最新人教版八年级上同步练习题+八年级上全册教案

最新人教版八年级上同步练习题+八年级上全册教案

最新人教版 八年级上同步练习题+八年级上全册教案 八上英语同步训练 Unit 1 Where did you go on vacation?‎ 第一课时 Section A 1a-2d 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 1. 任何人__________ ‎ 2. 精彩的；绝妙的___________ ‎ ‎3. most________ ‎ ‎4. anywhere __________ ‎ ‎5. few_________‎ II. 短语互译 1. 照相____________ ‎ 2. 相当多_____________ ‎ ‎3. 去度假_______________‎ ‎4. go to summer camp ______________ ‎ ‎5. stay at home _____________‎ ‎6. go to the mountains ____________‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. —你去哪里度假了？— 我去爬山了。‎ ‎—_______ did you _______ on vacation? ‎ ‎—I ______ to the mountains.‎ ‎2. 蒂娜上周去看望了叔叔。‎ Tina ________ her ________ last week.‎ ‎3. 上周末汤姆做了什么特别的事情吗？‎ Did Tom _______ _________ _________ last weekend?‎ ‎4. 格雷斯遇到了有趣的人。‎ Grace met _________ ____________.‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示补全单词 ‎1. Jim was o_____ vacation last month.‎ ‎2. I spent m_______ of my free time to read books.‎ ‎3. He thought Beijing Opera was w_______, he wants to watch again.‎ ‎4. How do you s______ for a test?‎ ‎5. I went to the b______ and swam in the sea.‎ II. 用所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. I didn’t do ______ interesting on my vacation. ( something)‎ ‎2. Julie likes collecting cartoon books, I think she has quite a ______ them. (little)‎ ‎3. Last year, his parents ______ him to New York City. (take)‎ ‎4. Long time ______ see. (not)‎ ‎5. What about ________ out with friends? (go)‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. She went to the mountains on vacations. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ________ _________ she ________ on vacations?‎ ‎2. Kevin bought something special. (变为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ ______ Kevin ________ __________ special?‎ ‎3. We took many photos there. (变为否定句)‎ ‎ We ________ _________ many photos there.‎ ‎4. go, his, uncle, with, the Great Wall, to, did, he (连词成句)‎ ‎ _________________________________________?‎ ‎5. Mary often stays at home on weekends. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ________ ________ Mary _________ on weekends?‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. You were so lucky to have an interesting weekend, but I had ___________.‎ A. something interesting B. interesting something ‎ C. something boring D. boring something ‎( ) 2. In China, many young people like playing _______ basketball.‎ ‎ A. the B. a C. / D. an ‎( ) 3. Would you like ________ to drink?‎ ‎ A. someone B. anyone C. something D. anything ‎( ) 4. You don’t have a drink. Can I get you __________?‎ ‎ A. something B. anything C. nothing D. everything ‎( ) 5. _________ is waiting for you at the gate. He wants to say thanks to you.‎ ‎ A. Somebody B. Anybody C. Everybody D. Nobody ‎( ) 6. —When were you born? ‎ ‎—I was born _______ a cold morning in 1996.‎ ‎ A. on B. at C. in D.for ‎ 创新提升 情景交际 (选择方框中的句子完成对话，其中有两项是多余的)‎ A. What about you?‎ B. What did you do there?‎ C. Would you like to go with me next time?‎ D. What did you think of your weekend?‎ E. Where did you go last weekend?‎ F. I think it was interesting.‎ G. That was boring.‎ A: Hello, Tom!‎ B: Hi, Wang Ming! 1 ?‎ A: I visited my grandparents in the countryside.‎ B: Oh, that must be very wonderful. 2 ?‎ A: I helped them feed the chickens and pick up apples. 3 ?‎ B: I just stayed at home and watched TV. 4 .‎ A: Of course. 5 ?‎ B: I’d love to. I can’t wait.‎ ‎1. ________ 2. _________ 3. _________ 4. _________ 5. _________‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (河北) Ken _____ his jacket in the gym. He has to get it back.‎ A. left B. leaves C. is leaving D. was leaving ‎( ) 2. (内蒙古) —Excuse me, look at the sign NO PHOTOS!‎ ‎—Sorry, I ______ it.‎ A. don’t see B. didn’t see C. haven’t seen D. won’t see ‎( ) 3. (河北) Your sweater looks smart. Where ______ you ______ it?‎ ‎ A. do; get B. did; get C. will; get D. have; got Unit 1 第二课时 Grammar Focus-3c 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 1. 我自己___________ ‎ 2. 你自己___________ ‎ 3. 日记___________ ‎ ‎4. 每人___________‎ ‎5. hen__________ ‎ ‎6. bored ___________ ‎ ‎7. pig__________ ‎ ‎8. nothing____________‎ II. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. —食物怎么样？‎ ‎—所有的尝起来都不错。‎ ‎—_______ was the food?‎ ‎—___________ tasted really good.‎ ‎2. 在晚上没有什么做的，除了看书。‎ There was ________ much to do in the evening_______ read.‎ ‎3. 你记日记吗？‎ Did you ________ _________ _________?‎ III. 补全对话 A: Where did you ______ on vacation?‎ B: I ______ to Sanya.‎ A: How was the _______?‎ B: Everything tasted good.‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. I went ________ (购物) with my mother yesterday.‎ ‎2. I think there are many things _______ (做) in Sanya.‎ ‎3. Did you go ________ (任何地方) last Sunday?‎ ‎4. There are many ________ (母鸡) and _______ (猪) on the farm.‎ ‎5. I am ______ (烦闷的), I can’t find my key.‎ II. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. We had a great time _________ (swim) in a river.‎ ‎2. The museum is so ________ (bored)‎ ‎3. Did you go _________ (somewhere) interesting?‎ ‎4. It was my _______ (one) time to go to Sanya.‎ ‎5. Let’s begin our class. ______ (be) everyone here today?‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. What do you think of TF boys? (改为同义句)‎ ‎ ______ do you ________ TF boys?‎ ‎2. There was something exciting to enjoy. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ _______ there _________ exciting to enjoy?‎ ‎3. Li Ming goes to school on foot. (用yesterday改写句子)‎ ‎ Li Ming ______ to school on foot yesterday.‎ ‎4. My father bought a gift for me last night. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ _______ my father _______ for me last night?‎ ‎5. There isn’t anything wrong with the car. (改为同义句)‎ ‎ There is _________ _________ with the car.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. —How is Helen in the new school?‎ ‎—She is doing very well. There is ________ to worry about.‎ A. something B. anything C. nothing D. everything ‎( ) 2. —Who taught you Japanese?‎ ‎ —Nobody. I learnt it by _________.‎ ‎ A. myself B. yourself C. me D. you ‎( ) 3. I ________ a flower ______ my teacher last Teachers’ Day.‎ ‎ A. buy; for B. bought; for C. buy;/ D. bought;/‎ ‎( ) 4. Don’t worry. We’re old enough to look after _______.‎ ‎ A. myself B. me C. ourselves D. us ‎( ) 5. Don’t worry about me. I’m old enough to think for _______.‎ ‎ A. himself B. herself C. yourself D. myself 创新提升 选词填空 watching TV, everything, winner vacation, means, relaxing, friends, exciting, needn’t, played with, visited ‎ Many children are always looking forward to the 1 . This is because during the vacation, children 2 go to school. They can do 3 they like, such as playing, 4 , traveling, or even sleeping all the day and so on. And when winter vacation comes on, it 5 that spring festival will come on soon. Last winter vacation, I spent the whole day at home every day, I 6 my computer .I played computer games and surfed the internet. During the vacation, I still stayed in touch with my classmates and my 7 . During the spring festival, I 8 my relatives, and got a lot of red bags. Even though my vacation wasn’t crazy and 9 , but I really learnt a lot. It was good for 10 , and I am getting ready for the coming new term now. ‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (河南) At present, children mean _________ to most parents in China.‎ ‎ A. everything B. nothing C. anything D. something ‎( ) 2. (山东) I don’t have a present for my friend. What if _______ else brings a present?‎ ‎ A. anybody B. nobody C. everyone D. none ‎( ) 3. (江苏) —What do you think of the documentary A Bite of China? ‎ ‎ —______. It has attracted lots of TV audiences.‎ ‎ A. Enjoy yourself B. Many thanks C. Pretty good D. It’s hard to say Unit 1 第三课时 Section B 1a-2e 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 1. 活动__________ ‎ 1. 建筑物；房子___________ ‎ 2. 想知道__________ ‎ ‎4. 伞__________‎ ‎5. 足够的___________ ‎ ‎6. 饥饿的___________‎ ‎7. enjoyable____________ ‎ ‎8. difference________‎ ‎9. below_____________ ‎ ‎10. bicycle____________ ‎ ‎11. trader___________‎ II. 短语互译 1. 给……的感觉____________ ‎ 2. 因为_____________ ‎ 3. 山顶____________ ‎ 4. 两个多小时______________ ‎ 5. walk up___________ ‎ 6. rain hard__________ ‎ ‎7. one bowl of rice__________‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 你周末过得愉快吗？‎ ‎ Did you ________ a good _______ on weekend?‎ ‎2. 我和我的家人今天早上到达了北京。‎ ‎ I ______ _______ Beijing this morning with my family.‎ ‎3. 我姐姐决定去看望我奶奶。‎ ‎ My sister _______ _______ visit my grandma.‎ ‎4. 我们等了一个多小时的火车。‎ ‎ We ________ ________ an hour for the train.‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示完成单词 ‎1. Though he is three years old, he isn’t old e______ to dress himself.‎ ‎2. Can you see the tall b________ over there, my office is in it?‎ ‎3. I am h_______, I want something to eat.‎ ‎4. My father likes paragliding. He says he feels like a b_______ in the sky.‎ ‎5. Don’t forget to take your u________, it says it will be rain.‎ II. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. I saw some children _________ (play) football on the playground.‎ ‎2. What activities do you find ________ (enjoy)?‎ ‎3. Can you find the ___________ (different) between the two pictures?‎ ‎4. My brother enjoys _______ ( watch) TV very much.‎ ‎5. There are a lot of ________ (trader) in the capital of America.‎ III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 丽萨在度假时给她最好的朋友买了些特别的东西。‎ ‎ Lisa ________ something special _______ her best friend on her vacation.‎ ‎2. 因为天气的原因，我们没有去动物园。‎ ‎ _______ _______ the bad weather, we can’t go to the zoo.‎ ‎3. 他们又花费了2个小时才爬到山顶。‎ ‎ They spent ________ two _______ to walk up to the top of the hill.‎ ‎4. 雨下得很大，我们都淋湿了。‎ ‎ It rained ________ , so we were all ________.‎ ‎5. 老师告诉我们要尽最大努力学习。‎ ‎ The teacher told us we should _______ our best ______ study.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. —Who did you go to the movies _______?‎ ‎ —Nobody. I went alone.‎ ‎ A. with B. about C. for D. from ‎ ( ) 2. —What would you like to drink, girls?‎ ‎ —________, please.‎ ‎ A. Two glass of water B. Two glass of water ‎ C. Two cups of tea D. Two cups of teas ‎ ( ) 3. Did you decide ______bicycle to school?‎ ‎ A. by B. riding C. to by D. to ride ‎ ( ) 4. Tony _____ football every weekend when he was young.‎ ‎ A. play B. played C. is playing D. has played ‎ ( ) 5. This movie wasn’t ________. He fell asleep half way through it.‎ ‎ A. interesting enough B. interested enough ‎ C. enough interesting D. enough interested ‎( ) 6. Look! A _______ is singing in the tree.‎ ‎ A. pig B. bird C. cow ‎( ) 7. I have been to Shanghai. I ________ there last month.‎ ‎ A. go B. went C. have gone D. will go ‎( ) 8. Dad, you have worked for three hours. Stop ______ and have a rest, please.‎ ‎ A. to work B. working C. work D. works 创新提升 阅读理解 One day, while my friend Jenny and I were traveling through Germany, we were very hungry but we didn’t have a lot of money. We decided to stop at a village market to get something to eat. I chose some cookies and went to the front counter(柜台) to pay. Near the counter I saw some packaged(包装好的) cookies in a large box. They looked good and were a lot cheaper than the ones I had in my hand, so I took them instead.‎ We left the store and looked for a place where we could eat. We found a quiet place under a tree and we ate our sandwiches first, and then the cookies. We thought they were great.‎ ‎“Let’s get some cookies again,” I said. “ They are cheap and they really taste good.”‎ Jenny could read some German, but I couldn’t, so I gave her the package. She looked it and then started to laugh.‎ ‎“Why are you laughing?” I asked.‎ ‎“Because they are dog biscuits!” she said.‎ ‎( ) 1. Where did the story take place?‎ ‎ A. In a small town in Germany. B. In a village in Germany.‎ ‎ C. In a big city in Germany. D. In a small village in Pairs.‎ ‎( ) 2. Why did the writer buy the packaged cookies?‎ ‎ A. Because the cookies were delicious.‎ ‎ B. Because the cookies were very cheap.‎ ‎ C. Because her friend liked eating cookies.‎ ‎ D. Because she had no other choices (选择).‎ ‎( ) 3. Where did they eat their sandwiches and cookies?‎ ‎ A. In the store. B. At home.‎ ‎ C. In a village’s restaurant. D. In the open air.‎ ‎( ) 4. Why did Jenny laugh?‎ ‎ A. Because the brand of the cookies was interesting.‎ ‎ B. Because the writer didn’t know German.‎ ‎ C. Because she could eat the cookies again.‎ ‎ D. Because they are for dogs.‎ ‎( ) 5. We can know the ending of the story is ________.‎ ‎ A. terrible B. sad C. exciting D. funny 中考全练 ‎( ) 1.(连云港) Beijing and Zhangjiakou applying to host the 2022 Winter Olympic Games in 2013.‎ A. begin B. began C. have begun D. had begun ‎ ( ) 2. (长沙)—Your brother is an excellent basketball player.‎ ‎ —So he is. He _______ to play basketball three years ago.‎ ‎ A. has started B. starts C. started Unit 1 第四课时 Section B 3a-Self Check 知识清单 I. 词组互译 1. 照相___________ ‎ 2. bring back____________ ‎ ‎3. one of these places ______________‎ ‎4. 购物中心____________ ‎ ‎5. 上上下下_______________ ‎ ‎6. get to the top___________‎ ‎7. 旅行日记_____________‎ II. 补全对话（根据上下文选择方框中的词并用其适当形式填写到对话中）‎ do terrible where how friendly go hope be A: Hello!‎ B: Hi! 1 did you go on vacation?‎ A: I 2 to the Palace Museum and the Great Wall.‎ B: Really? 3 you go to Tian’anmen Square?‎ A: Yes, I did. It was very great.‎ B: But the weather was 4 , wasn’t it?‎ A: Yes. It 5 hot and humid.‎ B: 6 were the people in Beijing?‎ A: They were 7 and they always helped us.‎ B: How great! I 8 I can go there one day.‎ ‎1. ________ 2. ________ 3. ________ 4. _________ 5. ________ ‎ ‎6.________ 7.________ 8. __________‎ 基础闯关 I. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. Mary dislike _______ (play) computer games, she thinks it’s boring.‎ ‎2. Why not ______ (go) to the party with me?‎ ‎3. My mother told me ______ (eat) more vegetables.‎ ‎4. They _____ (have) a fun time last school vacation.‎ ‎5. We didn’t bring back________ (something) from Beijing.‎ II. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. —Would you like some tea, please?‎ ‎ —Yes, and I prefer tea ______ some sugar.‎ ‎ A. to B. for C. with D. from ‎ ( ) 2. He dressed _______ quickly _______ he put his shoes on the wrong feet.‎ ‎ A. so…as B. such…that C. so…that ‎ ( ) 3. My mother often tells me _________ teachers carefully in class.‎ ‎ A. listen B. listen to C. to listen D. to listen to ‎ ( ) 4. —_______ go out for a picnic tomorrow?‎ ‎ — Good idea.‎ ‎ A. How about B. Let’s C. Why not D. Would you like ‎ ( ) 5. —How was your summer camp last year?‎ ‎ —________. I had a good time with my friends.‎ ‎ A. Awful B. Great C. Terrible D. Expensive III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 我喜欢这个地方因为可以学到一些重要的东西。‎ I like this place because I can learn _________ __________.‎ ‎2. —为什么你不喜欢这个CD? —因为它太吵了。‎ ‎—Why do you ________ this CD? —Because _______ too noisy.‎ ‎3. —那的天气怎么样？—糟糕透了。非常热。‎ ‎—________ was the _________ there? —Terrible. Very hot.‎ ‎4. 当我遇到问题时，老师总是告诉我坚持下去。‎ When I meet problem, the teacher always tells me to ________ ________.‎ IV. 句型转换 ‎1. They traveled to Beijing because they wanted to visit the Great Wall. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎______ did they _______ to Beijing?‎ ‎2. He practiced English yesterday afternoon. (改为否定句)‎ He _______ ________ English yesterday afternoon.‎ ‎3. They went to the mountains on vacation. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ _______ they _______ on vacation?‎ ‎4. Did Rose go to Xuzhou and Suzhou? (作肯定回答)‎ ‎ _______, ______ ________.‎ ‎5. The people there were very friendly. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ ______ the people there?‎ 创新提升 I. 情景交际。根据上下文选择方框中合适的句子填到对话中，其中有两项是多余的。‎ A. They’re all places of great interest in China.‎ B. What did you do, then?‎ C. How do you like the cities?‎ D. Nice to see you.‎ E. We visited our grandparents there.‎ F. What cities did you visit?‎ G. When did you come back?‎ A: Hi, Mary. 1 ‎ B: Hi, Mingming, nice to see you, too. Where did you go last month?‎ A: Well, we went to our hometown in Jiangxi. 2 ‎ B: Oh, they must have been very happy to see you again.‎ A: Sure.‎ B: 3 ‎ A: My parents took Dick and me to a few cities in the south.‎ B: That must have been very interesting. 4 ‎ A: We visited Shanghai, Nanjing, Wuhan and Hangzhou.‎ B: Oh! 5 I think you were sure to have a good time.‎ A: Yes, we really enjoyed ourselves very much.‎ ‎1.________ 2. ________ 3. ________ 4. _________ 5. __________‎ II.阅读理解 ‎ Kim went to a beautiful beach on Monday with his friends. It was sunny and hot. So they had great fun playing in the water. In the afternoon, they went shopping. But the shops were crowded, they didn’t really enjoy it.‎ ‎ The next day, it was rainy, so they went to a museum. It was boring. Kim found a small boy crying in the corner. The boy was lost. He helped the boy find his father. Kim was very happy. But he had no money for a taxi. So he had to walk back to the hotel. That made him very tired. ‎ ‎ On Wednesday, the weather was very cool. So they played tennis. They played all the morning. It was really fun.‎ 根据短文内容判断句子正（T）误（F）。‎ ‎( ) 1. On Monday, Kim had fun going shopping.‎ ‎( ) 2. It was very hot on Tuesday.‎ ‎( ) 3. They went to a museum on Tuesday.‎ ‎( ) 4. Kim helped a boy find his father and went back to the hotel by taxi.‎ ‎( ) 5. Kim and his friends played tennis all the morning on Tuesday.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (临沂) It_____ Mr Green an hour to fix up his bicycle yesterday.‎ ‎ A. cost B. paid C. spent D. took ‎( ) 2. (衢州) —Ssh, be quiet! The baby _____ in the next room.‎ ‎ A. sleeps B. slept C. is sleeping D. was sleeping ‎( ) 3. (温州) —What did you do yesterday evening, Gina?‎ ‎ —I _______ Titanic 3D in the City Cinema.‎ ‎ A. watch B. watched C. am watching D. will watch ‎( ) 4. (沈阳) After the students ______ their exams, they celebrated by having a party.‎ ‎ A. passed B. failed C. joined D. gave Unit 1 单元测试卷 第一部分 选择题（共50分）‎ I. 单项选择（本题共15分， 每小题1分）‎ ‎( ) 1. Hangzhou is a beautiful city. There are many people here ______ vacation every year.‎ ‎ A. in B. on C. for D. to ‎( ) 2. —Where _____ you go?‎ ‎ —I ______ to the bank.‎ ‎ A. were; go B. did; go C. were; went D. did; went ‎( ) 3. They had great fun _______ in the park yesterday.‎ ‎ A. play B. playing C. played D. plays ‎( ) 4. Why not _______ out the problem by yourself?‎ ‎ A. trying to work B. try working C. try to work D. trying working ‎( ) 5. ________ great weather today!‎ ‎ A. What a B. What C. How D. How a ‎( ) 6. It rained outside, they decided________ at home.‎ ‎ A. stay B. to stayed C. to stay D. stayed ‎( ) 7. —What did you ______ for your mother’s birthday? —I ______ a hat.‎ ‎ A. buy; bought B. bought; buy C. buy; buy D. bought; bought ‎( ) 8. Let’s take ______ photo! Everyone, cheese!‎ ‎ A. a B. an C. the D. /‎ ‎( ) 9. Don’t forget _______ your homework tomorrow.‎ ‎ A. bring B. to bring C. brought D. bringing ‎( ) 10. We are talking about “China Dream” these days. It’s ______ interesting ______ all of the Chinese people are interested in it.‎ ‎ A. such; that B. so; that C. too; to D. as; as ‎( ) 11. —What did Mr. Green do before he came to China?‎ ‎ —He________ in a car factory.‎ ‎ A. worked B. works C. is working D. will work ‎( ) 12. He went into his room and ________ to watch TV.‎ ‎ A. begins B. began C. beginning D. to begin ‎( ) 13. Students like outdoor _________ .‎ ‎ A. swimming B. activities C. vacations D. study ‎( ) 14. When you ______ , please call me.‎ ‎ A. get to B. arrive in C. arrive D. get ‎( ) 15. He was so _______ when he heard the _________ news.‎ ‎ A. excited; exciting B. excited; excited C. exciting; excited D. exciting; exciting II. 完形填空（本题共10分，每小题1分）‎ The summer vacation is over. It’s true that time always flies 1 . During the vacation, the weather was 2 and I could not do much homework, but I lived happily.‎ As the afternoon was hot, I did my homework in the 3 . I often got up at 6:30 and 4 in the garden for half an hour. After breakfast, I 5 reading English and Chinese and did some exercises in math. Those 6 me three hours or more. I worked quite 7 and made good progress(进步). ‎ I spent the afternoon outside. I went to 8 and it was funny. I would not go home until it was about five or six o’clock. Sometimes my friend came to see me and would spend some hours 9 music.‎ In this way I spent my vacation 10 . And I not only studied well but also became a good swimmer. Now I am in good health and high spirits(精神).‎ ‎( ) 1. A. lately B. easily C. fast D. differently ‎( ) 2. A. hot B. cold C. rainy D. sunny ‎( ) 3. A. afternoon B. morning C. night D. evening ‎( ) 4. A. take a walk B. take a walked C. took a walk D. took a walked ‎( ) 5. A. begin B. beginning C. to begin D. began ‎( ) 6. A. took B. spent C. cost D. paid ‎( ) 7. A. hardly B. hard C. easily D. easy ‎( ) 8. A. sing B. play basketball C. swim D. fish ‎( ) 9. A. to listen to B. listening to C. to listen D. listening ‎( ) 10. A. terrible B. not good C. happily D. exciting III. 情景交际（本题共5分，每小题1分）‎ A. Was it exciting?‎ B. How was your vacation?‎ C. How was the movie?‎ D. Frank helped me study it.‎ E. Where did you go on vacation?‎ F. What did you do last night?‎ G. Did you go to a movie last night?‎ A: 1 ‎ B: It was great. I enjoyed it.‎ A: 2 ‎ B: My family went to the Great Wall. We visited my uncle in Beijing.‎ A: That sounds good. 3 ‎ B: No, I stayed at home and studied for the math ‎ exam. 4 Did you go?‎ A: Yes, I did. I saw Dad, where we going last night.‎ B: 5 ‎ A: It was really exciting.‎ ‎1. ________ 2. _________ 3. ________ 4. ________ 5. _________‎ IV. 阅读理解（本题共20分，每小题2分）‎ A Mum and dad took my brother, Brad and me to a restaurant last night. Mum told us to wear our best clothes. Brad wanted to wear jeans but mum said no.‎ When we arrived at the restaurant, a waiter took us to our table. Our table was next to the window and we could see the river. Then the waiter asked us if we wanted to drink before the dinner. Brad and I both had an orange juice. I spent a long time looking at the menu. It was difficult to choose because there were many things on the menu. After five minutes, I decided to ‎ have chicken and a small salad. Brad had beef and mum and dad had fish. We all agreed that the food was delicious, we would like to go there again next time.‎ ‎( ) 1. ________ people went to the restaurant in the family.‎ ‎ A. Three B. Four C. Five D. Six ‎( ) 2. Why the mum told her children to wear their best clothes? _________.‎ ‎ A. Because they would go to a party.‎ ‎ B. Because they would go a restaurant.‎ ‎ C. Because she thought her children would look smart.‎ ‎ D. We don’t know.‎ ‎( ) 3. Did Brad’s parents order anything to drink? _______.‎ ‎ A. Yes, they did. B. Yes. His father did. ‎ C. No. His mother did. D. No, they didn’t.‎ ‎( ) 4. Which of the following is wrong?‎ ‎ A. Father had a small salad. ‎ B. Brad had some beef and orange juice.‎ ‎ C. Mother thought the food was delicious. ‎ D. I ordered the most kinds of foods.‎ ‎( ) 5. What did they think of the restaurant? It was ________.‎ ‎ A. terrible B. bad C. great D. beautiful B WE’LL SHOW YOU THE VERY BEST OF HAINAN ISLAND ON A 4-DAY TOUR BOOK NOW Price only ＄650‎ Including(包含)：‎ Round-trip plane tickets between Guangzhou and Haikou.‎ Bus service around Hainan. Three nights’ stay in good hotel.‎ Best tour guide service.‎ Places to visit HAIKOU The capital city of Hainan. A city tour and a visit to Hairui Tomb.‎ SANYA A chance to see surprise.‎ Colorful fish＆other sea animals.‎ A wonderful place for swimming, fishing and boating.‎ XINGLONG A nice experience to see different kinds of plants and watch the exciting dance.‎ QIONGHAI A full day visit to Wanquan River and other places of interest.‎ Office hours Monday-Friday ‎9:00 a.m. -8:00 p.m.‎ Saturday＆Sunday ‎9:00 a.m.-4:00 p.m.‎ Tel. 3245-0688‎ SOLD OUT(售完)‎ THIS MONTH BOOK BY PHONE NOW FOR NEXT MONTH ‎( ) 6. From the above, we know that this is ________.‎ ‎ A. a notice B. a book C. a postcard D. an advertisement ‎( ) 7. If you take a tour to Hainan on June 23rd, you will return on _________.‎ ‎ A. June 26th B. June 25th C. June 23rd D. July 26th ‎( ) 8. You can visit ________ main places if you take the tour.‎ ‎ A. 4 B. 5 C. 6 D. 7‎ ‎( ) 9. The price for the tour doesn’t include_________.‎ ‎ A. bus service B. meals C. plane tickets D. guide service ‎( ) 10. Which of the following is TRUE?‎ ‎ A. You don’t have to pay ＄650 if you book the tour earlier.‎ ‎ B. You have to go to the office to book the tour.‎ ‎ C. You can book the tour at 5 p.m. on Monday afternoon.‎ ‎ D. Book by phone now for this month.‎ 第二部分 非选择题（共50分）‎ V. 任务型阅读(每小题2分，共10分)‎ A study shows that today’s children play outdoors just half as much as their parents did when they were young.‎ They stay indoors most of their time. They watch TV, play computer games and, in some cases(情况)，even do their homework. Figures show that in the 1970s and 1980s children enjoyed more than two hours of outside play on weekdays, and even nine hours on weekends—whatever the weather is. But today’s youngsters(年轻人，小孩) stay outside for just over an hour on weekdays, and fewer than five hours on Saturday and Sundays.‎ It also shows that 58 percent of parents wish their children played outdoors more often, and they seriously worry their children don’t spend enough time playing outdoors.‎ In fact, playing outdoors is so important for children—not only to help them stay active and healthy, but also to communicate(交流) with friends, and make those colorful childhood(童年时代) which we look back on so warmly.‎ ‎1 题判断正误（“T”表示正确， “F”‎ 表示错误）；2题完成句子；3题简略回答问题；4题找出并写下本文的主题句；5题将文中划线部分译成汉语。‎ ‎1. Playing outdoors can help children stay active and healthy, communicate with friends and make childhood colorful. 【 】‎ ‎2. Today’s youngsters stay outside fewer than five hours ________________________.‎ ‎3. What do most of parents worry?‎ ‎__________________________________________________________.‎ ‎4. ____________________________________________________.‎ ‎5. ____________________________________________________.‎ VI. 情景交际（根据上下文，在横线上填写适当的句子完成对话。每小题2分，共10分）‎ A: It's a nice day. ‎ B: Yes, it's a beautiful day . ‎ A: Are there so many people here all the time?‎ B: 1.______________________. This is my first time here.‎ A: Me, too. I think this is a great place.‎ B: Yeah, I think so too.‎ A: 2.______________________?‎ B: I’m visiting from London. How about you?‎ A: 3.___________________________.‎ B: That’s cool. Are you having a good time?‎ A: Yes. There are many things to see and I’m taking a lot of picture.‎ B: 4.__________________________?‎ A: For two weeks, I went to San Francisco and Los Angeles. I want to see Yellow Stone National Park before I leave.‎ B: 5.__________________________.‎ A: Oh, my friends are waiting for me. I hope you enjoy your stay here.‎ B: Thank you. It was nice meeting you.‎ VII. 用所给词的适当形式填空（每小题1分，共5分）‎ ‎1. I stayed at home all day yesterday, it was _________. (bored)‎ ‎2. Many people enjoy reading e-books, but I__________ it as it’s bad for the eyes. (like)‎ ‎3. ______ of my free time I like watching movies at home. (much)‎ ‎4. Do you feel like _________ bicycle with me? (ride)‎ ‎5. Li Ling didn’t try his best ________ ( learn ) English, so he failed.‎ VIII. 根据汉语补全句子，每空一词（每小题2分，共10分）‎ ‎1. 当那几个德国人到达机场时，雨正下得很大。‎ It was _______heavily when the Germans _______at the airport.‎ ‎2. 他们去年冬天在海南度假。‎ They were __________ __________in Hainan last winter.‎ ‎3. 有足够的食物给每一个人。‎ There is ________ _________ for everybody.‎ ‎4. 当然，你这样做事对的。‎ ‎_______ _______, you were right.‎ ‎5. 上周Mary没有买字典。‎ Mary ________ __________ a dictionary last week.‎ IX. 书面表达（15分）‎ 用所给词语，以日记的形式描述你假期中的一天。‎ 要求：80词左右。‎ 提示词：May 1, Tuesday, sunny, go to New York City, visit Central Park, go shopping, supermarket, crowded, go to the zoo, animals, interesting, go back home, seven o’clock, tired…‎ ‎____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ Unit 2 How often do you exercise?‎ 第一课时 Section A 1a-2d 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 家务劳动____________‎ ‎2. 一次；曾经___________‎ ‎3. 互联网_______________‎ ‎4. 两次；两倍_____________‎ ‎5. 忙的；满的_____________‎ ‎6. hardly___________‎ ‎7. program____________‎ ‎8. swing____________‎ II. 短语互译 ‎1. 几乎从不___________‎ ‎2. 摇摆舞____________‎ ‎3. 去购物_____________‎ ‎4. go to movies _____________‎ ‎5. twice a week ____________‎ ‎6. once a month___________‎ ‎7. how often________‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 我爸爸每周锻炼三次。‎ My father ________ ________ ______a week.‎ ‎2. —在周末你经常做什么？‎ ‎ —我经常帮我妈妈做家务。‎ ‎—What do you do _______ _________?‎ ‎—I often _____ my mother _______ housework.‎ ‎3. 他几乎不去看书。‎ He ______ _______ reads books.‎ ‎4. 他最喜欢的节目是什么？‎ What’s his ________ __________?‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示补全单词 ‎《学升》12页 随堂检测 I 1-5题。‎ ‎1. —How o______ do you play soccer?‎ ‎ —Once a week.‎ ‎2. I like surfing the I_______ on weekends.‎ ‎3. —What’s your favorite TV p________?‎ ‎ —It’s Animal world.‎ ‎4. The room was f_________ of people.‎ ‎5. I’ll help my mom do some h_________.‎ II. 用所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. I’m busy, I ________ ever play with friends. (hard)‎ ‎2. He can play basketball four _______ a week. (time)‎ ‎3. How about _______ shopping? (go)‎ ‎4. Do you want ________ to my party? (come)‎ ‎5. My mother never _______ TV. ( watch)‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. I usually play soccer after school. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎_______ do you usually ______ after school?‎ ‎2. He uses the Internet every day. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎______ he _______the Internet every day?‎ ‎3. I play tennis with friends twice a week. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎______ ________ do you play tennis with friends?‎ ‎4. you, next, free, week, are (连词成句)‎ ‎_________________________?‎ ‎5. He always plays sports. (改为否定句)‎ He ________ _______ plays sports.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. (浙江温州) Ann often helps me ______ math after school?‎ A. for B. with ‎ C. on D. by ‎( ) 2. I’m very tired. I can _______ run.‎ A. always B. hardly ‎ C. usually D. sometimes ‎( ) 3. Most students read English books _________.‎ ‎ A. everyday B. every day ‎ C. every days D. everydays ‎( ) 4. (山东济南) —How often do the students play sports?‎ ‎—________.‎ A. Twice a day ‎ B. Since last night C. For two hours ‎ D. A month ago ‎( ) 5. He often comes to school early and he is ________late for school.‎ A. usually B. never C. often D. always ‎( ) 6. (北京) —_______ do you go to the cinema?‎ ‎—Once a month.‎ ‎ A. How long B. How far C. How often D. How much 创新提升 I. 情景交际 (选择方框中的句子完成对话，其中有两项是多余的)‎ A. What about you?‎ B. What do you do on weekends?‎ C. I’m free.‎ D. How often do you have it?‎ E. I have a piano lesson.‎ F. How often do you watch TV?‎ G. What’s your favorite program?‎ A: Hi! Are you free tomorrow?‎ B: Sorry. 1 .‎ A: 2 ?‎ B: Four times a week. So I can’t stay with my friends.‎ A: What a pity! 3 ?‎ B: I usually watch TV. 4 ?‎ A: Me too. 5 ?‎ B: Running Man. I think Deng Chao is so funny.‎ A: I agree.‎ ‎1.________ 2. _______ 3. _________‎ ‎4. ________ 5. __________‎ II. 根据上下文及首字母提示完成短文。‎ Someone says, “Time is money.” But I think time is m 1 important than money. Why ? Because when money is s 2 , we can get it back. However, when time is gone, it’ll never r 3 . That is why we mustn’t w 4 time.‎ ‎ It goes without saying that time is u 5 limited(有限的).Even a second is very important. We should make full use of our time to do s 6 useful.‎ ‎ But it is a pity that there are a lot of people who do not know the importance of time. They spent their limited time smoking, drinking and p 7 . They do not know that wasting time means wasting part of their own l 8 .‎ ‎ In a word, we should save time. We shouldn’t l 9 today’s work for tomorrow.‎ Remember we have no time to l 10 . ‎ 1. ‎_____ 2._____ 3._____ 4._____5._____6._____7._____ 8._____9._____10._____‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (山东莱芜) If you read a lot, life will be full ________ pleasure.‎ A. by B. of ‎ C. for D. with ‎ ‎( ) 2. (湖北宜昌) —My favorite TV________ is A Bite of Chinese (《舌尖上的中国》).‎ ‎—We like it, too. My mother often cooks delicious food after watching it.‎ A. instruction B. guidebook ‎ C. entertainment D. program ‎( ) 3. (南昌) My sister _______ goes to bed early because she needs a lot of sleep every day.‎ A. always B. sometimes ‎ C. hardly D. never 第二课时 Grammar Focus-3c 知识清单 I. 词汇、短语互译 ‎1. 或许；大概_____________‎ ‎2. 最小的___________‎ ‎3. exercise___________‎ ‎4. 太忙__________‎ ‎5. 踢足球____________‎ ‎6. 做运动_____________‎ ‎7. 至少______________‎ ‎8. healthy breakfast____________‎ ‎9. stay up late______________‎ II. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. —你多久去一次西藏？‎ ‎—一年一次。‎ ‎—______ _______ do you _______ to Tibet?‎ ‎—______ a year.‎ ‎2. —我可以帮助你。你需要多少钱？‎ ‎—至少一万元吧。‎ ‎— I can help you. How much do you need?‎ ‎—______ _______ ten thousand yuan.‎ ‎3. 我英语很好因为我每天都读它。‎ My English is well because I ______ it _______ ________.‎ ‎4. 老师告诉我们熬夜是不健康的。‎ The teacher told us to _______ _______ late is unhealthy.‎ III. 补全对话 A: Can I ask you some questions?‎ B: OK.‎ A: You are so _________. How ______ do you exercise?‎ B: Every day.‎ A: ______ your favorite food?‎ B: Vegetables and fruit.‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. He goes to movies _______ (大概) once a month.‎ ‎2. Is Li Ling your _______ (最好的) friend？‎ ‎3. My mother at _______ (最少的) goes shopping twice a week.‎ ‎4. How often does Sue eat a _______ (健康的) breakfast?‎ ‎5. He got up _____ (晚的)，so he can’t get to school on time.‎ II. 选择方框内的单词完成下面的句子（有多余选项）‎ always, every day, often, sometimes, never,‎ ‎ hardly ever ‎1. He ______ gets up a six o’clock, seven days a week.‎ ‎2. How _____ do you watch TV?‎ ‎3. It _________ rains here. It’s usually sunny and warm.‎ ‎4. Some of my friends are healthy because they exercise __________.‎ ‎5. I can’t swim. So I ______ go to the beach to ‎ swim.‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. My sister often plays computer games every night. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ ______ your sister _____ every night?‎ ‎2. The children read books five times a week. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ _______ do the children read books?‎ ‎3. Tom does his homework after school. (变为否定句)‎ ‎ Tom _______ ______ his homework after school.‎ ‎4. She always stays up late. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ _______ she always ______ up late?‎ ‎5. I, my, help, mother, housework, with, usually（连词成句）‎ ‎_______________________.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. (重庆) Helen was so excited at the news that she could ______ say a word.‎ ‎ A. ever B. almost ‎ C. hardly D. always ‎( ) 2. We should look after our ______ and stay _______.‎ A. health; healthy ‎ B. healthy; healthy C. health; health ‎ D. healthy; health ‎( ) 3. (山东东营) Though they are far away from school, the children who live in mountains ______ go to school on foot.‎ A. ever B. always ‎ C. never D. hardly ever ‎ ( ) 4. He studies ______. He ______ plays with his friends after school.‎ A. hard; hard ‎ B. hardly; hardly C. hard; hardly ‎ D. hardly; hard 创新提升 根据调查报告内容选择方框内合适的单词或短语填空(可重复使用)‎ No. 1 Middle School: Activity Survey Activity Every Day Once or Twice a Week Three or Four Times ‎ a Week Exercise ‎15%‎ ‎10%‎ ‎75%‎ Do homework ‎95%‎ ‎0%‎ ‎5%‎ Watch TV ‎85%‎ ‎2%‎ ‎13%‎ every day; some; no; most; three or four times; once or twice What Do Students Do at No. 1 Middle School?‎ ‎ Here are the results of the student activity survey at No.1 Middle School. (1)____________ students exercise three or four times a week. Some students exercise (2)_____________ a week. (3)_________ students are very active and exercise (4)___________. As for homework, (5)__________ students do homework every day. (6)___________ students do homework three or four times a week. (7)_______ students do homework once or twice a week. The results for “watch TV” are interesting. (8)_______ students watch TV once or twice a week, some students watch TV (9)_______________ a week, but most students watch TV(10) _________.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (成都) Le Ke _____ runs in the morning, for he wants to be healthy.‎ A. never B. often C. hardly ‎( ) 2.(北京) —_____ people are there in your family?‎ ‎—Three.‎ A. How often B. How long ‎ C. How many D. How much ‎ ‎( ) 3. (上海) —_____ can you finish the report on food safety?‎ ‎—In two days.‎ A. How far B. How much ‎ C. How often D. How soon ‎ 第三课时 Section B 1a-2e 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 咖啡____________‎ ‎2. 百分之….__________‎ ‎3. 头脑；心智______________‎ ‎4. 结果______________‎ ‎5. 在一起；共同______________‎ ‎6. although______________‎ ‎7. through_____________‎ ‎8. writer____________‎ ‎9. online___________‎ ‎10. television___________‎ II. 短语互译 ‎1. 垃圾食品____________‎ ‎2. 例如____________‎ ‎3. 空闲时间____________‎ ‎4. 90%____________‎ ‎5. 上个月____________‎ ‎6. the best way ___________‎ ‎7. be good for ____________‎ ‎8. three or four times a week__________‎ ‎9. play together _____________‎ ‎10. go camping III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 这周你想去看电影《小时代II》吗？‎ ‎ Do you _______ _______ _______ the film TINY TIMES II this week?‎ ‎2. 尽管天在下雨，他们仍然去上学。‎ ‎ ______ it is raining, they go to school.‎ ‎3. 不要吃太多的垃圾食品。‎ ‎ Don’t eat too much ________ ________.‎ ‎4. 这是调查结果。‎ ‎ ______ ______ the survey result.‎ ‎5. 90%的学生总是使用互联网。‎ ‎ Ninety percent of the students ______ the ________.‎ IV. 根据括号内提示翻译句子 ‎1. 它对我的健康是有益的。( be good for)‎ ‎ ____________________.‎ ‎2. 你每天晚上睡多少个小时？‎ ‎(how many; sleep)‎ ‎ ____________________?‎ ‎3. Kim 空闲时间都做些什么事情？‎ ‎(free time)‎ ‎ __________________________________?‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示完成单词 ‎1. Would you like to drink cola or c________?‎ ‎2. A________ she is young, she can speak English well.‎ ‎3. Everyone knows that eating more vegetables is good for h________.‎ ‎4. On Spring Festival, we Chinese get t_________ to celebrate(庆祝) it.‎ ‎5. In our school, seventy p_______ of students ride bikes to school every day.‎ II. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. It’s good to relax by _______ (watch) game shows.‎ ‎2. We don’t want_______ (play) soccer today.‎ ‎3. I watch TV _______(two) a week.‎ ‎4. This was a traffic accident. Many people _______ (die).‎ ‎5. Do you know the famous _______ (write) Mo Yan?‎ III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 妈妈让我每天都喝牛奶。‎ ‎ My mother wants _______ _______ ________ _______ every day.‎ ‎2. 我经常花时间和朋友在一起。‎ ‎ I often ______ time ______ my friends.‎ ‎3. 我弟弟不健康，因为他根本不锻炼。‎ ‎ My brother is unhealthy because he _____ exercise ______ _______.‎ ‎4. Jenny喜欢很多运动，例如游泳、网球、乒乓球等。‎ ‎ Jenny likes many sports, _______ _______ swimming, tennis, ping pong and so on.‎ ‎5. 我认为锻炼是一个放松的好方式。‎ ‎ I think exercise is a ______ _______ to relax.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. Although he is very old, _____ he works very hard.‎ ‎ A. and B. but ‎ ‎ C./ D. so ‎( ) 2. I love junk food very much, but I eat______ once a week.‎ A. its B. it C. them D. they ‎( ) 3. (山东济宁) Sam likes trekking ______ the jungle, because he thinks it’s exciting.‎ A. over B. under ‎ C. across D. through ‎( ) 4. (湖南湘西) —How do you study for a test?‎ ‎—I study _____ listening to tapes.‎ A. at B. by C. to ‎( ) 5. —My two teeth are bad. What should I do?‎ ‎—You should ________.‎ A. see a doctor ‎ B. go to the dentist ‎ C. have a good rest ‎ D. eat nothing ‎( ) 6. Summer holiday is coming. Li Lei with his father _____ to go to Shanghai.‎ A. want B. will want ‎ C. wants D. wanted ‎ ( ) 7. I won’t spend any time _____ computer games.‎ A. on play B. play ‎ C. in playing D. on playing V. 句型转换 ‎1. Many young people like using the Internet. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎_____ do many young people like _____?‎ ‎2. He reads English two hours every day. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ _______ _______ does he _______ English every day?‎ ‎3. Tina has good eating habits. (变为一般疑问句)‎ ‎_______ Tina _____ good eating habits?‎ ‎4. Tom always watches TV in his free time. (变为否定句)‎ ‎ Tom ______ watches TV in his free time.‎ ‎5. Excise is the best way to relax. (改为同义句)‎ ‎ The best way to ______ is ________.‎ 创新提升 I. 根据句意选择方框中单词并用其适当形式填空。‎ help have want exercise try ‎1. A lot of vegetables _____ you to keep in good health.‎ ‎2. Mum _____ me to get up at six every day.‎ ‎3. Do you ______ a healthy lifestyle?‎ ‎4. Grandpa is pretty healthy because he ________ every morning.‎ ‎5. You must ______ to eat less junk food.‎ II. 阅读理解 We surveyed (调查) 300 young people on what they like to do at weekends. One hundred people are from the ages of 11-18, one hundred 19-26 and one hundred 27-35. The following shows their answers.‎ ‎( ) 1. How many people enjoy playing computer games in the 11-18 group?‎ A. 20. B. 50. C. 60. D. 75.‎ ‎( ) 2. The people of 27-35 enjoy___ most.‎ A. watching TV ‎ B. going to the movies C. playing computer games ‎ D. taking a walk ‎( ) 3. According to the survey, which two activities do most people enjoy doing?‎ A. Playing computer games and watching TV.‎ B. Playing computer games and taking a walk.‎ C. Watching TV and going to the movies.‎ D. Going to the movies and taking a walk.‎ ‎( ) 4. From the chart (图表) above, we can see the older people are, the more they like ________.‎ A. watching TV ‎ B. taking a walk C. going to the movies ‎ D. playing computer games ‎( ) 5. Which of the following is TRUE according to the chart?‎ A. Fewest people like taking a walk.‎ B. The people of 11-18 like taking a walk most.‎ C. 90 people like going to the movies in the 19-26 group.‎ D. The people of 27-35 like playing computer games most.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (四川雅安) It is important _____ people ______ learn team spirit.‎ A. of; of B. of; to ‎ C. for; to D. to; to ‎( ) 2. (广东佛山) The Xiamen-Shenzhen high speed railroad will run ______ eight cities.‎ A. across B. through C. over ‎( ) 3. (广东梅州) I enjoy playing computer games, but I can’t ______ too much time _______ that.‎ A. take; doing B. spend; doing ‎ C. spend; for doing D. take; to do ‎( ) 4. (浙江宁波) —What fun The Croods is!‎ ‎—Yeah! I like the movie, too. It’s so ______.‎ A. boring B. scary ‎ C. interesting D. sad ‎( ) 5. (兰州) Please turn to Page ______ and read the ______ story.‎ A. Ten; two ‎ B. Ten; second ‎ C. Tenth; second D. Tenth; two 第四课时 Section B 3a-Self Check 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 然而____________‎ ‎2. 几乎；差不多_____________‎ ‎3. 没有一个___________‎ ‎4. 牙科医生_____________‎ ‎5. magazine __________‎ ‎6. point__________‎ II. 词组互译 ‎1. 多于____________‎ ‎2. 少于_____________‎ ‎3. 看牙医_____________‎ ‎4. over two hours____________‎ ‎5. drink juice_____________‎ ‎6. most of the time____________‎ III. 补全对话（根据上下文选择方框中的词并用其适当形式填写到对话中）‎ about read how often movie two A: _______ do you watch TV?‎ B: Hmm…about ______ a week, I guess.‎ A: Uh-huh. And how often do you ______?‎ B: Oh, I read every day at school.‎ A: How often do you go to ______?‎ B: Uhh…let’s see… maybe once a month.‎ A: How often do you exercise?‎ B: Oh, I exercise ______ three times a week.‎ III.根据汉语补全句子 ‎1. 我今天得去看牙医。‎ I have to ______ _______ _______ _______ today.‎ ‎2. 这件裙子比那件蓝色的小。‎ This dress is smaller ______ the blue one.‎ ‎3. 我们应该少吃垃圾食品。‎ We should _______ ________ junk food.‎ ‎4. 为了准备考试他熬夜到很晚。‎ He ______ _______ _______ to prepare to the exam. ‎ 基础闯关 I. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. Most parents don’t think it is __________ (health) for children to stay up too late at night.‎ ‎2. My mother wants me _______ (study) hard.‎ ‎3. My sister often ______ (go) swimming with her friends on weekends.‎ ‎4. How often does the baby _____ (drink) milk?‎ ‎5. Mr. Smith plays tennis _____ (one) a week.‎ II. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. (山东菏泽) —How often do you chat with your friends online?‎ ‎—_______ I’m busy with my study.‎ A. Only one month. ‎ B. About twice a month.‎ C. Almost every day. ‎ D. Maybe in two weeks.‎ ‎( ) 2. If you want to keep healthy, you should eat _____ meat.‎ A. more B. much ‎ C. less D. fewer ‎( ) 3. (江苏徐州) I ______ watch this TV programme. It’s very interesting.‎ A. often B. never ‎ C. hardly D. seldom ‎( ) 4. Eating fruit and vegetables can help you ______ more vitamins.‎ A. got B. getting ‎ C. to get D. gets ‎( ) 5. Tina often eats junk food, ______ she knows it’s bad for her health.‎ A. although B. so ‎ C. and D. or ‎( ) 6. We should exercise ______ than three or four times a week.‎ A. much B. many ‎ C. more D. mucher III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 我想问Jane关于她的习惯的问题。‎ I want to ______ Jane _______ her ________.‎ ‎2. Tommy几乎每天都打篮球。‎ Tommy ________ ________ basketball every day.‎ ‎3. 大多数学生都会帮助家长做家务。‎ ‎ ________ _________ students help with housework.‎ ‎4. 我通常是把牛奶和鸡蛋作为早餐。‎ ‎ I usually have milk and eggs _______ _________.‎ 创新提升 I. 完形填空 ‎ We all need to exercise. Doctors say it is good 1 us. It makes your heart and body strong. It 2 gives you more energy. And you will feel better about yourself. It’s best to exercise 3 a week. Twenty minutes each time is enough.‎ There are many ways to 4 . You can walk, run, play sports, or 5 . Many people go to special places to exercise. They are 6 “fitness centers”. These places have 7 equipment. Some people buy equipment 8 their homes. But it is very expensive.‎ Exercising can be 9 . Friends can exercise together at a fitness center. Or, they can play sports 10 . How often do you exercise?‎ ‎( ) 1. A. to B. at C. for D. in ‎( ) 2. A. too B. either C. also D. neither ‎( ) 3. A. two B. twice C. second D. both ‎( ) 4. A. run B. swim C. walk D. exercise ‎( ) 5. A. shop B. eat C. swim D. exercise ‎( ) 6. A. call B. called C. calls D. calling ‎( ) 7. A. a lot B. many C. lot of D. lots of ‎( ) 8. A. to B. of C. for D./‎ ‎( ) 9. A. fun B. sad C. healthy D. boring ‎( ) 10. A. with B. all ‎ C. together D. common II. 阅读理解 ‎ Fruit is good for people. Many people eat some fruit every day. Mr. and Mrs. Green like fruit very much and every Monday Mrs. Green goes to buy some fruit in the shop near her house. The man in the shop knows her well and helps a lot. She can buy all kinds of fruit there, apples, pears, oranges and bananas. In different time of the year, the price of each kind of fruit is not the same, sometimes high, sometimes low. Mrs. Green wants to buy cheap fruit. But Mr. Green likes bananas only. She buys bananas for him every week. She only buys cheap fruit for herself.‎ ‎( ) l. When does Mrs. Green go to buy some fruit? ‎ ‎ A. Saturday B. Monday. ‎ ‎ C. Thursday. D. every day ‎ ‎( ) 2. Where does Mrs. Green buy fruit? ‎ ‎ A. In the shop near her house. ‎ ‎ B. In the town. ‎ ‎ C. Near the shop ‎ D. In different shops ‎ ‎( ) 3. Mrs. Green buys ______for Mr. Green. ‎ ‎ A. pears B. apples ‎ ‎ C. bananas D. oranges ‎ ‎( ) 4. Which of following is not right? ‎ ‎ A. Fruit is good for people. ‎ ‎ B. Mr. and Mrs. Green like fruit a lot. ‎ ‎ C. Mrs. Green can buy all kinds of fruit. ‎ ‎ D. Mrs. Green only buys apples for herself. ‎ ‎( ) 5. In different time of the year, the price of each kind of fruit is______. ‎ ‎ A. the same B. not the same ‎ ‎ C. high D. cheap 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (辽宁大连) The _____ of the great book, The Adventures of Tom Sawyer, is Mark Twain.‎ A. theme B. price ‎ C. owner D. writer ‎ ( ) 2. (福建福州) —Why do people there _______use umbrella in the sun ?‎ ‎—Because they would rather enjoy the sunshine .‎ A. hardly B. often C. always ‎ ‎ ( ) 3. (江西南昌) _______ jeans were invented over 100 years ago, they're still in fashion today.‎ A. Because      B. If      ‎ C. Although     D. Since Unit 2 单元测试卷 第一部分 选择题（共50分）‎ I. 单项选择（本题共15分， 每小题1分）‎ ‎( ) 1. —_____ do you watch TV?‎ ‎ —Once a week, only on Sunday evening.‎ A. How long B. How much ‎ C. How often D. How many days ‎( ) 2. —______ does Betty do on weekends?‎ ‎—She often reads at home.‎ A. Where B. What ‎ C. How D. Why ‎( ) 3. ______ my brother is young, he knows a lot.‎ A. As B. When ‎ C. Although D. Because ‎( ) 4. I must look after my ______ and keep _______.‎ A. health; health ‎ B. health; healthy ‎ C. healthy; healthy ‎ D. healthy; health ‎( ) 5. —_______ hours do they exercise every week?‎ ‎—About 40 hours, I think.‎ A. How many B. How long ‎ C. How often D. How ‎( ) 6. In our class, 85% of the students take the bus to school. So ______ students in our class get to school by bus.‎ A. all B. most ‎ C. a few D. almost ‎( ) 7. Don’t read in bed. It’s bad _____ your eyes.‎ A. for B. of C. with D. at ‎( ) 8. _____ you put your watch in your inside pocket.‎ A. May be B. Maybe ‎ C. May D. Can ‎( ) 9. If you want to be thinner, you must eat_______ meat and take _______ exercise.‎ A. more; more B. less; less ‎ C. more; less D. less; more ‎( ) 10. —How often do you play the piano at home?‎ ‎—_______.‎ A. One hour B. All night C. Half an hour D. Once a day ‎( ) 11. — I left my keys in the room yesterday. I had to get in _______ the window. ‎ ‎—It’s dangerous to do that.‎ A. in B. through ‎ C. over D. to ‎( ) 12. I have ______ been to Disneyland. I hope I can go there next year.‎ A. ever B. never ‎ C. always D. often ‎( ) 13. My brother likes fruit a lot and he eats it three_____ four times every week.‎ A. and B. but C. or D. so ‎( ) 14. My grandfather is over seventy years old. He is very well because he always_______.‎ A. drinks tea B. sleep late ‎ C. plays computer ‎ D. plays sports ‎( ) 15. Here _______ in the classroom.‎ A. ten students are ‎ B. are ten students C. ten students is ‎ D. is en students II. 完形填空（本题共10分，每小题1分）‎ What do the people usually do on weekends? Some people like to  1  at home, but others like to go out for a walk, play football or do some other exercise. Mr. Smith  2  hard in a factory during (在…期间) the  3 . On the weekends, he usually  4  the same thing. On Saturday he washes his car and on  5  he goes with his family to a village (村庄) by car. His uncle and aunt  6  a farm there. It isn't a big one, but there is always  7  to do on the farm. The children help with the animals and give them some  8 . Mr. and Mrs. Smith help them do the farm work in the field. At the end of the day, they are all  9  and Mr. Smith's aunt  10  them a big meal. ‎ ‎( ) 1. A. play B. stay C. be D. so ‎( ) 2. A. works B. does ‎ C. makes D. studies ‎( ) 3. A. day B. year C. week D. month ‎( ) 4. A. does B. gets C. makes D. has ‎( ) 5. A. Friday B. Saturday ‎ C. Thursday D. Sunday ‎( ) 6. A. has B. have C. bring D. find ‎( ) 7. A. much B. many C. any D. no ‎( ) 8. A. cakes B. rice C. food D. fruit ‎( ) 9. A. hungry B. angry C. full D. happy ‎( ) 10. A. gives B. puts C. makes D. does III. 情景交际（根据上下文，选择适当的句子完成对话。每小题2分，共10分）‎ A. And you need to exercise more.‎ B. What about sweets?‎ C. You should change your diet.‎ D. Try to keep healthy.‎ E. Can I eat hamburgers?‎ F. You should eat lots of fruit and vegetables.‎ G. They give you energy but they are not healthy.‎ Jack: Look at yourself, Tom. You are too fat. You are not fit. (1) ‎ Tom: What food should I eat then?‎ Jack: You should stop eating sweets. (2) ‎ Tom: (3) I like them very much.‎ Jack: No, you can't. (4) ‎ Tom: OK. I will try to do so.‎ Jack: ( 5) It can help you be fit, too.‎ ‎1.________ 2. ________ 3. __________‎ ‎4._________ 5. _________‎ IV. 阅读理解（本题共20分，每小题2分）‎ A Jim was clever, but he never liked to work hard. He often said to his friends, “If I work hard, I will make a lot of money. But I want an easy job and a lot of money. That’s the best.”‎ So he could only be a thief. But he still thought it was too much work. So he told his friends what to do and how to get money from others.‎ One day Jim sent one of his friends into a very large and beautiful house. He told him to steal some money from that rich family. ‎ It was evening, and when the man looked through one of the windows he saw a young man and a girl in the room. They were playing duet on a piano. Then the thief left the house.‎ When he returned, Jim asked him what he got. But he said, “I didn’t take anything. That family can’t have much money. You know, two people were playing only the same piano there. They didn’t have enough money to buy another one.‎ ‎( ) 1. Jim wanted_______.‎ A. a lot of money without working hard B. to study hard and make lots of money C. to do little work with little money D. a lot of money after doing hard work ‎( ) 2. The underlined word “steal” in this passage may mean “_______”.‎ A. 买 B. 抢 C. 偷 D. 要 ‎( ) 3. Jim’s friend stole nothing because________.‎ A. he saw two people in the room B. he thought the family was poor C. he found two people playing music D. he thought the piano was too heavy ‎( ) 4. Jim’s friend didn’t _______.‎ A. like a piano B. leave the house C. know music D. want money ‎( ) 5. What do you think of Jim’s friend? _______.‎ A. clever B. not clever ‎ C. happy D. kind B Paying too much money to do what they want is not the most relaxing hobby. Here, some stay-at-home activities are a great way to enjoy time without spending much.‎ ‎◆ Start a small garden: You could start it in your backyard or in your balcony. Get different types of plants. The more color, the better, right?‎ ‎◆ Read: Reading is a great habit. So why not use it to enjoy your time? Read books that interest you and that will make you more and more knowledgeable(知识渊博的)。‎ ‎◆ Yoga: Yoga can also exercise your mind. There are several videos available(可利用的) on the Internet that you could watch to learn it well.‎ ‎◆ Repair Work: There are several things around house that need to be repaired and kept. Being the man of the house, you can spend your spare time doing that. This way, you could not only take your free time, but also save money that you would need to pay if you ask someone to come and do those jobs.‎ ‎◆ Cooking: Cooking is a kind of art. Whether you have skill or not, you can cook. The most important is, it makes you wiser every time. Just try your hand at it.‎ ‎( ) 6. What place may the word “balcony” refer to?‎ A. 厨房 B. 书房 C. 阳台 D. 卫生间 ‎( ) 7. Which of the following isn’t stay-at-home activity?‎ A. Growing plants in your garden.‎ B. Doing some reading.‎ C. Square dance.‎ D. Repairing around the house.‎ ‎( ) 8. Which of them can exercise your mind?‎ ①Working in the garden. ②Reading books.③Playing Yoga. ④Repairing at home. ‎ ⑤Cooking.‎ A. ②③ B. ①③⑤‎ C. ②③⑤ D. ②③④⑤‎ ‎( ) 9. What does the writer think of cooking?‎ A. A housework. B. A skill.‎ C. An art. D. A subject.‎ ‎( ) 10. The passage mainly tells us_______.‎ A. what to do on weekends ‎ B. how to save money ‎ C. what activities can save time and money D. what stay-at-home activities can be pleasant but cost little money 第二部分 非选择题（共50分）‎ V. 任务型阅读(每小题2分，共10分)‎ The food we eat depends on (取决于) where we live, or which part of our country we live in. For example, in the south of China, they eat rice, but in the north of China, they eat noodles. In central Europe, people don’t eat so much fish, they eat meat and sausages. In Australia, Germany, and Poland there are hundreds of different kinds of sausages.‎ In North America, Australia, and Europe there are two or more courses for every meal and people eat with knives and forks. In China there is only one course, all the food is together on the table, and they eat with chopsticks. In parts of India and the Middle East, people use their fingers to pick up the food.‎ Nowadays it is convenient to transport food from one part of the world to the other. We can eat what we likes at any time of a year. Bananas come from the Caribbean or Africa; rice comes from India or the US; strawberries come from Chile or Spain.‎ 根据短文内容，完成下列各题。‎ ‎1. 根据短文内容完成句子。（每空限填1个单词）‎ People living in the north of China eat ______ and people living in the southern China eat______.‎ ‎2. 根据短文内容完成句子。（每空限填1个单词）‎ In the parts of India and the Middle East, people use _______ _______ to pick up the food.‎ ‎3. What do people in central Europe eat?‎ ‎____________________________________‎ ‎4. 把短文中画线的句子译成汉语。‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ ‎5. 根据短文内容，用一个完整的英文句子回答问题。‎ What’s the main idea of the second paragraph(段落) ?‎ ‎_____________________________________.‎ ＶI. 用所给词的适当形式填空（每小题1分，共5分）‎ ‎1. He brushes his teeth ______ (two) a day.‎ ‎2. The story book is very ________ (interest), I want to read again.‎ ‎3. We should exercise ______ (much) than three or four times a week.‎ ‎4. It’s important for us _______ (learn) English well.‎ ‎5. She never goes to dentist for teeth______ (clean).‎ VII. 根据汉语补全句子，每空一词（每小题2分，共10分）‎ ‎1. 他周末几乎从来没有逛过街。‎ He _______ ________ goes shopping on weekends.‎ ‎2. 我的钱不到1000元，因此不能买iPhone5了。‎ My money is ______ _______ 1000 yuan, so I can’t buy an iPhone5.‎ ‎3. 在空闲时间你会经常使用互联网吗？‎ ‎ Do you often ______ the ______ in your free time?‎ ‎4. 他不知道这些问题的答案。‎ He doesn’t know the _______ _______ the questions.‎ ‎5. Tommy 几乎每天都吃肉。‎ Tommy ________ ________ meat every day.‎ VIII. 书面表达（15分）‎ ‎ 很多同学都喜欢Jackie Chan的电影。假设你是一名reporter，今天又机会采访他。请根据下面的表格，写一篇采访稿。(80词左右)‎ always visits his friends usually exercises often drinks milk for breakfast hardly ever stays at a place never feels bad about his acting ‎__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ Unit 3 I’m more outgoing than my sister.‎ 第一课时 Section A 1a-2d 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 爱交际的；外向的____________‎ ‎2. 大声地；响亮地____________‎ ‎3. 轻声地；安静地______________‎ ‎4. 极好的；了不起的______________‎ ‎5. 清楚地；明白地______________‎ ‎6. better____________‎ ‎7. hard-working_____________‎ ‎8. competition_______________‎ ‎9. though____________‎ ‎10. both_________‎ II. 短语互译 ‎1. 短头发____________‎ ‎2. 更响亮______________‎ ‎3. 敲鼓_____________‎ ‎4. 玩得愉快______________‎ ‎5. long hair__________‎ ‎6. singing competition__________‎ ‎7. run fast___________‎ ‎8. work hard___________‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 我认为最重要的事情就是玩得愉快。‎ I think the _______ _________ thing is to _________ ________.‎ ‎2. 短头发的女孩是我妹妹。‎ The girl ______ ______ hair is my sister.‎ ‎3. —你会敲鼓吗？—是的。我敲得很好。‎ ‎—Can you _______ _______ _______? ‎ ‎—Yes. And I play it ______.‎ ‎4. Tom 每天都起得很早。‎ Tom ______ _______ _______ every day.‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示补全单词 ‎1. We should close the door q________.‎ ‎2. It was so foggy that I couldn’t see the road c__________.‎ ‎3. W_________ one do you like best?‎ ‎4. My friend, Han Mei is o_______. She likes talking.‎ ‎5. The competition yesterday was f________.‎ II. 用所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. This flower is _______ (good) than mine.‎ ‎2. Liu Ying sings as ______ (well) as Li He.‎ ‎3. Lily is __________ (outgoing) than Lucy.‎ ‎4. Sam has _______ (long) hair than Tom.‎ ‎5. Yesterday I had fun ________ (sing) in the party.‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. I’m tall. My best friend is short. (合并为一句)‎ I’m _______ _______ my best friend.‎ My best friend _____ _______ _______ me.‎ ‎2. Tim has long hair. Jim has long hair, too. (合并为一句)‎ Tim and Jim _______ _______ long hair.‎ ‎3. I’m quieter than my sister. (改为同义句)‎ My sister is _______ ________ than me.‎ ‎4. Nelly dances better than Lisa. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎______ Nelly ______ better than Lisa?‎ ‎5. Tina is hard-working, so she always gets good grades. (改为同义句)‎ Tina _______ _______, so she always gets good grades.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. (广西贺州) Don’t talk _____. Your grandmother is sleeping now.‎ A. loud B. loudly ‎ C. loudly D. hard ‎( ) 2. Although he is young, ______ he can so some things by himself.‎ A. and B. / ‎ C. but D. so ‎( ) 3. All of the boys ______ playing football.‎ A. likes B. like ‎ C. is like D. are like ‎( ) 4. This shirt is a little ________ than that one.‎ A. big B. bigger ‎ C. biggest D. the biggest ‎( ) 5. (上海) The volunteer spoke as ______ as she could to make the visitors understand her.‎ A. clearly ‎ B. more clearly ‎ C. most clearly ‎ D. the most clearly ‎( ) 6. Miss Wang is _______ than me.‎ A. much quiet B. more quiet ‎ C. much quieter D. more quieter ‎( ) 7. He has two daughters. They ______ doctors.‎ A. both are B. are both ‎ C. are all D. all are ‎( ) 8. —The coffee is good.‎ ‎—That’s right. It will taste ______ with some milk.‎ A. good B. better ‎ C. best D. the best ‎ ‎( ) 9. _____ do you like better, this one or that one?‎ A. What B. Who ‎ C. Which D. /‎ ‎( ) 10. (四川宜宾)—Sam didn’t go to school yesterday, did he?‎ ‎—______. He was ill yesterday.‎ A. Yes, he did. ‎ B. No, he did. ‎ C. No, he didn’t.‎ D. Yes , he didn’t.‎ 创新提升 I. 情景交际 (填写适当的词补全对话，每空一词)‎ A: Li Ping 1 my friend. She’s a little 2 outgoing than me.‎ B: My friend and I are the 3 . We are 4 quiet.‎ A: Do you 5 the same?‎ B: 6 . I’m a little taller 7 her.‎ A: What 8 Lucy’s friend?‎ B: Lucy’s friend 9 from her 10 much more athletic than her.‎ ‎1.______ 2. _______ 3.________ 4. _______ ‎ ‎5.＿＿＿ 6. _______ 7. ________ 8.＿＿＿‎ ‎9.________ 10. _________‎ II. 用所给形容词的适当形式填空 short, heavy, light, tall, small, long ‎1. He’s on school basketball team. So he is _______ than any other student in his class.‎ ‎2. What animals are _______, elephants or horses?‎ ‎3. When autumn comes, the days get _______ and the nights get_________.‎ ‎4. Things are much _______ on the moon than the earth.‎ ‎5. This shirt is too big. Please show me a ______one.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (四川泸州) No one can sing ______ than her.‎ A. well B. good ‎ C. better D. best ‎( ) 2. (浙江湖州) —How do you like the short play? ‎ ‎—Funny, ______ the music of it is not so good.‎ A. so B. though ‎ C. or D. because ‎( ) 3. (浙江温州) My sister is _______. She likes making friends with others.‎ A. shy B. quiet ‎ C. athletic D. outgoing ‎( ) 4. (河南) It’s possible to get ＄100 a day in this company, and some days you can get _______.‎ A. much B. more ‎ C. little D. few 第二课时 Grammar Focus-3c 知识清单 I. 词汇、短语互译 ‎1. 赢；获胜________‎ ‎2. 更友好__________‎ ‎3. 更好的__________‎ ‎4. as…as….____________‎ ‎5. sing well ___________‎ ‎6. study harder_____________‎ II. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 汤姆不如吉姆跑得快。‎ Tom doesn’t run ______ ______ ______ Jim.‎ ‎2. 目前，大城市的房价比小城市的高。‎ At present, the price of houses in big cities _______ _______ than that in small cities.‎ ‎3. 我和刘英都有黑色的头发。‎ ‎_______ Liu Ying and I ______ black hair.‎ ‎4. 他比我英语说的好。‎ He speaks English ________ _______ me.‎ ‎5. 我认为数学和英语一样重要。‎ I think math is _______ ________ _______ English.‎ III. 补全对话 A: I like pop music. Do you like it?‎ B: No. I like country music more than pop music. It’s quieter ________ pop music.‎ A: Yes. They are different. Pop music is a little _____ exciting than country music.‎ B: How _______ jazz music?‎ A: It’s not bad.‎ B: I think it’s ______ good as country music.‎ A: So you like them _______.‎ B: That’s right.‎ 基础闯关 I. 用所给单词的正确形式填空 ‎1. Who’s ____________ (hard-working), Tina or Mike?‎ ‎2. Han Lei ______ (win) the show I am a singer II. He sings _______ (well) than other singers.‎ ‎3. —Can you speak a little more slowly, I can’t hear you _______ (clear)?‎ ‎—OK.‎ ‎4. I think the most important is ________ (learn) English well.‎ ‎5. If you want to make more friends, you should be _________(friendly).‎ II. 选择方框内的单词完成下面的句子（有多余选项）‎ smarter; harder; faster; taller; better; earlier ‎1. Li Ming is the ______ one in the two boys. But he is shorter than Lin Tao.‎ ‎2. —Is Lisa _______ than May? ‎ ‎—I think so. She often won the first prize in our class.‎ ‎3. You must get up _______, or you will be late like today.‎ ‎4. The _______ you work, the better grades you will get.‎ ‎5. Look! Sun Yang is swimming ______ than any other player.‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. I was outgoing two years ago. I am more outgoing now. (合并为一句)‎ I am _______ _______ _______ I was two years ago.‎ ‎2. This film is not as interesting as that one. (改为同义句)‎ That film is ________ _________ ________ this one.‎ ‎3. Mary is eleven. Kate is twelve. (合并为一句)‎ Mary is one year _______ _______ Kate.‎ ‎4. Jane has longer hair than Lucy. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎_______ Jane ______ longer hair than Lucy?‎ ‎5. My father is funnier than my mother. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎______ funnier than ________ mother?‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. (山东聊城) The baby is sleeping. Please speak______.‎ A. loudly B. clearly ‎ C. quietly D. politely ‎( ) 2. (四川绵阳) Linda has bought a large house ______ a swimming pool.‎ A. with B. in ‎ C. on D. from ‎( ) 3. Liu Ming’s hair is longer than _______.‎ A. she B. her ‎ C. hers D. him ‎( ) 4. Which one do you like ______, the green or the red one?‎ A. much B. better ‎ C. good D. well ‎( ) 5. The two girls _____ well.‎ A. both can swim B. can swim both C. can both swim D. both can swimming ‎( ) 6. —The cake is too expensive. Would you like to show me a _____ one?‎ ‎—Sure. Here you are.‎ A. cheap B. cheaper C. dear D. more cheap 创新提升 完形填空 Min is the ____1_____ student in our class. His father is a ____2____in a factory. His mother is a teacher. He ____3_____ a brother and a sister. His sister is ____4____younger than him. But she is much ____5____than Min. And his sister is ____6___than Min, too. Min works very ___7____. He usually gets up ____8____a quarter past six in the morning. After breakfast, he leaves home. He goes to ____9____by bike. He often gets there earlier than others. He likes to ___10_____his classmates with their lessons.‎ ‎( ) 1. A. good B. better ‎ C. best D. nicer ‎( ) 2. A. farmer B. worker ‎ C. teacher D. student ‎( ) 3. A. is B. have ‎ C. likes D. has ‎( ) 4. A. a little B. more ‎ C. very D. quite ‎ ‎( ) 5. A. younger B. older ‎ ‎ C. stronger D. more ‎( ) 6. A. short B. shorter ‎ C. the shorter D. shortter ‎( ) 7. A. busy B. hard ‎ C. good D. fine ‎( ) 8. A. in B. on ‎ C. at D. to ‎( ) 9. A. school B. home ‎ C. factory D. farm ‎( ) 10. A. to work B. to make ‎ C. to write D. to help 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (湖南株洲) We should protect(保护) the beautiful flowers on ______ sides of the street.‎ A. every B. both C. either ‎( ) 2. (北京) Debbie is growing fast. She is even ______ than her mother.‎ A. tall B. taller ‎ C. tallest D the tallest ‎( ) 3. (陕西) —Which of the two subjects do you like, art or music?‎ ‎—______. They are really interesting.‎ A. Neither B. Both C. All ‎( ) 4. (广东广州) The actress is already 50, but she looks ______ than she really is.‎ A. young B. more young ‎ C. more younger D. much younger 第三课时 Section B 1a-2e 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 严肃的_____________‎ ‎2. 必需的；必要的_________________‎ ‎3. 格言；言语_______________‎ ‎4. 感动；触摸_______________‎ ‎5. 笑；笑声________________‎ ‎6. 损坏_____________‎ ‎7. grade_______________‎ ‎8. should_______________‎ ‎9. share_______________‎ ‎10. similar_________________‎ ‎11. mirror________________‎ ‎12. truly_____________‎ II. 短语互译 ‎1. 关心；在意____________‎ ‎2. 只要；既然______________‎ ‎3. 与….不同______________‎ ‎4. 使显现_____________‎ ‎5. 和…相同_______________‎ ‎6. in fact ___________‎ ‎7. be similar to ________________‎ ‎8. talk about ________________‎ ‎9. do the same things as _______________‎ ‎10. be better at_______________‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 在某些方面他们看起来一样。‎ In some ways, they _______ _______ ______.‎ ‎2. 妈妈说好朋友就像一面镜子。‎ My mother says a good friend is _______ a ______.‎ ‎3. 王磊很有趣，他总是让我哈哈大笑。‎ Wang Lei is so funny, he often ______ me _______.‎ ‎4. 我的好朋友在音乐方面很有才干。‎ My good friend is ________ _______ music.‎ ‎5. 父母都非常在意自己的孩子。‎ Parents all ______ ________ their kids.‎ IV. 根据括号内提示翻译句子 ‎1. 我的书比他的多。(more; than)‎ ‎__________________________________.‎ ‎2. 于梅的橘子和我的一样大。(as…as)‎ ‎__________________________________.‎ ‎3. 我的朋友比我更努力。(hard-working)‎ ‎__________________________________.‎ ‎4. 他们两个都很外向吗？(both)‎ ‎__________________________________?‎ ‎5. Jeff擅长英语。(be good at)‎ ‎__________________________________.‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示完成单词 ‎1. Don’t t_______ the food before washing your hands.‎ ‎2. It’s n_______ to go to bed early and get up early.‎ ‎3. Though our English is s______, we all like her very much.‎ ‎4. When will we r_______ Beijing if we take the train?‎ ‎5. Please take c_____ of yourself when you are out.‎ II. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. There are many _____ ( kid) in the park.‎ ‎2. The boy’s ______ ( hand) are dirty. You should help him wash them.‎ ‎3. I’m ______ (true) sorry that things had to end like this.‎ ‎4. We enjoy_______ (read) in our free time.‎ ‎5. You should know that your father _______ (care) about you.‎ III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 韩庚擅长跳舞和唱歌。‎ Han Geng is _______ ______ _______ and singing.‎ ‎2. 我认为友谊比金钱重要。‎ I think friendship is _______ _______ ______ money.‎ ‎3. 使用互联网对于张平是非常简单的。‎ ‎______ __________ _________ Zhang Ping to use the Internet.‎ ‎4. 只要你离他们原点，你就会安全。‎ ‎______ ________ _______ you can keep away from them, you’re safe.‎ ‎5. Jeff与他的父亲非常相像。‎ ‎ Jeff is ________ ________ his father.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. (四川广安) —When will the plane ______ Shanghai?‎ ‎—Sorry, I don’t know.‎ A. get B. arrive at C. reach ‎( ) 2. We should give the boy another chance_______ he has made some mistakes.‎ A. though B. when ‎ C. unless D. because ‎( ) 3. She is not good at _______ a bike.‎ A. ride B. to ride ‎ C. riding D. rides ‎( ) 4. (广东广州) The food ______ my country is quite different_______ that here.‎ A. in; like B. to; from ‎ C. from; to D. in; from ‎( ) 5. Mr. Brown’s daughter likes to read the same books _____ he does.‎ A. like B. with ‎ C. as D. of ‎( ) 6. I’d like to make friends ______ the girl. She’s talented ______ music.‎ A. to; at B. to; in ‎ C. with; at D. with; in ‎( ) 7. (浙江丽水) —Can you tell the differences between these two pictures?‎ ‎—Differences? Oh, no. They look quite ______.‎ A. different B. similar ‎ C. strange D. interesting V. 句型转换 ‎1. I’m shorter than he. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎_______ ________ shorter than he?‎ ‎2. You are similar to your parents. (改为同义句)‎ You are _______ ________ _______ your parents.‎ ‎3. My good friend is outgoing. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ________ is your good friend_______ ?‎ ‎4. I care my friends are good at music and art. (改为否定句)‎ ‎ I ______ care my friends are good at music______ art.‎ ‎5. I’m outgoing. My friend is quiet. (合并为一句)‎ ‎ My friend is _________ ________ me.‎ 创新提升 阅读理解 Being outgoing is good for your life. Those who are more outgoing meet lots of interesting people and have more fun in life. In fact, being outgoing is not so hard as you think. Even the shy people can be outgoing.‎ You can start becoming outgoing with your best friend or a group of friends. But the real challenge (挑战) comes when you meet strange people or new friends. Smile more, and usually they will return your smile. In this way, you may have some talks.‎ Start a talk. Just a simple “Hello” or “How is it going” is a good start. If you want to make interesting talks, you should read the news and prepare (准备) your views. Surf the Internet for new information and then keep that in mind.‎ The easiest way to become more outgoing is to go out. This is also the most important step(步). Go to a park, beach, club, party or any other place that you think can be fun, and you may make new friends there.‎ 根据短文内容，选择正确答案。‎ ‎( ) 1. You should start to be outgoing with _______. ‎ A. your parents ‎ B. your teachers ‎ C. your best friends ‎ D. your new friends ‎ ‎( ) 2. When you stat a talk with a stranger, you should say “_________” ‎ A. What’s the matter? B. What’s your name?” C. How is it going? D. Are you healthy?‎ ‎( ) 3. The easiest way to be outgoing is .‎ A. talking B. smiling C. playing D. going out ‎( ) 4. Making new friends can make us .‎ A. more outgoing B. healthier ‎ C. more serious D. more tired ‎( ) 5. Which is NOT the writer’s idea? A. Being outgoing is really difficult. ‎ B. Being outgoing is good for our lives. ‎ C. Being outgoing helps people have more fun.‎ D. Being outgoing with strangers is not easy.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (山东淄博) —Do you like Zhou Libo’s talk show? ‎ ‎—Yes. His talk show is very funny. It always makes people______.‎ A. laugh B. laughed ‎ C. laughing D. to laugh ‎( ) 2. (江苏宿迁) Can you tell me ______ in the future?‎ A. how life will be like ‎ B. how will life be like C. what life will be like ‎ D. what will life be like ‎( ) 3. (湖北十堰) —Many boy students think math is _______ English. ‎ ‎—I agree. I’m weak in English.‎ A. much difficult than ‎ B. so difficult as C. less difficult than ‎ D. more difficult than ‎( ) 4. (贵州黔东南) This time I don’t know if I _____ the exam. If I _______ the exam, I’ll have a great vacation.‎ A. pass; pass B. pass; will pass ‎ C. will; pass D. will pass; will pass ‎( ) 5. (山东东营) —What’s on ______ side of the hill, mum?‎ ‎—A big lake.‎ A. other B. others ‎ C. another D. the other 第四课时 Section B 3a-Self Check 知识清单 I. 词汇、短语互译 ‎1. 最初的；最早的_________‎ ‎2. 信息；消息___________‎ ‎3. 小学____________‎ ‎4. long straight hair_____________‎ ‎5. good grades________‎ ‎6. be good with __________‎ ‎7. call…at…____________‎ II. 选词填空。（选择方框中的词并用其适当形式填空）‎ information, break, good, loud, say ‎1. Please speak a little _______, and then I can hear you more clearly.‎ ‎2. We have no _______ about where she has gone.‎ ‎3. “Practice makes perfect,” as the _______ goes.‎ ‎4. We know glass ______ easily.‎ ‎5. He is ______ at English than me.‎ III.根据汉语补全句子 ‎1. 他在英语上总是取得好成绩。‎ He always _______ good _______ ______ English.‎ ‎2. 我有一个和我不太一样的朋友。‎ I have a friend who _______ _______ ______ me.‎ ‎3. 那个短直发的女孩是汤姆的妹妹。‎ ‎ The girl with ______ ________ hair is Tom’s sister.‎ ‎4. 我想凯特比我在学校里更受欢迎。‎ ‎ I think Kate is ________ ________ than me in our school.‎ 基础闯关 I. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. Look! There is a teacher ________ (want) on the wall.‎ ‎2. Both of us ______ (like) watching the movie Lost In Thailand.‎ ‎3. My father is a ________ (talent) man. He can work out many problems.‎ ‎4. Take exercise one hour a day, and you’ll become________ (healthy) than before.‎ ‎5. He is good at _______(play) the drum. ‎ II. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. (广西玉林) ______ he exercises every day, ______ he is very healthy.‎ A. Because; so ‎ B. Because; though C. Because; / ‎ D. Though; /‎ ‎( ) 2. I bought _______ exercise books with _______ money.‎ A. less; less B. more; less ‎ C. fewer; fewer D. more; fewer ‎( ) 3. He is serious. No one can make him_______.‎ A. laugh B. laughs ‎ C. to laugh D. laughing ‎( ) 4. —What do you think of the singer?‎ ‎—No one sings _______.‎ A. well B. good ‎ C. better D. best ‎( ) 5. (江苏苏州) There are millions of websites on the Internet and there ______ a lot of ‎ useful______ on the websites.‎ A. are; informations ‎ B. are; information C. is; information ‎ D. is; information ‎ ( ) 6. (浙江杭州) Mom makes me eat an apple every day_____ the doctor away.‎ A. keeps B. is kept ‎ C. to keep D. kept III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 张老师和孩子们相处得很好，是我们学校最受欢迎的老师之一。‎ Miss Zhang ______ _______ _______ the kids, she is one of the most _________ teachers on our school.‎ ‎2. 他需要两个鸡蛋和一杯牛奶作为早餐。‎ ‎ He______ two eggs and a glass of milk _______ breakfast.‎ ‎3. 我的好友和我一样严肃，我们都爱学习。‎ ‎ My friend is ________ ________ ______ me, we both like to study.‎ 创新提升 I. 用方框中所给单词的正确形式填空（可重复使用）‎ big, round, small, near, far The sun, the moon and many stars are all in the sky. We see the sun in the day. We see the moon and the stars at night.‎ The sun is like a 1 ball. It gives us light and heat. The moon is a ball, too. Sometimes it looks as 2 as a plate, and sometimes it looks like half a plate. It looks 3 than the stars because it’s much 4 to the earth(地球). In fact, it’s much 5 than many stars. ‎ The stars look very 6 , but most of the stars are even 7 than the sun. They look small just because they are very 8 away from us.‎ ‎1._______ 2. ________ 3. _________‎ ‎4. _______ 5. ________ 6. _________‎ ‎7. ________ 8. __________‎ II. 阅读理解 WANTED: BABYSITTER Do you like children? Do you have free time in the afternoon? We need a babysitter for our son. He’s six years old. Hours are from 3:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. on weekdays. Sometimes you will work on weekends. The pay (工资) is ¥10 per hour.‎ For the job, you’ll: ‎ ‎1）Watch our son ‎2）Read some books for him ‎3）Play with him ‎4）You will work at our house. We live in Fuzhou, near the Fuzhou Railway Station.‎ Please call 0591—87533186. Ask for Mrs. Zhang.‎ 根据上面的广告内容，完成下列各句。（每条横线的字数不限）‎ ‎1:The word “babysitter” means ________________ in Chinese.‎ ‎2: A babysitter can get _______________ each hour on weekends.‎ ‎3: A babysitter must work _____________ hours on weekdays.‎ ‎4: The baby is _____ years old.‎ ‎5: Please call Mrs. Zhang at __________________ if you want the job.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (河北) Some animals can even see things _______ in the dark.‎ A. bad B. badly ‎ C. clear D. clearly ‎( ) 2. (湖南娄底) —What do you think of math and physics?‎ ‎—I think physics is _____ than math.‎ A. difficult B. more difficult C. the most difficult ‎( ) 3. (江苏无锡) —What did your parents think about your decision? ‎ ‎—They always let me do ______ I think I should.‎ A. when B. that ‎ C. how D. what ‎( ) 4. (安徽) ______ the sun was not yet up, many people were already taking exercise in the square.‎ A. As B. If ‎ C. Though D. Because ‎( ) 5. (吉林) —Nick, what kind of movies do you like_______, action movies or comedies?‎ ‎—Comedies, I think.‎ A. good B. better C. best ‎( ) 6. (北京) My parents always tell me ______ more vegetables and fruit.‎ A. eat B. eating ‎ C. eats D. to eat ‎( ) 7. (上海) Air pollution has become _______ than ever before. We must do something to stop it.‎ A. serious B. more serious ‎ C. most serious D. the most serious Unit 3 单元测试卷 第一部分 选择题（共50分）‎ I. 单项选择（本题共15分， 每小题1分）‎ ‎( ) 1. English is my favorite subject, and I am good _____ it.‎ A. for B. to C. at D. of ‎( ) 2. Some of the girls don’t like their new teacher _____ with them little after class.‎ A. who talks B. who talk ‎ C. talks D. who talking ‎( ) 3. Ruth is not _____ serious as Rose.‎ A. as B. more ‎ C. to do D. does ‎( ) 4. As you see, in some ways we look ________ and in some ways we look________.‎ A. the same; different B. same; different C. the same; different D. same; the different ‎( ) 5. I had to call a taxi because the box was ______ than I’d expected.‎ A. heavy B. heavier ‎ C. the heavier D. the heaviest ‎( ) 6. I work hard this term, but Peter works much ________.‎ A. hard B. harder ‎ C. hardest D. the hardest ‎( ) 7. —I hear _____ your grandpa ______ your grandma like watching Beijing Opera.‎ ‎—Right, just as many old people do in our city.‎ A. both; and B. either; or ‎ C. neither; nor D. not only; but also ‎( ) 8. —Your brother often disagrees with you _______ he?‎ ‎—_______. We often have different opinions.‎ A. does; Yes B. doesn’t; Yes ‎ C. does; No D. doesn’t; No ‎( ) 9. The students didn’t find much _____ about the topic on that website.‎ A. report B. article ‎ C. information D. story ‎( ) 10. —Is Linda your friend? ‎ ‎—Yes, she is a funny girl. She often _____ us _____ when we are together.‎ A. makes; to laugh ‎ B. makes; laugh C. keeps; laugh ‎ D. keeps; to laugh ‎( ) 11. Does he enjoy _______ basketball with us?‎ A. playing B. play ‎ C. plays D. to play ‎( ) 12. Though we are hungry and tired, _____ we are so excited.‎ A. so B. but C. / D. too ‎( ) 13. When winter comes, the days get _________.‎ A. long and long ‎ B. short and short C. longer and longer ‎ D. shorter and shorter ‎( ) 14. The ______ you work at your lessons, the _______ results you will get.‎ A. hard; good B. harder; good ‎ C. hard; better D. harder; better ‎( ) 15. —Hi, I’m Xiao Li, I’m very glad to ______ friends______ you.‎ ‎—Me, too. I’m Xiao Wang.‎ A. get; like B. make; with ‎ C. get; with D. make; to II. 完形填空（本题共10分，每小题1分）‎ There is nobody in the world the same 1 you. You are unique(唯一的). Everybody is 2 from everyone else. That is good! 3 it makes the world an interesting place.‎ There are people taller 4 you, and shorter than you. Maybe your hair is the same color as your friend’s hair, but maybe it is longer than 5 . Another difference is that your hair may be straight, her hair may be curly.‎ I am sure you have some friends who are 6 than you. An d you also have some friends, they are as 7 at sports as you. But there are also people around you who are not good at some things. 8 does your best friend look like? Do you both 9 to finish your homework at school? Do you both want to wear the same clothes every day? I think 10 some ways you are the same, but in many other ways you are different. So say loudly to the world, “ I am who I am—I’m unique!”‎ ‎( ) 1. A at B. as C. of D. from ‎( ) 2. A. better B. different ‎ C. smart D. good ‎( ) 3. A. Because B. So ‎ C. Although D. But ‎( ) 4. A. after B. than ‎ C. then D. in front of ‎( ) 5. A. her B. she C. hers D. she’s ‎ ‎( ) 6. A. smart B. smarter ‎ D. smartest D. outgoing ‎( ) 7. A. bad B. better ‎ C. well D. good ‎( ) 8. A. Where B. What ‎ C. How D. How often ‎( ) 9. A. like B. enjoy ‎ C. would like D. going ‎( ) 10. A. through B. by C. in D. on III. 交际运用（本题共5分，每小题1分）‎ 从方框中选择所给句子的相应答语。‎ A. He’s tall and thin.‎ B. You’re welcome.‎ C. No, you needn’t.‎ D. Sure, I’d like to.‎ E. Twice a week.‎ F. Enjoy yourselves.‎ ‎( ) 1. Thank you for helping me.‎ ‎( ) 2. How often do you visit your parents?‎ ‎( ) 3. Must I put on the jacket?‎ ‎( ) 4. How about having a cup of coffee?‎ ‎( ) 5. What does your father look like?‎ IV. 阅读理解（本题共20分，每小题2分）‎ A The sun says he is stronger(强) than the wind. The wind says he is stronger than the sun.‎ ‎  A man is walking down the street with a hat and coat on. The sun says, “Let’s see who can make the man take off his hat and coat. If you can do that, you are stronger than me. ”‎ ‎ Now the wind begins to blow ( 吹) . But the harder he blows , the tighter (更紧地) the man holds his hat and coat . The wind can’t make the man take off his hat and coat.‎ ‎  Now the sun tries. He shines( 照耀)brightly . Soon the man takes off his hat. Then the sun shines more brightly, and the man takes off his coat.‎ ‎  So the wind says, “That’s all. You are stronger than me.”‎ 根据短文内容，判断下列句子的正误。正确的填“T”，错误的填“F”。‎ ‎(     ) 1. The wind is stronger than the sun .‎ ‎(      ) 2. The sun and the wind see a man with a hat and coat.‎ ‎(  ) 3. The harder the wind blows, the tighter the man catches his hat and coat.‎ ‎(      ) 4. The sun begins to shine brightly, and the man takes off his hat and coat.‎ ‎(      ) 5. The sun and the wind can’t make the man take off his hat and coat.‎ B ‎  My good friend is Diana. She is a rich and proud girl. ‎ One day after school, I was waiting for Diana when Vivien came up to me. She gave me a biscuit. I accepted it. We talked and joked, and from then on, I began to spend more time with Vivien than with Diana. I felt a little uneasy. ‎ After a few days, I went to see Diana for some snacks when Vivien came and sat with me. She offered me a sandwich. She also offered one to Diana, but Diana refused it. She walked away. I was angry with Diana for being so rude（粗鲁的）. "Never mind," Vivien said, "I'm used to（习惯的） it." ‎ After school, I tried to catch up With Diana. While walking home, I tried to correct her attitude, but she would not listen to me. She said, “Go and join your 'dear' Vivien. I know you make new friends and forget the old ones." ‎ For the next few weeks, we did not talk to each other. Then, one day, Diana came to Vivien and me, saying, “I’m really sorry about what I did. I'm a spoiled (宠坏的) girl, but I also need good friends just like you. Would you please forgive (原谅) me?”Vivien and I looked at each other and smiled. From then on, Diana, Vivien and I are best friends. ‎ ‎( ) 6. The writer was angry with Diana ______. ‎ A. because she was too good for anyone ‎ B. when Diana refused Vivien's sandwich ‎ C. though she asked the writer to forgive ‎ D. so Diana walked away ‎ ‎( ) 7. The underline word “uneasy” means _______.‎ A. 不容易 B. 忐忑不安 ‎ C. 不简单 D. 想不开的 ‎( ) 8. Vivien's saying "I'm used to it" shows that ______. ‎ A. someone refused to give her things ‎ B. Vivien used to be rude to others ‎ C. she liked to be refused ‎ D. some people were rude to her before ‎ ‎( ) 9. Diana asked Vivien and the writer to forgive because ______. ‎ A. they didn't spend much time with her B. she realized she was wrong ‎ C. Vivien and the writer didn't talk to her ‎ D. she was a rich and proud girl ‎ ‎( ) 10. The reading is mainly about ______. ‎ A. the mistake among the three friends ‎ B. two best friends at a school ‎ C. three friends at a school ‎ D. the trouble between Diana and Vivien ‎ 第二部分 非选择题（共50分）‎ V. 任务型阅读(每小题2分，共10分)‎ Many teenagers feel that the most important people in their lives are their friends. ‎ ‎1) They believe that their family members, and in particular (尤其是) their _____, don't know them as well as their _____ do! In large families, it is quite normal (正常) for brothers and sisters to fight (打架) with each other and then they can only go to their friends for advice. ‎ ‎2) It is very important for a teenager to have a good friend or a circle (圈子) of friends. Even when they are not with their friends, they usually spend much time talking to each other on the phone. This communication is very important in children's growing up, because friends can discuss things that are difficult to discuss with their family members. ‎ However, parents often try to choose their children's friends for them. Some parents even stop their children from seeing their good friends. The question of "choice" is an interesting one. Have you ever thought of the following questions? ‎ Who choose (选择) your friends? Do you choose your friends or your friends choose you? Have you got a good friend your parents don't like? ‎ ‎1. 在1）句的空白处填入适当的词使句意完整、上下文通顺：‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ ‎2. 将2）句译成中文： ‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ ‎3. 回答问题：Who knows teenagers better according to the passage? ‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ ‎4. 在文中画出与下列句子意思相近的句子：It usually takes them lots of time to phone each other. ‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ ‎5. 找出文中或写出最能表达该短文主题的句子。 ‎ ‎____________________________________‎ VI. 情景交际（根据上下文，选择适当的句子完成对话。每小题2分，共10分）‎ A. Are you popular in your school?‎ B. What kind of friends do you like?‎ C. May I ask you some questions?‎ D. Of course.‎ E. How old are you?‎ F. Thanks for your answer.‎ G. Are you good at math?‎ A: Hi, Jim. 1 ‎ B: 2 ‎ A: Do you like to make friends?‎ B: Yes, I like to do it very much. Because I’m an outgoing boy.‎ A: 3 ‎ B: I don’t like to make friends who are different from me. And I like friends who are outgoing, interesting and very funny.‎ A: OK. I am the same as you. 4 ‎ B: Sure. You know, I am the vest player in our school basketball team.‎ A: Yes, and you are handsome, too. 5 ‎ B: You’re welcome.‎ ‎1._______ 2. _______ 3. ________‎ ‎4.________ 5. _________‎ VII. 根据首字母或汉语提示补全单词（每小题1分，共5分）‎ ‎1. Do you think it _______ (必要的) to have a friend who has cool clothes?‎ ‎2. The customs in Qingdao are ________ (相似的) to those in Yantai.‎ ‎3. Don’t worry. The doctor says there is nothing s_______.‎ ‎4. That’s exciting news! We w_____ the first prize.‎ ‎5. I’m too short. I can’t r_______ the apple on the tree.‎ VIII. 根据汉语补全句子，每空一词（每小题2分，共10分）‎ ‎1. 我认为我比杰克高多了。‎ I think I’m _______ ________ than Jack.‎ ‎2. 我们应该关系那些留守儿童。‎ We should _______ ______ the children without parents.‎ ‎3. 警察没用多长时间就查出了真相。‎ ‎ It didn’t take the police much time to ______ _______ the truth.‎ ‎4. 事实上，比赛我们输了。‎ ‎ ______ ______, we lost the game.‎ ‎5. 既然你已经来了，我们就开始吧。‎ ‎ As_______ _______ you come, let’s start.‎ IX. 书面表达（15分）‎ 如果你是李雷,请根据表格中提供的信息,写一篇短文介绍一下你和好朋友Tom的情况。要求：语句通顺，前后连贯；词数60-80。‎ 相同点 不同点 Tom Li Lei No.7 Middle School ‎15 years old ‎14 years old Class 2 Grade 8‎ be goo at be good at ‎ English ‎ Chinese like to help others likes basketball like soccer study hard likes green like red ‎________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ Unit 4 What’s the best movie theater?‎ 第一课时 Section A 1a-2d 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 戏院；剧场___________‎ ‎2. 票；入场券_______________‎ ‎3. 银幕；屏幕_____________‎ ‎4. 选择；挑选____________‎ ‎5. 记者___________‎ ‎6. comfortable_________‎ ‎7. cheaply___________‎ ‎8. close________‎ ‎9. DJ__________‎ ‎10. fresh__________‎ II. 短语互译 ‎1. 到目前为止___________‎ ‎2. 最好的声音______________‎ ‎3. 在城镇__________‎ ‎4. 欢迎到…_______________‎ ‎5. the biggest screen __________‎ ‎6. waiting time___________‎ ‎7. Thanks for _________‎ ‎8. No problem___________‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 城里最好的服装店是哪个？‎ What’s _______ _______ clothes store in town?‎ ‎2. 那是离我家最近的大超市。‎ That’s the supermarket that ______ _______ to my home.‎ ‎3. 在那个新电影院里，你可以很快就买到票。‎ You can buy _______ ______ in the new movie theater.‎ ‎4. —感谢你帮助我。‎ ‎—不客气。‎ ‎—_______ for _______ me. ‎ ‎—No_________.‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示补全单词 ‎1. Please look at the s_______, I think it’s the best in the movie theater.‎ ‎2. I’m f______ here. Could you tell me where the library is?‎ ‎3. The two T-shirts are both nice on me. I can’t c______ which one to buy.‎ ‎4. My father is a r________. He talks with all kinds of people every day.‎ ‎5. The more c_______ you work, the fewer mistakes you will make.‎ II. 用所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. Henry sings _______ (well) in our class.‎ ‎2. You can pay the tickets _________ (cheap) on weekends.‎ ‎3. Who is the ________ (short), Lily, Ann or Kate?‎ ‎4. You can sit _______ (comfortably) because they have the biggest seats.‎ ‎5. There’s something wrong with my old TV set. I’ll buy a new one with a _______ (big) screen.‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. Movie World is a good movie theater. (用in our city改写句子)‎ Movie World is _____ ______ movie theater in our city.‎ ‎2. He is taller than any other boy in his class. (改为同义句)‎ He is ________ ________ boy in his class.‎ ‎3. 970 AM is the most popular radio station in town. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎_______ ______ the most popular radio station in town?‎ ‎4. I think the restaurant is great. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎_______ do you ______ the restaurant?‎ ‎5. You can ask me some questions. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎________ I ask ______ ______ questions?‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. (湖北襄阳) —Who ran _____ of all the sports meeting?‎ ‎—Hector did, I think.‎ A. fast B. faster ‎ C. fastest D. more fast ‎( ) 2. Of all the streets in our city, Zhongshan Street is _______.‎ A. the busier B. the busyest C. busiest D. the busiest ‎( ) 3. (天津) Who listens ______, Tom, Jack or Bill?‎ A. the most carefully ‎ B. more carefully C. the most careful ‎ D. more careful ‎( ) 4. We’ll try to do ______ work with ______ time than before.‎ A. much; much B. little; little ‎ C. less; more D. more; less ‎( ) 5. Of the two T-shirts, I’ll choose the ______ one to save money for a book.‎ A. cheapest ‎ B. cheaper ‎ C. more expensive ‎ D. most expensive ‎( ) 6. —Which is _______ month of the year?‎ ‎—July, I think.‎ A. hot B. hoter ‎ C. hotter D. the hottest ‎( ) 7. (贵州黔西南) —Are you sure you can do well in the final exam?‎ ‎—________. I’ve got everything ready.‎ A. No, I’m not sure ‎ B. It’s hard to say C. Yes, I think so ‎ D. I hope that 创新提升 I. 情景交际 (填写适当的词补全对话，每空一词)‎ A: Do you want to go to the 1 ?‎ B: Sure.‎ A: OK, great. 2 the best movies theater to go to?‎ B: Town Cinema. It’s the 3 to home.‎ A: That’s right. We can walk there.‎ B: But they don’t show new movies.‎ A: Maybe not, but it’s the 4 . You know we don’t have much money.‎ B: OK. And it’s has the 5 waiting time. Let’s go.‎ 1. ‎______ 2. ______ 3. _______‎ ‎ 4. ________ 5._______‎ II. 用所给形容词的适当形式填空 long, many, little, tall, interesting ‎1. Tom is the ______ of the two boys.‎ ‎2. I think English is ___________ of all the subjects. I like it best.‎ ‎3. Do you have _____ books than Jim?‎ ‎4. The Yellow River is the second ________ river in China.‎ ‎5. He drank ______ juice than you.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (河南) My grandpa told a good story, but I told a ______ one.‎ A. good B. better ‎ C. best D. worse ‎( ) 2. (山东德州) I carried the bowl with both hands ______, so that I wouldn’t break it.‎ A. carefully B. happily ‎ C. quickly D. carelessly ‎( ) 3. (河北) Water is the cheapest drink. And it’s also ________.‎ A. healthier B. healthiest ‎ C. the healthier D. the healthiest ‎( ) 4. (山西) —Have you watched A bite of China recently? ‎ ‎—Of course. I do believe Chinese food is ______ in the world.‎ A. the most delicious ‎ B. more delicious C. delicious 第二课时 Grammar Focus-3c 知识清单 I. 词汇、短语互译 ‎1. 最差的___________‎ ‎2. 接待；服务____________‎ ‎3. 早(或午、晚)餐____________‎ ‎4. 相当；十分____________‎ ‎5.the worst music__________‎ ‎6. how far_________‎ ‎7. not…at all___________‎ ‎8. much better_____________‎ II. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 到目前为止你最喜欢的歌曲是什么？‎ What’s your favorite song ______ _______?‎ ‎2. 梦想服装店有全镇最差的衣服。‎ Dream Clothes has ________ _________ clothes in town.‎ ‎3. —图书馆离你家多远？‎ ‎—步行大约10分钟。‎ ‎—_______ ________ is the library from your home? ‎ ‎— About 10 minutes on foot.‎ ‎4. 我觉得能和你一起拍照真是十分幸运。‎ I fell ______ _______ to take photos with you.‎ ‎5. 在我家附近的餐馆服务很好。‎ The ______ of the restaurant ______ ______ my home is very good.‎ III. 补全对话, 每空一词 A: Hello! I’m a reporter. ______ I ask you some questions?‎ B: OK.‎ A: How do you _______ the Dream Clothes?‎ B: It’s ________. We all like it.‎ A: _______ do you think so?‎ B: It has the ______ service in our town.‎ A: What ______ Blue Moon?‎ B: That’s the ______. Its clothes are too expensive and the service is also terrible. ‎ 基础闯关 I. 用所给单词的正确形式填空 ‎1. Jason’s is the ______ (good) store people like to go.‎ ‎2. Screen City has _________ (comfort) seats of the three.‎ ‎3. I think 107FM is much _______ (bad) than the other stations in our city.‎ ‎4. Who is the _______ (fun) actor in the play?‎ ‎5. Last night, we ______ (go) to movies with our parents.‎ II. 选择方框内的单词并用其适当形式完成下面的句子（有多余选项）‎ shop, health, hour, many, monkey, cheap ‎1. How many ______ do you sleep every night?‎ ‎2. Let’s go ______ now.‎ ‎3. There are ________ girl students in Class 2 than in Class 1.‎ ‎4. His father takes exercise every day, so he is very ________ .‎ ‎5. Look! A tiger is running after some _______. ‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. He knows a little about Chinese. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎_______ ________ _______ he know about Chinese?‎ ‎2. I think Eliza is the best student in our class. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎_______ ______ you think is the best student in our class?‎ ‎3. Town Cinema has the friendliest service. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎_______ Town Cinema _______ the friendliest service?‎ ‎4. The supermarket is about ten minutes’ walk from my home. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎_______ _______ is the supermarket from your home?‎ ‎5. She is the most careful in her class. (改为同义句)‎ She is _______ ______ ______ any other student in her class.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. —Hi！Lisa! Are you feeling better today? ‎ ‎—No. I am feeling even_______.‎ A. good B. bad ‎ C. well D. worse ‎( ) 2. Of the three cinemas, you can buy movie tickets_______ at Town Cinema.‎ A. more quickly B. the most quickly C. quicker D. quickly ‎( ) 3. (河北) Sometimes walking is even _______ than driving during the busy traffic time.‎ A. fast B. faster ‎ C. slow D. slower ‎( ) 4. Nobody is as ______ as Sandy, so we all like make friends with her.‎ A. politely B. carefully ‎ C. likely D. friendly ‎( ) 5. (上海) Pudong International Airport is one of _______ airports in the world.‎ A. big B. bigger ‎ C. biggest D. biggest ‎( ) 6. (天津) Mr. Smith thinks running is _______ than gymnastics.‎ A. very popular ‎ B. more popular ‎ C. most popular ‎ D. the most popular 创新提升 根据上下文，在空中填写合适的单词，使文章完整通顺。‎ The most important drink is water．Not many people understand this but it is quite true．People can 1 for a long time without food，but they will die if two or three days 2 water．In 3 weather，many people do not drink 4 water，because they don’t know how much water they 5 ． After taking exercise，people need more 6 ．The water in the man’s body is 7 more than other matters(物质)．We’d 8 have enough water，or we may get i11．‎ ‎ Water is necessary to all the living things．“There will be no 9 if there is no water·”‎ ‎ So we must save water and don’t 10 water.‎ ‎1.___________ 2.__________ 3.__________ 4.____________5.__________6.___________7.__________ 8.___________ 9.___________ 10.___________‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (浙江宁波) —I really like to watch the TV program I AM A SINGER.‎ ‎—Me, too. It’s one of the _____ TV programs I’ve ever seen.‎ A. least boring B. least interesting C. most boring D. most interesting ‎( ) 2. (广东) Eighteen kids died in the school bus accident in Gansu Province. It’s ______ one that I have ever head of.‎ A. a very serious ‎ B. a more serious ‎ C. the most serious ‎ D. the least serious ‎( ) 3. (云南昆明) The water in the lakes and rivers in Yunnan became _______ because of the dry weather.‎ A. fewer and fewer ‎ B. more and more C. less and less ‎ D. little and little ‎( ) 4. (北京) Debbie is growing fast. She is even _____ than her mother.‎ A. tall B. taller ‎ C. tallest D. the tallest ‎( ) 5. (内蒙古呼和浩特) I know you are shorter than your brothers, but you run _____.‎ A. more faster B. fastest C. more fast D. fast 第三课时 Section B 1a-2e 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 天资；天赋____________‎ ‎2. 作用；职能____________‎ ‎3. 贫穷的___________‎ ‎4. 严重地______________‎ ‎5. 获胜者____________‎ ‎6. 魔术师________________‎ ‎7. creative ____________‎ ‎8. prize___________‎ ‎9. beautifully ______________‎ ‎10. performer____________‎ ‎11. example_____________‎ ‎12. everybody___________‎ II. 短语互译 ‎1. 编造___________‎ ‎2. 各种各样的____________‎ ‎3. 发挥作用；用影响___________‎ ‎4. 是……的职责___________‎ ‎5. for example____________‎ ‎6.have…in common_____________‎ ‎7. take… seriously _____________‎ ‎8. talent show_____________‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 请认真对待这份工作，否则你的妈妈会生气的。‎ Please _______ the job ______, or your mother will be angry.‎ ‎2. 在2014年我们看到了各种各样的电影。‎ We watched ______ _______ ______ movies in 2014.‎ ‎3. 你必须努力学习才能实现梦想。‎ ‎ You must work hard and your dreams will ______ _______.‎ ‎4. 这对双胞胎有很多共同之处。‎ ‎ The twins have many things _______ ________.‎ ‎5. 她被邀请扮演电视剧中的一个角色。‎ ‎ She was invited to ______ ______ ______ in the TV play.‎ IV. 根据括号内提示翻译句子 ‎1. 有些人确实有才赋。(truly; talented)‎ ‎_______________________.‎ ‎2. 做决定是你的职责。( be up to)‎ ‎_______________________.‎ ‎3. 你觉得这些表演怎么样？(think of)‎ ‎_______________________?‎ ‎4. 阅读是学好英语的一种方法。( a way to)‎ ‎_______________________.‎ ‎5. 很多人不喜欢才艺表演节目。(don’t like; talent show)‎ ‎_______________________.‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示完成单词 ‎1. I like many sports, for e_______ , basketball, soccer, tennis and so on.‎ ‎2. Please g_____ me some information about Zhang Jie. I like his songs.‎ ‎3. Liu Qian is a m_______, and he is popular in China.‎ ‎4. Though the man is p______, he is very happy.‎ ‎5. Many people thought this was a c_______ and useful invention(发明).‎ II. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. Liu Mei _____ (give) us many beautiful toys yesterday.‎ ‎2. Xiao Shenyang performs very well. He is a good _________ (perform)‎ ‎3. He is ______ (good) football player of the three.‎ ‎4. My mother made me ______ (wait) for her at the gate.‎ ‎5. Watch me ______ ( do ) it and then try to copy what I do.‎ III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 你认为班里谁唱歌最好？‎ Who _____ ______ _____ sings best in your class?‎ ‎2. 每个人都想知道怎样把它做好。‎ ‎_______ _______ to know how to do it well.‎ ‎3. 有些欧洲语言来自于拉丁语，例如法语和西班牙语。‎ ‎ Some of the European languages come from Latin, ______ _______ French and Spanish.‎ ‎4. 我只是开玩笑，但是他却当真了。‎ ‎ I just joked, but he _____ it ________.‎ ‎5. 我决定周游世界。‎ ‎ I decide to travel _______ the ________.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. It’s all ______ you whether you go or not.‎ A. to up B. up with ‎ C. up to D. up for ‎( ) 2. (江苏淮安) Of all the subjects, English is _______ for me.‎ A. interesting ‎ B. more interesting C. the most interesting ‎ D. much more interesting ‎( ) 3. —What do you think of the lecture of Li Yang’s Crazy English? ‎ ‎— I think it’s ________, but someone thinks it’s much too______.‎ A. creative enough; bored ‎ B. enough creative; boring ‎ C. creative enough; boring ‎ D. enough creative; bored ‎( ) 4. _____ is very important for us to learn more knowledge.‎ A. It B. That ‎ C. This D. All ‎( ) 5. ( 湖北武汉) —Morning, class. Is _______ here? ‎ ‎—No, sir. Tom is absent.‎ A. anybody B. everybody ‎ C. nobody D. somebody ‎( ) 6. (四川遂宁) If we Chinese work hard together, China Dream will _______.‎ A. come out B. come true ‎ C. achieve V. 句型转换 ‎1. Tina was the best performer. ( 对划线部分提问) ‎ ‎______ was the best performer?‎ ‎2. Jim is taller than the other two. (改为同义句) ‎ ‎ Jim is ______ ______ of the three.‎ ‎3. I like him because he is the greatest player in the world. ( 对划线部分提问) ‎ ‎ ______ ______ you like him?‎ ‎4. The lives of the actors are made up. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ ______ the lives of the actors ______ up?‎ ‎5. My father gave me a bike as my birthday present. (改为同义句)‎ ‎ My father ______ a bike _____ me as my birthday present.‎ 创新提升 阅读理解 Many people think Xiao Shenyang is the funniest actor. As we know, Xiao Shenyang did a wonderful job in the CCTV Spring Festival Gala in 2009. Now more and more people become his fans. But how much do you know about him? Do you like him?‎ His nickname(昵称) is Xiao Shenyang. His real name is Shen He. He is from Liaoning. He was born in 1981 and he is 32 years old now. He is 174cm tall. He is good at acting and singing. I like him very much because of his funny-looking. He can make people laugh all the time. ‎ Xiao Shenyang was born in a poor family. During his school life, he was very active in many activities. He looks like a simple(简单的) man. He is good at errenzhuan. He learns acting from Zhao Benshan. He is an exciting, interesting and humorous(幽默的) actor and he is one of Zhao Benshan’s favorite students.‎ ‎( ) 1. Many people know Xiao Shenyang in _____________.‎ A. 2008 B. 2009 C. 2010 D. 2011‎ ‎( ) 2. Which of the following is Xiao Shenyang good at?‎ ‎ A. Acting B. Singing C. Acting and singing D. Writing ‎( ) 3. Was Xiao Shenyang born in a rich family?‎ ‎ A. Yes, he is B. Yes, he was C. No, he isn’t D. No, he wasn’t ‎( ) 4. Why does the writer like him very much? Because ____________‎ ‎ A. he has funny-looking B. he is beautiful ‎ C. he can act D. he can sing ‎( ) 5. Which of the following is TRUE?‎ A. His real name is Xiao Shenyang.‎ B. He can make people cry all the time.‎ C. He is not good at errenzhuan.‎ D. Zhao Benshan is Xiao Shenyang’s teacher.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (福建莆田) —Steven is good at writing. ‎ ‎—So he is. He writes ____ than us.‎ A. most carefully ‎ B. more carefully C. less carefully ‎( ) 2. (河北) Of all the subjects, chemistry seems to be ______ for me.‎ A. difficult ‎ B. too difficult ‎ C. more difficult ‎ D. the most difficult ‎( ) 3. (江苏苏州) —The picture is, I have to say, not a bit beautiful.‎ ‎—Why? It’s _____ than the pictures I have ever seen.‎ A. far more beautiful B. much less beautiful C. no more beautiful D. any less beautiful ‎( ) 4. (上海) Air pollution has become _____ than before. We must do something to stop it.‎ A. serious B. more serious C. most serious D. the most serious ‎( ) 5. (湖北随州) —_____ will Mrs. Lin go to Canada? ‎ ‎— To see her daughter there.‎ A. How B. When ‎ C. Why D. What 第四课时 Section B 3a-Self Check 知识清单 I. 词汇、短语互译 ‎1. 人多的；拥挤的___________‎ ‎2. 完成；结束__________‎ ‎3. 安静地___________‎ ‎4. the best place ______________‎ ‎5. one of…____________‎ ‎6. a plate of ___________‎ ‎7. take walks____________‎ II. 选词填空。（选择方框中的词并用其适当形式填空）‎ quietly, boring, friendly, comfortable, bad ‎1. I think watching TV is the _______ thing at home.‎ ‎2. Miss Zhang is one of the ________ teachers, all the kid like her.‎ ‎3. He is a _______ and shy boy. He hardly talks with others.‎ ‎4. I did ______ than you, so you are the winner.‎ ‎5. Look! The cat is lying on the sofa ________.‎ III.根据汉语补全句子 ‎1. 我几乎没有钱了，因此我想买最便宜的衣服。‎ ‎ I have little money. So I want to buy _____ _______ clothes.‎ ‎2. 谢谢你告诉我去邮局的路。‎ ‎ ______ _______ _______ me the way to the post office.‎ ‎3. 这个新超市总是挤满了人。‎ ‎ The new supermarket is always _________.‎ ‎4. 格林公园是散步的最好的地方。‎ ‎ Green Park is the ______ ______ ______ take walks.‎ ‎5. 第一中学是我们城市最漂亮的学校之一。‎ ‎ No. 1 Middle School is ______ _____ the most beautiful ______ in our city.‎ 基础闯关 I. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. The boy had two ______ ( meal) yesterday, so he is very hungry.‎ ‎2. Jim wants to be a ______ ( report) when he grows up.‎ ‎3. He is listening to EXO’s songs ________ (careful).‎ ‎4. Liu Shishi is a famous actor. And she _____(act) many roles so far.‎ ‎5. English is ______ (important) than math. So we must study it hard.‎ II. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. —_____ do you _____ of the sports shows? ‎ ‎—They’re interesting.‎ A. How; think B. How; about C. What; like D. What; think ‎( ) 2. My sister can _______ pop music very well.‎ A. play a B. play the piece ‎ C. play a piece of D. play a piece ‎( ) 3. (山东泰安) —How are you today, Mike?‎ ‎—I’m _____ now. I don’t think this medicine is good for me.‎ A. badly B. better ‎ C. well D. worse ‎( ) 4. —Why do you like Gold Theater best?‎ ‎—Because it has the _____ seats.‎ A. less comfortable ‎ B. more comfortable C. much comfortable ‎ D. most comfortable ‎( ) 5. (福建福州) Shu-Hao Lin is now one of _______ basketball players in the NBA.‎ A. popular ‎ B. more popular ‎ C. the most popular ‎( ) 6. The supermarket is the _______ my home. I usually do some shopping in it.‎ A closest B. farthest ‎ C. closest to D. near III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 图书馆是适合阅读的最好的地方。‎ The library is the ______ ______ to read.‎ ‎2. 这家商店经常播放最舒服的音乐。‎ ‎ This shop often ______ ______ _______ ________ music.‎ ‎3. 每个人都在努力寻找幸福。‎ ‎ Everyone_____to____ ____happiness.‎ 创新提升 I. 完形填空 Many people like watching TV, watching TV is ____1_____of the most important activities of the day. TV brings the outside world ____2_____ to people’s houses. Some people ___3______ the world is getting smaller than_____4____.‎ What’s happening in other countries? ___5______ do people live in faraway(遥远的) places? Is there a good sports game somewhere? What’s life in the deepest part of the sea? If you want to ____6____these and other things, just turn on the TV and ____7____ it. Of course people can also learn through listening to the ___8____, but TV can help them learn better and more easily. Why? Because they can hear and watch, ___9_____. TV can give us new ____10______. It’s an interesting thing.‎ ‎( ) 1. A. some B. any ‎ C. a D. one ‎( ) 2. A. farther B. closer C. closest D. far ‎( ) 3. A. say B. speak ‎ C. talk D. tell ‎( ) 4. A. ago B. before ‎ C. after D. later ‎( ) 5. A. Why B. When ‎ C. How D. Where ‎( ) 6. A. look B. know C. study D. see ‎( ) 7. A. watch B. see C. look D. look for ‎( ) 8. A. TV B. radio ‎ C. film D. newspaper ‎( ) 9. A. too B. either ‎ C. neither D. again ‎( ) 10.A. paper B. information ‎ C. informations D. books II. 阅读理解 In England， everybody knows Jamie Oliver. He has his own TV programs. La these programs， he tells people how to cook healthy food. Everyone likes Jamie’s programs because his food is easy to make.‎ Jamie wants people to eat healthily. In some schools in England， the food at lunch time wasn’t healthy. One day， Jamie went to a school to make a TV program about healthy diet. He cooked the food with lots of fruit and vegetables. At first the children didn’t want to eat because they didn’t like fruit or vegetables. But after they tasted the food， they started to enjoy it.‎ Now the food for children in schools has become much healthier.‎ ‎( ) 1. People like Jamie’s TV programs about food because his food_______.‎ ‎　　 A. is always healthy ‎　　 B. is easy to make ‎　　 C. is good for kids ‎( ) 2. One day， Jamie visited a school and_______.‎ ‎　　 A. surveyed the students’ diet ‎　　 B. showed the students how to cook ‎　　 C. made a program about healthy food ‎( ) 3. From the passage we leant that Jamie is a famous_______.‎ ‎　　 A. TV host 　‎ B. film actor 　‎ C. school teacher 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (内蒙古呼和浩特) —How far is it from Tianjin to Changsha?‎ ‎—It’s a ______ flight from Tianjin to Changsha.‎ A. 2-hour-long B. 2-hours-long C 2 hours’ long D. 2 hour long ‎( ) 2. ( 安徽) We lost the match because they had ______ players. They had eleven and we had only nine!‎ A. stronger B. younger ‎ C. fewer D. more ‎( ) 3. (天津) Mo Yan is one of _______ writers in the world.‎ A. famous B. more famous ‎ C. most famous D. the most famous Unit 4 单元测试卷 第一部分 选择题（共50分）‎ I. 单项选择（本题共15分， 每小题1分）‎ ‎( ) 1. —I’m sorry I’m calling you so late.‎ ‎—_______.‎ A. No problem B. You’re welcome C. That’s okay D. I’m all right ‎( ) 2. Tom is better than other students at ______ football.‎ A. played B. to play ‎ C. play D. playing ‎( ) 3. The twins both like sports and music. They have some things _____ common.‎ A. with B. at C. for D. in ‎( ) 4. The People’s Park is the best place ______ on weekends in Xiaogan.‎ A. to go B. to go to ‎ C. going D. going to ‎ ‎( ) 5. Simon spent _______ money on CDs of all, but he had _____ CDs.‎ A. the least; the most ‎ B. the most; the most C. the fewest; the least ‎ D. the fewest; the most ‎( ) 6. Mum, I’m feeling even _______ .‎ A. bad B. worse ‎ C. worst D. the worst ‎( ) 7. —______ is the street crowded with so many people?‎ ‎—Because they are waiting to watch the boat races.‎ A. Why B. Where ‎ C. How D. Who ‎( ) 8. —Laura enjoys _____ story books.‎ ‎—Me, too.‎ A. reading B. read ‎ C. to read D. reads ‎( ) 9. That singer is _________.‎ A. more popular and more popular B. more popular and popular C. popular and more popular ‎ D. more and more popular ‎( ) 10. —There are ______ seats in Town Cinema.‎ ‎—Yes, you can sit there ________.‎ A. comfortable; comfortable B. comfortably; comfortably C. comfortably; comfortable D. comfortable; comfortably ‎( ) 11. In our class, Grace is the _______. She always makes everybody laugh.‎ A. tallest B. youngest ‎ C. quietest D. funniest ‎( ) 12. Talent shows just give people a way to make their dreams .‎ A come true B to come true C come back D to come back ‎( ) 13. I think Andy Liu is one of the ______ movie stars in China. ‎ A. popular B. popularity C. more popular D. most popular ‎ ‎( ) 14. Bill, __________ watch TV on weekdays.‎ ‎ A. not try to B. try not to ‎ C. don’t try D. try not ‎( ) 15. He _________an interesting story and all of us liked it.‎ ‎ A. made B. make up ‎ C. made of D. made up II. 完形填空（本题共10分，每小题1分）‎ Sanya, Harbin and Beijing are three __1__in China, and they are in different places. They are quite __2__ from each other. Sanya is in Hainan Province and it’s in the __3__ place of China. Even in winter, it’s about 15℃ in the daytime. Harbin is in the __4__of China. It’s cold in __5__, sometimes -30℃. There is an Ice and Snow Festival that lasts six __6__. Beijing is not very cold I winter. It’s about -5℃. It __7_ rains or snows. The __8_ of hotel rooms are quite different, too. In Beijing, hotel usually cut __9__ prices in winter. About 200 yuan a night is __10__. ‎ ‎( ) 1. A city B. cities ‎ C. country D. countries ‎( ) 2.A. like B. same ‎ C. far D. difficult ‎( ) 3. A. cold B . coldest C. warm D. warmest ‎( ) 4. A. north B. south C. east D. west ‎( ) 5. A. spring B. summer ‎ C. autumn D. winter ‎ ‎( ) 6. A. days B. weeks ‎ C. months D. years ‎ ‎( ) 7. A. does B. seldom ‎ C. always D. never ‎( ) 8. A. room B. food ‎ C. beds D. prices ‎( ) 9. A. its B. their ‎ C. it’s D. theirs ‎( ) 10. A. cheap B. expensive C. enough D. dear III. 情景交际（根据上下文，选择适当的句子完成对话。每小题2分，共10分）‎ A. Because it has the best clothing. ‎ B. It has the worst music. ‎ C. What's the best clothing store? ‎ D. Because it has the most interesting music. ‎ E. But easy Listening 979 is the most popular. ‎ F. Just listen to their commercials. ‎ G. What's the best radio station? ‎ Reporter: Hi, I'm doing a survey for the Bedford Daily News. 1 ‎ Boy: I guess Jammin 107 FM is the best.‎ Reporter: Why? ‎ Boy: 2 It's much better than the other stations in town. ‎ Reporter: What about the other radio stations? ‎ Boy: Well, I think Oldies 102.1 FM is very bad. 3 ‎ Reporter: I heard that. 4 ‎ Boy: Not for me. ‎ Reporter: Why not? ‎ Boy: 5 They're worse than the commercials of All Talk 970 AM! ‎ ‎1. ______ 2. ________ 3. ________‎ ‎4. ______ 5. _________‎ IV. 阅读理解（本题共20分，每小题2分）‎ A ‎ Tom, Jean, Jack and Lucy are talking about the movie theaters in the city. ‎ My name’s Tom. I go to the Movie Palace twice a month. It’s about two kilometers from my home. The service is good. But the price of a ticket is a little expensive. I never go to Moon Cinema. It’s about 10 kilometers from my home.‎ I’m Jean. I go to Moon Cinema more often. There are often new movies on show and the screens are big. Most importantly, the price is cheaper. It’s always half price for students, about 30 yuan. I go there once a week.‎ I’m Jack. I live about 5 kilometers from Moon Cinema and 8 kilometers from Movie Palace. I think the seats in Moon Cinema are hard and the music is too loud. So I prefer to go to Movie Palace. I go to Movie Palace once a month. ‎ I’m Lucy. I prefer to go to Movie Palace. It’s in the center of the city and is very modern. I like shopping and there are some shopping centers around. I go there once a month.‎ ‎( ) 1. Who go to a cinema once a month? ‎ ‎ A. Tom and Jean. B. Jean and Jack. ‎ C. Jack and Lucy. D. Lucy and Tom. ‎ ‎( ) 2. How much is a full-price ticket in Moon Cinema? ‎ ‎ A. 50 yuan. B. 100 yuan. ‎ C. 30 yuan. D. 60 yuan. ‎ ‎( ) 3. Why does Tom never go to Moon Cinema? ‎ A. The ticket is expensive. ‎ B. The seats are hard. ‎ ‎ C. The screens are big. D. It’s far from his home. ‎ ‎( ) 4. Jack’s home is ___________ kilometers farther from Movie Palace than Tom’s. ‎ ‎ A. 3 B. 5 C. 6 D. 10‎ ‎( ) 5. Which of the following is NOT true? ‎ ‎ A. Tom thinks the service in Movie Palace is good. ‎ B. Jean and Jack prefer Movie Palace to Moon Cinema. ‎ C. Lucy likes Movie Palace because she can go shopping.‎ D. Movie Palace is in the middle of the city.‎ B Betty and I are best friends. Our birthdays are on the same day, so every year we have a birthday party together. But this year we had a costume party instead.‎ While we were writing the invitations, my mom came in and asked, “Nancy, what about inviting John?” John had been in our class for only a few months, but he was already getting better grades in math than anyone else in our class. “Mom, he wears the same pants to school every day. How could he even afford a costume?” Mom said nothing.‎ The next day, mom gave me an envelope(信封) with a shopping card in it. “I thought it would be nice for you to give this to John.” Mom said. But how? We didn’t want to make John embarrassed. We discussed it for a long time. Finally, Betty and I had a good idea.‎ On the day of our party, John arrived, in an old sheet(床单)，but still in the same brown pants as usual. Before eating the birthday cake, Betty said in a loud voice, “Now it’s time for the great prize game.” It was a math game. None of us were surprised when John gave the right answer first and walked off with the envelope.‎ Everything went well as we planned. John wore a new pair of pants and a new shirt the next week. He felt happy. So did we.‎ ‎( ) 6. Nancy and Betty are ______.‎ A. best friends B. cousins C. sisters D. brother and sister ‎( ) 7. John did best in ______ of all the class.‎ A. English B. games C. math D. science ‎( ) 8. ______ had the idea of playing a math game.‎ A. Nancy’s mother B. Nancy C. Betty D. Betty and Nancy ‎( ) 9. John got ______ as the prize for the math game.‎ A. an envelope ‎ B. a shopping card C. a birthday cake ‎ D. a new pair of pants ‎( ) 10. Betty, Nancy and John all felt ______ in the end.‎ A. happy B. embarrassed C. surprised D. sad 第二部分 非选择题（共50分）‎ V. 任务型阅读(每小题2分，共10分)‎ There are many TV programs on Chinese dishes, but few are like A Bite of China(舌尖上的中国).The seven-part documentary(记录影片) tells us something interesting about what Chinese eat in different cultures and places.‎ The different kinds of foods on TV are from sixty different places. You can see so much delicious food which can catch your eyes and stomachs. And you can also learn how to make the food. That’s why the program becomes so popular.‎ What’s more, the program is not only about food. There are also many great stories between food and people. Liu Wen, a worker of CCTV-9, says the stories also show social changes.‎ ‎“As the program works as a window, the documentary wants to help people around the world know more about Chinese dishes and its cultures,” he says.‎ You can see the documentary on CCTV-1 or listen to it on CCTV-9 if you like it.‎ ‎(1-3简略回答问题；4将划线部分翻译为汉语；5找出并写下本文的主旨句)‎ ‎1. Does the TV program A Bite of China have seven parts?‎ ‎ .‎ ‎2. How many places are the different kinds of food from in the TV program?‎ ‎ .‎ ‎3. What can people know more about after watching the TV program?‎ ‎ .‎ ‎4._______________________‎ ‎5. _____________________‎ VI. 用所给词的适当形式填空（每小题1分，共5分）‎ ‎1. The radio station has the _____ (bad) music in the city.‎ ‎2. Han Li had the ______ (funny) act in the talent show.‎ ‎3. Linda is the big______ (win) of the car race.‎ ‎4. Mr. Chan told us to write as ______ (care) as we could.‎ ‎5. Does Gold Theatre have _______ (comfort) seats of the five in your city?‎ VII. 根据汉语补全句子，每空一词（每小题2分，共10分）‎ ‎1. 她因唱歌好而获奖。‎ She _______ the ______ for singing well.‎ ‎2. 我是一名记者。你能回答我的问题吗？‎ I’m a _________. Can you ________ my questions?‎ ‎3. 才艺表演变得越来越受欢迎了。‎ ‎ Talent shows are getting _______ _______ more popular.‎ ‎4. 这件事在发展生产中起到了重要的作用。‎ ‎ This thing ______ an important _______ in developing production.‎ ‎5. 因为认真对待工作，他获得了最佳员工奖。‎ ‎ Because of ______ his job ______, he won the prize of the best worker. ‎ VIII. 书面表达（20分）‎ Ted对学校附近的三家快餐店进行了调查列表如下。假设你是Ted，请用所学过的比较级或最高级的句型描述表格中的内容。词数80左右。‎ Ted dislike like like best Restaurants Ham Billy Pizza Price ‎$1.5/hamburger ‎$2/hamburger ‎$10/hamburger Quality better good best Service Not friendly friendly friendlier ‎_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ Unit 5 Do you want to watch a game show?‎ 第一课时 Section A 1a-2d 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 新闻；新闻节目_______________‎ ‎2. 介意；对（某事）烦恼___________‎ ‎3. 忍受；站立___________‎ ‎4. 计划；打算______________‎ ‎5. 发生；出现____________‎ ‎6. 笑话；玩笑______________‎ ‎7. sitcom___________‎ ‎8. educational ________________‎ ‎9. discussion_______________‎ ‎10. expect___________‎ II. 短语互译 ‎1. 查明；弄清___________‎ ‎2. 肥皂剧____________‎ ‎3. 谈话节目____________‎ ‎4. 才艺秀___________‎ ‎5. can’t stand____________‎ ‎6. sports show__________‎ ‎7. don’t mind_____________‎ ‎8. learn from__________‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 我计划假期去学习英语。‎ I ______ _____ learn English on my vacation.‎ ‎2. —你觉得这个故事怎么样？‎ ‎—我觉得无法忍受。‎ ‎—______ do you ______ ______ the story?‎ ‎—I ______ _____ it.‎ ‎3. 我妈妈不喜欢谈话类节目。‎ My mother ______ like ______ _______.‎ ‎4. —你想看新闻吗？‎ ‎—不，不想。‎ ‎—Do you want to ______ the _____?‎ ‎—No, I ______.‎ ‎5. 我喜欢在小组里学习，那样我们可以互相学习。‎ I like study in groups. We can _____ ______ each other.‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示补全单词 ‎1. I h______ that the children in the poor area can get many people’s help.‎ ‎2. I e______ the school trip. That must be very interesting.‎ ‎3. That’s exciting n______. We all jump up and down.‎ ‎4. Would you m_____ help me watch the dishes?‎ ‎5. I think this show is more e______ than that one. It’s good for studying.‎ II. 用所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. Simon’s mother ______ (love) soap operas very much.‎ ‎2. They __________ (not like) watching TV shows.‎ ‎3. I don’t mind _______ (open) the window.‎ ‎4. Look! What is _______ (happen) there? Let’s go and see.‎ ‎5. I plan _______(have) a birthday party for my best friend.‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. I like cooking. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎________ _______ you _________ ______ cooking?‎ ‎2. He plans to go to movies tomorrow. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ does he _____ to _____ tomorrow?‎ ‎3. Nick likes to watch game shows. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ _____ Nick _____ to watch game shows?‎ ‎4. What do you think of Chinese food? (改为同义句)‎ ‎ ______ do you _____ Chinese food?‎ ‎5. Mike loves sitcoms because he thinks they’re funny. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ does Mike ______ sitcoms?‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. (江苏苏州) — I hear you’ve got a new iPhone 4s. ______ I have a look?‎ ‎—Yes, certainly.‎ A. May B. Do ‎ C. Shall D. Should ‎( ) 2. —_____ does she think of English today?‎ ‎—She loves it.‎ A. How B. What ‎ C. Why D. When ‎( ) 3. The children hope ____________‎ everything is fine.‎ A. see B. seeing ‎ C. to see D. saw ‎( ) 4. —They plan________ Yunnan on National Day of 2015.‎ ‎—Sounds great!‎ A. go to B. to go to ‎ C. to go D. going to ‎ ‎( ) 5. (四川绵阳) Excuse me, would you mind _____ your voices down, please?‎ A. to keep B. keeping ‎ C. keep D. kept ‎( ) 6. (山东青岛) —You look sad. What has happened? ‎ ‎—Everyone ______ us to win the match, but we lost.‎ A. expects B. expected ‎ C. hopes D. hoped ‎( ) 7. —Can you _____ the bad weather?‎ ‎—No, I can’t. It’s too terrible.‎ A. like B. love ‎ C. stand D. mind 创新提升 I. 情景交际 (填写适当的词补全对话，每空一词)‎ A: What do you 1 of soap operas?‎ B: I don’t like them.‎ A: What do you think of game shows?‎ B: I 2 them. So I watch them every day.‎ A: How about 3 ?‎ B: Sitcoms? Mmm. I don’t 4 them.‎ A: And talk shows?‎ B: Oh, I can’t 5 them. I never watch them.‎ ‎1. ________ 2. ________ 3. ________‎ ‎4. _______ 5. ________‎ II. 选择合适的单词或短语并用其适当形式填空 game show, like, find out, discuss, happen ‎1. Please ______ when Mrs. Green will go to Beijing.‎ ‎2. What ______ to you? Why were you so sad?‎ ‎3. What do you think of _______?‎ ‎4. The teacher asked us to have a _______ in our group.‎ ‎5. My father _______ playing sports, but he doesn’t like watch it on TV.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (湖南娄底) —Would you mind ____ the window? It’s very hot. ‎ ‎—No, not at all.‎ A. open B. to open C. opening ‎( ) 2. (新疆阜康) —Is Mr. Brown driving here?‎ ‎—I’m not sure. He ____ come by train.‎ A. may B. shall ‎ C. need D. must ‎( ) 3. (贵州黔西南) —What do you think of Chinese food?‎ ‎—It’s very delicious.‎ A. What do you like B. How do you like C. Do you like D. Do you think of ‎( ) 4. (山东泰安) —Jack, could you help me _____ when the plane will take off on the Internet?‎ ‎—I’m sorry. My computer doesn’t work.‎ A. get out B. look out ‎ C. take out D. find out 第二课时 Grammar Focus-3c 知识清单 I. 词汇、短语互译 ‎1. 喜剧；喜剧片_________‎ ‎2. 希望___________‎ ‎3. tonight____________‎ ‎4. watch a movie____________‎ ‎5. go on__________‎ II. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 刘静期望成为像李娜一样的运动员。‎ Liu Jing ______ _______ _______ a player like Li Na.‎ ‎2. 这个小男孩不能忍受西餐。‎ The little boy _______ ________ western food.‎ ‎3. 你今天晚上计划看什么（节目）？‎ What do you ________ ________ _______ on TV tonight?‎ ‎4. 因为我希望弄清世界各地在发生着什么。‎ Because I _______ _______ _______ ______ what’s going on around the world.‎ ‎5. 从新闻节目中你能学到什么？‎ ‎ What can you ______ _______ the news?‎ III. 补全对话, 每空一词 A: What are you ______?‎ B: Lost In Thailand(《泰囧》). ‎ A: Do you like _______?‎ B: Yes, I love comedies. What _______ you？‎ A: Me too. What do you _______ of Wang Baoqiang in this movie?‎ B: I think he is so ______ that I laugh the whole movie.‎ A: That’s right. Let’s watch it together.‎ 基础闯关 I. 用所给单词的正确形式填空 ‎1. Thank you very much for _____ (give) me t he nice toy.‎ ‎2. What ______ Liu Peng____ (think) of Weekend Talk?‎ ‎3. I think _______ (swim) is good for boys.‎ ‎4. What about ________ (take) a walk with us after dinner?‎ ‎5. Now Alan _____ (watch) an interesting talk show.‎ II. 选择方框内的单词并用其适当形式完成下面的句子 can’t stand, love, don’t like, think of, not mind, surprise ‎1. My grandfather likes wearing fashion clothes. He _____young people _____ him.‎ ‎2. The old men ______ rock music. They think it’s noisy.‎ ‎3. The boy’s answer _______ me.‎ ‎4. Her sister ______ soap opera. That’s her favorite.‎ ‎5. I ______ to go shopping with my mother. It’s too crowed in the store.‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. My brother loves sitcoms very much. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _________ _________ your brother ______ sitcoms?‎ ‎2. Let’s take a walk after dinner. ( 改为同义句)‎ ‎ _________ __________ taking a walk after dinner?‎ ‎3. Mike wants to watch a sports show. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ _____ Mike _____ to watch a sports show?‎ ‎4. I found out the difference between the two things. (改为否定句)‎ ‎ I _______ ______ out the difference between the two things.‎ ‎5. Tim likes games shows because they’re exciting. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ _____ Tim _______ games shows?‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. (江苏连云港) —What do you think of the documentary A Bite of China?‎ ‎—_________. It has attracted lots of TV audiences.‎ ‎ A. Enjoy yourself B. Many thanks ‎ C. Pretty good D. It’s hard to say ‎( ) 2. I can’t ______ soap operas. They’re quite boring.‎ A. love B. like ‎ C. mind D. stand ‎( ) 3. —Would you like to watch the sports show?‎ ‎—________.‎ A. No, I’d not like to B. Yes, I’d like C. No, I’d like to D. Yes, I’d like to. But I have no time.‎ ‎( ) 4. An accident happened _____ him the other day.‎ A. on B. to ‎ C. of D. for ‎( ) 5. (河北) _____ I see your ID card, sir? We have to check your information.‎ A. May B. Must ‎ C. Should D. Need 创新提升 完形填空 Boys and girls love to watch TV. Some children   1   six hours a day in the school and sit four to six hours a day   2   the TV sets. Some children even (甚至) watch TV for eight or   3   hours at weekends. Sometimes TV programs (节目) are   4   and a child can know a lot of things from them. It’s very   5   to watch TV.   6   sometimes TV can also teach children some   7   things. It’s not good for children to watch   8  TV and it’s bad for their   9  , too. So, boys and girls don’t watch too much TV. It’s also very interesting to read   10  or to visit friends.‎ ‎( ) 1. A. study  B. studies   ‎ C. to study D. studying ‎( ) 2. A. before B. beside ‎ C. in front of D. near ‎( ) 3. A. many B. more ‎ C. much D. lots of ‎( ) 4. A. helps B. help C. helpful   D. helping ‎( ) 5. A. interest B. interesting ‎ C. fun D. funny ‎( ) 6. A. And B. Or ‎ C. But  D. So ‎( ) 7. A. good B. bad ‎ C. important D. helpful ‎( ) 8. A. too B. too many ‎ C. too much D. much ‎( ) 9. A. eye B. eyes ‎ C. ear D. ears ‎( ) 10. A. books B. newspaper ‎ C. pictures D. map 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (广东梅州) —Amy, I hear you’ve got many foreign coins. ______ I have a look?‎ ‎—Of course, I’ll fetch them for you.‎ A. May B. Must ‎ C. Should D. Need ‎( ) 2. (山东莱芜) Most of the young people enjoy_______ Jay Chou’s songs.‎ A. sing B. sang ‎ C. singing D. to sing ‎( ) 3. (北京) Our teacher often asks us ______ questions in groups.‎ A. discuss B. to discuss ‎ C. discussing D. discussed ‎( ) 4. (江苏扬州) —What are you going to do when you grow up?‎ ‎—A singer, but my mother wish me ____ a teacher.‎ A. am B. to be ‎ C. will be D. be ‎( ) 5. (辽宁锦州) —________.‎ ‎—Not bad.‎ A. How old are they?‎ B. Does Judy like thrillers?‎ C. Where do you have breakfast?‎ D. What do you think of the salad?‎ 第三课时 Section B 1a-2e 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 著名的__________‎ ‎2. 出现____________‎ ‎3. 主要的____________‎ ‎4. 获得成功的______________‎ ‎5. 愿意的；准备好____________‎ ‎6. 简单的；易做的______________‎ ‎7. cartoon____________‎ ‎8. culture_____________‎ ‎9. unlucky_____________‎ ‎10. meaningless______________‎ ‎11. might____________‎ ‎12. reason_____________‎ II. 短语互译 ‎1. 准备好（做某事）_____________‎ ‎2. 动作片____________‎ ‎3. 出版___________‎ ‎4. think of ____________‎ ‎5. not so ….as___________‎ ‎6. in the 1930s____________‎ ‎7. a pair of ___________‎ ‎8. try one’s best __________ ‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 你为这次聚会做好准备了吗？‎ ‎______ you ________ for the party?‎ ‎2. 周杰伦首次出现在《中国好声音》里。‎ Jay Chou _______ _______ in the Voice of China.‎ ‎3. 我们必须勇敢地努力面对各种问题。‎ ‎ We must _____ ______ _______ all kinds of problems bravely.‎ ‎4. —你喜欢看卡通片吗？‎ ‎—不，我认为它们毫无意义。‎ ‎—Do you like watch_________? ‎ ‎—No, I think they’re __________.‎ ‎5. 唐嫣和钟汉良一样有名。‎ ‎ Tang Yan is ______ _______ ______ Zhong Hanliang.‎ IV. 根据括号内提示翻译句子 ‎1. 你最喜欢的卡通片是什么？(favorite; cartoon)‎ ‎_________________________________?‎ ‎2. 我认为恐怖片是毫无意义的。(scary movie; meaningless)‎ ‎ __________________________________.‎ ‎3. 他是我们班里最高的学生之一。(one of)‎ ‎ __________________________________.‎ ‎4. 我已经准备好去游泳了。( be ready to)‎ ‎ __________________________________.‎ ‎5. 莫言的新书出版了。(come out)‎ ‎ __________________________________.‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示完成单词 ‎1. Lao She was one of the most f________ writers in the twentieth century.‎ ‎2. His aunt is a s_________ businesswoman.‎ ‎3. He was u________ enough to miss the last train.‎ ‎4. —Did little Tom l_______ his keys?‎ ‎ —Yes, he can’t find it everywhere.‎ ‎5. My friends didn’t a_______ until seven o’clock.‎ II. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. It’s a very ______ (success) scary movie, but I think it’s boring.‎ ‎2. Today Tim was _________ (luck). He left his keys at home when he went out.‎ ‎3. Yon know me—I’m always ready_______ (help).‎ ‎4. Who has a pair of ears _________ (famous) than Mickey?‎ ‎5. Can you tell me some _______ (reason) why you must study English well?‎ III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 白色是纯洁的象征。‎ The color white is ______ _______ _______ purity.‎ ‎2. 孩子们在尽最大努力学习英语。‎ ‎ Children are ______ their ______ to learn English.‎ ‎3. 你叔叔可能回去开会，不过我不确定。‎ ‎ Your uncle ______ ______ to a meeting but I’m not sure.‎ ‎4. 我喜欢很多种类的电影，例如卡通片和动作片。‎ ‎ I like many kinds of movies, ______ _______ cartoons and action movies.‎ ‎5. 他学习英语的主要原因是他去美国。‎ ‎ The _______ ________ why he studies English is that he wants to the USA.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. —His mother wants him ______ at home all day.‎ ‎—Really? That’s terrible.‎ A. stays B. stayed ‎ C. to stay D. staying ‎( ) 2. Han Ming is a helpful boy. He is ready _____ anything for others.‎ A. do B. to do ‎ C. doing D. does ‎( ) 3. (江苏盐城) Cao Wenxuan’s new book has just ________. Let’s go and buy one.‎ A. come over B. come down C. come on D. come out ‎( ) 4. (浙江衢州) Many children are left alone in the countryside. Let’s try our best _____ them.‎ A. help B. helping ‎ C. to help D. helps ‎( ) 5. ___________ November 18, 1978,‎ Mickey became the first cartoon character to have a star on the Hollywood Walk of Fame.‎ A. On B. At ‎ C. In D. Before ‎( ) 6. (湖南岳阳) Wembley Stadium(温布利大球场) is one of the ______ soccer fields in the world. It will be the place for soccer matches during the Olympics next month.‎ A. famous B. more famous ‎ C. most famous V. 句型转换 ‎1. The teacher asked me, “When did you finish the work?” (改为宾语从句)‎ The teacher asked me ______ ________ ________ the work.‎ ‎2. I know it’s early, but I’m ready for bed. (改为同义句)‎ ‎ I know it’s early, but I’m _______ ______ _______ ______ ________.‎ ‎3. I like to watch action movies because they’re exciting. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _________ _______ you like watch action movies?‎ ‎4. Mickey is a black mouse with two large round ears. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ________ does Mickey ________ ______?‎ ‎5. I like talk shows best. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ ________ _______ TV shows do you like best?‎ 创新提升 阅读理解.‎ Walt Disney was born in 1901. The Mickey Mouse created (被创作) in 1927 made him very famous. ‎ He died in 1966, but his work and his dreams did not die. Now people all over the world enjoy his Mickey Mouse and other cartoons. ‎ Walt Disney was a man who did not give up easily. One summer, Walt Disney wanted a job in a post office, but they told him that he was too young. He went home, drew some lines on his face. And put on his father's suit and hat. Then he went back to the same office and told them he was 18. He got the job finally. ‎ Later in his life, Mr. Disney had a dream, that is, to build a new kind of amusement park. It would be clean and beautiful. There would be rides for children and nice hotels for adults. It would be fun for people of all ages. Mr. Disney drew a plan for this park. It was called Disneyland. Engineers told him it was an impossible dream. His family and friends thought he was mad. But Mr. Disney did not give up his idea. ‎ In1955, Disneyland opened to the public and became the most successful amusement park in the USA. Walt Disney's dream comes true.‎ ‎1. When did Walt Disney create Mickey Mouse?‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ ‎2. What is Walt Disney's dream? Did it come true?  ‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ ‎3. Was Walt Disney 18 years old when he got the job in the post office?‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ ‎4. Where is the first Disneyland? ‎ ‎ _____________________________________‎ ‎5. What's the meaning of "give up"? (You can write it in Chinese.) ‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (浙江温州) —Father’s Day is coming. What should I buy for my father?‎ ‎—Why not _______? He likes sports.‎ A. a scarf ‎ B. a key ring ‎ C. a pair of jeans ‎ D. a pair of running shoes ‎( ) 2. (贵州贵阳) The World Cup Opening Ceremony was held in Brazil _____ June 12th, 2014.‎ A. in B. at C. on ‎( ) 3. (上海) The retired couple enjoy ______ photos. They always go out with their cameras.‎ A. take B. took ‎ C. to take D. taking ‎( ) 4. (贵州黔东南) Yao Ming is famous _____ playing basketball.‎ A. to B. as ‎ C. for D. between ‎( ) 5. (江苏宿迁) Han Han is a popular writer. His new book will ______ this September.‎ A. come up B. come in ‎ C. come out D. come on 第四课时 Section B 3a-Self Check 知识清单 I. 词汇、短语互译 ‎1. 陆军_________‎ ‎2. 装扮；乔装打扮____________‎ ‎3. 干得好____________‎ ‎4. 代替；替换_____________‎ ‎5. an old Chinese story______________‎ ‎6. the name of____________‎ ‎7. what kind_________‎ ‎8. come from___________‎ II. 选词填空。（选择方框中的词并用其适当形式填空）‎ plan; excite; enjoy; meaning; act ‎1. Though many people like scary movies, I think they are _________.‎ ‎2. Next school trip, we ______ to go camping in the mountains.‎ ‎3. Zhong Hanliang is one of the best ______ in China.‎ ‎4. Mulan is a(an) _________ movie. It shows Mulan’s love for her family, friends and country.‎ ‎5. —Jim, why are you so _______?‎ ‎—Oh, I won the first prize for the singing competition.‎ III.根据汉语补全句子 ‎1. 你认为2015年央视春晚怎么样？‎ ‎ ______ do you _______ ______ the 2015 CCTV Spring Festival Gala?‎ ‎2. 罗斯忍受不了老年人不能爱美的想法。‎ ‎ Rose can’t _____ _______ ______ that old people can’t be beautiful.‎ ‎3. 不要担心，他们可能会得到别人的帮助的。‎ ‎ Don’t worry. They ______ _______ other’s help.‎ ‎4. 你期望从郭敬明的小说中学到什么？‎ ‎ _______ did you _______ _______ ______from Guo Jingming’s novels?‎ ‎5. 他们装扮成了小丑。‎ ‎ They ______ _______ as clowns.‎ 基础闯关 I. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. Last week she ______ (write) an English letter to me.‎ ‎2. Many people enjoy _______ (watch) Animal World.‎ ‎3. Could you please _______ (read) the article for me?‎ ‎4. I don’t want my sister ______ (walk) to school, so I lend my bike to her.‎ ‎5. My friend asked my _______ (go) out with him, but I had no time.‎ II. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. (广西贺州) Our teacher often tells us _________ in the river. It’s dangerous.‎ A. don’t swim B. not swim ‎ C. not to swim D. not swimming ‎( ) 2. —How do you like the Weekend Talk?‎ ‎— I can’t ______ it.‎ A. stand B. stands ‎ C. standing D. stood ‎( ) 3. This week I asked students _______ fashion.‎ A. of B. in ‎ C. at D. about ‎( ) 4. I happen ______ the answer to your question.‎ A. know B. to know ‎ C. knowing D. that know ‎( ) 5. (陕西) Mary called and asked her husband _______ at once, because she locked their daughter in the home.‎ A. to leave B. leave ‎ C. go D. to go III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 她说要找个人来代替现任经理很不容易。‎ She said it would be difficult to find a man to _______ _______ ________ _______ the present manager.‎ ‎2. 我认为你做得非常好。‎ ‎ I think you _______ _______ _______ job.‎ ‎3. 听说你买了一本有趣的故事书。能给我看看吗？‎ I heard you bought an interesting story book. Could you ______it ______ me? ‎ ‎4. 明年我哥哥就要加入军队了。‎ ‎ My brother will ______ the _______ next year.‎ ‎5. 小沈阳来自于一个贫穷的家庭。‎ ‎ Xiao Shenyang _______ _______ a poor family.‎ 创新提升 I. 完形填空(选择方框中的词并用其适当形式填空)‎ happen; see; lie; visit; hear of; long; which; themselves; among; Chinese culture China is a great country with 5,000 years of history. There are many places of interest, 　1　attract millions of tourists form all over the world every year. Some of them are fantastic lakes, beautiful mountains and long rivers.‎ Many mountains, such as Mount Tai, Mount Emei, Mount Hua are very famous. People go to Mount Tai 　2　the sun rise. 　3　the rivers the Yangtze River is the longest one and the second 　4　one is the Yellow River. They are the birthplaces of 　5　.‎ Have you 　6　the love story about Xu Xian and White Snake? It is said that the story 　7　on West Lake. West Lake is the most fantastic place that I have ever visited. It 　8　in Hangzhou, Zheijiang Province. It is surrounded on three sides by mountains. Many tourist attractions there are well worth 　9　, such as Sudi Causeway, the Broken Bridge and Leifeng Pagoda. The scenery is so attractive that visitors often lose 　10　in it.‎ ‎1. ________ 2. ________ 3. _________ ‎ ‎4. _________ 5. _________ 6. _________‎ ‎7. _________ 8. __________ 9. ________ ‎ ‎10._________‎ II. 阅读理解 The World Clown  (小丑) Festival opened at People Square in Liuzhou on May 1st. Over 60 clown artists from 10 countries got together there. Clowns with bright hair, red noses, big shoes, big smiles and all kinds of funny movements crowded into Liuzhou. Local people enjoyed clown art from western and the festival had brought huge happiness to the city at the very first day.      ‎ Clown artists performed in the morning from 9 a. m. So many clowns lighted up the stage (活动场所) as an excellent world funny event, and the stage was full of people who laughed as clown performed like being in their childhood again.      ‎ There was not only European feature (特色) but also Liuzhou's local flavor (风情) in the festival. Songs from Zhuang people. Dances from Yao people. Events from Miao and “big songs" from Dong were performed to create a happy festival with international and national features. The festival finished at May 7th.‎ ‎( ) 1. Where was the festival opened?‎ A. In a cinema.  ‎ B. In a park.  ‎ C. At a square.    ‎ D. In a shopping center. ‎ ‎( ) 2. How long did the World Clown Festival last? ‎ A. Four days.   B. Five days. ‎ C. Six days.     D. Seven days.  ‎ ‎( ) 3. What does the underlined word" movement" mean? ‎ A. An excellent world funny event. ‎ B. An act of moving the body or parts of the body.   ‎ C. A group of people who share the same ideas. ‎ D. A change in what people do or think. ‎ ‎( ) 4. Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the passage?  ‎ A. More than 60 clown artists from 10 countries came to Liuzhou.     ‎ B. People could enjoy not only clown performance but also Peking Opera. ‎ C. Dong people performed " big songs" at the festival.     ‎ D. The festival brought much happiness to the local people 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (黑龙江绥化) Sanya is famous ______ it’s beautiful beaches.‎ A. of B. for C. as ‎( ) 2. (湖南怀化) Remember _____ off the lights when you leave the classroom.‎ A. turn B. to turn C. turning ‎( ) 3. (湖南益阳) You look too tired. Why not _______ a rest?‎ A. stop to have B. to stop having ‎ C. stop having Unit 5 单元测试卷 第一部分 选择题（共45分）‎ I. 单项选择（本题共15分， 每小题1分）‎ ‎( ) 1. —Excuse me, could you tell me how _____ to Beijing Zoo?‎ ‎—Well, you may take Bud No. 65.‎ A. get B. gets ‎ C. getting D. to get ‎( ) 2. We’re trying our best _____ toys away when we see our teacher?‎ A. put B. putting ‎ C. to put D. puting ‎( ) 3. It’s cold outside. Please put on ____.‎ A. warm something ‎ B. anything warm C. warm anything ‎ D. something warm ‎( ) 4. ______ kind of TV shows does your father like?‎ A. How B. Whose ‎ C. Who D. What ‎( ) 5. Do you mind ______ here?‎ ‎ A. I smoke B. my smoking C. to smoke D. me smoke ‎( ) 6. —Many children enjoy _______ Pleasant Goat and Big Big Wolf.《喜羊羊和灰太狼》‎ ‎—Yes, it’s an interesting cartoon.‎ A. watch B. to watch ‎ C. watching D. watches ‎( ) 7. —What do you think of the new show?‎ ‎—______, but my mother likes it.‎ A. I like it. B. I enjoy them ‎ C. I don’t like it D. I don’t agree ‎( ) 8. The word “_______” comes from the two words “ situation comedy”.‎ A. soap B. sports ‎ C. sitcom D. culture ‎( ) 9. He looks rich. _______, he is very poor.‎ A. In the fact B. In fact ‎ C. At fact D. On fact ‎( ) 10. I like ______ story books, but now I want to _____ TV.‎ A. read; watch ‎ B. reading; watching C. reading; to watch ‎ D. read; to watch ‎( ) 11. Why ______ he go to the movie with you the day before yesterday?‎ A. does B. is ‎ C. wasn’t D. didn’t ‎( ) 12. My mother plans ______ a new dress for me.‎ A. buy B. to buy ‎ C buys D. bought ‎( ) 13. —I’m very sorry, Allen. I can’t find your favorite CD.‎ ‎—______, Torn. I’ll go and buy another one.‎ A. It doesn’t matter. ‎ B. Don’t say that.‎ C. Sure. ‎ D. You are kidding.‎ ‎( ) 14. I don’t think it is a __________ performance.‎ A. success B. successful ‎ C. succeed D. successes ‎( ) 15. Mary is tired of learning because she is ______ to do better than she can, both at school and at home.‎ A. thought B. expected ‎ C. hoped D. helped II. 完形填空（本题共10分，每小题1分）‎ Korean culture is really popular right now. The Korean Wave (韩流) is sweeping Asian countries including (包括)  1 . Young people are  2  in Korean TV plays, Korean pop songs and the Korean language. ‎ The Korean Wave started  3  years ago with the TV series (电视系列剧) Winter Sonata (冬季恋歌). This love story is still popular now. People, especially girls, like the beautiful stories and handsome actors  4  Pei Yongjun.  ‎ In the music world, Korean stars are making  5  heard in China. You can often find big Korean names such as Baby Vox, SES and Finkle at the top of the Chinese  6  charts (排行榜). ‎ The Korean Wave  7  makes young people try the clothes and hairstyles of the Korean pop stars. Not only those, now some girls in China are having plastic surgery (整形手术)  8  their looks. It is said that many Korean stars look beautiful  9  plastic surgery. ‎ As you see, Korean culture has changed us a lot. Is it  10  for us to follow in every way? We each should think about it.‎ ‎( ) 1. A. China     B. Canada ‎ C. Australia D. Egypt      ‎ ‎( ) 2. A. excited   B. interested ‎ C. surprised D. worried    ‎ ‎( ) 3. A. a little   B. little ‎ C. a few    D. few ‎ ‎( ) 4. A. on         B. at ‎ C. for      D. like       ‎ ‎( ) 5. A. them       B. they       ‎ C. their     D. themselves ‎ ‎( ) 6. A. sports     B. health     ‎ C. music  D. clothes    ‎ ‎( ) 7. A. too       B. also       ‎ C. as well   D. else             ‎ ‎( ) 8. A. change     B. changing  ‎ C. changed   D. to change  ‎ ‎( ) 9. A. instead   B. instead of ‎ C. because   D. because of ‎ ‎( ) 10. A. necessary B. serious  ‎ C. pleasant   D. friendly   ‎ III. 阅读理解（本题共20分，每小题2分）‎ A On a Friday morning, it was a composition lesson. David's English teacher Mr. Wang said, "We will have a long summer vacation in two weeks. What will you do during your summer vacation, boys and girls? Please write a composition about your summer vacation plan." ‎ The students didn't speak. They all thought and wrote about their vacation plans. But David didn't write. After Mr. Wang's words, he lost himself into his wonderful vacation. "That is very easy. I will go to my grandpa's home. At his home I can get up late in the morning. When I get up, I will go to the small river with grandpa. We can catch many big fish there. It will be very interesting. There are many children in that village. I can play with them. We will go swimming in the river on sunny days. It will be great fun. I like to play sports. In the afternoon, I will climb the mountain near my grandpa's home. I can see many birds, trees and flowers. I can …" ‎ While David was dreaming, Mr. Wang said, "David, give your composition to me now." But David didn't write a word.‎ ‎( ) 1. What day was that day? ‎ A. Monday. B. Tuesday. ‎ C. Friday. D. Saturday. ‎ ‎( ) 2. How soon will the summer vacation come? ‎ A. In half a month. B. In one week. ‎ C. In a month. D. In two months. ‎ ‎( ) 3. David's grandpa lives ________. ‎ A. in a city B. in a town ‎ C. on a farm D. in a village ‎ ‎( ) 4. What is the meaning of the word "composition" in Chinese? ‎ A. 作文 B. 演讲 ‎ C. 比赛 D. 考试 ‎ ‎( ) 5. Why did not David write a word when the teacher asked him for the composition? ‎ A. Because he couldn't write. ‎ B. Because he lost himself into his vacation. ‎ C. Because he wouldn't have a vacation. ‎ D. Because he didn't want to write. ‎ B The Voice of China was hot during the summer of 2012!‎ The Voice of China is the large music show in China. This show is also the only one which regards the Voice as the only ruler. It premiered at 21:15 on July 13, 2012, on the Zhejiang Television. It has attracted great attention. The show became an overnight sensation.‎ The first season used “Real voice, real music” as its slogan. As a mentor(导师), singers like Liu Huan, Na Ying, Yu Chengqing and Yang Kun will be responsible for seeking world-shaking voices of China in the following three and a half months, through four stages, namely, “blind choosing”, “selecting”, “team PK” and “yearly grand ceremony”.‎ It is really a miracle that The Voice of China can stand out in the flood of today’s talent shows in China and attracts the audience. A great many of audience said this will be the best television show in this summer. They were all proud for these good voices of China. ‎ The students’ beautiful voices moved everyone. Xu Haixing, a girl from Chengdu, sang “Self” to realize her father’s dream and Liu Huan was moved to tears by her song. Huang Yong sang “In Spring” showing his persistence on his dream and Yang Kun cried for this. The blind girl Zhang Yuxia, a busker from Taiwan, played while singing. She was praised as “Deng Lijun No.2” for her unique voice, and her sincere feelings touched everybody. Na Ying went to the stage to sing with the students together for two times.‎ The Voice of China casts off magnificent clothes and wonderful dancing. It regards “inspiration” and “professionalism” as the ruler of music. The singer uses their songs to tell their real stories and the happiness of life.‎ ‎( ) 6. If you want to be the winner of The Voice of China, you must _____.‎ A. have a good-looking B. have special talent ‎ C. have a wonderful voice D. dance and sing well ‎( ) 7.The right order of The Voice of China’s program is _____. a. team PK   b. blind choosing.   ‎ c. selecting    ‎ d. yearly grand ceremony A. c b a d B. b c a d C. c a b d D. d c a b ‎( ) 8. From the passage we know Liu Huan was deeply moved by_____ song.‎ A. Na Ying’s    ‎ B. Xu Haixing’s    ‎ C. Huang Yong’s   ‎ D. Zhang Yuxia’s ‎( ) 9. What is the Chinese meaning of the underlined sentence?‎ A. 通宵节目 B. 无与伦比 C.一夜成名           ‎ D.彻夜难眠 ‎ ‎( ) 10. Which of the following is NOT true according the passage?‎ A. The best title of the passage is The Voice of China.‎ B. The Voice of China last three and a half months.‎ C. The fourth telegraph tells us The Voice of China is hot in China.‎ D. Magnificent clothes and wonderful dancing are rulers of the show.‎ 第二部分 非选择题（共55分）‎ IV. 任务型阅读(每小题2分，共10分)‎ ‎ Here is a list of CCTVprograms:‎ CCTV PROGRAMS Next Friday Channel 1‎ Channel 2‎ ‎18:00 Sports News ‎18:30 Cartoon ‎19:00 CCTV News ‎19:30 Weather Report ‎19:40 Around the World ‎20:10 Art Life ‎21:00 China’s Got Talent ‎22:15 The Voice of China ‎17:45 English Out look ‎18:10 Healthy Living ‎18:30 Animal World ‎19:00 Culture of China ‎19:25 New Probe ‎20:20 Sports Time ‎21:00 Mulan ‎22:55 English News 根据表格内容，回答下列问题：‎ ‎1. How long does CCTV News last(持续)？ ___________________________________‎ ‎2. Which channel can you choose to find Animal World？‎ ‎__________________________________ ‎ ‎3. What time does Culture of China begin？ __________________________________ ‎ ‎4. If you like music, what program should you watch? ‎ ‎___________________________________‎ ‎5. If you want to know about the weather tomorrow, when should you watch TV and which channel can you choose to find it?‎ ‎__________________________________‎ V. 情景交际（根据上下文，选择适当的句子完成对话。每小题2分，共10分）‎ A. Oh, I don’t mind them. ‎ B. H is a very funny man.‎ C. May I ask you a question?‎ D. What kind of TV shows do you like?‎ E. Who is Li Yong?‎ F. Do you like him?‎ G. Me, too.‎ William: Jerry, do you know the famous host of CCTV LiYong?‎ Jerry: Yes. 1. _________ .‎ William: What do you think of his game shows?‎ Jerry: I love all his TV shows. What about you? 2. __________ .‎ William: Yes, I do. And I like game shows; I ike his Lucy 52.‎ Jerry: 3. ________ . ‎ William: I love sports shows.‎ Jerry: 4. _________ . You know, I don’t like playing sports.‎ William: What do you think of Animal World?‎ Jerry: I can’t stand it. It’s for kids. I like Culture China.‎ William: 5. ________. I learn a lot from it.‎ VI. 用所给词的适当形式填空（每小题1分，共5分）‎ ‎1. He _________ (not, like) the film. It’s very boring.‎ ‎2. We hope ______ (meet) our teacher at the street.‎ ‎3. What do you think of ________ (visit) Beijing?‎ ‎4. Lost in Thailand is an ________ (enjoy) movie, we all like watching it.‎ ‎5. A smile _______ (appear) on the teacher’s face after he knew the news.‎ VII. 根据汉语补全句子，每空一词（每小题2分，共10分）‎ ‎1. 我认为情景剧比肥皂剧更有教育意义。‎ I think sitcoms are _______ ________ than soap operas.‎ ‎2. 她不能忍受每天弹三个小时的钢琴。‎ She can’t _______ _______ the piano for three hours every day.‎ ‎3. 玛丽正在为期末考试做准备。‎ ‎ Mary is ________ _______ _______ the final exam.‎ ‎4. 这是第一部带有声音和音乐的卡通片。‎ This is the first cartoon _______ ________ _______ __________.‎ ‎5. 我妈妈出去之前常常打扮一番。‎ ‎ My mother often ______ ______ before she goes out.‎ VIII. 书面表达（20分）‎ 假如你是张文，八年级四班的班长。你们班排练了一部英文课本剧（an English textbook play），准备本周六下午4:00在学校礼堂（the school hall）演出。请你用英语给学校的外籍教师Terry写一封80字左右的E-mail，邀请他来观看演出，并在演出结束时发言。‎ 注意：1. 可增加细节，使文章连贯完整；2. 开头和结尾已给出，不计入总词数。‎ Dear Terry,‎ ‎ Hi, I’m Zhang Wen, monitor of Class 4, Grade 8.‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ ‎ We are all looking forward to your coming.‎ Yours,‎ Zhang Wen 期中测试卷 ‎(测试时间：90分钟 满分：120分)‎ I. 单项选择（本题共15分， 每小题1分）‎ ‎( ) 1. —Do you know ______ Jane visits her grandparents?‎ ‎—Once a week. She loves them deeply.‎ A. how soon B. how often ‎ C. how long D. how far ‎( ) 2. —How was your school trip in Beijing last year?‎ ‎—______. I had a good time with my classmates.‎ A. Terrible B. Great ‎ C. Expensive D. Not good ‎( ) 3. I don’t feel like _______ today.‎ ‎ A. to read B. reading ‎ ‎ C. read D. reads ‎( ) 4. —Are you going anywhere?‎ ‎ —I _______ about visiting my sister, but I have changed my mind.‎ ‎ A. think B. have thought ‎ C. will think D. thought ‎( ) 5. —What’s his brother? ‎ ‎—He is a teacher. He ______ maths at a school.‎ A. taught B. has taught ‎ C. teaches D. will teach ‎( ) 6. Please don’t eat too much junk food. It’s bad _____ your health.‎ A. to B. for ‎ C. at D. with ‎( ) 7. The watch is _______ than that one.‎ ‎ A. more cheaper B. much cheap ‎ C. more cheap D. much cheaper ‎( ) 8. —Everyone knows Canada is the second largest country in the world.‎ ‎—That is, it is larger than _______ country in Asia.‎ A. any B. any other C. other D. another ‎( ) 9. Mike isn’t as _______ as Tina, so he always makes more mistakes.‎ A. careful B. carefully ‎ C. more careful D. more carefully ‎( ) 10. —What do you think of her teaching English?‎ ‎ —Great! No one teaches ______ in our school. ‎ ‎ A. good B. worse ‎ C. better D. best ‎ ( ) 11. —It’s smoggy these days. That’s terrible!‎ ‎—Yes, I hope to plant trees. ___________ trees, _________air pollution.‎ A. The more; the fewer ‎ B. the less; the more ‎ C. The less; the fewer ‎ D. The more; the less ‎ ‎( ) 12. Come here at Christmas! You can buy ______ clothes in a year.‎ A. the cheapest B. cheaper C. the worst D. worse ‎( ) 13. Tom doesn’t like thrillers because it’s ______.‎ A. funny B. interesting C. exciting D. scary ‎( ) 14. Mona doesn’t like making speeches. She feels _______ talking in front of the class.‎ ‎ A. annoyed B. excited ‎ C. nervous D. surprised ‎( ) 15. —What do you think of _______?‎ ‎—I don’t mind it.‎ A. to watch TV ‎ B. watching TV ‎ C. watch TV ‎ D. watched TV II. 完形填空（本题共10分，每小题1分）‎ Is it good for students to do some housework.‎ Some people think students need not do 1 housework. They think the only thing students need do is to study 2 . I don’t think so. It is good for students to do some housework for 3 reasons.‎ ‎ Firstly, to do some housework can 4 you independent（独立的）.You can’t depend on（依靠） others all your life. So, you should 5 to do some housework now.‎ ‎ Secondly, to do some housework can 6 you healthy and strong, some hard housework can be regarded(认为)as a kind of physical（身体的） 7 .‎ ‎ 8 , to do some housework can share your parents’ work. They must be 9 if you say “Have a rest, and I will do the housework.”‎ ‎ So I think it is 10 for students to do some housework.‎ ‎( ) 1. A. many B. a lot C. some D. any ‎( ) 2. A. good B. well C. better D. best ‎( ) 3. A. one B. two C. three D. four ‎( ) 4. A. make B. take C. ask D. tell ‎( ) 5. A. study B. learn C. hope D. want ‎( ) 6. A. talk B. be C. keep D. show ‎( ) 7. A. practice B. exercise C. activity D. active ‎( ) 8. A. Next B. Last C. Later D. Finally ‎( ) 9. A. sad B. happy C. unhappy D. relaxing ‎( ) 10. A. bad B. not good C. good D. well III. 情景交际：根据上下文，从方框中选择合适的句子，补全对话。（本题共10分，每小题2分）‎ A: We had a talent show yesterday in our school, John.‎ B: 1 ‎ A: It was great.‎ B: 2 A: Helen. She is an excellent violin player.‎ B: 3 ‎ B: Yes, I think they were the funniest.‎ B: 4 ‎ A: I think Mary was. Her joke didn’t make us laugh.‎ B: Terrible. 5 ‎ A: Yeah. But I think her sister was the most creative. She could dance with her dog. ‎ B: Really? That’s fun.‎ A. She might be very sad.‎ B. How was it, Jack?‎ C. Did Henry and his parrot (鹦鹉) take part in （参加）the show?‎ D. Who was the best actress（女演员）?‎ E. Who was the worst?‎ F. That’s great.‎ G. What can she do?‎ IV. 阅读理解（本题共40分，每小题2分）‎ A Tommy is from a poor family. His father is a worker and he is often ill. Tommy hopes to be an artist, but everybody says it is impossible (不可能) for him to be an artist and makes fun of his family and his dream. But Tommy never gives up. ‎ One day, he heard there was a drawing competition the following week, and anyone aged 13 and up was welcome. The winner would get 10, 000 dollars and some art equipment (设备). He thought for a minute and decided to take part in the competition. ‎ That week seemed like the longest week in his life. Every day when he got home from school, a pencil and a piece of paper were the first things in his hands. Then, the day of the competition came. He finished his drawing quickly. ‎ After two weeks, Tommy got a letter. Tommy was too afraid to open the letter. At last, he opened it slowly. Just as he read the first sentence, he began crying (哭). However, they were not tears (眼泪) of sadness… They were tears of happiness.‎ ‎( ) 1. Tommy hopes to be 　　　. ‎ A. a worker B. a doctor C. a writer D. an artist ‎ ‎( ) 2. The underlined words “makes fun of” means “　　　” in Chinese. ‎ ‎ A. 嘲笑 B. 支持 C. 夸奖 D. 创造 ‎( ) 3. Which of the following is TRUE?‎ A. Only young boys could take part in the competition. ‎ B. The winner could get about 1,000 dollars. ‎ C. The winner could get some art equipment. ‎ D. Young girls couldn’t take part in the competition.‎ ‎( ) 4. Before the competition, when Tommy came back home, the first thing he did was 　　　. ‎ ‎ A. cook dinner for his father B. practice drawing ‎ ‎ C. finish his homework D. watch news about the ‎ competition ‎( ) 5. From the end of text we can know that 　　　. ‎ A. Tommy was sad, because he didn’t win the competition B. Tommy was happy, because he won the competition C. Tommy could never become an artist ‎ D. Tommy didn’t win the competition, but he was still happy B What is a good friend like?‎ Molly May 19,2015,9:32pm I think a good friend likes to do the same things as me. Jack is my best friend. We both like to play the guitar after class.‎ Holly May 19,2015 9:40pm For me, a good friend makes me laugh.‎ He or she likes to talk about something interesting and funny.‎ Maria May19,2015,9:45pm I think a good friend should be a good listener, and he or she should keep secrets(秘密) for me—that’s more important for me.‎ Sally May19,2015,9:55 pm In my opinion, a good friend should have cool clothes and he or she is popular in school. He or she should be good at sports, because I like doing sports.‎ Toby May19,2015,10:16pm As we are students, I think a good friend should be good at schoolwork. Then we can help each other and learn from each other.‎ Jim May19,2015,10:13‎ I think good friends should help each ‎ other, when I am in trouble, Kelly always helps me.‎ ‎( ) 6. Who can be Holly’s friend?‎ A. Someone who is very quiet B. Someone who likes to talk about ‎ interesting things C. Someone who is good at schoolwork. ‎ D. Someone who is very cool and popular. ‎ ‎( ) 7. Who wants his or her friends to do well in their schoolwork?‎ A. Molly B. Toby C. Jim D. Sally ‎( ) 8. What does Jack like?‎ A. Playing the guitar ‎ B. Sports ‎ C. Making others laugh ‎ D. Schoolwork ‎( ) 9. Whose friend is Kelly? ‎ A. Jim’s B. Toby’s C. Sally’s D. Molly’s ‎( ) 10. This passage mainly talks about ______.‎ ‎ A. how to make friends ‎ B. how to get on well with friends ‎ C. what a good friend like ‎ D. what we do with good friends C ‎“Who needs a shopping mall (购物中心)if you have Taobao?” says Wang Lin,28,a writer in Beijing.‎ Taobao, China’s largest online shopping site (网上购物网站), has become an important part of Wang Lin’s life. She spends lots of money on Taobao.‎ A growing number of Chinese Internet users like Wang have found the joys of online shopping. Most online shoppers are students or young workers. More women shop on line than men. Clothing and home-use products(产品)are the most popular on line.‎ It was reported that more than 250 billion(十亿)yuan was spent on online shopping last year,80% through Taobao.‎ ‎　　Taobao means “looking for treasure” in Chinese. People can find almost everything they need on Taobao, from clothes to books ,from candies to DVD players .‎ ‎　　You may question the security of online shopping ,Wang Lin said, “It’s very safe and convenient (便利的).Unless you receive the products from the sellers and are satisfied with them, the shop owner will not get the money .You can also get your money back if you want to return the products.”‎ ‎( ) 11. What are the most popular on line?‎ A. Candles and DVD players B. Clothes and books.‎ C. Clothing and home-use products.‎ D. Candies and clothes ‎( ) 12. Taobao is ____________.‎ A. a shopping mall ‎ B. an online shopper ‎ C. an online shopping site D. a shopping street ‎( ) 13. Most online shoppers are _______.‎ A. young B. old ‎ B. C. babies D. adults ‎( ) 14. What does the underlined word “security” mean?‎ ‎　　 A.质量 B.安全 ‎ C. 信誉 D. 社会 ‎( ) 15. Which is the best title(标题)of the passage?‎ A. Wang Lin’s life. ‎ B. Online shopping in China. ‎ C. Shopping on line is not safe.‎ D. The security of shopping D Lily and Lucy are twin sisters. They look the same and in some ways they are the same. But in other ways they are different. Lily and Lucy both like basketball. But Lily plays every day and Lucy plays only on weekends. Lucy likes watching basketball games on TV but Lily only likes to play the game, not to watch it. Lily and Lucy are both outgoing and funny, but Lucy is a little more outgoing than Lily. Lucy is also a little more serious about schoolwork. Lily and Lucy are very popular at school, and they both have a lot of friends.‎ 根据短文内容，判断正（T）误（F）‎ ‎( ) 16. Lily plays more basketball than Lucy.‎ ‎( ) 17. Both of the sisters like football.‎ ‎( ) 18. Lily is more outgoing than Lucy.‎ ‎( ) 19. The twin sisters are popular at school.‎ ‎( ) 20. Lily likes to watch basketball games on TV. ‎ V. 根据短文内容，补全表格。（本题共10分，每小题2分）‎ What are they doing for holiday?‎ They are happy because they are on holiday. Mary is visiting her aunt in Paris. She is very excited to be in Paris. It is a very well-known city. And it is a good place to go shopping!‎ ‎ Jack is fishing in the lake. Because the water is very clean, there are so many fish in the lake. Jack is having a good harvest (收获).‎ ‎ Simon and Bill are good friends. They are usually very busy with their study every day. So they want to do something different. They are riding bikes together in the beautiful countryside. It’s relaxing.‎ ‎ Jesse is taking some photos in the park. The park is very beautiful in autumn, and it’s a good place to take photos.‎ Everyone gets tired sometimes. It’s important to have a rest. And it’s good for your health. It can help you work or study better, too. I hope everyone is having a good time.‎ What are they doing for (1)__________?‎ Name Place Things they are doing Mary In Paris ‎(2)____________‎ ‎(3)__‎ In the lake Fishing ‎_____‎ Simon and Bill In the countryside ‎(4)__________‎ Jesse ‎(5)______________‎ Taking photos VI. 情景交际：根据对话内容，用适当的句子补全对话（本题共10分，每小题2分）‎ A: Sally and I went to Lao She Teahouse (老舍茶馆)last night.‎ B: Oh, really? 1. ?‎ A: We drank tea and watched Beijing Opera.‎ B: 2. ?‎ A: We liked it very much. It was interesting and wonderful!‎ B: 3. ?‎ A: We stayed there for two hours.‎ B: Oh, you had a great time, didn’t you?‎ A: Yes, 4. . Sally enjoyed it very much and we decided to watch it again next week.‎ B: Can I go with you?‎ A: 5._________! We can get together then!‎ VII. 用所给词的适当形式填空（本题共5分，每小题1分）‎ ‎1. My mother shops _______ (two) a week.‎ ‎2. They had an __________ (enjoy) holiday last year.‎ ‎3. The best way _______ (exercise) is to run every day.‎ ‎4. I think English is the _______ (easy) of all our subjects.‎ ‎5. We should take study _________ (serious).‎ VIII. 根据汉语，完成句子。（本题共10分，每小题2分）‎ ‎1. 北京是中国最大的城市之一。‎ ‎ Beijing is one of the _______ ________ in China.‎ ‎2. 昨天我没有买任何东西。‎ ‎ I ________ ________ yesterday.‎ ‎3. 这位演员正变得越来越受欢迎。‎ ‎ This actor is becoming _______ ________ _______ ________.‎ ‎4. 你认为竞技类节目怎么样？‎ ‎ _______ do you _______ game shows?‎ ‎5. 你今天或明天来这里都可以, 由你决定。‎ ‎ You can come here today or tomorrow. It’s _______ ________ you to decide. ‎ IX. 书面表达（本题共10分）‎ 根据提示，用英语写一篇短文介绍你的好 惯和坏习惯，不少于60字。‎ Activities How often Good habits ‎1. Exercise ‎ ‎2. Read books ‎3. Eat fruit ‎4. Drink milk ‎5. Stay up late every day ‎ always every day twice a week never Bad habits ‎1.Watch TV for two hours ‎ ‎2.Use the Internet ‎ always ‎ twice a ‎3.Help with housework ‎4.Eat hamburgers ‎5. Go to the dentist ‎ week hardly ever ‎ often ‎ never ‎___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________.‎ Unit 6 I’m going to study computer science?‎ 第一课时 Section A 1a-2d 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 医生____________‎ ‎2. 小提琴手________________‎ ‎3. 驾驶员____________‎ ‎4. 钢琴家______________‎ ‎5. 工程师______________‎ ‎6. 厨师____________‎ ‎7. pilot ________________‎ ‎8. scientist____________‎ II. 短语互译 ‎1. 成长；长大____________‎ ‎2. 确信；对…有把握___________‎ ‎3. 计算机程序设计员_______________‎ ‎4. 确保；查明___________‎ ‎5. basketball player_____________‎ ‎6. keep on __________‎ ‎7. want to be ____________‎ ‎8. don’t worry_____________‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 他想成为电脑程序设计师，所以他努力学习计算机科学。‎ He wants to be a _________ _________，so he studies ________ ________ hard.‎ ‎2. 凯特正在房间里拉小提琴。‎ ‎ Kate _________ ________ the violin in her room.‎ ‎3. 你打算如何成为一名作家？‎ ‎ ______ ______ _______ ________ ______‎ become a writer?‎ ‎4. 我姐姐长大后想成为一名艺术家。‎ ‎ My sister is ______ _______ ____ an artist when she _______ _______ .‎ ‎5. 确保尽你最大的努力。‎ ‎ _______ _______ you try your best.‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示补全单词 ‎1. My dream is to be teacher when I g_____ up.‎ ‎2. You look ill. Go to see the d________.‎ ‎3. I want to be a p_______ and fly in the sky.‎ ‎4. I’m going to be a computer p_________‎ ‎5. Einstein is a great a__________.‎ II. 用所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. It’s Saturday tomorrow. Parents ________ (have) a birthday party for Maria.‎ ‎2. Jack plays the violin very well. He must be a (violin) when he grows up. ‎ ‎3. What is he going to be when he_______ (grow) up?‎ ‎4. _____ you ____________ (play) basketball with me next week? ‎ ‎5. He admires actors very much. He’s going to take_____ (act) lessons every day. ‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. John and his brother are going to shop this afternoon. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎______ John and his brother ______ to shop this afternoon?‎ ‎2. She’s going to fly a kite this Sunday morning. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎______ she going to _____ this Sunday morning?‎ ‎3. Bill moved to America last month. (用next month改写句子)‎ ‎ Bill_________ ________ _______ _______ to America next month.‎ ‎4. He wants to be a actor when he grows up. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ _______ he ______ to be when he grows up?‎ ‎5. They are going to travel to Shanghai next week. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ _______ they going to ______ next week?‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. (山东德州) A/An _____ can use his drawings to tell about beautiful mountains, the blue sea and many other things.‎ A. actor B. scientist ‎ C. artist D. doctor ‎( ) 2. What is she going to do when she _____ up?‎ A. grows B. is going to grow C. grew D. is growing ‎( ) 3. There ______ an exam tomorrow.‎ A. is going to B. is going to be ‎ C. is going to have D. is going ‎( ) 4. (山东青岛) There aren’t many tickets left for the concert. You’d better _____ that you get one today.‎ A. make sure of ‎ B. make a decision C. make sure ‎ B. make plans ‎( ) 5. —_____ the Greens going to move? —Maybe Beijing or Shanghai. I’m not sure yet.‎ ‎　　 A. What is B. What are ‎ C. Where is D. Where are ‎( ) 6. —_____ are you going to do that?‎ ‎—I’m going to exercise every day.‎ A. What B. How ‎ C. When D. Where ‎( ) 7. An ________ must take ________ lessons.‎ ‎　 A. actor; act B. actor; acting ‎ C. acting; actor D. acting; act 创新提升 I. 情景交际 (填写适当的词补全对话，每空一词)‎ A: What do you 1 to be when you 2 up?‎ B: I want to be a doctor. ‎ A: 3 do you going to do that?‎ B: I’m 4 to be a volunteer in the hospital every weekend. What 5 you? What are you gong to be?‎ A: Oh, I’m gong to be a 6 . I like kids. I’m 7 I can be good with them.‎ ‎1. _______ 2. ________ 3. _______ 4. ______‎ ‎5. _______ 6. _________ 7. ________‎ II. 选择合适的单词或短语并用其适当形式填空 grow up; science; act; driver; read ‎1. I like science, so I want to be a _______ in the future.‎ ‎2. Taking ______ lesson is a good way to be an actor.‎ ‎3. My father is a bus driver. He ______ the bus eight hours every day.‎ ‎4. I like _______ books. I want to be a writer when I grow up.‎ ‎5. Do you know what he is going to be when he ______ ______?‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (湖南岳阳) Jeremy Lin is the first Chinese-American basketball ______ in the NBA. He is a little different from Yao Ming.‎ A. dancer B. player ‎ C. watcher ‎( ) 2. (陕西) John wants to be a _______, so he often helps sick people in the hospital.‎ A. reporter B. doctor ‎ C. scientist D. cook ‎( ) 3. (河北) My sister wants a new dress. She ______ it to the party.‎ A. wears B. has worn ‎ C. wore D. is going to wear ‎( ) 4. (四川遂宁) There _____ a basketball match this weekend.‎ A. will have ‎ B. is going to be ‎ C. is going to have 第二课时 Grammar Focus-3c 知识清单 I. 词汇、短语互译 ‎1. 学院；大学______________‎ ‎2. 伦敦____________‎ ‎3. 邮寄；发送___________‎ ‎4. 药；医学___________‎ ‎5. 文章；论文____________‎ ‎6. university____________‎ ‎7. education______________‎ ‎8. race car driver____________‎ ‎9. take acting lesson____________‎ ‎10. sound difficult__________________‎ II. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 你可以发电子邮件给我，好吗？‎ You can ______ e-mail ______ me, OK?‎ ‎2. 当我长大时，我想成为像朗朗那样的钢琴家。‎ I want to be a ______ like Lang Lang when I _______ ________. ‎ ‎3. 他打算每天练习打篮球。‎ He ________ _________ _______ practice basketball.‎ ‎4. 我打算在大学里学习医学，因为我想成为一名医生。‎ ‎ I will _______ _______ at a university, because I want to be a doctor.‎ ‎5. 你可以上表演课如果你想成为歌手的话。‎ ‎ You can ______ _______ _______ if you want to be a singer.‎ III. 补全对话, 每空一词 A: What 1 you going to be when you 2 up?‎ B: I 3 going to be a journalist.‎ A: 4 are you going to 5 that?‎ B: I’m going to 6 articles and 7 them to magazines and newspapers.‎ A: 8 are you going to work?‎ B: I’m not 9 yet. Maybe Nanjing 10 Shanghai.‎ ‎1. ____ 2.______ 3. _______ 4. ______ 5. ___‎ ‎6. ______ 7. _____ 8. ______ 9. ___ 10._____‎ 基础闯关 I. 用所给单词的正确形式填空 ‎1. He was born and _______ (grow) up in Beijing, but he lives in Shanghai now.‎ ‎2. A ________(violin) is good at playing the violin.．‎ ‎3. He likes writing and he always sends _________(article) to newspapers.‎ ‎4. Look at the clouds. It_______ (rain).‎ ‎5. ______ Mary ______ (surf) the Internet this weekend?‎ II. 选择方框内的单词并用其适当形式完成下面的句子 be; medicine; travel; send; play ‎1. —What will you do tomorrow afternoon?‎ ‎—I ______basketball with Jim.‎ ‎2. He ______a teacher after he leaves college.‎ ‎3. The doctor told him to take the ________ three times a day.‎ ‎4. My parents ____________ to New York this summer holiday.‎ ‎5. I want _______ a letter to my uncle in the USA.‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. He’s going to tell me all about it. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ ______ he _______ ______ tell me about it?‎ ‎2. They are going to visit the Great Wall. (改为否定句) ‎ ‎ They _____ _____ to visit the Great Wall.‎ ‎3. We are going to leave next Tuesday. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ are _____ going to leave?‎ ‎4. The man is going to work in New York. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ _____ the man ______ to work?‎ ‎5. Grace studies science every day. (用this afternoon改写句子)‎ ‎ Grace ______ _________ _______ ______ science this afternoon.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. —_______?‎ ‎—He is an engineer.‎ A. What’s your uncle ‎ B. Where is your uncle C. How is your uncle D. Who is your uncle ‎( ) 2. (黑龙江绥化) —What do yo usually do in the morning?‎ ‎—I often practice ____________ English.‎ A. speak B. to speak ‎ C. speaking ‎( ) 3. If you are going to be an actor, you have to _______.‎ A. take acting lessons ‎ B. take act lesson ‎ C. take acting lesson ‎ D. take act lesson ‎( ) 4. Chengdu ______ a beautiful city to live in.‎ A. sounded B. sound ‎ C. sounds like D. sound like ‎( ) 5. You are coughing! You should take some _______ ‎ A. medicine B. meat ‎ C. hamburgers D. juice ‎( ) 6. —Where is Linda?‎ ‎— She may be at home. But I’m not sure it.‎ A. at B. about ‎ C. with D. in 创新提升 完形填空(根据上下文，选择方框内合适的单词填空)‎ asked, ago, because, well, going, little，But, after, try your best, herself Young people today may not know Zhu Mingying. But she was very famous more than twenty years ___1___. ‎ She was a dancer at first. But one day she thought that she could also sing___2___. So she went to visit a music teacher. The teacher___3___her to sing a few songs and then said that she would not be successful in singing, ___4___ she didn’t have a good voice. ___5___Zhu Mingying didn’t give up. She spent a lot of time___6___ to music lessons. She had___7___ time to rest. She didn’t have much money to buy___8___ delicious food. Life was really hard for her at that time .But Zhu Ming ying felt happy, because she proved(证明)she herself could be a good singer at last___9___she practiced singing for many years.‎ If you want to do something, just___10___. You’ll be successful in the end!‎ 1. ‎______ 2. ______ 3. ______ 4. ______ ‎ ‎5. ______ 6 . ______ 7. ______ 8. ______ ‎ ‎9. ______10. ______‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (重庆) Lin is _____ good basketball player in the NBA.‎ A. a B. an ‎ C. the D. /‎ ‎( ) 2. (浙江温州) —Where does your uncle work, Jack?‎ ‎—In a _______ in Pairs. He is a policeman.‎ A. TV station B. book store C. post office D. police station ‎( ) 3. (山东滨州) —My English teacher visited Australia last summer. ‎ ‎—Which city did he visit?‎ ‎—________.‎ A. Pairs B. Washington ‎ C. London D. Sydney ‎ ‎( ) 4. (贵州遵义) Li Ming is so careful that he always looks over this exercise to _____ there are no mistakes.‎ A. make sure B. find out ‎ C. think of ‎( ) 5. (山东济南) —Your paintings are so reat, David! When did you learn______?‎ ‎—Three years ago.‎ A. to meet B. to swim ‎ C. to paint D. to sing 第三课时 Section B 1a-2e 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 队；组___________‎ ‎2. 外国的__________‎ ‎3. 意义；意思____________‎ ‎4. 改进；改善_____________‎ ‎5. 他们自己___________‎ ‎6. 业余爱好____________‎ ‎7. promise ___________‎ ‎8. discuss_______‎ ‎9. physical___________‎ ‎10. paint_________‎ ‎11. weekly_________‎ ‎12. self-improvement____________‎ II. 短语互译 ‎1. 组建足球队__________‎ ‎2. 在……的开始____________‎ ‎3. 写下；记下_____________‎ ‎4. 学着做；开始做_____________‎ ‎5. 能够做某事____________‎ ‎6. have to do with___________‎ ‎7. learn to play the piano_____________‎ ‎8. get good grades__________‎ ‎9. get lots of exercise_____________‎ ‎10. New Year’s resolution____________‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 老师在开始上课时分发卷子。‎ ‎ The teacher handed out the paper_______ ______ _______ ______ the lesson.‎ ‎2. 他说的和这件事无关。‎ ‎ What he said ________ nothing _________ _______ _______ this thing.‎ ‎3. 如果你答应了，就必须做到。‎ ‎ If you _____ _______ _______, you must keep it.‎ ‎4. 李伟昨天制定了他的新年计划。‎ Li Wei his New Year’s_______ yesterday.‎ ‎5. 我打算努力学习并取得好成绩。‎ I am going to study _ and_______ good grades.‎ IV. 根据括号内提示翻译句子 ‎1. 明年你打算做什么？(be going to)‎ ‎_______________________________?‎ ‎2. 决定有时候太难坚持了。(too…to…)‎ ‎________________________________.‎ ‎3. 把你的地址写在纸上。(write down)‎ ‎________________________________.‎ ‎4. 下周我能来看你。(be able to)‎ ‎________________________________.‎ ‎5. 你什么时候开始对音乐感兴趣的？‎ ‎(take up)‎ ‎______________________________?‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示完成单词 ‎1. Some students decide to go to f_________ countries after finishing high school.‎ ‎2. The answers to the q________ are not right.‎ ‎3. Do you know the m________ of this sign?‎ ‎4. The New Year’s r________ are usually too difficult to keep.‎ ‎5. My friends and I are d_________ the plans for the coming holiday.‎ II. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. Jack plays the violin very well. He must be a (violin) when he grows up.‎ ‎2. He goes back home (week).‎ ‎3. The (begin) of the meeting is a video about animals.‎ ‎4. What’s the (mean) of what he said?‎ ‎5. My ________(hobby)include swimming and playing the piano.‎ III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 每个人都不应该轻易地跟别人许下诺言。‎ ‎ Everyone shouldn’t ______ ______ ______ other people easily.‎ ‎2. 他尽力实践新年许下的决心。‎ ‎ He tried to carry out her _______ _______ ________.‎ ‎3. 我朋友打算明年学习一门新的外语。‎ ‎ My friend is going to ______ a new ______ language next year.‎ ‎4. 在2015年初我许了一个愿望。‎ ‎ I made a wish ________ _______ _______ of 2015.‎ ‎5. 孙老师与这件事有关系。‎ ‎ Miss Sun _______ ______ _______ with this matter.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. He’s going to practice___________‎ basketball next week.‎ A. play B. to play ‎ C. playing D played ‎ ‎( ) 2. She is ______tired ______help them study English.‎ A. so, that can’t B. very can’t ‎ C .too; can’t D. too; to ‎( ) 3. —I won’t have time to go shopping with you this afternoon.‎ ‎ —But you ______me yesterday.‎ A. ordered B .mentioned ‎ C .promised D. knew ‎( ) 4. (湖北随州) —Which hobby do you think ______ the least time?‎ ‎—Collecting stamps.‎ A. takes up B. puts up ‎ C. gives up D. makes up ‎( ) 5. Kim always studies English very hard, so she always ______ in the English tests.‎ A. gets good grades ‎ B. gets lots of exercise ‎ C. won the first prize ‎ D. got good grades ‎( ) 6. (天津) He promised _______ his old friend during his stay in Tianjin.‎ A. see B. seeing ‎ C. saw D. to see ‎( ) 7. This is an important problem. Please .‎ A. write it down B. write down it C. write it in D. write in it. ‎ V. 句型转换 ‎1. My grandpa cooks for us every week. (用next week 改写)‎ ‎ My grandpa _______ _______ ________ _________ for us next week.‎ ‎2. The resolution is so hard that he can’t keep it. (改为同义句)‎ The resolution is hard for him _______ keep.‎ ‎3. They are going to keep healthy by taking exercise. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ _______ they __________ to keep healthy?‎ ‎4. He gets lots of exercise. (改为同义句)‎ ‎ He exercises _______ ________.‎ ‎5. My New Year’s resolution is to get good grades. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ _____ your New Year’s resolution?‎ 创新提升 阅读理解.‎ Jack and Hob are going to high school now. Jack wants to be an engineer. He is going to build roads, bridges and houses. Hob is interested in math and science, but he is going to study medicine. He wants to be a doctor. ‎ Kate is good at music. She wants to be an artist. She is going to sing and dance for people. Joan wants to be a woman astronaut. She loves science. She says, "I am going to explore(探索) space some day." "What do you want to be, Alice?" Joan asks me, "Oh, I want to be a teacher when I grow up. I am going to teach in the countryside." Each of us is doing his best at school. I am sure we will do something good for our country. ‎ ‎( ) 1.             students are talking. ‎ A. Two B. Three ‎ C. Four D. Five ‎ ‎( ) 2. Who wants to be an artist? ‎ A. Joan B. Jack ‎ C. Kate D. Alice ‎( ) 3. Two students are interested in             . ‎ A. medicine B. music ‎ C. space D. science ‎ ‎( ) 4. What does an engineer do? ‎ A. He takes care of patients in a hospital. ‎ B. He sings and dances for the people.‎ C. He explores space.‎ D. He builds bridges, roads and houses. ‎ ‎( ) 5. Where does Alice want to teach?‎ ‎ A. On a farm. B. In the countryside.‎ C. At home. D. Abroad.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (江苏徐州) If you ______ your name on the paper, you can get a magazine.‎ A. cut down B. look down C. turn down D. write down ‎( ) 2. (四川达州) My sister likes playing _______ piano, but she doesn’t like playing _______ football.‎ A. the; the B. /; the ‎ C. the; / D. a; an ‎( ) 3. (甘肃白银) Finish your homework first, and then you’ll ______ watch TV for an hour.‎ A. can B. be able to ‎ C. able D. could ‎( ) 4. (江苏盐城) —Do you have any _____?‎ ‎—Yes, I like chess and drama best.‎ A. jobs B. duties ‎ C. hobbies D. problems ‎( ) 5. (陕西) Don’t worry. We’re old enough to look after _______.‎ A. myself B. me ‎ C. ourselves D. us ‎( ) 6. (吉林) —Shall we go to visit our teachers after this exam?‎ ‎—_______.‎ A. Take it easy ‎ B. Never mind ‎ C. Sounds good ‎( ) 7. (上海) _______ carefully, Michael! There’s a school ahead.‎ A. Drive B. To drive ‎ C. Drove D. Driving 第四课时 Section B 3a-Self Check 知识清单 I. 词汇、短语互译 ‎1. 自己的；本人的___________‎ ‎2. 个人的；私人的____________‎ ‎3. 关系；联系_____________‎ ‎4. make resolutions_____________‎ ‎5. personal improvement______________‎ ‎6. sing together_____________‎ ‎7. make me happy_____________‎ II. 选词填空。‎ cook; schoolwork; end; improve; own ‎1. The tired(疲倦的) children have to do much _________ after school.‎ ‎2. At the ________ of the term, I got good grades ‎3. Don’t open that box. It’s my thing.‎ ‎4. He joined the English club to _______his English.‎ ‎5. Li Lei likes delicious food and he wants to be a .‎ III.根据汉语补全句子 ‎1. 我的英语学得不好，我想参加一个英语学习班。‎ I don’t learn English well. I’m going to _____ _______ ______ ______.‎ ‎2. 一些女生说，他们准备经常锻炼身体保持苗条。‎ ‎ Some girls said they were going to _____ very often ______ keep fit.‎ ‎3. 我将做我想做的事情。‎ ‎ I’m going to ______ ______ I want to do.‎ ‎4. 我从2016年学习唱EXO的歌了。‎ ‎ I’m going to _______ _______ learning to sing EXO’s songs from the year of 2016.‎ ‎5. 他们很快就能告诉你那个消息了。‎ ‎ They will ______ _______ ______ tell you the news soon.‎ 基础闯关 I. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. What is your brother going to be when he ______ (grow) up?‎ ‎2. I think I enjoy_______ (be) a reporter. I like communicating with other people.‎ ‎3. I’m going to be a teacher. I want to get good______ (grade).‎ ‎4. The film describes the _______ (relate) between a young man and an older woman.‎ ‎5. Lucy wants ______ (get ) a lot of exercise every week.‎ II. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. Although it’s late, he still keeps on _________ his homework.‎ ‎ A. does B. do ‎ C. doing D. did ‎( ) 2. He’s going to buy a big house when he _________ more money.‎ ‎ A. has B. have ‎ C. will have D. is going to have ‎( ) 3. Lin Tao and Ling Hai __________ a swim tomorrow.‎ A. are going to has ‎ B. is going to have ‎ C. are having ‎ D. are going to have ‎( ) 4. The girl is listening to ______pop music.‎ A. a B. many ‎ C .a piece of D a few ‎ ‎( ) 5. (湖北黄冈) —Why are you walking so quickly, Edward?‎ ‎—There ______ a talent show in ten minutes.‎ A. will have ‎ B. will be ‎ C. is going to have ‎ D. are going to be ‎( ) 6. (安徽芜湖) —Do you like the song You and Me?‎ ‎—Of course. It ______ really beautiful.‎ A. listens B. sounds ‎ C. thinks D. hears III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 我可以问你一个私人问题吗？‎ ‎ May I ask you a _________ ___________?‎ ‎2. 我父亲在40岁时开始学习英语。‎ ‎ My father _________ _______ the study of English at the age of forty.‎ ‎3. 这些学生都有他们自己的见解。‎ ‎ These students had opinions of ________ _______.‎ ‎4. 我们应该尽最大努力去改善我们的环境。‎ ‎ We should ______ our best to ______ our environment.‎ ‎5. 他家里养着很多不同种类的鱼。‎ ‎ He has many _______ _______ of fishes at home.‎ 创新提升 I. 完形填空 Kate’s brother Danny 1 some New Year’s resolutions this year. 2 , he is going to learn 3 the guitar. She is going to take the guitar lessons 4 practice every day. Next he wants to get good 5 . He is going to study 6 and he is going to do all his homework 7 he watches TV. Finally, he wants to learn 8 new language. He is going to buy some 9 CDs and practice 10 at home every morning. ‎ ‎( ) 1. A. made B. make ‎ C. is make D. making ‎( ) 2. A. First B. Second ‎ C. Third D. Last ‎( ) 3. A. play B. playing ‎ C. to play D. plays ‎( ) 4. A. but B. or C. then D. and ‎( ) 5. A. lesson B. class ‎ C. grades D. record ‎( ) 6. A. harder B. worse ‎ C. more beautiful D. cooler ‎( ) 7. A. when B. as C. if D. before ‎( ) 8. A. an B. a C. the D. /‎ ‎( ) 9. A. Japan B. Japanese ‎ C. China D. America ‎( ) 10. A. they B. their ‎ C. them D. theirs II. 阅读理解 Americans love sports-they love to play them, to watch them on televisions, and to talk about them. But this hobby sometimes has serious results-at least to the players. For example, ‎ when people play tennis, sometimes they hurt their elbow and in this way they develop "tennis elbow". Also it is easy to hurt knees in a football game. These injuries happen while the player is having fun, but they still hurt. ‎ A few months ago, Kathleen Simmons, who loves playing volleyball, hurt her knee in a volleyball game. Her doctor told her that she needed a very difficult operation (手术) or she might not be able to play again, She felt very sad and didn't know what to do. Then Simmons learned about "video operation". With the help of this new science in medicine, doctors can now repair many injuries and get people back on the playing field and back to their jobs much faster. Simmons found a hospital that was using this new science and went to see the doctors there. The doctors told her the operation could help. For this operation, her doctor didn't have to open her knee. Instead he put a very small camera lens (镜头) inside her knee. The lens sent back pictures, which appeared on a television screen. As he worked, he could see the inside of her knee on the TV. With the help of the large pictures on the screen, the doctor knew exactly what to do when he was making the repairs. Simmons started walking five days after her operation. “My knee hurt a lot the first few days,” she said.  “But I felt better very quickly.” ‎ Now, six months after her operation, Simmons can do everything she did before her injury. "It feels like a new knee," she said.  "I can even play volleyball again.”‎ 根据短文内容，回答下列问题 。‎ ‎1. Do Americans love sports?‎ ‎___________________________________‎ ‎2. What sport is Simmons interested in?  ___________________________________‎ ‎3. What did the doctor put inside Simmons' knee?‎ ‎ _____________________________________‎ ‎4. What problem may people have when they play sports?‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ ‎5. What's the advantage of the new science?‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (山东聊城) —What’s your ______?‎ ‎—I like listening to music.‎ A. job B. age C. hobby D. fan ‎( ) 2. ( 黑龙江鸡西) The math problem is so hard. I really don’t know______.‎ A. how to do it B. how to do ‎ C. what to do it Unit 6 单元测试卷 第一部分 选择题（共45分）‎ I. 单项选择（本题共15分， 每小题1分）‎ ‎( ) 1.—How are you going to be _______?‎ ‎—I’m going to practice basketball every day.‎ A. a basketball player ‎ B. a teacher ‎ C. a pianist ‎ D. a pilot ‎( ) 2. —_______does he want to be when he_______?‎ ‎—He wants to be a computer programmer.‎ A. What, grows up B. How, grows up C. What, grow up D. How, grow up ‎( ) 3. The boy wants to be a(n)_______. He studies math really hard. ‎ A. writer B. cleaner ‎ C. engineer D. artist ‎( ) 4.— My New Year’s resolution is to travel to Qingdao.‎ ‎— .‎ ‎ A. That sounds great ‎ B. Sorry to hear that ‎ C. Sure ‎ D. I’d love to ‎( ) 5.—Is she going to be actor?‎ ‎—Yes. She is taking _______ lessons on weekends now.‎ ‎ A. a, actor B. an, actor ‎ C. an, acting D. a, action ‎( ) 6. —Where is Linda?‎ ‎— She may be at home. But I’m not sure________ it.‎ A. at B. about ‎ C. with D. in ‎( ) 7. I’m going to write articles and send ______some famous magazines and newspapers when I’m older. ‎ A. it to B they do ‎ C. them for D. them to ‎( ) 8. I think this exhibition can _____ us rich and famous.‎ A. let B. have C. help D. make ‎( ) 9. the beginning of the term, my mother bought me a new schoolbag.‎ A. With B. On ‎ C. At D. By ‎( ) 10. They are going to the party ______ next Sunday.‎ ‎ A. in B./ ‎ C. the D. for ‎( ) 11. Mary with her friends________ going_______ tomorrow.‎ ‎ A. are, boating B. is, shopping C. are, biking D. was, fishing ‎( ) 12. His resolution the life in the next year.‎ A. has to do with B. is good at C. is next to D. cross from ‎( ) 13. I want to go to the movie tonight. But my parents don’t agree ______ me.‎ ‎ A. with B. on ‎ C. at D. in ‎( ) 14. Does Mike want _______ the first one to get to the top of the mountain?‎ A. to be B. to go ‎ C. for D. to ‎ ‎( ) 15. When Jack was a small boy, he was able to ______ the piano and violin.‎ A. playing B. played ‎ C. plays D. play II. 完形填空（本题共10分，每小题1分）‎ Now many children have different dreams. Some are going to be famous actors. Some children want to be writers some day. They want to write stories or __1__ for people to read. That sounds ___2__! It’s good to write something for people to read! __3___ they should know that they need to be good ___4__ first before they are really good writers because reading books __5___ helpful for them to become good writers. They should read __6__ books, instead of watching TV and spending a lot of time ____7__ games when they are free. ‎ There is more fun in reading, and you must _8___ more books to read. ‎ Before you decided to be a good writer, you’d better say to _9___, “I am going to do my best to read more and ___10__ books!”‎ ‎( ) 1. A. information B. news ‎ C. pictures D. books ‎( ) 2. A. well B. good ‎ C. happy D. intelligent ‎ ‎( ) 3. A. but B. though C. and D. or ‎ ‎( ) 4. A. students B. listeners ‎ C. readers D. players ‎ ‎( ) 5. A. are B. is C. was D. were ‎ ‎( ) 6. A. a lots of B. much ‎ C. many D. a lot ‎ ‎( ) 7. A. to play B. play ‎ C. played D. playing ‎( ) 8. A. look over B. look for ‎ C. look up D. look at ‎ ‎( ) 9. A. him B. them C. yourself D. you ‎ ‎( ) 10. A. many B. much C. more D. most III. 阅读理解（本题共20分，每小题2分）‎ A I’m very glad to work in the east of Shanxi, China. Because people here are friendly to me. How time flies! I have worked here for one year and New Year’s Day is coming soon again. I’ll have a holiday then, but I don’t know what to do, I really have a lot of work to do at home. I think this will be a god chance for me to do it. But I don’t like to do it at home that way. In fact I can work all the rest of the year. Last year I went to Huashan Mountains. Everything there was beautiful, but it is too cold this time of year. I think this is not a good time to go to the mountains. But I really want to go to some place. Perhaps this would be very nice to go to the History Museum It’s about fifteen miles and it will take me half an hour to go there by bus. After thinking it over, I’m sure that this is the better time for the History Museum than the mountains. I guess I’m going to the History Museum next week.‎ ‎( ) 1. I have work here for _______.‎ A. two years B. one year ‎ C. half a year D. a year and a half ‎( ) 2. I’m working ______ now.‎ A. in the Huashan Mountains ‎ B. in the east of Shanxi ‎ C. in the History Museum ‎ D. in America ‎( ) 3. I went to the Huashan Mountain _______.‎ A. in summer B. in spring ‎ C. in winter D. in autumn ‎( ) 4. I think going to the History Museum is better than________.‎ A. staying at home ‎ B. working in China ‎ C. thinking it over ‎ D. hiking to the mountains ‎( ) 5. Going to the History Museum will cost me_______.‎ A. a little money ‎ B. much money ‎ C. a little time ‎ D. many things B A SCHOOL REPORT ‎ Name: Edward Scott    ‎ School: Revin Grove State High School ‎ Grade: 7 Term ending: 6 May ‎ Subjects (科目):‎ Mathematics ‎ He is a little weak (弱) in this, but he has tried his best to catch up with others. ‎ Science ‎ He can work out many difficulties. Well done! French ‎ He is the best in the class. Keep it up. ‎ History ‎ He is not so good at this, but has done better than before. ‎ Geography ‎ He is familiar (熟悉的) with the names of many places in the world. ‎ Music ‎ He doesn't like pop songs, though sings very well. ‎ Conduct: Fair No. in class: 9 Absences: 8 ‎ Remarks (评语): Edward has the ability to do a lot better. More work is needed next term. ‎ Class teacher: Ivy ‎ Principal: M. L. Martin ‎ School reopens: 11 September ‎( ) 6. After reading this, we know this is _____.‎ A. a studying plan of Edward Scott ‎ B. a teaching plan of Ivy ‎ C. a school report of Edward Scott ‎ D. a working plan of M. L. Martin ‎ ‎( ) 7. Which of the following is NOT mentioned(提到) in the passage? ‎ A. PE. B. Music ‎ C. Mathematics D. History ‎ ‎( ) 8. Edward's best subject is _____.‎ A. science B. English ‎ C. geography D. French ‎ ‎( ) 9. Edward is NOT so good at _____.‎ A. science and geography B. mathematics and history ‎ C. history and French ‎ D. music and English ‎ ‎( ) 10. According to the passage, which of the following sentences is TRUE?‎ A. Edward can't sing songs very well. ‎ B. Edward doesn't do well in science.‎ C. Edward can do better if he works harder next term.‎ D. Edward learns two foreign languages in school.‎ 第二部分 非选择题（共55分）‎ IV. 任务型阅读(每小题2分，共10分)‎ English and Chinese speaking maid wanted in Shanghai. ‎ Very good salary! ‎ Hi! We are an English family living in Shanghai and we are now looking for a maid (女佣) to help us take care of our house, my 6-year-old son (He speaks Chinese.) and our 2 new babies. We will give you a very good salary. You should a. like children b. be good at cooking c. be funny and kind.‎ If you want to be a member of our family, please call me at 1305056009.‎ 请仔细阅读短文，然后在信息卡上填入相关信息。‎ Information card ‎ ‎ Where does the family live?‎ ‎1. _______‎ How many children do they live? ‎ ‎2. _______ ‎ What language does their son speak? ‎ ‎3. _______ ‎ The maid should _______ ‎ a. speak both 4._______ and Chinese ‎ b. be kind and like children ‎ c. be good at 5._______ ‎ V. 情景交际（根据上下文，选择适当的句子完成对话。每小题2分，共10分）‎ A. How far is it from here?‎ B. So do I.‎ C. Is it far from here?‎ D. How many times have you read it?‎ E. Who is the writer of the book?‎ F. What do you think of this book?‎ G. How can I get there?‎ A: Hi, Jeff! You’re reading the book Tiny Times(《小时代》)again.‎ B: Yes. I’m going to be a writer like him when I grow up.‎ A: 1 .‎ B: Five times. Every time I read it, I can always learn something new.‎ A: Really? 2 ‎ B: Guo Jingming. I think he is a great Chinese writer. What about you?‎ A: 3 He is also my favorite writer. Please let me have a look at it. ‎ B:OK, here you are! 4 ‎ A: It’s wonderful. Where did you buy it?‎ B: In the Rose Bookshop.‎ A: I don’t know where it is. 5 ‎ B: No. Only 10 minutes’ walk from here.‎ A: Oh, I see. I’m going there to get one, too.‎ VI. 用所给词的适当形式填空（每小题1分，共5分）‎ foreign; grow up; move; save; enjoy; send; pilot ‎1. I am going to be a _____ because I like flying in the sky.‎ ‎2. My aunt work in Canada. I often communicate with her by _____ e-mails.‎ ‎3. I’m going to learn a ______ language this year.‎ ‎4. The boy says that he is going to be an actor when he ______.‎ ‎5. —Do you ______ reading the storybook?‎ ‎—Yes. It’s very interesting.‎ VII. 根据汉语补全句子，每空一词（每小题2分，共10分）‎ ‎1. 在新学期开始，我做了一个新计划。‎ ‎______ _______ _______ _______ the new term, I made a new plan.‎ ‎2. 当你姐姐长大的时候她想做什么？‎ What is your sister going to be when she ______ _______.‎ ‎3. 这些问题非常重要，请记下来。‎ ‎ These questions are important. Please _______ them _______.‎ ‎4. 如果你想成为演员，你应该上表演课。‎ ‎ If you want to be an actor, you should _____ ______ _______.‎ ‎5. 对不起，我不同意你的意见。‎ ‎ Sorry, I can’t ______ ______ you.‎ VIII. 书面表达（20分）‎ 每个人对未来都会有梦想，请围绕下面的几个问题，谈谈你对心目中的工作向往。内容可以适当发挥，不少于60词。‎ ‎1. What is your dream job?‎ ‎2. Where would you like to work?‎ ‎3. How are you going to work?‎ ‎4. Why do you like your dream job?‎ ‎___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ Unit 7 Will people have robots?‎ 第一课时 Section A 1a-2d 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 纸；纸张___________‎ ‎2. 污染n.______________‎ ‎3. 将来____________‎ ‎4. 环境_____________‎ ‎5. 行星__________‎ ‎6. earth____________‎ ‎7. part__________‎ ‎8. plant____________‎ ‎9. pollute____________‎ ‎10. prediction____________‎ II. 短语互译 ‎1. 参与；发挥作用____________‎ ‎2. 在地球上_________‎ ‎3. live to be …..years old___________‎ ‎4. in danger __________‎ ‎5. plant more trees___________‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 在未来人们可以活到200岁吗？‎ ‎ ______ people _______ to be 200 in the future?‎ ‎2. 我们将在家里用电脑学习。‎ We _________ ________ at home _______ computer.‎ ‎3. 我认为在3000年所有的东西都会免费。‎ ‎ I think everything __________ _________ _______ in 3000.‎ ‎4. 每个人都应该参与到挽救地球的活动中。‎ ‎ Everyone should ________ a _______ in _______ the earth.‎ ‎5. 人们将会搬到其他行星上吗？‎ ‎ Will people ___________ _________ other ________?‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示补全单词 ‎1. Many people want to have a r________ to help them in their homes.‎ ‎2. There will be more air p_______ if more and more people drive cars to work.‎ ‎3. I want to write to may parents. Please pass me a piece of p_________.‎ ‎4. E______ begins to grow in spring.‎ ‎5. They did more work with less money and f_______ people.‎ II. 用所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. He _____ (come) back in two days.‎ ‎2. He started on Sunday and ________(arrive) in Beijing after three days.‎ ‎3. I have ______ (little) homework to do than you.‎ ‎4. —I think there will be ______ (few) trees in the future.‎ ‎—I think so.‎ ‎5. More and more ________ (pollute) made the environment worse.‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. People will have robots in their homes. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ ________ people ________ robots in their homes?‎ ‎2. There will be only one country in the future. (改为否定句)‎ ‎ There _______ ______ only one country in the future.‎ ‎3. I will move to Beijing next month. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ ______ ______ move to Beijing?‎ ‎4. They clean the room every day. (用tomorrow改写句子)‎ ‎ They ______ ______ the room tomorrow.‎ ‎5. Will people use money in 100 years? (作否定回答)‎ ‎ ______ , ______ _______.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. I hope I have _____ free time. I don’t like to keep busy.‎ A. more B. less ‎ C. fewer D. many ‎( ) 2. (山东临沂) Traveling to space is no longer just a dream. Russia _______ the first hotel in space in the near future.‎ A. builds B. will build ‎ C. build D. has build ‎( ) 3. There _____ some ______ on the table.‎ A. are; paper B. are; paper C. is; paper D. is ; papers ‎( ) 4. (四川绵阳) I hope Tim can come to my birthday party. Then we ______ a much happier time.‎ A. have B. had ‎ C. will have D. have had ‎( ) 5. —When _____ you ______ here?‎ ‎—In a month.‎ A. will; moving B. do; move C. will; move D. did; move ‎( ) 6. They have ______ work today and they’ll have _____ tomorrow.‎ A. more; more B. much; more ‎ C. much; much D. many; more ‎( ) 7. More and more people can _____ 100 years old in the future.‎ A. live B. live to be ‎ C. living to be D. live to 创新提升 I. 情景交际 (填写适当的词补全对话，每空一词)‎ John: Ann. What do you think of the 1 ?‎ Ann: The future? Well, I think we 2 study at home 3 computer. And we don’t have to go to school?‎ John: You think so? What 4 will you do?‎ Ann: We’ll take long vacations, too.‎ John: Where will we be 5 to go on vacation?‎ Ann: To the 6 .‎ John: To the moon? Why don’t we 7 vacations on the 8 ?‎ Ann: Because it’s much 9 interesting on the moon 10 on the earth.‎ ‎1. ______ 2. ______ 3. ______ 4. _______‎ ‎5. _____ 6. ______ 7. _______ 8. _______‎ ‎9. ______ 10. _______‎ II. 选择合适的单词或短语并用其适当形式填空 pollute; much; paper; crowded; dangerous ‎1. I hope there will be ______ plants in the future.‎ ‎2. Books will be on the computers, not on _______ in 100 years.‎ ‎3. Do you think the city will be much ______?‎ ‎4. Let’s help the little boy. He seems in _____.‎ ‎5. There will be less ______ if we drive cars less.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (四川眉山) There _____ an English party in our school tomorrow evening.‎ A. have B. will have ‎ C. is going to have D. will be ‎ ‎( ) 2. (安徽合肥) I hear our teacher will be back _____ three weeks’ time.‎ A. at B. in C. for D. after ‎( ) 3. (黑龙江绥化) I think Bob is the suitable person to make the job because he can do the work well with ______ money and _____ people.‎ A. less; fewer B. less; more ‎ C. more; fewer ‎( ) 4. (四川德阳) —Can I help you, sir?‎ ‎—I’m like to have 100 ______. I want my students to draw pictures.‎ A. piece of paper ‎ B. pieces of paper C. pieces of papers 第二课时 Grammar Focus-3c 知识清单 I. 词汇、短语互译 ‎1. 和平___________‎ ‎2. 海；海洋____________‎ ‎3. 建筑；建造_____________‎ ‎4. 天空___________‎ ‎5. more buildings ___________‎ ‎6. in the future___________‎ ‎7. spend time___________‎ II. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 在未来孩子们将会由更少的家庭作业和更多的空闲时间。‎ Children will have _______ homework and _______ free time in the future.‎ ‎2. 在周末家人们通常花时间在一起。‎ Families usually _______ time _______ on weekends.‎ ‎3. 我认为将来会有更多的城市，因为人们将会建造更多的建筑物。‎ I think there will be _______ _______, because people will build _______ _______ in the future.‎ ‎4. 环境处于极大的危险中。‎ ‎ The environment will _______ ________ ________ ________.‎ ‎5. 城市在未来会很大、很拥挤吗？‎ ‎ ______ cities ______ very big and crowded in the future?‎ III. 补全对话, 每空一词 A：Hi，Mary，I watched a TV show just now about the 1 . Do you think there will be schools in ten years?‎ B: Yes，I think so. And I think there will be 2 computers than books.‎ A: I think there will be fewer books，too. Computers will be 3 ，and every home will have one.‎ B：I 4 think homes will have computers. I don't think there will be any homes. We will 5 on space stations.‎ A: I don't want to. Could I live here?‎ B：No，you'll have to live on the space station, too. But they'll be 6 than houses. They'll be bigger and cleaner.‎ ‎1. ______ 2. ______ 3. ______ 4. _______‎ ‎5. _______ 6. _______‎ 基础闯关 I. 用所给单词的正确形式填空 ‎1. I think we will play a part in _____ (save) the world.‎ ‎2. Tom was surprised by all the ______ (pollute) on the beach.‎ ‎3. I think the kids in the future will study at home on the ________ (computer).‎ ‎4. There ______ (not be) more and more plants in the future.‎ ‎5. We can’t see blue ______ (sky) in Beijing now.‎ II. 选择方框内的单词并用其适当形式完成下面的句子 have; be; not move; much; rain ‎1. Do you think he has _______ money than you?‎ ‎2. The students ___________ a meeting this weekend.‎ ‎3. It _________ this evening, so we can’t go hiking.‎ ‎4. _____ you free recently?‎ ‎5. My sister________ to France this year.‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. Tom will play ping-pong with me. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ ______ Tom ______ with me?‎ ‎2. They had a meeting yesterday. (用tomorrow改写句子)‎ ‎ They ______ _____ a meeting tomorrow.‎ ‎3. I think Jim will be an actor in eight years.(对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ ______ ______ you think Jim will be an actor?‎ ‎4. There will be some tall buildings in your school next year. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ ______ there be _______ buildings in our school next year?‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. People should keep the __________ between countries.‎ A．relationship B．peace C．discussion D．role ‎( ) 2. (广西贺州) There __________ a basketball game in our school this evening.‎ A. is going to have B. will have ‎ C. will is D. will be ‎ ‎( ) 3. —Look! What’s that moving high up in _____ sky?‎ ‎—It must be _____ plane.‎ A. a; the B. the; / ‎ C. the; a D. /; a ‎( ) 4. —Mingming, how much did you ______ on this book?‎ ‎—Fifty yuan.‎ A. take B. spent ‎ C. took D. spend ‎( ) 5. —What will the future ______？‎ ‎—No one can predict exactly.‎ A．be like B．be C．like D．like as ‎( ) 6. —Jack is leaving for holiday.‎ ‎—Really? Where _______ he _______?‎ A. has; gone B. will; go ‎ C. did; go D. does; go 创新提升 完形填空 What will our life be like in the future？Each family will have a __1__in the future. You can ask it to do everything__2__you.It will serve you__3__hours a day. The robot will__4__like a human. It can talk with you when you are __5__.You won't know whether it is a human__6__ a robot when you meet it on the street.‎ People will have__7__time to work and more time to travel. The vehicles (交通工具)in the future will fly freely in the sky because every vehicle will have wings with it. They will__8__ you to any place you want to visit. You can go to__9__during your travel when you feel tired. All vehicles will be__10__because they're driven by robots.‎ ‎( ) 1. A. rocket B．robot C．car D．computer ‎( ) 2. A. on B．about C．around D．for ‎( ) 3. A. eight B．twenty C. twenty-four D．forty-eight ‎( ) 4. A. sound B．live C．look D．take ‎( ) 5. A. happy B．alone C．comfortable D．ill ‎( ) 6. A. so B．and C．or D．but ‎( ) 7. A. less B．few C．more D．most ‎( ) 8. A. make B．take C．let D．turn ‎( ) 9. A. school B．work C．parks D．sleep ‎( ) 10. A. safe B．dangerous C．unpleasant D．impossible 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (浙江台州) —How do you like Li Yundi?‎ ‎—A cool guy! His music ______ really beautiful.‎ A. tastes B. sounds ‎ C. smells D. looks ‎( ) 2. (河北) I’m busy now. I ____ to you after school this afternoon.‎ A. talk B. talked ‎ C. will talk D. have talked ‎( ) 3. (天津) Robots ______ more heavy work for us in the future.‎ A. will do B. did ‎ C. have done D. were doing ‎( ) 4. (上海) Aunt Lucy will tell us something about her trip to Australia when she ____ back.‎ A. came B. comes ‎ C. would come D. will come 第三课时 Section B 1a-2e 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 太空；空间____________‎ ‎2. 人的；人___________‎ ‎3. 有危险的_____________‎ ‎4. 工厂_______________‎ ‎5. 相信_______________‎ ‎6. 同意；赞成_____________‎ ‎7. 可能的_____________‎ ‎8. 已经；早已_____________‎ ‎9. apartment_____________‎ ‎10. impossible______________‎ ‎11. Japan_____________‎ ‎12. disagree____________‎ ‎13. shape____________‎ ‎14. inside_______________‎ II. 短语互译 ‎1. 数以百计的____________‎ ‎2. 寻找____________‎ ‎3. 太空站_____________‎ ‎4. 多次的；反复的____________‎ ‎5. 突然倒下__________‎ ‎6. look like____________‎ ‎7. do the same things as sb. ___________‎ ‎8. wake up__________‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 你必须反复练习才能做得更好。‎ ‎ You must exercise __________ _________ ________ _______ and you will do better.‎ ‎2. 他的叔叔是一名宇航员。他去年在太空站工作。‎ ‎ His uncle is an ______. He worked in a ______ ______ last year.‎ ‎3. 公园里有好几百人。‎ ‎ There are _______ ________ people in the park.‎ ‎4. 这个女孩看起来像她的爸爸。‎ ‎ The girl _______ _______ her father.‎ ‎5. 你能帮我找下钥匙吗？我把它弄丢了。‎ ‎ Can you help me ______ ______ my key? I have lost it.‎ IV. 根据括号内提示翻译句子 ‎1. 未来将会由更多的机器人。( more; in the future)‎ ‎___________________________________.‎ ‎2. 在公寓的对面是一个图书馆。(across from)‎ ‎ ___________________________________.‎ ‎3. 人类将在太空站居住。(live; space station)‎ ‎ ___________________________________.‎ ‎4. 我们可以乘坐火箭去太空吗？(fly to)‎ ‎ __________________________________?‎ ‎5. 走路去学校花费了我10分钟的时间。(take)‎ ‎ __________________________________.‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示完成单词 ‎1. It’s d______ to cross the street when the traffic lights are red.‎ ‎2. My uncle is a worker. He works in a f_____.‎ ‎3. I d________ with my brother. I think he isn’t right.‎ ‎4. I think it is i_______ to live on the moon.‎ ‎5. My mother gave me two h_______ yuan to buy a new watch.‎ II. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. My father ______ (take ) me to the zoo last Sunday.‎ ‎2. I think you should eat ______ (little) food and do more exercise.‎ ‎3. He ________ (write) to his pen-friend yesterday evening.‎ ‎4. There _______ (be) an important meeting this afternoon.‎ ‎5. We _______ (not have) the piano lesson the day after tomorrow.‎ III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 妈妈每天让她做很多的家务。‎ ‎ Her mother ______ her ______ a lot of housework every day.‎ ‎2. 为了学好英语李明每天反复读英语。‎ ‎ Li Ming reads English _______ _______ _______ _______ to learn it well.‎ ‎3. 汤姆到处找他的表，最后终于找到了。‎ ‎ Tom __________ __________ his watch everywhere, and at last he found it.‎ ‎4. 在25-50年之后机器人甚至能够像人类一样交谈。‎ Robots will even ______ ______ ________ ‎ ‎ talk like humans in 25 to 50 years.‎ ‎5. 请在六点钟叫醒露西。‎ ‎ Please ______ ______ Lucy at six.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. Everyone wants to _____ to the moon for _______.‎ A. walk; vacation ‎ B. run; vacation ‎ C. swim; holidays ‎ D. fly; holidays ‎( ) 2. (四川广安) —How many teachers are there in your school?‎ ‎—About four______.‎ A. hundreds of B. hundred ‎ C. hundreds ‎( ) 3. I’ll fly the rocket to the moon as an _______ like Yang Liwei in ten years.‎ A. astronaut ‎ B. computer programmer ‎ C. engineer D. reporter ‎( ) 4. (河北) Jason likes the ______ of the cake. It is a heart.‎ A. color B. size ‎ C. smell D. shape ‎( ) 5. —What are you doing? ‎ ‎—I’m ______ my bag. I can’t find it.‎ A. looking at B. looking for ‎ C. looking after D. looking up V. 句型转换 ‎1. There will be more people in our country. (改为否定句)‎ ‎ _______ ________ _______ more people in our country.‎ ‎2. Sally played football yesterday. (改为一般将来时)‎ ‎ Sally ______ _______ ______ tomorrow,‎ ‎3. Humans will live on the moon. (对划线部分提问) ‎ ‎ ______ ______ humans _______?‎ ‎4. They will go back home in five days. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _____ ______ _______ they go back home?‎ ‎5. His father went to Hong Kong by plane last month. (改为同义句)‎ ‎ His father ______ _____ Hong Kong last month.‎ 创新提升 阅读理解 Dear Anita, ‎ ‎ In your last letter you asked me about my plans for the future. First, I will finish high school. Then I will go to college and study to be a doctor. I won’t get married right away because it takes a long time to become a doctor. I want to help sick people. I’m going to learn a lot about illness. Maybe I will find a treatment for cancer. I’ll be famous and I will become very rich.‎ ‎ After I become a successful doctor, I’ll get married. I want to marry an interesting person. For example, my wife might be an artist. We will have one or two children. Doctors get paid quite ‎ a lot so I think we will have a nice house. We will travel a lot. I want to visit Australia, Europe, and Africa.‎ ‎ Are these plans, or dreams? Do they sound crazy to you? Write soon and tell me about your plans.‎ Josh 根据短文内容，判断正（T）误（F）。‎ ‎( ) 1. Josh wants to become a doctor.‎ ‎( ) 2. Josh wants to get married very soon.‎ ‎( ) 3. Josh’s wife might do interesting work.‎ ‎( ) 4. Josh wants to have a lot of children.‎ ‎( ) 5. Josh will travel to India.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (湖北孝感) The peaceful music in the CD made the students______ relaxed.‎ A. feel B. feels ‎ C. felt D. to feel ‎( ) 2. (广西钦州) —Let me help you carry the box, Granny.‎ ‎—Thank you, Li Lei. It’s very nice ______ you_____ me.‎ A. of; to help B. for; help ‎ C. of; helping D. for; helping ‎( ) 3. (湖北随州) It’s dangerous ______ with the wild animal.‎ A. for us to play B. of us playing C. for us playing D. of us to play ‎( ) 4. (湖北黄石) The 3D Titanic is a moving film. My parents have seen it twice_______.‎ A. yet B. already ‎ C. never D. almost ‎( ) 5. (山东潍坊) —I’ll to France for a holiday next month. —Great! ______ !‎ A. Good luck ‎ B. Best wishes C. Glad to see you again ‎ D. Have a good time ‎( ) 6. (江苏宿迁) Our school is so famous that _______ people come and visit it every term.‎ A. hundred B. hundreds ‎ C. hundred of D. hundreds of 第四课时 Section B 3a-Self Check 知识清单 I. 词汇、短语互译 ‎1. 很可能；大概_____________‎ ‎2. 在……期间____________‎ ‎3. 假期；假日______________‎ ‎4. 单词______________‎ ‎5. 甚至；连；愈加____________‎ ‎6. as a reporter_____________‎ ‎7. the meaning of ___________‎ ‎8. fly up into__________‎ ‎9. both…and…‎ II. 选词填空 danger; factory; agree; possible; apartment ‎1. — I think we should go there by bus.‎ ‎—I ______ with you. We should take the train.‎ ‎2. His ______ is far from the school, so he goes to school stay at home.‎ ‎3. It is ______ for us to climb the mountains. We’d better stay at home.‎ ‎4. —There will be more big ______ in the future.‎ ‎—I agree with you.‎ ‎5. It is ______ to get more money. That’s too difficult.‎ III.根据汉语补全句子 ‎1. 有朝一日我甚至会飞上太空。‎ ‎ I’ll even fly up into the sky _______ _____.‎ ‎2. 生活中有好事也有坏事。‎ ‎ There will be ______ good things _______ bad things.‎ ‎3. 未来的生活将会是什么样的？‎ ‎ What will the future _______ _______?‎ ‎4. 20年后，我想成为一名新闻记者。‎ ‎ In 20 years, I think I’ll be a ________ _________.‎ ‎5. 没有什么好怕的，天不会塌下来。‎ There’s nothing to be afraid of. The sky won’t _______ ______.‎ 基础闯关 I. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. It will ______ (probable) rain. We’d better stay at home.‎ ‎2. There are many kinds of _______ (robot) on show in Beijing.‎ ‎3. I think ______ (human) will have less time in the future.‎ ‎4. People built many _______ (build) in this city.‎ ‎5. Thanks for always being here ______ (help) me.‎ II. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. The old man is very healthy. I think he will live______.‎ A．to be 100 years old B．100 years old C．at 100 years old D．in 100 years old ‎( ) 2. —In 2050，what will the world's population be?‎ ‎—I think cities will be really big and crowded because there will be a lot ______ people.‎ A．much B．more C．many D．less ‎( ) 3. I can't find my notebook. Could you help me ______ it?‎ A．look for B．look at C．look like D．look out ‎( ) 4. —How many people came to Beijing for the Olympic Games in 2008?‎ ‎—It's hard to say. _____people，I think.‎ A．Million of ‎ B．Millions of C．Two million of ‎ D．Two millions of ‎( ) 5. (江苏苏州) —Why are you in such a hurry, John? —There ______ a basketball match between Class Three and our class in ten minutes.‎ A. is going to be ‎ B. is going to have ‎ C. will have ‎ D. will hold ‎( ) 6. I ______believe everything ______ be free in 20 years.‎ A．/；won't B．don't；won't C．don't；will D．will；doesn't ‎( ) 7. Some old houses ________in my hometown last summer.‎ A．fall down B．fell down C．write down D．wrote down ‎( ) 8. (四川内江) It is very important for us _____ English well.‎ A. learn B. learning ‎ C. to learn D. learned III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 两年以后我就上高中了。‎ ‎ I will be in a high school ______ two _______.‎ ‎2. 教育可以在其中起到作用。‎ ‎ Education can _______ a _____ in it.‎ ‎3. 我弟弟将和我做相同的事情。‎ ‎ My brother will do _________ __________ things ______ me.‎ ‎4. 她的脸看上去像个红苹果。‎ ‎ Her face _____ ______ a red apple.‎ ‎5. 整个夏天我们每天都去游泳。‎ ‎ We go swimming every day ______ the summer.‎ 创新提升 I. 完形填空(阅读下面短文，根据短文意思和首字母提示补全单词，使短文意思完整)‎ In some science fiction movies，people in the future have their own robots. They help with the housework，and do the 1.m______ unpleasant jobs.‎ Some scientists believe that there will be such robots，and they think that robots will be 2.a______ to talk to people in the future. But James White thinks it will be 3.d______ for a robot to do so. However，they agree it may 4.t______ hundreds of years. They are now trying to make robots look like people，and do the same things 5.a______ us. There are already robots 6.w______ in factories. They do simple jobs over and over again. They will never get bored.‎ In the future，there will be more robots everywhere，and humans will have 7.l______ work to do. New robots will have many different 8.s______.Some will look like humans and 9.o______ might look like snakes. They could help look for people under buildings 10.a______ an earthquake. That may not seem possible now，but we never know what will happen in the future!‎ II. 阅读理解 Life in the future will be different from life today. Between then and now many changes will happen. But what will the changes be?‎ The population is growing fast. There will be many people in the world and most of them will live longer than people live now.‎ Computers will be much smaller and more useful，and there will be at least one in every home. And computer studies will be one of the important subjects in schools then. People will work fewer hours than they do now and they will have more free time for sports，watching TV and traveling. Traveling will be much cheaper and easier. And many more people will go to other countries for holidays.‎ There will be changes in our food，too. More land will be used for building new towns and houses for all the people. Then there will be less room for cows and sheep，so meat will be more expensive. Maybe no one will eat it every day. Instead，they will eat more fruits and vegetables. Maybe people will be healthier. Work in the future will be different，too. Robots will do dangerous and hard work. Because of this，many people will not have enough work to do. This will be a problem.‎ ‎( ) 1. In the future there will be ______.‎ A．much more fruit B．fewer people C．less vegetables D．less people ‎( ) 2. Every family will have at least a ______ in the future.‎ A．robot B．cow C．TV set D．computer ‎( ) 3. In the future people don't have to ______.‎ A．work long hours B．work fast C．walk on foot D．eat meat ‎( ) 4. People may not eat ______ as much as they do today.‎ A．fruit B．fish C．meat D．rice ‎( ) 5. One big problem in the future is that ______.‎ A．many people don't have to work B．many people will not be able to find work C．people have to work fast D．all the work will be done by robots 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (辽宁锦州) David is a good boy. He always makes ______ mistakes than others.‎ A. little B. less C. few D. fewer ‎( ) 2. (辽宁营口) Dulangkou Middle School of Shandong Province(省) is so famous that ______ people come and visit it every day.‎ A. hundred B. hundreds ‎ C. hundred of D hundreds of ‎ Unit 7 单元测试卷 第一部分 选择题（共45分）‎ I. 单项选择（本题共15分， 每小题1分）‎ ‎( ) 1. It's careless(粗心)______the same mistake again in your composition.‎ A．for you to make ‎ B．for you making C．of you to make D．of you making ‎( ) 2. The TV program was very ______ and we all got______.‎ A．bored；bored B．boring；boring C．bored；boring D．boring；bored ‎( ) 3. —He got an A in last week's math test.‎ ‎—It is ______！His math is always the worst.‎ A．possible B．simple C．impossible D．bored ‎( ) 4. What do you think Sally will be ______ 10 years?‎ A．after B．behind C．later D．in ‎( ) 5. “There __________ a meeting next Monday.” means “They______a meeting next Monday.”‎ A．will be; will be B．will have; will have C．will be; will have D．will have; will be ‎( ) 6. It ______ that everyone ______ to laugh.‎ A．seems；loves B．seem；love C．seems；love D．seem；loves ‎( ) 7. Look at those black clouds. It _____ rain. Let’s hurry.‎ A. must B. will ‎ C. would D. is going to ‎ ‎( ) 8. —Will people live to be 300 years old?‎ ‎ —_________.‎ A. No, they aren’t ‎ B. No, they won’t ‎ C. No, they don’t ‎ D. No, they can’t ‎( ) 9. It’s very difficult for a robot _____ the same things ____ a person.‎ A. doing; like B. do; form ‎ C. to do; as D. does; as ‎( ) 10. The boy ______ animals and he can jump _____ many animals.‎ A. likes; like B. like; like ‎ C. like; likes D. likes; likes ‎( ) 11. Mr. White thinks that robots won’t _____ talk to people.‎ A. can B. able ‎ C. be able to D. are able to ‎ ‎( ) 12. In this exam, you’re asked to write a composition of about_______.‎ A. 90-words B. 90-word ‎ C. 90 words D. 90 word’s ‎( ) 13. —I need _____ to write ______ now.‎ ‎—Here you are.‎ A. two papers; in ‎ B. two pieces of paper; on ‎ C. two paper; on ‎ D. two pieces of paper; in ‎( ) 14. —Let’s play a part_____ the room.—That sounds great.‎ A. clean B. cleaning ‎ C. to clean D. in cleaning ‎( ) 15 —What a strong sandstorm(沙尘暴)! _______?‎ ‎—I’m afraid so. We’re getting into the sandstorm season now.‎ A. Do you like sandstorm days B. Will it be sunny C. Will you stay at home D. Will it last long II. 完形填空（本题共10分，每小题1分）‎ Life in the year 3044 is very different 1 life in the 21st century. We will do many of the things you do, but we do them 2 . For example, we now have e-friend help us and keep us company. An e-friend is a machine that looks just 3 a human being. It can walk and talk and can do almost 4 we human beings do. My e-friend is like me a lot and we have 5 fun together. She helps me 6 my homework and we often go swimming. She is programmed to take care of me if anything 7 , so I always feel safe when we are together. She can also send me messages, just like old-fashioned e-mail, and I can download information from her memory. It great 8 an e-friend—I am never lonely and I always have someone to talk 9 .‎ I would like to tell you more about life in the year 3044. Maybe 10 I will be able to travel back and visit you.‎ ‎( ) 1. A of B. from C. in D. with ‎( ) 2. A. different B. difference ‎ ‎ C. differently D. differences ‎( ) 3. A. like B. for C. at D. up ‎( ) 4. A. something B. anything ‎ C. nothing D. everything ‎( ) 5. A. many B. a number of ‎ ‎ C. a lot of D. the number of ‎ ‎( ) 6. A. with B. at C. on D. doing ‎( ) 7. A. will happen B. happens ‎ ‎ C. happened D. is going to happen ‎( ) 8. A. have B. having ‎ C. to have D. had ‎( ) 9. A. to B. about ‎ C. with D. both A and C ‎( ) 10. A. one day B. in one day ‎ C. after one day D. with one day III. 阅读理解（本题共20分，每小题2分）‎ A Tom and Fred are talking about the year 2040. “What will our world be like in the year 2040?” “I don’t know,” says Fred. “What do you think?” “Well, no one knows, but it’s interesting to guess.” “In the year 2040 everyone will carry a pocket computer. The computer will give people the answers to all their problems. We shall all have telephones in our pockets, too, and we’ll be able to talk to our friends all over the world. Perhaps we’ll be able to see them at the same time.” “ A lot of people will live and work under the sea. Perhaps there will be big towns, ‎ factories and farms under the sea, too.” “Machines will do most of the work, so people will have more holidays, perhaps they’ll work only two or three days a week. They’ll be able to fly to the moon by spaceship and spend their holidays there.” “I’m looking forward to the year 2040. I hope to go to the moon!” “And I hope I’ll be able to live under the sea.” says Fred. “Won’t that be very interesting? Just like a fish!”‎ ‎( ) 1. Tom and Fred are talking about ______.‎ A. their school life ‎ B. their life in the future C. their life in the past ‎ D. their family ‎( ) 2. Machines will _______.‎ A. do most of the work instead of people B. do as much work as people C. so some of the work instead of people D. not do the work ‎( ) 3. From their conversation, we know that________.‎ A. Fred hopes to fly to the moon B. both of them hope to fly to the moon C. one of them hopes to fly to the moon D. neither of them hopes to fly to the moon ‎( ) 4. Fred says ______‎ A. he likes fish very much B. he hopes to go fishing under the sea C. he would like to live under the sea like a fish D. he wants to catch fish ‎( ) 5. Which of the following statements is NOT true according to the passage?‎ A. People will be able to fly to the moon in a spaceship.‎ B. People will have more holidays.‎ C. People will talk to their friends all over the world.‎ D. All people will live under the sea.‎ B The computer changed our lives in the 1980s, the Internet changed our lives in the 1990s, and the robots will change our lives in the new century.‎ Do you think there will be robots in people’s homes? It’s not a dream that every home will have a robot.‎ Now, robots are not only able to help people do the housework, they can also help the doctors do the difficult operations, play chess with people, play the piano and so on. ‎ A new cooking robot is used in Beijing. It can cook all the dishes on the menu, you only need to wait two or four minutes. In the future, the robot will be a nurse, a security(安全) guard, or a partner in your life. ‎ Experts(专家) believe robots will be used everywhere form the industrial(工业的) robots to service robots. In the future, robots will become a part of the family, and provide close service for people. We all look forward to the new robots age.‎ ‎( ) 6. _______ changed our lives in the 1990s.‎ A. The robots B. The computers C. The TV sets D. The Internet ‎( ) 7. According to the passage, we know that a new cooking robot is being used in _______.‎ A. the future B. Beijing ‎ C. many countries D. many families ‎( ) 8. What can the robots do now?‎ A. They can help people do the housework.‎ B. They can help the doctors do the difficult operations.‎ C. They can play chess with people.‎ D. A, B and C.‎ ‎( ) 9. Robots will become part of the family________.‎ A. in the 1980s B. in the 1990s C. in the past D. in the future ‎( ) 10. Which is the vest title of the passage?‎ A. The computers changed our lives B. Robots can cook C. Robots are coming D. Robots will be doctors 第二部分 非选择题（共55分）‎ IV. 任务型阅读(每小题2分，共10分)‎ Here is a page from a magazine called Future. Read the following information about things that may happen in twenty years:‎ Cars will run on solar power(太阳能) and will be much cleaner and safer. For example, if you are too close to another car or if you are driving dangerously, your car will slow down or stop by itself.‎ New cities will have to be built in the sea. Some cities on water will have two levels(层). People will live on the upper level, the lower level will be used for traffic, shops and factories.‎ Biotechnology(生物技术) will make food better and healthier. Plants without insects or illnesses(病虫害) will be developed. The taste of fruit and vegetables will be better and food will be kept longer.‎ Many new ways to cure(治愈) illnesses will be found. People will use products of genetic engineering(基因产品) to cure more illnesses. However, some new illnesses will appear.‎ 根据短文内容，填写表格。‎ Things To happen in 1.________years.‎ Cars To run on solar power; to be much 2.__________.‎ New cars To be 3._________in the sea Biotechnology To make food better and healthier, plants will have no insects or illness. The ‎ 4.________ of fruit and vegetables will be better and better.‎ Illnesses To be cured, some new illnesses will appear, some people have to find new 5._________to cure new illnesses.‎ V. 情景交际（根据上下文，选择适当的句子完成对话。每小题2分，共10分）‎ A: So what will you be in the future, Liangliang?‎ B: I will be a basketball player like Yao Ming.‎ A: Sounds great. But I don’t think it is easy to be a basketball player. 1._________‎ B: I will do some exercise every day so that I can be strong enough. And I will take the basketball lessons.‎ A: 2.__________‎ B: Why do you want to be a doctor?‎ A: Because I can help many sick people.‎ B:8.________‎ A: I’d like to work here in our hometown. I want to do something for our hometown.‎ B: 4.__________‎ A: Wonderful! And we should work hard to make our dreams come true.‎ B: 5.________‎ A. I hope so, too.‎ B. I will be a doctor.‎ C. OK. Let’s do it right now.‎ D. You’re welcome.‎ E. How are you going to do that?‎ F. Thanks. I will do it.‎ G. Where will you work?‎ VI. 用所给词的适当形式填空（每小题1分，共5分）‎ believe; possible; side; during; pollute ‎1. —Do you think which ______ is right?‎ ‎—I have no idea.‎ ‎2. It’s _____ to go there on foot because it’s too far from here.‎ ‎3. I ______ they will have a happy life in the future.‎ ‎4. Water_____ is bad for our health. We should protect(保护) the water.‎ ‎5. ______ May Day, many people want to Mount Huang.‎ VII. 根据汉语补全句子，每空一词（每小题2分，共10分）‎ ‎1. 一百年后人们将住在空间站。‎ People______ ______ ______a space station______100 years.‎ ‎2. 将来一切都将是免费的。‎ ‎______will______ ______ ______ ______ ______.‎ ‎3. 我们家乡将有一个火车站。‎ ‎______ ______ ______a railway station in our hometown.‎ ‎4. 你十年后的生活将会是什么样？‎ What ______ your life______ ______in ten years?‎ ‎5. 多久之后你能完成这份工作？‎ ‎______ ______will you finish the work?‎ VIII. 书面表达（20分）‎ 请预测一下50年以后的中学生生活，用英语写一篇50-80词的短文。‎ Students' Life in 50 Years ‎___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ Unit 8 How do you make a banana milk shake?‎ 第一课时 Section A 1a-2d 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 摇动；晃动_____________‎ ‎2. 蜂蜜___________‎ ‎3. 勺；调羹_______________‎ ‎4. 倒出；倾倒____________‎ ‎5. 增加；添加___________‎ ‎6. 最后；最终____________‎ ‎7. salt ___________‎ ‎8. yogurt______________‎ ‎9. blender____________‎ ‎10. watermelon______________‎ ‎11. pot___________‎ ‎12. peel_____________‎ II. 短语互译 ‎1. 打开___________‎ ‎2. 奶昔___________‎ ‎3. 切碎____________‎ ‎4. how much_________‎ ‎5. one cup of __________‎ ‎6. Russian soup__________‎ ‎7. another ten minutes__________‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. —怎样做香蕉奶昔？‎ ‎—让我给你做一个。‎ ‎—_____ do you make a banana________ ________?‎ ‎—Let me make it for you.‎ ‎2. 请打开灯，屋子里太暗了。‎ ‎ Please ______ ______ the light, the room is too dark.‎ ‎3. —我们需要多少酸奶呢？‎ ‎—大约两杯。‎ ‎—_______ _______ ______ do we need? —About two _______.‎ ‎4. 能给我削一个苹果吗？‎ ‎ Could you _______ an apple for me?‎ ‎5. 我们需要把水倒进锅里。‎ ‎ We should _______ the water_______ the pot.‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示补全单词 ‎1. If you have a fever, you should drink hot tea with h________.‎ ‎2. I don’t like milk, but I like y_______.‎ ‎3. Please p_____ the water, it smells terrible.‎ ‎4. My father likes eat w________ in summer.‎ ‎5. I need a s_______ to drink the soup.‎ II. 用所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. How many ______ (spoon) of sugar do you want?‎ ‎2. There is a lot of _______ ( honey) in the glass.‎ ‎3. Is there any _______ (orange) in the glass?‎ ‎4. There are two ______ (cup) of tea on the table.‎ ‎5. Mike always _______ (shake) his head when he doesn’t agree with others.‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. Drink the milk shake. (改为否定句)‎ ‎ _______ _______ the milk shake.‎ ‎2. I need two cups of yogurt. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ ______ _______ do you need?‎ ‎3. He wants one spoon of honey. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ _______ _______ of honey does he want?‎ ‎4. Let’s cut up the bananas. (改为同义句)‎ ‎ ______ ______ cutting up the bananas?‎ ‎5. Drink the milk shake every day. (用she为主语改写句子)‎ ‎ _______ _______ the milk shake every day.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. The blender is too noisy. Would you please ______?‎ A. turn off it B. turn on it ‎ C. turn it off D. turn it on ‎( ) 2. —_____ yogurt do we need for the milk shale?‎ ‎—One cup.‎ A. How many B. How much C. How D. What ‎( ) 3. (湖北黄冈) After nine years’ hard-work, finally his dream came true.‎ A. at the end B. at the moment C. at once D. at last ‎( ) 4. —How do you make fruit salad?‎ ‎—_____cup up three bananas and a watermelon. Next put them in a bowl.‎ A. First B. Next ‎ C. Then D. Finally ‎( ) 5. —How much milk does your mother need?‎ ‎—She needs ______.‎ A. two milk ‎ B. two milks ‎ C. two teaspoons of milks ‎ D. two teaspoons of milk ‎( ) 6. (浙江舟山) It’s time for CCTV news. Let’s _____ the TV and watch it.‎ A. turn on B. get on ‎ C. try on D. put on ‎( ) 7. (浙江宁波)—Can I help you, dear?‎ ‎—Yeah, I don’t know ______ a banana milk shake. Maybe you can teach me.‎ A. what to do B. when to make ‎ C. how do make D. why to do ‎( ) 8. Let’s _____ the old man across the road.‎ A. help B. to help ‎ C. helping D. to helping 创新提升 I. 情景交际 (填写适当的词补全对话，每空一词)‎ A: Do you like ______(1) salad? ‎ B: Yes, I like fruit salad very much. ‎ A: Let's ______(2) some now. ‎ B: OK. How many ______(3) do we need? ‎ A: Let me see. We ______(4) two apples. ‎ B: And how many ______(5) do we need? ‎ A: Three. ‎ B: OK. How many ______(6) do we need? ‎ A: Only one. ‎ B: How much ______(7) do we need? ‎ A: One cup. ‎ B: Here are two apples, three bananas, one watermelon and one cup of yogurt. And here is a bowl. It's ready now. Let's begin to make it. ‎ II. 选择合适的单词或短语并用其适当形式填空 cut up; turn on; spoon; forget; final ‎1. ________ he won the first prize after two hours.‎ ‎2. Could you please add two ______ of honey to the water?‎ ‎3. You should _______ some meat before we make dumplings.‎ ‎4. Don’t __________ the TV, the baby is sleeping.‎ ‎5. I ______ to tell my friend I can’t come.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (宁夏) The room was dark, so she asked me to ______ the lights.‎ A. turn up B. turn down ‎ C. turn off D. turn on ‎( ) 2. (浙江湖州) How many ______ do we need to make fruit salad?‎ ‎—Two should be enough.‎ A. cabbage B. potatoes ‎ C. bananas D. lemon ‎( ) 3. (山东青岛) —Remember _____ to my daughter’s dance show next Friday.‎ ‎—Of course I will. I’ll never forget______ her dance for the first time last year.‎ A. to come; to see ‎ B. coming; to see C. to come; seeing ‎ D. coming; seeing ‎( ) 4. (山东济南) —Alice, could you help me ______ the meat? I want to make some dumplings for dinner.‎ ‎—OK. I’ll do it right now.‎ A. put up B. give up ‎ C. use up D. cut up 第二课时 Grammar Focus-3c 知识清单 I. 词汇、短语互译 ‎1. 食糖___________‎ ‎2. 干酪；奶酪_______________‎ ‎3. 玉米；谷物____________‎ ‎4. 挖；凿____________‎ ‎5. 洞；孔；坑_______________‎ ‎6. popcorn___________‎ ‎7. machine_________________‎ ‎8. half a cup___________‎ ‎9. take out______________‎ ‎10. plant a tree_____________‎ II. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 请把他的名字加到名单上。‎ ‎ Please ______ his name ______ the list.‎ ‎2. 他们挖了一个洞，然后栽上了一棵小树。‎ ‎ They ______ _______ ______, and then planted a little tree.‎ ‎3. 请把水倒入碗中。‎ ‎ Please _______ the water ______ the bowl.‎ ‎4. 我没有决定住在哪儿。‎ ‎ I didn’t decide _______ _______ _______.‎ ‎5. 我们在那又待了两天。‎ ‎ We stayed there for two _______ _______.‎ III. 补全对话, 每空一词 A: How do you make fruit salad? ‎ B: First 1. __________ 2. ___________three bananas, three apples and a watermelon. Next 3.__________ the fruit in a bowl. 4. __________ put in two 5. __________ of honey and a cup of yogurt. 6. __________ 7. __________ it all up.‎ 基础闯关 I. 用所给单词的正确形式填空 ‎1. Don’t forget________ (turn) off the light when you leave the room.‎ ‎2. Tina _______ (buy) some oranges and apples to make the milk shake.‎ ‎3. I spent an hour _______ (make) a bottle of delicious apple milk shake.‎ ‎4. Fifteen minutes is enough for you _______ (cut) up some tomatoes.‎ ‎5. You need _______ (add) some red sugar to the soup.‎ II. 从方框中选择适当的短语填空 turn off; turn on ; add…to…; mix up; cut up ‎1. Please ___________ the radio. There is a weather report now.‎ ‎2. Did you _______ sugar_____ the coffee?‎ ‎3. Please help me ______ the pears. I want to make fruit salad.‎ ‎4. Remember to _________ the lights before you leave the classroom.‎ ‎5. Please ________ the ingredients to make fruit salad.‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. There is a cup of tea on the table. (改为复数形式)‎ ‎1. There __________ __________ of tea on the tables.‎ ‎2. Lily needs some help. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ _____ Lily ______ _______ help?‎ ‎3. Can you tell me how I can make popcorn? (改为同义句)‎ Can you tell me how_________ _________ popcorn?‎ ‎4. Ten minutes isn’t enough, I need another ten minutes. (改为同义句)‎ ‎ Ten minutes isn’t enough, I need ______ ______ minutes.‎ ‎5. I want a cup of tea.(对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ ______ _______ of tea do you want?‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. Please ______ the TV, I want to watch football match on TV.‎ A. turn on B. turn off ‎ C. open D. close ‎( ) 2. He _____ some milk _____ the banana shake.‎ A. added; to B. added; in ‎ C. put; to D. added;/‎ ‎( ) 3. (湖北黄冈) —What would you like to drink, girls?‎ ‎—_______, please.‎ A. Two glass of water ‎ B. Two glass of waters C. Two cups of tea ‎ D. Two cups of teas ‎( ) 4. —What is your sister doing now?‎ ‎—_______ the onions.‎ A. Cut up B. To peel ‎ C. Cutting on D. Peeling ‎( ) 5. He is very tired and he _____ to have a good rest.‎ A. need B. needs ‎ C. needed D. needn’t ‎( ) 6. Do you know ______ women teachers are there in your school?‎ A. how many B. how much ‎ C. how D. how often 创新提升 完形填空 Some English words have some __1__behind them. The word "sandwich" is very __2__ in England. Do you want to know the story behind it? You must know something about an Englishman __3_ Sandwich. He lived in the __4_ century.‎ Sandwich was rich, but he _5__ cards. He often played for 24 hours and he didn't __6_ to have his meals. He asked his men __7_ him some meat and bread so he could play when he was eating. He put meat between two pieces of bread and held the bread_8__ his left hand when he was playing with his right hand. People liked his idea and began to eat bread and meat__9_.‎ From the name of Sandwich, we__10_ the word "sandwich" today.‎ ‎( ) 1. A. stories B. words ‎ C. history D. experience ‎( ) 2. A. interesting B. popular ‎ C. beautiful D. different ‎( ) 3. A. names B. about ‎ C. called D. of ‎( ) 4. A. eighteenth B. eight ‎ C. last D. twenty-first ‎( ) 5.A.enjoys playing ‎ B. enjoyed to play ‎ C. enjoyed playing ‎ D. made ‎( ) 6.A.come B. start ‎ C. begin D. stop ‎( ) 7.A.to bring B. to take ‎ C. to put D. to show ‎( ) 8. A. in B. on C. to D. by ‎( ) 9. A. by this way B. in this way C. in same way D. on this way ‎( ) 10. A. call B. know ‎ C. take D. have 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (山西) I like ______ a lot, and my mother usually cooks it in different ways.‎ A. fish B. potatoes C. noodles ‎( ) 2. (江苏淮安) It’s getting dark. Please ______ the light.‎ A. turn on B. turn off ‎ C. turn down D. turn around ‎( ) 3. (黑龙江齐齐哈尔) How many ______ are there in the basket?‎ A. potato B. bread ‎ C. tomatoes ‎( ) 4. (山东济南) —Jenny, I need some milk. ‎ ‎—OK. Mum. ______ do you need?‎ A. How much B. How many C. How often D. How long ‎( ) 5. (四川绵阳) —______ do you make a banana milk shake?‎ ‎—Peel the banana first and blend it with milk.‎ A. What B. When ‎ C. How D. Where 第三课时 Section B 1a-2e 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 三明治____________‎ ‎2. 黄油___________‎ ‎3. 传统的____________‎ ‎4. 秋天；秋季______________‎ ‎5. 漂泊者；旅行者_______________‎ ‎6. 英格兰_____________‎ ‎7. 胡椒粉________________‎ ‎8. temperature____________‎ ‎9. turkey___________‎ ‎10. celebrate______________‎ ‎11. serve_______________‎ ‎12. lettuce____________‎ ‎13. cover____________‎ ‎14. Thanksgiving_______________‎ II. 短语互译 ‎1. 传统食品____________‎ ‎2. 一片面包___________‎ ‎3. 两勺黄油_____________‎ ‎4. at this time__________‎ ‎5. main dish___________‎ ‎6. fill…with…_____________‎ ‎7. thin pieces_________________‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 在大多数国家，家庭成员喜欢聚在一起欢庆特殊的日子。‎ In _______ _______, family members like to get together to celebrate their special day.‎ ‎2. 为什么你不把杯子装满热水呢？‎ ‎ Why don’t you _______ your cup _______ hot water?‎ ‎3. 你喜欢三明治里的生菜吗？‎ ‎ _________ __________ ________ lettuce in a sandwich?‎ ‎4. 这个特殊日子的由来有很多原因。‎ ‎ There are many ______ _______ this special day.‎ ‎5. 将火鸡放在一个大盘子里并且淋上肉汁。‎ ‎ Place the turkey on a large plate and _____ it _______ gravy.‎ IV. 根据括号内提示翻译句子 ‎1. 他们对这位老人表示感谢。(give thanks to)‎ ‎ __________________________________.‎ ‎2. 你需要两片面包吗？(piece of)‎ ‎ __________________________________?‎ ‎3. 人们如何庆祝感恩节？(celebrate)‎ ‎ __________________________________?‎ ‎4. 请把火鸡切成薄片。(cut…into…)‎ ‎ ___________________________________.‎ ‎5. 感恩节是在11月的第四个星期四。(fourth; Thursday; November)‎ ‎ ___________________________________.‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示完成单词 ‎1. When a______ is coming, the leaves fall down from the trees.‎ ‎2. There are some oranges on the p________.‎ ‎3. I will go to E_______ to learn English and it’s famous for the Big Ben.‎ ‎4. The high t_________ made the turkey delicious.‎ ‎5. He likes some bread with b_______ for breakfast.‎ II. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. How many ________ (tomato) do you need?‎ ‎2. Can you help me put some _______ (sugar) on the plate?‎ ‎3. Don’t eat these bread _______ (piece), they were bad.‎ ‎4. My grandmother feeds some ________ (chicken) in the yard.‎ ‎5. There are millions of __________ (travel) to Beijing every year.‎ III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 他把黄油和糖拌在一起了。‎ ‎ He ______ the butter and sugar _________.‎ ‎2. 对于你的帮助，我深表谢意。‎ ‎ I’d like to __________ _________ for your _________.‎ ‎3. 这是一种学习英语的好方法。‎ ‎ Here is ______ _______ _______ to learn English.‎ ‎4. 凯特用双手捂着脸。‎ ‎ Kate __________ her face _________ her hands.‎ ‎5. 那个男孩用沙子把瓶子装满了。‎ ‎ The boy _______ the bottle _______ sand.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. ______ the books in the bookcase, Tom.‎ A. Put B. To put ‎ C. Putting D. Puts ‎( ) 2. —Would you like ______ apple?‎ ‎—No, thanks. I’m full.‎ A. other B. another ‎ C. the other D. others ‎( ) 3. (四川南充) _______ call me Wang Wang! It’s my dog’s name.‎ A. Not B. No C. Don’t ‎ ‎( ) 4. “Autumn” also means _______ in America.‎ A. fall B. hall ‎ C. elevator D. mail ‎( ) 5. My sister is a _______ and she enjoys _______ very much.‎ A. travel; traveling ‎ B. traveler; traveling ‎ C. traveling; traveling ‎ D. travel; traveler ‎( ) 6. The nurse took my _______ and told me that I had a fever.‎ A. technology B. temperature ‎ C. teaspoon D. teenager ‎( ) 7. (四川凉山) —I feel very thirsty and hungry after a long walk.‎ ‎—Would you like some ______ and ______?‎ A. apple juice; sandwich ‎ B. apples juice; sandwiches ‎ C. apple juice; sandwiches V. 句型转换 ‎1. This pair of shoes is eight dollars. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎_________ ________ _________ this pair of shoes?‎ ‎2. My mother can make a banana milk shake.（改为一般疑问句）‎ ‎ _____ your mother ______ a banana milk shake?‎ ‎3. Place the turkey on a large plate. (改为否定句)‎ ‎_________ _________ the turkey on a large plate.‎ ‎4. He studies English by reading aloud. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎________ _______ he ________ English?‎ ‎5. I want to buy two bottles of juice. （对划线部分提问）‎ ‎ __________ _________ ________ of juice _________ you want to buy?‎ 创新提升 阅读理解 Ann likes fish and chips. What is your favorite meal at home? Have you eaten food from another country? Here is some information about some kinds of foods you might eat. ‎ Dumplings are eaten in different ways around the world. Chinese jiaozi, Italian ravioli, Jewish kreplach, and Polish pierogi are kinds of dumplings filled with meat, cheese, or vegetables. ‎ Pizza an international favorite came from the city of Naples, Italy about 700 years ago. Pizza is the Italian word for pie, so you don’t need to say pizza pie. ‎ Hamburger was first called Hamburger steak. Later, people just called them hamburgers. The hamburger was named after the city of Hamburg, Germany. Frankfurters were named after the city of Frankfurt, Germany. About 1900, an American selling cooked frankfurters called them hot dogs because they looked like a kind of small dog. ‎ Ice-Cream Cones were first sold at the World’s Fair in St. Louis Missouri, in the USA, in 1904. A scoop of ice cream was put into a cone. You eat the ice cream; then you eat the cone－nothing left to throw away. ‎ Sandwiches were named after the Earl of Sandwich, a rich man in England in the 1700s. While he was playing cards, he asked a servant to bring him two pieces of bread with a piece of meat between them. This was the first sandwich.‎ 根据短文内容，判断正（T）误（F）。‎ ‎( ) 1. Chinese jiaozi, Italian ravioli, Jewish kreplach, and Polish pierogi are kinds of dumplings. ‎ ‎( ) 2. Pizza is the Italian word for noodles. ‎ ‎( ) 3. In 1904, the first ice-cream cones were sold at the St. Louis World’s Fair. ‎ ‎( ) 4. A sandwich has sand in it. ‎ ‎( ) 5. Another name for a frankfurter is hot dog. ‎ ‎( ) 6. The Earl of Sandwich lived in England in the 1700s.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (四川遂宁) I’m so hungry. Please give me _______ to eat.‎ A. three bread ‎ B. three piece of bread ‎ C. three pieces of breads ‎( ) 2. (湖北随州) —Mum, I am hungry. May I have some _______?‎ ‎—Of course. But don’t eat too much.‎ A. bread B. noodle ‎ C. dumpling D. hamburger ‎( ) 3. (湖北十堰) —The box is too heavy to carry. What’s in it?‎ ‎—Oh, it is _______ books.‎ A. filled with B. covered with C. used for D. asked for ‎( ) 4. (广西南宁) There isn’t any ______ in the bowl.‎ ‎ A. noodles B. tomatoes ‎ ‎ C. rice D. eggs 第四课时 Section B 3a-Self Check 知识清单 I. 词汇、短语互译 ‎1. 混合_________‎ ‎2. 盘子；碟子__________‎ ‎3. gravy___________‎ ‎4. oven__________‎ ‎5. rice noodles____________‎ ‎6. of course___________‎ ‎7. over 100℃_______________‎ ‎8. it’s time to ___________‎ II. 选词填空 add; sandwiches; put; turkey; check Do you like 1. _________? I like them very much. Do you know how to make a 2._________ sandwich? Let’s have a try.‎ First, 3. _________ all the ingredients and put two spoons of butter on a piece of bread. Next cut up an onion and a tomato. 4. ________ them to the bread. Then, add three pieces of turkey and put one spoon of relish on the turkey. Finally, 5. _______ another piece of bread on the top.‎ The great turkey sandwich is ready. You can enjoy it now.‎ III.根据汉语补全句子 ‎1. 让我为你做水果沙拉。‎ ‎ _______ me _____ fruit salad for you.‎ ‎2. 然后让鸡汤非常热，超过100摄氏度。‎ ‎ Then, __________ the chicken soup very _________, _______100℃.‎ ‎3. 现在就是享受美味米线是时刻了。‎ ‎ ______ ________ _______ enjoy the rice noodles now.‎ ‎4. 我爸爸经常把面包和牛奶作为早饭。‎ ‎ My father often _______ bread and milk _________ breakfast.‎ ‎5. 请一个接一个地进入房间。‎ ‎ Please come in the room ___________ ________ _________.‎ 基础闯关 I. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. How many ________ (teacher) are there in your school?‎ ‎2. I have three________ (watch).‎ ‎3. There are some ________ (orange) on the table.‎ ‎4. I like ________ (tomato) and _________ (chicken).‎ ‎5. How much _______ (honey) do we need?‎ II. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. We must cut _____ the tomatoes and put them ______ the blender.‎ A. off; in B. up; into ‎ C. down; into D. over; in ‎( ) 2. (山东枣庄) —______ apples do we need to make fruit salad? —Let me think…We need three apples.‎ A. How long B. How often ‎ C. How much D. How many ‎( ) 3. How to eat an apple? First _____it, then eat it.‎ A. cuts B. peel ‎ C. turn D. drink ‎( ) 4. —Would you like _______? ‎ ‎—Thank you, but I’m not thirsty.‎ A. some sandwiches ‎ B. some moon cakes C. some bread ‎ D. some yogurt ‎( ) 5. (山东济南) It’s 9:30 p.m., children! ________ is time to go to bed.‎ A. That B. It C. This D. They ‎( ) 6. Please add a little salt_______ the soup.‎ A. to B. with C. by D. in ‎( ) 7. Although we _____ the hole ______ the grass, it is very dangerous.‎ A. help; with B. covered; with ‎ C. filled; with D. mixed; together ‎( ) 8. (四川广安) —Mum, I’m hungry. _______ no milk in the fridge.‎ ‎—Oh, I’ll go and buy some at once.‎ A. There is B. It is ‎ C. There are III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 首先，把西红柿切碎。‎ ‎ ________, _______ _______ the tomatoes.‎ ‎2. 到起床的时间了。‎ ‎ It’s ______ _______ _______ up.‎ ‎3. 你怎样做云南米线？‎ ‎ _______ ______ you ______ Yunnan rice noodles?‎ ‎4. 奶奶把篮子里装满了鸡蛋。‎ ‎ My grandmother __________ the basket _________ eggs.‎ ‎5. 为了借那两本书，我去了市里图书馆。‎ ‎ _______ ______ the two books, I went to the library in the city.‎ 创新提升 I. 完形填空(阅读下面短文，根据短文意思和首字母提示补全单词，使短文意思完整)‎ ‎ Tea is very 1. p_________ in the world, but more than three hundred years ago most of the ‎ people in Europe 2. d______ know anything about tea.‎ ‎ Once an English doctor 3. c________ back from China for Christmas holiday. He gave his mother some tea as a 4. p______. She told her friends about the present and 5. a_____them to come to a “tea party”. When her friends came the old woman 6.t_______ out some tea-leaves and asked them to eat. Of 7. c______, nobody liked the tea-leaves.‎ Just at that time the doctor came in. He 8. l_______ at the table and asked, “ Mother, what did you do with the tea?”‎ II. 阅读理解 The food in Britain is very different from our Chinese food. For instance （例如），they eat a lot of potatoes. They like to eat them every day. They eat bread for breakfast and usually for one other meal. They eat their bread with butter （黄油）, maybe cheese（乳酪）or jam（果酱）, things we don’t eat much in China. Cheese and butter are made from milk. They drink a lot of milk, too. They drink the milk cold or hot, and they put it in their tea. They put sugar in their tea, as well. They are the world’s biggest tea drinkers. They like Chinese tea, but they drink mostly strong black tea from India and Sri Lanka（斯里兰卡）. They don’t eat much rice. For their main meal they like meat or fish with potatoes and one or two vegetables. They serve all these together. After the main meal they always have something sweet. They call this dessert（甜点心）. They don’t have Jiaozi in Britain. 根据短文内容选择正确答案。 ‎ ‎( ) 1. People eat many ______ in Britain. ‎ A. potatoes B. beef ‎ C. butter D. milk ‎ ‎( ) 2. They eat ________ butter. ‎ A. breakfast with B. Cheese for C. bread with D. jam for ‎ ‎( ) 3. They drink strong black tea ______. ‎ A. to India B. from India ‎ C. for China D. in China ‎ ‎( ) 4. After the main meal they always ________. ‎ A. eat sweet something ‎ B. eat sweet bread ‎ C. have sweet something ‎ D. have something sweet ‎ ‎( ) 5. People don’t eat Jiaozi _______. ‎ A. in China B. in England ‎ C. from India D. from Sri Lanka 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (吉林) —Do you know the little boy ______ is helping the old man cross the road?‎ ‎—No. But how nice he is!‎ A. which B. who C. whom ‎( ) 2. (广西定西) —What would you like, sir?‎ ‎—________.‎ A. Two pop ‎ B. Two bottles pop ‎ C. Two bottles of pop ‎ D. Two bottle of pop ‎( ) 3. (贵州黔西南) Sally works very hard. Finally, she won the first place. 下列各项与划线单词意思相同的是_______.‎ A. At the end of B. At last ‎ C. Luckily D. To the end ‎( ) 4. (河北) —_______ did you pay for the CD?‎ ‎—Only nine dollars.‎ A. How many B. How much ‎ C. How long D. How often Unit 8 单元测试卷 第一部分 选择题（共45分）‎ I. 单项选择（本题共15分， 每小题1分）‎ ‎( ) 1. —_____ yogurt do you need?‎ ‎—Two cups, please.‎ A. How many B. Which C. How much D. When ‎( ) 2. There are ________ on the table. ‎ A. a glass of water ‎ B. a glass of milk ‎ C. two glasses of milk ‎ D. a glass of orange ‎ ‎( ) 3. It’s hot today. Please ______ the watermelon ______ pieces, and let’s eat them.‎ A. cut; up B. cut; into ‎ C. cut; off D. cut; down ‎( ) 4. I don’t like the color of the T-shirt. Would you show me _______ one? A. other B. the other ‎ C. another D. others ‎( ) 5. Give me ______ water, please. I’m thirsty.‎ A. little B. few ‎ C. a little D. a few ‎( ) 6. Dad, may I ______ the TV? I want to watch the soccer match.‎ A. turn on B. turn off ‎ C. turn down D. turn up ‎( ) 7. —Will your mum make you a banana milk shake?‎ ‎—_______, but she is too busy to make it.‎ A. Of course B. I hope so ‎ C. I’m afraid so D. I’m afraid not ‎( ) 8. —Let’s make fruit salad.‎ ‎—_______.‎ A. No, I’m not ‎ B. Thank you ‎ C. That’s all right ‎ D. That’s a good idea ‎( ) 9. His eyes were ______ tears as he looked happily at her.‎ A. covered with B. agreed with C. filled with D. took up ‎( ) 10. Don’t forget ______ Lin Tao about the match when you meet him.‎ A. tell B. tells ‎ C. telling D. to tell ‎( ) 11. Mr. Green often teaches us to ______ delicious food. He’s really good at cooking.‎ A. check B. do ‎ C. turn D. make ‎( ) 12. Here _______ four bowls_______ water.‎ A. is; of B. are; of ‎ C. is; for D. are; for ‎( ) 13. ______ mix these things together.‎ A. Don’t B. No ‎ C. You aren’t D. Not ‎( ) 14. We need to ______ the bananas before we eat them.‎ A. mix B. pour ‎ C. cup D. peel ‎( ) 15. Eating more vegetables is good for our health. I often eat lettuces, broccoli and _________.‎ A. tomato B. tomatos ‎ C. tomatoes D. potato II. 完形填空（本题共10分，每小题1分）‎ My favorite food is Chinese dumplings. It is a kind of ___1__ Chinese food in North China. And they’re __2___ popular during Chinese holidays and festivals. ‎ I like ___3__ dumplings not because I am from North China but ___4__ they’re really delicious. My family usually eat dumplings when all the members __5___ together. Making dumplings with my family is the happiest thing for __6___. ‎ Chinese dumplings are one of the most important foods at the Spring Festival. ___7__ the first day of a new year, the first meal is very important. People from the north and the south __8___ different food on this special day according to(根据) their own eating __9___. In North China, people usually eat dumplings. ‎ There are many kinds of Chinese dumplings with different fillings(馅). I’m sure you can __10___ the kind you like, because the fillings can be made with different ingredients(配料). ‎ ‎( ) 1. A. traditional B. active ‎ C. super D. different ‎ ‎( ) 2. A. too B. special ‎ C. also D. either ‎ ‎( ) 3. A. making B. eating ‎ C. buying D. cooking ‎ ‎( ) 4. A. if B. although ‎ C. so D. because ‎ ‎( ) 5. A. talk B. sit ‎ C. begin D. get ‎ ‎( ) 6. A. me B. us ‎ C. them D. you ‎ ‎( ) 7. A. On B. At ‎ C. For D. In ‎ ‎( ) 8. A. spend B. put ‎ C. have D. believe ‎ ‎( ) 9. A. recipes B. habits ‎ C. plans D. instructions ‎ ‎( ) 10. A. know B. find ‎ C. use D. see III. 阅读理解（本题共20分，每小题2分）‎ A Dear Linda, ‎ I’m really glad to receive your letter. You said you were learning to cook. Is it interesting? I think if you want to keep healthy, food is very important. You’ll be in good health if you try different kinds of foods, especially vegetables and fruit. I eat them every day. ‎ You asked me how to make a milk shake. There are many different kinds of milk shakes, such as apple milk shake, banana milk shake and carrot milk shake. Carrot milk shake is my favorite, because carrots and milk are both good for health. Before starting, we need a carrot, a glass of milk, some ice and two teaspoons of honey. Of course, you need a blender. ‎ Now, let’s start. First, wash the carrot and cut it up. Next, put the carrot, the milk, some ice and two teaspoons of honey into the blender. Then turn on the blender. Keep it working for only one minute. Finally, pour the carrot shake in a glass and drink it. It’s delicious! ‎ I want to learn how to make Chinese food, for example, dumplings. Could you teach me? ‎ Write soon! ‎ Yours, ‎ Sally ‎ ‎( ) 1. This letter is about how to make _____. ‎ A. fruit salad B. a milk shake C. a sandwich D. dumplings ‎ ‎( ) 2. _______ kinds of milk shakes are mentioned in the letter. ‎ A. Five B. Four ‎ C. Three D. Two ‎ ‎( ) 3. What kind of milk shake is Sally’s favorite? ‎ A. Apple milk shake ‎ B. Banana milk shake ‎ C. Strawberry milk shake ‎ D. Carrot milk shake ‎ ‎( ) 4. Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the letter? ‎ A. Milk and ice ‎ B. Sugar and yogurt ‎ C. Carrots and honey ‎ D. Vegetables and fruit ‎ ‎( ) 5. Which of the following is NOT true according to the letter? ‎ A. Sally can cook Chinese food B. Linda is learning to cook ‎ C. Sally thinks carrots are good for health ‎ D. Sally eats fruit every day B Every country has its own way of cooking. American people have their own way of cooking, don’t they? ‎ Most people in the United States like fast food, but if you think that American people don’t like cooking, you are wrong. It’s true that most Americans eat fast food for their breakfast and lunch, but they also think cooking is interesting, parents see the importance of teaching their children how to cook, and most Americans say that home-cooked meals are the best.‎ Americans have theirs own way of cooking. For example, baking is the most popular way of cooking in American. Most American families have ovens. American cooks pay attention to the balance of food. When planning a big meal, they try to cook meat, a few vegetables, some bread and sweet food. They also like to make meal look beautiful. There are too many kinds of colorful food, so the meal is healthy and look beautiful, too.‎ ‎( ) 6．Most Americans ______． ‎ ‎ A．don't like cooking ‎ B．cook food in the morning ‎ C．1ike home-cooked meals ‎ D．1ike having a picnic ‎ ‎( ) 7．What does the sentence“It's true that most Americans eat fast food for their breakfast and lunch”mean? It means______． ‎ ‎ A．they don't eat dinner ‎ B．they like eating fast food ‎ C．they only eat fast food ‎ D．they can't cook ‎ ‎( ) 8．______is the most popular way of cooking in the USA． ‎ ‎ A．Baking B．Cutting ‎ C．Frying D．Boiling ‎ ‎( ) 9．How does an American cook balance different kinds of food? ‎ A. He cooks a lot of meat． ‎ B．He cooks meat，vegetables，bread and sweet food for a big meal． ‎ C．He makes the food delicious．‎ D．He cooks a lot of vegetables． ‎ ‎( ) 10．Which is TRUE according to the passage? ‎ ‎ A. The meal looks beautiful because the foods are in ‎ different colors. ‎ B．American people only cook at home in t he evening． ‎ ‎ C．American parents don't like to teach their children to cook． ‎ D．Most people in the United states don't 1ike fast food at all．‎ 第二部分 非选择题（共55分）‎ IV. 任务型阅读(每小题2分，共10分)‎ Hey, I’m Mona. Yesterday I went to see my grandparents. She made an apple milk shake for me. Also, she taught me how to make the apple milk shake. Just follow the instructions below.‎ First, make sure you have all the ingredients. You should have two apples, some milk and some ice cream. Next, you should wash the apples and peel them. After that, please, cut the apples up. Then put the apples and ice cream in the blender. Oh, you also need to pour the milk into it. Finally, turn on the blender for two minutes. Then the apple milk shake is OK. The apple milk shake tasted very delicious. ‎ After that, I helped my grandmother sweep the floor and do the laundry. At the end of the day, I felt tired but happy.‎ 根据上文内容，在下面的空白处填入适当的词或词组。‎ How do you make an apple shake? 1 , check you have everything. 2 you wash the apples. After that, please 3 the apples and 4 the apples. 5 you 6 the ‎ apples and ice cream in the blender. You also need to 7 the milk 8 it. 9 you 10 the blender for five minutes. Well, the apple milk shake is OK.‎ ‎1. ________ 2. ________ 3. ________‎ ‎4. ________ 5. ________ 6. _________‎ ‎7. ________ 8. ________ 9. __________‎ ‎10. __________‎ V. 情景交际（根据上下文，选择适当的句子完成对话。每小题2分，共10分）‎ A：1. ‎ B：First，put the butter on a slice of bread．‎ A：2. ‎ B：Cut up an onion and a tomato．3. ‎ A：What do you do next?‎ B：4. Put the relish on the chicken．‎ A：5. ‎ B：Yes，you are right.‎ A. Add these to the sandwich.‎ B. How do you make fruit salad?‎ C. Finally put another slice of bread on the top.‎ D. How do you make a chicken sandwich?‎ E. Put the butter on one piece of bread.‎ F. And then?‎ G. Put some lettuce and the chicken slices on the sandwich VI. 用所给词的适当形式填空（每小题1分，共5分）‎ ‎1. We have some ___________ (tomato) for breakfast.‎ ‎2. Do you like lettuce in these ____________ (sandwich)‎ ‎3. Do Chinese enjoy ______________ (eat) dumplings?‎ ‎4. Would you like __________ (make) a milk shake for me?‎ ‎5. __________ (final), you should cover the pot.‎ VII. 根据汉语补全句子，每空一词（每小题2分，共10分）‎ ‎1. 不要在课堂上吃东西。‎ ‎ _______ ________ anything in class.‎ ‎2. 请给我两勺蜂蜜。‎ ‎ Please pass me two _________ _________ __________.‎ ‎3. 你需要把水倒进锅里煮三分钟。‎ ‎ You should _______ the water _______ the pot and boil for three minutes.‎ ‎4. 爱丽丝病了，你能给她削个苹果吗？‎ ‎ Alice is ill, _______ you _______ an apple for her?‎ ‎5. 他们需要另外10个男孩帮助做这项工作。‎ ‎ They need _______ ten ________ to help with the work.‎ VIII. 书面表达（20分）‎ ‎ 假如你的朋友准备了以下原料：火鸡、酸奶、牛奶、蜂蜜、面包、生菜和两个苹果。请你写一篇教你的朋友如何制作火鸡三明治的文章。‎ ‎ 1. 提示词：cut up; put; peel; a piece of; enjoy……‎ ‎2. 全文不少于60词，开头已给出。‎ First put some yogurt _______________‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎. ‎ Unit 9 Can you come to my party?‎ 第一课时 Section A 1a-2d 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 考试___________‎ ‎2. 使做好准备______________‎ ‎3. 流行性感冒___________‎ ‎4. 有空的；可获得的____________‎ ‎5. 直到……为止____________‎ ‎6. catch____________‎ ‎7. hang___________‎ ‎8. party_____________‎ II. 短语互译 ‎1. 为……做准备_______________‎ ‎2. 去看医生________________‎ ‎3. 其他时间________________‎ ‎4. 闲逛________________‎ ‎5. go bike riding_____________‎ ‎6. have the flu_____________‎ ‎7. help my parents____________‎ ‎8. too much___________‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 下周我们考试。我得为考试做准备。‎ ‎ We have an exam next week. I have to ____ ______ it.‎ ‎2. —你能和我一起去购物吗？‎ ‎—当然，我愿意。‎ ‎ —Can you ________ shopping with me? ‎ ‎—Sure, _______ _______ _______.‎ ‎3. 上周，爱丽丝没什么事做就和朋友一起逛街。‎ ‎ Last week, Alice had nothing to do and ________ ______ in the street with her friends.‎ ‎4. 汤姆知道下周才会离开。‎ ‎ Tom _______ leaving ________ next week.‎ ‎5. 感谢你对我的帮助。‎ ‎ _______ ______ helping me.‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示补全单词 ‎1. Ted is feeling ill and he’ll see a d_______.‎ ‎2. Tomorrow is Mary’s birthday, she will have a birthday p_______.‎ ‎3. We are p________ for an English test.‎ ‎4. —I can’t go to the movies.‎ ‎—Maybe a_______ time.‎ ‎5. Look! There is a cat on the wall, can you c_______ it?‎ II. 用所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. Li Ming can ______ (speak) English well.‎ ‎2. It’s raining outside, so Maria has to ______ (stay) at home.‎ ‎3. I would love _______ (make) friends with the new student.‎ ‎4. He likes _______ (hang) out with his friends in his free time.‎ ‎5. He often _____ (help) his parents on weekends.‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. Can you come to my party? (作肯定回答)‎ ‎ ________, _______ _______ ________.‎ ‎2. Thanks for your help today. (改为同义句)‎ ‎ Thanks for _____ ______ today.‎ ‎3. He has to prepare for the sports meeting. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ ______ he _______ to prepare for?‎ ‎4. Tim had a flu last week. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ _______ Tim ______a flu last week?‎ ‎5. Judy can sing and dance. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ ______ Judy ________?‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. (湖南娄底) —Must I start now? ‎ ‎—No, you _______.‎ A. mustn’t B. can’t C. needn’t ‎( ) 2. (山东滨州) —Would you like _____ camping with me? ‎ ‎—I’d like to. But I’m busy ______ my homework.‎ A. to go; to do B. to go; doing C. going; to do D. going; doing ‎( ) 3. I have no time to play computer games. I have _______ homework to do.‎ A. too many B. too much ‎ C. much too D. many too ‎( ) 4. He is still hungry. Please give him _________ hamburger!‎ A. another B. other ‎ C. an D. others ‎( ) 5. I think you should remember _____ your homework first.‎ A. finishing B. finish ‎ C. to finish D. finished ‎( ) 6. He can’t forget he went bike ______ with his friends.‎ A. ride B. riding ‎ C. to ride D. rode ‎( ) 7. He ________ leave until his teacher came in.‎ A. isn’t B. wasn’t ‎ C. didn’t D. doesn’t 创新提升 I. 情景交际 ‎(J=John L=Li Lei） ‎ J: Hello, Li Lei! ‎ L: Hi, Jim. Can you come and play football with us on Sunday? ‎ J: Sorry, I can't. __(1)__. ‎ L: Do you like going out in the car? ‎ J: Yes, I do. We sometimes go out in the car on Saturday. ‎ L: Oh, we usually go and see my uncle on Saturday. __(2)__. ‎ J: I like fishing. What about you? ‎ L: I like fishing, too. __(3)__He always catches a lot of fish. We often take the fish home for supper.__(4)__. ‎ J: __(5)__. ‎ L: My dad. I help him. We like cooking fish! ‎ J: And eating it, too. ‎ A. What do you like to do in your free time? ‎ B. My uncle is very good at fishing. ‎ C. I like eating fish. ‎ D. We sometimes go fishing. ‎ E. Dad is taking us out in the car.‎ F. Who cooks the fish? ‎ G. I will go out with my father.‎ 根据上下文，选择合适的句子填写到对话中。‎ ‎1. _______ 2. ______ 3. _______‎ ‎4. _______ 5. _______ ‎ II. 选择合适的单词或短语并用其适当形式填空 have to; prepare; available; hang out; catch ‎1. I am _______ this afternoon, I can go with you.‎ ‎2. Bob ______ clean his father car every Sunday.‎ ‎3. The cat likes _______ mice.‎ ‎4. He likes reading and often _____ in the bookstore.‎ ‎5. My mother ______ a nice breakfast this morning.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (云南大理) —Jim, can you repair the computer for me now?‎ ‎—______. I have to take care of my little sister.‎ A. Yes, I can ‎ B. Sorry, I’m afraid I can’t C. Well done ‎ D. Best wishes ‎( ) 2. (江苏苏州) —Could we see each other at 9 o’clock tomorrow morning? —Sorry, let’s make it ______ time.‎ A. other’s B. the other ‎ C. another D. other ‎( ) 3. (广西钦州) The little girl didn’t stop crying ______ she found her mother.‎ A. after B. until ‎ C. because D. when ‎( ) 4. (云南昆明) —Would you like to go bike riding with us tomorrow?‎ ‎—________.‎ A. Sorry, I’d love to.‎ B. Sure, I’d love to.‎ C. Sure. I have to help my parents D. Yes, I can. I have a piano lesson 第二课时 Grammar Focus-3c 知识清单 I. 词汇、短语互译 ‎1. 邀请v.__________________‎ ‎2. 接受______________‎ ‎3. 拒绝__________________‎ ‎4. on the weekend_____________‎ ‎5. visit my grandparents____________‎ ‎6. practice the violin_________________‎ ‎7. birthday party___________‎ ‎8. study for a math test_____________‎ II. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. —明天晚上能和我一起看电影吗？‎ ‎—恐怕不行。我感冒了。‎ ‎—_______ you _______ to the movies with me tomorrow night?‎ ‎—I’m ______ not. I have the _______.‎ ‎2. 过度使用手机对你的健康有害。‎ ‎ Using mobile phones ________ ______ is bad for your health.‎ ‎3. 昨天我邀请他和我一起吃晚餐。‎ ‎ I _______ him _______ ______ dinner with my yesterday.‎ ‎4. 直到到家，他才意识到他把钥匙忘在办公室了。‎ ‎ He_______ realize the had left his keys in this office _______ he got home.‎ ‎5. 你不必担心钱的问题。‎ ‎ You _______ _______ _______ worry about money.‎ III. 补全对话, 每空一词 D: Hi, Tim, can you play soccer 1 me 2 Saturday?‎ T: I’m sorry I 3 . I have too 4 homework to do this weekend.‎ D: That’s too 5 . Maybe 6 time.‎ T: Sure, Dave. Thanks for 7 .‎ ‎1._________ 2._________ 3. _________ ‎ ‎4. _________ 5. _________ 6. _________‎ 基础闯关 I. 用所给单词的正确形式填空 ‎1. Tomorrow is my birthday. Would you like ________ (come) to my party?‎ ‎2. Do you want to go________ (swim) with us next Monday?‎ ‎3. Thank you for _________ (invite) me to your birthday.‎ ‎4. I’m afraid I can’t go with you, I’m busy _______ (do) my housework.‎ ‎5. He ________ (accept) my plan last meeting.‎ II. 从方框中选择适当的单词填空 sorry; tomorrow; party; busy; clean ‎1. I can’t go to the museum, I’m _______ today.‎ ‎2. I can’t go out today, but I can go ________.‎ ‎3. I’m ________, I have to have a piano lesson.‎ ‎4. John is having a birthday________, can you come?‎ ‎5. —Can Linda play baseball?‎ ‎—No, she can’t. She has to _______ her room.‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. The boy has to play basketball every day. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ _______ the boy ______ to play basketball every day?‎ ‎2. They will go to a party tomorrow evening.‎ ‎ (对划线部分提问) ‎ ‎ _______ _______ they go to a party?‎ ‎3. I’m going hiking with my friends this Sunday. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ _______ _______ going hiking with this Sunday?‎ ‎4. Can you hung out with us tomorrow? (作肯定回答)‎ ‎ Sure, _______ _______ _______.‎ ‎5. He invited me to join his club yesterday. (改为否定句)‎ ‎ He _______ _______ me to join his club yesterday.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. Judy invited me _______ shopping with her, but I promised my mother _______ the room.‎ A. go; clean B. to go; cleaning C. going; cleaning D. to go; to clean ‎( ) 2. (湖南邵阳) —What about ______ a rest? ‎ ‎—Let’s go for a walk.‎ A. to take B. take C. taking ‎( ) 3. The young man refused _______ in the big company.‎ A. work B. to work ‎ C. works D. to working ‎( ) 4. Jeff can’t go to the party because he’ll ______ help his mom.‎ A. must B. has to ‎ C. have to D. should ‎( ) 5. I’m going to Hong Kong by plane _______Sunday evening. ‎ A. in B. at ‎ C. on D. of ‎( ) 6. Thanks a lot for _______ me ______ your house. ‎ A．invite；for B．invite；to C．inviting；for D．inviting；to ‎( ) 7. I have to ______ for the math test. ‎ ‎ A．study B．studying ‎ C．learning D．studied 创新提升 完形填空 I am going to have a party tomorrow night. I promised(答应) mother that she needn’t do 1 for me. My friend Jane is coming, too. She would like to help me, 2 she can’t. Because she has a piano lesson in the morning and in the afternoon she has to babysit her sister. So I will do everything by myself. I try to make(使) 3 party a nice one. ‎ ‎ I sent invitations to my friends 4 . Now I am thinking about what I need to do tomorrow. Yes! I have to clean the room and do some shopping. I am going 5 some food, drinks and some fruit in the supermarket. I am going to make a shopping list 6 I go. I also have to decorate(装饰) the room. I need to do so many things, so I 7 see the movie “Da Vinci Code” after lunch. A terrible thing! ‎ The party begins 8 8pm. So I must have my dinner 9 . Because I am tired after I finish 10 so many things and after dinner I can have a short rest. ‎ ‎( ) 1. A. something B. anything ‎ C. nothing D. everything ‎ ‎( ) 2. A. so B. although ‎ ‎ C. but D. because ‎ ‎( ) 3. A. a B. an ‎ C. the D. / ‎ ‎( ) 4. A. yesterday ‎ B. tomorrow ‎ C. tomorrow morning ‎ D. the day after tomorrow ‎ ‎( ) 5. A. buy B. sell ‎ C. to buy D. buying ‎ ‎( ) 6. A. after B. when ‎ C. how D. before ‎ ‎( ) 7. A. can B. not ‎ C. can’t D. never ‎ ‎( ) 8. A. at B. in ‎ C. on D. with ‎ ‎( ) 9. A. late B. early ‎ C. short D. quick ‎ ‎( ) 10. A. do B. to do ‎ C. did D. doing 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (湖南益阳) I had too much homework to do last night. I didn’t go to bed_______ 11 o’clock.‎ A. in B. until C. for ‎( ) 2. (四川泸州) The story he told us happened ______ the night of May 5.‎ A. in B. at C. by D. on ‎( ) 3. (山东临沂) Please hold on to your dream ______ one day it comes true.‎ A. if B. until ‎ C. unless D. though ‎( ) 4. (广东) —______ you come with me to Lang Lang's piano concert this evening?‎ ‎ —I'd love to, but I have to study for my math test.‎ ‎ A. Should B. May ‎ C. Must D. Can 第三课时 Section B 1a-2e 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 邀请 n. __________________‎ ‎2. 高兴；愿意___________‎ ‎3. 回答；答复______________‎ ‎4. 转寄；发送_____________‎ ‎5. 再见___________‎ ‎6. 没有___________‎ ‎7. 惊奇的；感觉意外的___________‎ ‎8. workday__________‎ ‎9. print_________‎ ‎10. delete________‎ ‎11. preparation_____________‎ ‎12. glue___________‎ ‎13. housewarming___________‎ II. 短语互译 ‎1. 照顾；照看__________‎ ‎2. 拒绝____________‎ ‎3. 盼望；期待_________________‎ ‎4. 收到某人的来信、电话等___________‎ ‎5. 分担工作；解决困难______________‎ ‎6. 去旅行______________‎ ‎7. the day before yesterday ___________‎ ‎8. the day after tomorrow____________‎ ‎9. at the end of _____________‎ ‎10. go back__________ ‎ ‎11. …so that…___________________‎ ‎12. have a surprise party_____________‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 下周我要去旅行，你能帮我照顾一下狗吗？‎ Next week I will _______ ______ _______, can you help me _______ ________ my dog?‎ ‎2. 马克马上要离开我们回到美国去。‎ ‎ Mark is ________ soon to _______ ______ to the US.‎ ‎3. 明天是莉莉的生日，让我们给她举办一个生日聚会吧。‎ ‎ Tomorrow is Lily’s birthday, let’s _______ a birthday_______ _______ her.‎ ‎4. 昨天我给麦克留了一个信息，但是他并有没答复我。‎ ‎ I left a message for Mike yesterday, but he _______ ________ to me.‎ ‎5. 离开了水没有人能生存。‎ ‎ Nobody can live _______ ________.‎ IV. 根据括号内提示翻译句子 ‎1. 在工作日请早点睡觉。(on weekdays)‎ ‎ _________________________________.‎ ‎2. 今天是什么日子？(what)‎ ‎ _________________________________?‎ ‎3. 你妹妹已经足够大能照顾自己了。(look after)‎ ‎ __________________________________.‎ ‎4. 你能和我一起去打网球吗？(play tennis)‎ ‎ _________________________________?‎ ‎5. 听到这个坏消息我很难过。(sad；bad)‎ ‎ _________________________________.‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示完成单词 ‎1. There are five w in a week.‎ ‎2. Betty is always ready to help with all the party p .‎ ‎3. Why did she refuse the i of the dance party?‎ ‎4. She looked very s______ because her iPad was lost.‎ ‎5. I am so s_______ that I can see you in another city.‎ II. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. I'm looking forward to ______ (hear) from you soon. ‎ ‎2. Tom ___________ (can) come to my party because he is ill. ‎ ‎3. Thank you for your______(invite)． ‎ ‎4. Please keep quiet！My sister’s trying ________ (study)． ‎ ‎5. He would love______(have)a cup of tea.‎ III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 特德起床晚了，所以他没有吃早饭就去上班了。‎ Ted got up late, so he _______ to work __________ breakfast.‎ ‎2. 斯蒂恩前天给报社答复了。‎ Steen ________ _________the newspaper the day before yesterday.‎ ‎3. 为了能去参加聚会，她买了一件新裙子。‎ ‎ She bought a new dress _______ ________ she can go to the party.‎ ‎4. 这个月底我将去见你。‎ ‎ I will see you ______ ______ _____ _____ the month.‎ ‎5. 他们在谈论一些筹备聚会的事情。‎ ‎ They are talking about some___________ __________.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. —______today? ‎ ‎—It’s Monday the 14th. ‎ ‎ A. When B. When’s ‎ C. What D. What’s ‎( ) 2. (江苏南通) In some western countries shops are closed ______‎ weekends.‎ A. in B. to C. at D. with ‎( ) 3. My best friend often invites me ______ delicious food. ‎ A．enjoy B．enjoying ‎ C．enjoyed D．to enjoy ‎( ) 4. The students are very ______ at the ______ news. ‎ A．surprised；surprising ‎ B．surprising；surprised ‎ C．surprised；surprised ‎ D．surprising；surprising ‎( ) 5. (浙江衢州) —Jenny, would you please ______ my dog when I am away?‎ ‎—No problem.‎ A. look up B. look in ‎ C. look at D. look after ‎( ) 6. —My mother is ill. I have to take care of her at home.‎ ‎—____________.‎ A. Thank you ‎ B. Oh, I don’t know ‎ C. I’m sorry to hear that ‎ D. Is that true?‎ ‎( ) 7. (青海西宁) We couldn’t finish our work so early ______ your help.‎ A. without B. with ‎ C. for D. by ‎ V. 句型转换 ‎1. It is Sunday, January 12 today? (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ _______today? ‎ ‎2. My mother went to work. She didn’t have breakfast. (改为同义句) ‎ My mother went to work_______ ________ breakfast.‎ ‎3. Thank you for your invitation. (改为同义句)‎ ‎ Thanks for .‎ ‎4. They can come to our school on Tuesday. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ _______ they come to your school?‎ ‎5. Does she have to leave now? (改为陈述句)‎ ‎ She _______ _______ leave now.‎ 创新提升 阅读理解 A: Hi, Peter. Can you come to my party this Saturday?‎ B: Party? What party?‎ A: It's my 15th birthday.‎ B: Really? Happy Birthday to you, Donna. I'd love to. What time?‎ A: At 6 p.m., October 25th, at my home. Do you know my address? No. 108 Green Street. If you can't find it, give me a call, 24606776. By the way, can you ask Ann to come together?‎ B: OK, I will. Thanks for asking us.‎ 请根据对话内容，把邀请卡补充完整 It's a   1   party. ‎ For whom:   2   ‎ Time:   3   ‎ Place:   4   ‎ Phone number:   5   ‎ Come and join us!                         ‎ Yours,     ‎ Donna ‎1. ________ 2. _______ 3. ________ ‎ ‎4.________ 5. _________‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (四川广安) —I’m looking forward to _______ my parents soon. What about you?‎ ‎—Me too.‎ A. seeing B. see C. saw ‎( ) 2. (湖北孝感) Students shouldn’t go to school _____ breakfast. It’s bad for their health.‎ A. with B. without ‎ C. for D. by ‎( ) 3. (广西贺州) Linda, I have to go shopping now. Please______ your little sister at home.‎ A. look for B. look like ‎ C. look after D. look up ‎( ) 4. (云南大理) —Thank you for helping me so much! ‎ ‎—______.‎ A. Don’t thank me ‎ B. All right C. Don’t say so ‎ D. You’re welcome ‎( ) 5. (山东济南) —______ I help you, sir?‎ ‎—Yes. I want a T-shirt.‎ A. Can B. Should ‎ C. Must D. Would ‎( ) 6. (陕西) We are planning to have a surprise party ______ her fifteenth birthday.‎ A. at B. in C. for D. with ‎( ) 7. (广东广州) I couldn’t do it _____ your great help. Thanks a lot!‎ A. with B. without ‎ C. for D. to ‎ 第四课时 Section B 3a-Self Check 知识清单 I. 词汇、短语互译 ‎1. 开幕式____________‎ ‎2. 音乐会_____________‎ ‎3. 大事；公开活动_____________‎ ‎4. 客人；宾客_______________‎ ‎5. 白天___________‎ ‎6. 日历；日程表________________‎ ‎7. headmaster________________‎ II. 选词填空 sorry; dentist; busy; soccer; invitation; birthday; at home; Saturday; math test; movies Hi Betty,‎ Thank you for your 1. __________. I’m 2. _________ I can’t come. You see, I have a really 3. ___________ week. This evening I’m going to the 4. _______ with some friends. And tomorrow, I have to go to the 5. __________ (Yuck!) On 6. _________, I’m playing 7. ________ with the school team. And I have to study for my8. ____________ on Thursday. On Friday evening, I’m going to my cousin’s 9. _________ party. Can you come to the movies or have video games with us 10. _________on Friday?‎ Write soon.‎ Xiao Ming III.根据汉语补全句子 ‎1. 我想邀请你去参加我们图书馆的开幕仪式。‎ I ________ ________ to invite you to the _________ of our new library.‎ ‎2. 我们希望你们能尽快回复此申请，以便我们做准备。‎ ‎ We hope you can _________ ________ this invitation ___________ _________ we can make preparation.‎ ‎3. 同时你可以欣赏我们学校的音乐会。‎ ‎ You can ______ our school ________ at the same time.‎ ‎4. 我要在周六的上午去打网球。‎ ‎ I _________ _________tennis on Saturday morning.‎ ‎5. 学生们都盼望着过一个轻松的假期。‎ ‎ Students are ______ _______ to having a free holiday.‎ 基础闯关 I. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. All the students must go to school on _______ (weekday).‎ ‎2. I have to study for my test, so I can’t accept your _________ (invite).‎ ‎3. He _______ (reply) to the question quickly in class yesterday.‎ ‎4. She must be very ________ (surprise) when she sees the gifts because we don’t tell her.‎ ‎5. —We can’t live on the earth _______ (with) water.‎ ‎—So we should save the water.‎ II. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. You can’t find him. He usually _______ at 4:00.‎ A. have an English lesson ‎ B. goes to the guitar lesson C. is having an English lesson ‎ D. will go to the guitar lesson ‎( ) 2. (北京) —__________ you sing an English song? ‎ ‎—Yes, I can.‎ A. Can B. May ‎ C. Must D. Need ‎( ) 3. This is Ella’s . She has a lot of things to do this week!‎ A. card B. book C. calendar D. paper ‎( ) 4. She has to ____ her mother _____ the housework.‎ ‎ A helps, do B help, doing ‎ C help, do D helps, doing ‎( ) 5. (四川成都) Tom usually goes fishing ______ Sunday morning.‎ A. at B. on C. for ‎( ) 6. It’s hard to ______ this kind of plant. You have to water it every day.‎ A. look for B. look at ‎ C. look after D. look like ‎( ) 7. We are all looking forward _______ to the new house.‎ A. move B. to move ‎ C. to moving D. for moving III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 在明天之前你能完成这项工作吗？‎ ‎ Can you ________ the work ______ tomorrow?‎ ‎2. 我问他去哪儿，但他没有回答。‎ ‎ I asked where he was going, but he ______ _______.‎ ‎3. 上周我收到了妈妈的来信。‎ ‎ I _______ _______ my mother last week.‎ ‎4. 我每天努力学习，以便能赶上汤姆。‎ ‎ I work hard every day ______ _______ I can catch up with Tom.‎ ‎5. 在那里遇见他我感到很意外。‎ ‎ I ______ ______ to see him there.‎ 创新提升 I. 完形填空(选择方框中的单词并用其适当形式填空)‎ get; movie; to; until; like; good; fun; eat; all; take Yesterday we held a party for Peter at his home. It was very interesting.‎ After school yesterday, I 1._______ Peter to go to the 2._______. While we were in the cinema, his other friends and his family were all there. We 3.________ to his house at about seven o’clock in the afternoon. When he opened the door, everybody shouted, “Surprise! ” and we 4._______ said, “ Happy Birthday” 5._______ him.‎ Later we 6. _______ the birthday cake, sang and danced 7._________ 11 o’clock. Peter got many gifts at the party, but he said he liked my 8._________. It was a money box that looked 9._______ a duck and the duck had a hat on its head. Do you think it is something 10.________?‎ II. 阅读理解 Children all over the world like to celebrate their birthdays. American children are of no difference. ‎ They usually celebrate with a party. They invite their friends to their birthday parties. The party may not be held on the right date of their birthday if it comes on a school day. It may be ‎ held on the weekend instead. ‎ Today two kinds of parties are the most popular. One is held at home. Parents decorate the house beautiful with balloons and colored paper. They prepare a special birthday meal. The children play games. The other kind is held away from home. Some are at a special restaurant. The children eat pizza and ice cream. The waiters, who serve the food, also sing and tell jokes to the children. Other parties may be held at a park, or at a movie theater, or in some other places. Every birthday party has a cake with candles on it. There is one candle for each year of a birthday boy's or girl's age. When the candles are lighted (点燃), everyone sings the special birthday song: HAPPY BIRTHDAY TO YOU. ‎ ‎ As Americans grow older, their birthday parties change. In fact, many people stop having them. They say they would like to forget how old they are. Yet they do like to keep the happy birthday parties of their childhood in mind. ‎ 根据短文内容填空。‎ ‎1. All _________________ in the world like ___________ their birthdays. ‎ ‎2. _____________ children usually ________ to their birthday parties. ‎ ‎3. Today _____________ parties are the most popular. They are usually held _________. ‎ ‎4. There's ___________ for every birthday party. Everyone sings _________ at the party. ‎ ‎5. As Americans __________. Many of them stop having their birthday parties because they don't want to_________.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (山东潍坊) Tigers wait______ it is dark, and then go out to find their food.‎ A. since B. until ‎ C. as D. because ‎( ) 2. (江苏扬州) —Thank you for the present you sent me. It’s so nice.‎ ‎—_______.‎ A. No, thanks ‎ B. I’m glad you like it C. Please don’t say so ‎ D. No, it isn’t good ‎( ) 3. (广西玉林) Don’t waste water. Water is very important and no one can live _____ it.‎ A. without B. with ‎ C. except D. besides Unit 9 单元测试卷 第一部分 选择题（共45分）‎ I. 单项选择（本题共15分， 每小题1分）‎ ‎( ) 1. —Why are you so tired these days? —Well，I have ____ work to do. ‎ A. too much B. too many ‎ C. much too D. many too ‎( ) 2. Is he studying __________ the test ________ Monday morning? ‎ A. at；on B. on；at ‎ C. on；for D. for；on ‎ ‎( ) 3. — Today is my birthday. Can you come to my party tonight? ‎ ‎—____，but I should finish my homework first. ‎ A. That's too bad B. Yes，please C. No，I don't know D. I'd love to ‎ ‎( ) 4. —Could we see each other at 9 o'clock tomorrow morning? ‎ ‎—Sorry，let's make it ____ time. ‎ A. others B. the other ‎ C. another D. other ‎ ‎( ) 5. You ____ wear sports shoes when you climb a mountain. ‎ A. can't B. shouldn't ‎ C. mustn't D. have to ‎( ) 6. They didn't go to bed ________ they finished the work. ‎ A. when B. while ‎ C. until D. after ‎ ‎( ) 7. —____ you play baseball? ‎ ‎ —No. But I can play table tennis. A. Can B. May ‎ C. Must D. Should ‎ ‎( ) 8. —When are we going to meet? —____you on Monday evening! A. Catch B. Look ‎ C. Sound D. Invite ‎ ‎( ) 9. We often go to school on ____ and relax on ________. ‎ A. weekends；weekdays ‎ B. weekdays；weekends ‎ C. weekdays；week ‎ D. weekday; weekend ‎( ) 10. —What's today? ‎ ‎—____． ‎ A. It's Monday ‎ B. It's March 18th ‎ C. It's Monday the 18th D. It’s 7:00‎ ‎( ) 11. Tim can play ________ tennis very well，but he can't play _________ piano. ‎ A. the；the B. /；the ‎ C. /；/ D. the; /‎ ‎( ) 12. Today is Friday the 18th. ____ is Sunday 20th. ‎ A. Yesterday ‎ B. The day before yesterday ‎ C. The day after tomorrow D. Tomorrow ‎( ) 13. —Can you help me _______ my mother？She is ill. ‎ ‎—OK. ‎ A. look at B. look like ‎ C. look after D. look for ‎( ) 14. He Wei didn't want this email. So he ____ it. ‎ A. printed B. replied ‎ C. deleted D. answered ‎( ) 15. My friends are going to leave for China，I should say ____to them. ‎ A. goodbye B. hello ‎ C. excuse me D. thank you II. 完形填空（本题共10分，每小题1分）‎ Ms. Steen is our English teacher. She is from England. She began to teach __1__ last year. ‎ But now she is leaving for her country. We are so __2__ to see her go because she is a good teacher. We're going to have a __3__ for her. We think it is the best way to say“Thank you and goodbye”． We __4__ to have the party this Saturday. Now，we are preparing for it. Wang Lei and Wei Wei __5__ all the teachers. Our Chinese teacher Miss Zhang __6__ come. Her family is taking a trip to Beijing this weekend.__7__，the other teachers promised that they would come. Li Ye is writing a thankyou note(短笺)．We want to show __8__ we're going to miss Ms. Steen. He asks Wu Shan to read it to Ms. Steen，because Wu Shan __9__ very good English. I'm going to play a piano piece for Ms. Steen at the party. And I also __10__ a fun game to play at the party. We hope the party will be very great. ‎ ‎( ) 1. A. them B．us ‎ C．him D．you ‎ ‎( ) 2. A. glad B．sad ‎ C．relaxed D．excited ‎ ‎( ) 3. A. trip B．meal ‎ C．prize D．party ‎ ‎( ) 4. A. plan B．refuse ‎ C．forget D．happen ‎ ‎( ) 5. A. caught B．believed ‎ C．saw D．invited ‎ ‎( ) 6. A. will B．can’t ‎ C．has to D．doesn’t ‎ ‎( ) 7. A. Probably B．Usually ‎ C．Luckily D．Finally ‎( ) 8. A. how B．how many ‎ C．how much D．when ‎ ‎( ) 9. A. writes B．speaks ‎ C．likes D．shares ‎ ‎( ) 10. A. hear from B．turn down ‎ C．make up D．think of III. 阅读理解（本题共20分，每小题2分）‎ A The children of Mr. and Mrs. Marley invite you, ‎ Mr. and Mrs. Wilson Join us for food , fun ,crazy（疯狂的） time to celebrate: ‎ the 50th birthday of Richard Marley on Saturday, August 11th from 2:00pm to 7:00pm at Golden Sun Park. ‎ Remember to bring your swimsuits(泳衣) dancing shoes . Call or E-mail us for directions to the party or to arrange (安排) a ride. ‎ Tel : (605) 397-8160 ‎ E-mail : samdu@sina.com ‎ ‎( ) 1. Who will be invited to the party? ‎ A. The children of Mr. Wilson. ‎ B. The children of Mr. Marley. ‎ C. Mr. Wilson and his wife ‎ D . Mr. and Mrs. Marley. ‎ ‎( ) 2. What will they have the party for? ‎ ‎ A. New Year’s Day.‎ B. Mr. Wilson’s coming.‎ C. Christmas Day.‎ D. Richard’s birthday. ‎ ‎( ) 3. How long will the party last? ‎ A. For three hours.‎ B. For four hours.‎ C. For five hours.‎ D. For six hours.‎ ‎( ) 4. What will people do at party? ‎ A. Swim and dance ‎ B. Ask for direction C. Make swimsuits D. Ride bikes.‎ ‎( ) 5. The invitation does NOT include (包括)_________. ‎ A. an E-mail address. ‎ B. directions to the party ‎ C. the time or date ‎ D. a telephone number B Last weekend was a busy one，and a lot of fun！On Friday night we had a party for my friend Emily. It was her 20th birthday，and we went to Covent Garden. All the cool restaurants are there. It's such a nice place to go on a Friday or Saturday night. There is a band (乐队) that plays lots of cool music.‎ The next day my friends and I went to the Tate Britain Museum. There were lots of paintings of British countryside. I saw a few of the paintings we discussed in class，and it was so cool to see them close. ‎ We spent Sunday in Putney，where we saw the Oxford-Cambridge boat race (竞赛)．It has a history of more than 150 years. The students of Oxford and Cambridge are trained all year for this race. It is only 17 minutes long. There were 12,000 people by the river，and it was like a huge party！It was great. ‎ ‎( ) 6. According to the passage，Emily was ______ years old last Friday. ‎ A．twelve B．twenty ‎ C．twenty-one D．twenty-two ‎ ‎( ) 7. Where did the author and his friends go on Friday night? ‎ A．To Covent Garden. ‎ B．To the Tate Britain Museum. ‎ C．To Putney. ‎ D．To the River Thames. ‎ ‎( ) 8. What did the author and his friends do on Saturday? ‎ A．They had a birthday party.‎ B．They listened to cool music. ‎ C．They had a painting lesson.‎ D．They saw a lot of British ‎ paintings.‎ ‎( ) 9. When did the Oxford-Cambridge ‎ boat competition start? ‎ A．More than 150 years ago. ‎ B．More than 1200 years ago. ‎ C．More than 20 years ago. ‎ D．Nobody knows. ‎ ‎( ) 10. What did the author think of his weekend? ‎ A．It was very busy and tiring.‎ B．It was very relaxing. ‎ C．It was awful.‎ D．It was very busy and fun.‎ 第二部分 非选择题（共55分）‎ IV. 任务型阅读(每小题2分，共10分)‎ Bobby was six years old，and he went to school. There were nineteen other little boys and girls in his class. They were all friends，so they often went to parties together. ‎ When one of the children had a birthday，he or she invited all the other children to come to a party. And at Christmas all the mothers gave parties for all the children. ‎ Bobby liked parties very much. He liked the games they played there—but he liked the nice food more. His favorites were cakes. ‎ Before a party，Bobby‘s mother always asked him not to eat too many cakes，and Bobby always answered，“I won’t，Mom.”But he always ate a lot and sometimes he got ill(生病的)． ‎ Christmas came again，and again there were a lot of parties，Bobby went to all of them. The last one was on January 6th. ‎ One evening before this party，Bobby's mother called the lady(女士) who had the party，“Bobby always eats too many cakes at parties.” ‎ ‎“Don't worry，”answered the lady.“At my party，a child can only have three cakes—and the cakes are small！” “Oh，good！”Bobby's mother answered happily. On January 6th，she took Bobby to the party. ‎ When it was time to eat，Bobby took four cakes and began to eat them. “You can only have three cakes，Bobby！”said the lady. She asked him to put the fourth one back on the plate. “I can't，”answered Bobby.“I ate that one first.” ‎ 根据材料内容简要回答下列问题。 ‎ ‎1. How many children were there in Bobby's class?‎ ‎___________________________________‎ ‎2. When did the children have parties? ‎ ‎ ___________________________________‎ ‎3. What did Bobby like more at parties，the games or the food? ‎ ‎ ___________________________________‎ ‎4. What happened sometimes when Bobby ate a lot of cakes at parties?‎ ‎ ___________________________________‎ ‎5. Where did the lady ask Bobby to put the fourth cake back?‎ ‎ ___________________________________‎ V. 情景交际（根据上下文，选择适当的句子完成对话。每小题2分，共10分）‎ Mary：Hi，Alice！Next Saturday is my birthday. 1. ‎ Alice：Oh，I'd love to. 2. ‎ Mary：At 3：30 p．m. ‎ Alice：OK. I'll remember it. ‎ Mary：Don't forget to tell Peter. I hope he can come，too. ‎ Alice：Peter？Look！There he is. Let's go and tell him. ‎ Mary：Hello，Peter. 3. ‎ Peter：Nice to see you，too. ‎ Mary：I hope you can come to my party next Saturday. ‎ Peter：Party？What kind of party? ‎ Mary：4. Would you like to come?‎ Peter：5. ‎ Mary：Thank you very much. See you then. Peter：See you. ‎ A. Nice to see you！ ‎ B. I'm afraid I can't come. ‎ C. Can you come to my party? ‎ D. Sure，I'd love to. ‎ E. What time does the party start?‎ F. Thanks a lot for the invitation. ‎ G. It's my birthday party.‎ VI. 用所给词的适当形式填空（每小题1分，共5分）‎ ‎1. Sam, can you come and ______(play) with us this afternoon?‎ ‎2. Why not _______(say) goodbye to others when you leave?‎ ‎3. I want to invite you _______ (go) boating next Monday.‎ ‎4. I’m looking forward to ________ (see) you soon.‎ ‎5. Can you think of some ideas _______ (help) me out?‎ VII. 根据汉语补全句子，每空一词（每小题2分，共10分）‎ ‎1. 他正在等待你的好消息。‎ ‎ He is ________ ________ ________ your good news.‎ ‎2. 你隔多久收到你父母的来信?‎ ‎ How often do you _______ _______ your parents?‎ ‎3. 她为什么拒绝你的邀请?‎ ‎ Why did she _________ _________ your invitation?‎ ‎4. 这个月底我打算出发去美国。‎ ‎ I am leaving for America _______ ______ ________ ________ this month.‎ ‎5. 我很高兴帮你摆脱困境。 ‎ ‎ I’m ______ to _______ you out.‎ VIII. 书面表达（20分）‎ 假如你是丽莎(Lisa)，6月22日是你的生日，请根据以下表格的内容，向你的好朋友发 一封邀请信。(信的开头和结尾已给出)‎ Time：Friday，June 22nd，at 2：30p.m. ‎ Place：Lisa's home ‎ Activities：watching a new movie，playing games，having dinner l Hi，friends， ‎ ‎______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ Yours， ‎ Lisa Unit 10 If you go to the party, you’ll have a great time!‎ 第一课时 Section A 1a-2d 知识清单 I. 词汇、短语互译 ‎1. 会议__________‎ ‎2. 录像带____________‎ ‎3. 组织____________________‎ ‎4. 巧克力_______________‎ ‎5. order__________‎ ‎6. half__________‎ ‎7. lazy_____________‎ ‎8. potato chips_______________‎ II. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 如果他今晚去看电影，他就不能完成作业了。‎ ‎ If he ______ _______ _______ _______, he won’t be able to finish his homework.‎ ‎2. 如果你去聚会，你将会玩得很愉快。‎ ‎ If you go to the party, you __________ _______ _______ _______ _________.‎ ‎3. 他们太懒而不愿做饭。‎ ‎ They are ______ lazy ______ cook.‎ ‎4. 如果在聚会上看录像会发生什么呢？‎ ‎ What ________ _______ ______ we watch the videos at the party?‎ ‎5. 一半的钱是我的。‎ ‎ ______ _____ _______ is mine.‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示补全单词 ‎1. My parents will help me o_______ my birthday party.‎ ‎2. He likes wearing j_______.‎ ‎3. What will h________ if you are late?‎ ‎4. Don’t eat too much c________, you will be fat.‎ ‎5. Because of the bad weather, we will put off our sports m_______.‎ II. 用所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. The students will go to the Summer Palace if it _______ (not rain) tomorrow.‎ ‎2. If he ______ (walk) to school, he’ll be late.‎ ‎3. If she likes it, she _________ (read) it soon.‎ ‎4. If your play computer games on weekdays, you _______ (be) tired.‎ ‎5. If you are famous, people _______ (watch) you all the time and follow you everywhere.‎ ‎6. If she _______ (study) hard, she will go to Beijing University.‎ ‎7. I had a great time (play) basketball yesterday. ‎ ‎8. What (happen) if there is no water or air on the earth?‎ ‎9. If Gina (have) enough money, she (buy) a beautiful wallet for her mom.‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. I will go to the party with Anna. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ ______ you go to the party_____?‎ ‎2. Finish your homework and you can watch TV. (改为条件状语从句)‎ ‎ ______ you finish your homework, ______ can watch TV.‎ ‎3. The teacher will be angry if we eat in class. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ will ______ if we eat in class?‎ ‎4. They enjoyed themselves at the party yesterday. (改为同义句)‎ ‎ They _______ ________ _______ _______ at the party yesterday.‎ ‎5. We will not go to the park. It will rain tomorrow. (合并为一句话)‎ ‎ We________ go to the park if it _________ tomorrow.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. What will he do if he _________ the result? ‎ A. know B. knew ‎ C. knows D. knowing ‎( ) 2. (天津) You will be later for school ______ you don’t get up early.‎ A. but B. if ‎ C. and D. or ‎( ) 3. I want to know if Mary______ to the party tomorrow. ‎ A. go B. went ‎ C. will go D. goes ‎ ‎( ) 4. All the students in Class 5 will climb the mountain if it ______ rain tomorrow.‎ A．won't　　　 B．don't ‎ C．didn't D．doesn't ‎ ‎( ) 5. Half the class______. ‎ A．is sing B．is singing ‎ C．are singing D．sings ‎( ) 6. (内蒙古呼和浩特) If we _________ take environmental problems seriously, the earth ________ worse and worse.‎ A. don’t; will be B. won’t; isn’t ‎ C. won’t; is D. don’t; won’t be ‎( ) 7. Don’t speak loudly _____ the party. If you do, you’ll ______ leave.‎ A. at; must B. of; have to ‎ C. at; have to D. in; must 创新提升 I. 情景交际 Tom: Hi, Mark. I want to have a class ‎ party. 1. ___________? ‎ Mark: Sure, Tom. I can help you. So when ‎ shall we have the party? ‎ Tom: Let's have it today after class. ‎ Mark: 2. ____________If we have it today, half the class won't come. ‎ Tom: Okay, Let's have it tomorrow. ‎ Mark: Hmm...There is a test tomorrow.‎ Students will leave early to study for the test. 3. ___________ ‎ Tom: Okay, let's have it on Saturday afternoon. We can all meet and watch a video. ‎ Mark: 4. ______________ Some students will be bored. Let's play party games. ‎ Tom: Okay, good idea. Can you organize the party games? ‎ Mark: Sure, I can do that. And can you make ‎ some food for us? ‎ Tom: 5. _____________‎ A. You will have a good time.‎ B. And can you make some food for us?‎ C. Will you help me organize it?‎ D. There will be a test tomorrow.‎ E. I’m going to take a bus to the party.‎ F. Let’s have it today after class.‎ G. I don’t think we should watch a video.‎ II. 选择合适的单词或短语并用其适当形式填空 exciting; come, have, stop, dress ‎1. The little girl is too young to herself.‎ ‎2. This game is　　　 　　than that one.‎ ‎3. I’ll buy a computer if I _________ enough money.‎ ‎4. If the rain_________tonight, we will go to the cinema.‎ ‎5. My pen pal　　　to see me next week.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (山东临沂) — We are going on a school trip tomorrow.‎ ‎—________.‎ A. Excuse me ‎ B. I’m sorry to hear that C. You’re welcome ‎ D. Have a good time ‎( ) 2. (山东济南) It was time for class. Mr. King asked all the children _______ down quietly.‎ A. sit B. sat ‎ C. to sit D. sitting ‎( ) 3. (江苏苏州) —What would you do if it ______ tomorrow? ‎ ‎—We have to carry it on, since we’ve got everything ready.‎ A. is raining B. rains ‎ C. will rain D. rain ‎( ) 4. (山东东营) Eating and drinking on Beijing subway is not allowed. If you ______ the rule, you’ll face a fine (罚款) of up to 500 yuan.‎ A. broke B. break ‎ C. will break D. have broken ‎( ) 5. (四川达州) —Excuse me, could you please tell me if the sports meeting _______ on time?‎ ‎ —Hard to say . If it _______ tomorrow, we’ll have to put it off.‎ A. will hold; rain ‎ B. will be held; rains C. will be held; will rain ‎ D. holds; will rain 第二课时 Grammar Focus-3c 知识清单 I. 词汇、短语互译 ‎1. 难过；沮丧____________‎ ‎2. 出租汽车_________________‎ ‎3. 劝告；建议____________‎ ‎4. take a taxi___________‎ ‎5. enough time_________‎ ‎6. make friends____________‎ ‎7. get up late__________________‎ II. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 如果我们乘坐出租车，那将会太贵了。‎ ‎ If we ______ ______ ______, it will be too expensive.‎ ‎2. 你能给我一些建议吗？‎ ‎ Can you _______ me ________ ________?‎ ‎3. 他如果玩游戏太久了，他的父母会很难过。‎ ‎ If he _______ computer games too much, his parents will ______ _______.‎ ‎4. 他们在讨论什么时候举行聚会。‎ ‎ They are ________ _______ when to have the party.‎ ‎5. 我真的不知道该做什么。‎ ‎ I really don’t know ______ ______ ______.‎ III. 补全对话, 每空一词 A: Are you going to the school party?‎ B: Yes, I am. I 1._______ to wear my new jeans.‎ A: You can’t do that.‎ B: What will 2.______ if I do?‎ A: We don’t 3.______ you in. You should 4.______ your cool pants.‎ B: That’s a 5.________ idea.‎ 基础闯关 I. 用所给单词的正确形式填空 ‎1. He’ll get better grades if he ________ (study) hard.‎ ‎2. ________you ________(watch) the video with me if you are free this weekend?‎ ‎3. My teacher give some ________ (advice) about how to study English well.‎ ‎4. She looks__________ (worry). We don’t know what happened to her.‎ ‎5. To keep in good health, it is best (exercise) every day.‎ II. 从方框中选择适当的单词填空 advice; enough; video; taxi; organize ‎1. You can take a ______ to go to the park.‎ ‎2. Can you give me some ______ about the plan?‎ ‎3. We should get ______ exercise to keep healthy every day.‎ ‎4. Why not watch the ___________? It can tell you our school life.‎ ‎5. Can you help me _______the party games?‎ III. 句型转换 ‎1. Let’s hurry, or we’ll be late. (改为复合句)‎ ‎ _______ we _______ hurry, we’ll _______ late.‎ ‎2. Please bring the flowers to the hall. (改为否定句)‎ ‎ ______ _______ the flowers to the hall.‎ ‎3. He asked me to go to Hong Kong. (改为否定句)‎ ‎ He asked me ________ ______ _______ to Hong Kong.‎ ‎4. You should take a taxi to go there. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ _______ I ________?‎ ‎5. if, to, movies, go, won’t, I, the, finish, I, homework, my (连词成句)‎ ‎ ________________________________.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. The math problem is so hard. I really don't know ________.‎ ‎　　 A．how to do it B．how to do C．what to do it D．what do it ‎( ) 2. I want three ______. Can you give them to me?‎ A．pieces of advice B．advices C．advice D．pieces of advices ‎( ) 3. (湖南衡阳) —Lucy, what about going camping if it ______ tomorrow?‎ ‎—Sounds great!‎ A. didn’t rain B. doesn’t rain ‎ C. won’t rain ‎( ) 4. I’ll go to see you when you _____ the training course.‎ A. finished B. finish ‎ C. are finishing D. will finish ‎( ) 5. March is a good time ______ Lijiang.‎ A. visit B. visits ‎ C. to visit D. visiting ‎( ) 6. He gave me some advice about ________.‎ A. how get there ‎ B. how to get there ‎ C. how getting there 创新提升 完形填空 I’m thinking about what I’m going to do this summer. Maybe I’ll get a job. If I get a job, I’ll have　1　money to buy some new things. Maybe I’ll buy some new clothes. I’d like to have some new dresses　2　I start school again in September. Or I can buy some books, or some music CDs. I really love jazz(爵士乐). I could buy some CDs　3　my jazz collection. Or I can use the money　4　tennis lessons. I play tennis　5　, but I’d like to learn to play it better. Or maybe I can use the money to pay for the piano lessons. I’d like to learn to play it. ‎ If I　6　get a job this summer, I’ll visit my grandparents in San Francisco. They live in a beautiful old house near the beach. That will be fun. My grandparents are always very nice to me. They’ll let me sleep late. I won’t　7　get up until 10 o’clock every day. I’ll eat delicious food because my grandmother is an excellent　8　. She always cooks my favorite food. I’ll also go to the　9　with my grandparents. I like swimming in the sea. My grandparents like to go to the museum but I don’t enjoy the museum so much, so maybe I’ll　10　to watch TV. ‎ ‎( ) 1. A. less B. many ‎ C. a few D. enough ‎( ) 2. A. why B. while ‎ C. before D. if ‎( ) 3. A. for B. to C. at D. as ‎( ) 4. A. to take B. to pay for C. to spend D. to buy ‎( ) 5. A. very good B. pretty well C. better D. best ‎( ) 6. A. am B. will C. don’t D. won’t ‎( ) 7. A. be able to B. have to ‎ C. must D. may ‎( ) 8. A. cook B. lawyer C. agent D. teacher ‎( ) 9. A. museum B. San Francisco C. shop D. beach ‎( ) 10. A. travel around the world B. go to college ‎ C. stay at home D. lie on the beach 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (山东滨州) —Mary, could you tell me if your mother ______ our school sports meeting tomorrow?‎ ‎—I think she will come to school if she _____ free.‎ A. will take part in; will be ‎ B. takes part in; is ‎ C. will take part in; is ‎ D. takes part in; will be ‎( ) 2. (浙江宁波) —I hear the famous singer Xu Song may come to Ningbo next month.‎ ‎—Really? ______ he comes, my younger sister will be very excited.‎ A. If B. Until ‎ C. Unless D. Before ‎( ) 3. (湖北孝感) —What _____ can you give me on learning English?‎ ‎—I think you could join an English club.‎ A. advice B. news ‎ C. messages D. information 第三课时 Section B 1a-2e 知识清单 I. 词汇互译 ‎1. 旅行；游历________________‎ ‎2. 青少年____________‎ ‎3. 正常的；一般的____________‎ ‎4. 除非___________‎ ‎5. 发怒的；生气的______________‎ ‎6. 粗心的；不小心的_____________‎ ‎7. 解决____________‎ ‎8. 步；步骤_____________‎ ‎9. 别的；其他的____________‎ ‎10. certainly___________‎ ‎11. wallet____________‎ ‎12. understanding____________‎ ‎13. trust___________‎ ‎14. halfway____________‎ ‎15. mistake___________‎ ‎16. mile____________‎ II. 短语互译 ‎1. 保守秘密____________‎ ‎2. 分成两半_______________‎ ‎3. 周游世界__________________‎ ‎4. be afraid to _____________‎ ‎5. make mistakes_____________‎ ‎6. run away from______________‎ III. 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 近来学生们经常有很多烦恼。‎ ‎ Students these days often ________ a lot of ________.‎ ‎2. 他害怕告诉别人这件事。‎ ‎ He _____ _______ ______ tell others about it.‎ ‎3. 我们应该努力去解决问题，而不是逃避。‎ ‎ We should _________ ________ solve our problems instead of _________ _________ ______ them.‎ ‎4. 我应该对这件事保密。‎ ‎ I should _________ the thing __________ _________.‎ ‎5. 如果我赚很多钱，我会周游世界。‎ ‎ If I _______ a lot of ________, I will ‎______ _______ _______ _________.‎ IV. 根据括号内提示翻译句子 ‎1. 他很担心他父亲的健康。(worry about)‎ ‎ _________________________________.‎ ‎2. 因为我的迟到，老师很生气。(be angry)‎ ‎ _________________________________.‎ ‎3. 请把这个苹果切成两半。(in half)‎ ‎ _________________________________.‎ ‎4. 为什么你不告诉你的父母呢？(why don’t you do)‎ ‎ _________________________________?‎ ‎5. 对于学习英语你给过他建议吗？(give advice to sb.)‎ ‎ _________________________________?‎ 基础闯关 I. 根据句意及首字母提示完成单词 ‎1. They had a great t_______ last week. They visited many places.‎ ‎2. It’s five m_______ from my home to school, so I often take a bus to school.‎ ‎3. Many t________ can’t to choose their school clothes.‎ ‎4. —Why do you t________ him? ‎ ‎—Because he’s an honest boy.‎ ‎5. I think my father can s__________ the problem.‎ II. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. I have a lot of ________ (worry) these days in my life.‎ ‎2. In the end, all the students were ________ (understand).‎ ‎3. John was so ________ (care) that he forgot to do his homework.‎ ‎4. My teacher advised me________ (read) more books.‎ ‎5. We would ________ (certain) know less.‎ III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 他作业中经常犯错误。‎ ‎ He often _______ _________ in his homework.‎ ‎2. 我的父母想让我受到良好的教育。‎ ‎ My parents want me to _______ good ________.‎ ‎3. 我希望我们可以一直保守这个秘密。‎ ‎ I hope we can ______ it ______ ______ all the time.‎ ‎4. 林峰昨天丢了钱包，为此他很沮丧。‎ ‎ Lin Feng _______ ________ ________ yesterday, so he was upset.‎ ‎5. 高中毕业后我会去上大学。‎ ‎ I will ________ ______ _________ after finishing high school.‎ IV. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. I won’t pass the exam_________ I work hard. ‎ ‎ A. when B. if ‎ C. unless D. because ‎( ) 2. I have some problems with my schoolwork. Can you give me some______? ‎ A. advices B. advice C. advise D. advises ‎( ) 3.Linda was lost in the forest and her parents were really _______her. A. worry B. worried about C. worried D. be worried about ‎( ) 4. Sara studies English very_________ and her English is ________in her class.‎ A. careful, good B. carefully, well ‎ C. carefully, the best D. careful; well ‎( ) 5. (山东聊城) Some students are so _______that they often make mistakes in their homework. ‎ A. careful B. careless C. serious D. understanding ‎( ) 6. (广西玉林) —Please give Alice the story book ______ you see her.‎ ‎—All right.‎ A. unless B. or ‎ C. but D. if ‎( ) 7. If I have a lot of money, I’ll travel _________ the world.‎ A. at B. around ‎ C. for D. to V. 句型转换 ‎1. Take more exercise and you’ll be healthy. (改为同义句)‎ ‎_______ ________take more exercise, you’ll be healthy. ‎ ‎2. The little girl is afraid of going out at night. (改为同义句)‎ ‎ The little girl is afraid _______ ______ out at night.‎ ‎3. He is too small, so he can’t help his mother.‎ ‎(改为同义句)‎ He is______ small_______ help his mother. ‎ ‎4. Jim enjoyed himself in the park.‎ ‎(改为同义句)‎ Jim______ _______ _________ _________ in the park. ‎ ‎5. You can’t bring friends from other schools to the party.(改为祈使句) ‎ ‎__________ ________ friends from other schools to the party.‎ 创新提升 阅读理解 Many teenagers feel that the most important people in their lives are their friends. They believe that their family members don’t know them as well as their friends do. In large families, it’s quite often for brothers and sisters to fight with each other and then they can only go to their friends for some ideas. ‎ It is very important for teenagers to have one good friend or a group of friends. Even when they are not with their friends, they usually spend a lot of time talking among them on the phone. This communication is very important in children’s growing up, because friends can discuss something. These things are difficult to say to their family members. ‎ However, parents often try to choose their children’s friends for them. Some parents even stop their children from meeting their good friends. Have you ever thought of the following questions? ‎ Who choose your friends? ‎ Do you choose your friends or your friends choose you? ‎ Have you got a good friend your parents don’t like? ‎ Your answers are welcome. ‎ ‎( ) 1. Many teenagers think that _____ can understand them better. ‎ A. friends B. brothers C. sisters D. parents ‎ ‎( ) 2. ____ is very important to teenagers. ‎ A. To make friends ‎ B. Communication C. To stop meeting friends ‎ D. Both A and B ‎ ‎( ) 3. When teenagers have something difficult to say to their parents, they usually __________. ‎ A. stay alone at home ‎ B. fight with their parents ‎ C. discuss it with their friends ‎ D. go to their brothers and sisters for help ‎ ‎( ) 4.The sentence “Your answers are welcome.” means“________”. ‎ A. You are welcome to discuss the questions with us. ‎ B. We’ve got no idea, so your answers are welcome. ‎ C. Your answers are always right. ‎ D. You can give us all the right answers. ‎ ‎( ) 5. Which of the following is the writer’s attitude（态度）? ‎ A. Parents should choose friends for their children. ‎ B. Children should choose everything they like. ‎ C. Parents should understand their children better. ‎ D. Teenagers should go to their friends for help.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (山西) In April, the weather in Shanxi was really changeable. People still remember they have ______ four seasons in a week.‎ A. organized B. experienced ‎ C. described D. solved ‎( ) 2. (湖北武汉) —Is the child any better today? ‎ ‎—I think so. His temperature seems _______ now.‎ A. high B. normal ‎ C. low D. special ‎( ) 3. (山东莱芜) Lisa was so careless that she made many spelling _______ in her homework.‎ A. plans B. decisions ‎ C. grades D. mistakes ‎( ) 4. (安徽) The man tried several times to start the car, and he succeeded________.‎ A. in the past B. in the end ‎ C. at first D. at once ‎( ) 5. (浙江丽水) Being honest is the first ______ is you want to make friends with others.‎ A. step B. time ‎ C. job D. hand 第四课时 Section B 3a-Self Check 知识清单 I. 短语互译 ‎1. old people’s home visit _______________‎ ‎2. school clean-up________________‎ ‎3. children’s hospital visit________________‎ ‎4. worry about ___________‎ ‎5. two other problems________________‎ ‎6. talk to _________________‎ II. 选词并由其正确形式填空 you; feel; away; talk; good; call; surprise; long; know; care Everyone needs friends. It’s nice to have a friend 1._______, laugh and do things with. We 2.________ lonely if we never have a friend. Friends sometimes don’t get on 3.____.‎ Sometimes friends move 4._______. We miss them very much, but we can 5._______ them and write to them. It is 6.______ to find out how much we like new people when we get to know them.‎ There’s more food news for people who have friends. They live 7._______ than people who don’t. Why? It could be just 8._______ that someone cares. If someone 9.______ about you, you take better care of 10._______.‎ III.根据汉语补全句子 ‎1. 如果我们为他组织生日聚会，大家都会来的。‎ Everyone ______ ______ if we _______ a birthday party _______ him.‎ ‎2. 班里一半的学生想要在将来成为教师。‎ ‎ _______ ________ _______ want to be teachers in the future.‎ ‎3. 我认为你应该去上大学。‎ ‎ I think you should _______ _______ ________.‎ ‎4. 最后，他终于找到了丢失的宠物狗。‎ ‎ _______ ________ _______, he found his lost pet dog.‎ ‎5. 他自己保守着这个秘密。‎ ‎ He ________ the secret to ________.‎ 基础闯关 I. 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. I had a great time _______ (play) basketball yesterday. ‎ ‎2. What _____________(happen) if there is no water or air on the earth? ‎ ‎3. If Gina _________(have) enough money, she __________ (buy) a beautiful wallet for her mom. ‎ ‎4. To keep in good health, it is best ________ (exercise) every day. ‎ ‎5. The little girl is too young to ___________ (dress) herself.‎ II. 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. My mother often asks me ______ more vegetables. ‎ A. eat B. eating ‎ C. to eat D. eaten ‎( ) 2. The little boy is _______young ______ go to school now. A. too; to B. to; to C. so; that C. too; too ‎( ) 3. If you don’t finish your homework, your teacher will _________you. A. be angry with B. be angry at C. be angry about D. be angry ‎( ) 4. Half of the students in our class ________interested in playing computer games. ‎ A. is B. are C. have D. be ‎( ) 5. —Are you going to the Summer Palace this weekend? ‎ ‎—Yes, I am. But if it ________, I _______stay at home. ‎ ‎ A. will rain, will stay ‎ B. will rain, stay ‎ C. rains, will stay D. rains; stay ‎( ) 6. (北京) Hurry up, _____ you will miss the plane.‎ A. and B. but C. so D. or III. 根据句意及汉语提示完成句子 ‎1. 很多孩子都喜欢炸薯条和奶酪。‎ ‎ Many kids like eating ________ ________ and cheese.‎ ‎2. 请小心！那里很危险。‎ ‎ Please ______ ______ ! It’s dangerous there.‎ ‎3. 我们不应该逃离问题。你认为呢？‎ ‎ We shouldn’t _______ _______ ______ our problem. Do you think so?‎ ‎4. 你还能从谁那儿得到建议？‎ ‎ _______ _______ can you get advice from?‎ ‎5. 你知道怎样把这个蛋糕切成两半吗？‎ ‎ Do you know how to ______ the cake ________ ________?‎ 创新提升 阅读理解 ‎“A friend walks in when the rest of the world walks out.” Sometimes in life, you find a special friend: someone who changes you life just by being part of it; someone who makes you laugh until you can’t stop; someone who convinces (使相信) you that there really is an open door just waiting for you to open it. This is forever friendship. ‎ When you are sad, and the world seems dark and empty, your forever friend lifts you up in spirits (精神) and makes that dark and empty world suddenly seem bright and full. If you have a forever friend, it will be easier for you to get through the hard times and the sad times. If you turn and walk away, your forever friend follows. If you lose your way, your forever friend guides you, encourages (鼓励) you, holds your hands and tells you that everything is going to be OK. ‎ And if you find such a friend, you feel happy because you need not worry. You have a forever friend for life and forever have no end.‎ 根据短文内容填空 Forever friendship ‎ What’s a 1._____ friend like?‎ ‎2. ___ your life just by being part of it. Make you laugh until you can’t stop.‎ Make you 3.______ that there really is a way of 4.________ problems.‎ ‎ What’s forever friendship like in time of 5.________?‎ When you are not 6.______, your forever friend can cheer you up and turn the 7._____ and empty world into a bright and full one so that you can go through the difficult and sad times more 8._______.‎ Nothing can worry you if you find a 9._______friend. You can turn to him for help even when you lose your way.‎ Wherever you go, he will follow you.‎ Conclusion(总结)‎ It’s 10.______ for all of us to find forever friendship.‎ 中考全练 ‎( ) 1. (辽宁鞍山) The children will climb the hill if it ______ tomorrow.‎ A. won’t rain B. didn’t rain C. isn’t rain D. doesn’t rain ‎( ) 2. (湖北咸宁) —Let’s go to the community if it ______ tomorrow.‎ ‎—But nobody knows if it ______ tomorrow.‎ A. won’t rain; rains ‎ B. doesn’t rain; rains C. doesn’t rain; will rain ‎ D. won’t rain; will rain ‎( ) 3. (山西) A country has dreams. We teenagers ______ also have dreams. With dreams and hard work, anything amazing can be created.‎ A. may B. must C. should Unit 10 单元测试卷 第一部分 选择题（共45分）‎ I. 单项选择（本题共15分， 每小题1分）‎ ‎( ) 1. Don’t worry, Mom. I can look after ________. ‎ A. me B. I ‎ C. my D. myself ‎ ‎( ) 2. I won’t go if it ___ tomorrow. ‎ A. rain B. is raining ‎ C. rains D. will rain ‎( ) 3. What about ___ the hill? ‎ A. climb up B. to climb up ‎ C. climbing up D. to climb ‎ ‎( ) 4. What _________ if I ________ my homework?  ‎ A. will happen; don’t finish ‎ B. will happen; won’t finish  ‎ C. happen; don’t finish ‎ D. happen; won’t finish ‎ ‎( ) 5. It’s hard_____________ the work in two days. ‎ A. finishing B. to finish C. finish D. finishes ‎ ‎( ) 6. I remembered _________ that math problem yesterday. ‎ A. solve B. solves ‎ C. solved D. solving ‎ ‎( ) 7. — May I speak to the headmaster? ‎ ‎ —He ___ a meeting now. Can I take a message? ‎ A. is having B. had ‎ C. has D. will have ‎ ‎( ) 8. “Who won the match _______?” he asks. ‎ A. in the end B. in the end of ‎ C. at the end of D. at the end ‎( ) 9. The little girl wants to go to school, but she is ___. ‎ A. enough old ‎ B. old enough C. not enough old ‎ D. not old enough ‎( ) 10. Dear, don’t come ___________ I telephone you. ‎ A. if        B. unless ‎              C. because  D. when ‎ ‎( ) 11. Alex is a(n) _____ boy. He always makes mistakes in his homework. ‎ A. quiet             B. outgoing ‎ C. careful         D. careless ‎ ‎( ) 12. My music teacher advised me _____ the school music club. ‎ A. join           B. joining C. to join      D. joined ‎ ‎( ) 13. He is nice and always keeps his promise. You can _____ him.   ‎ A. trust         B. miss ‎  C. stand       D. refuse ‎ ‎( ) 14. _____ your problems with others can make you feel relaxed. ‎ A. Share           B. To sharing C. Sharing         D. Shares ‎ ‎( ) 15. —You can wear your cool coat to the party! ‎ ‎—_____  ‎ A. That’s a great idea!  ‎ B. That’s really too bad!  ‎ C. You look old!   ‎ D. You look cool! ‎ II. 完形填空（本题共10分，每小题1分）‎ Do you have any worries? Zhang Lin, a fourteen-year-old girl from No. 29 Middle School, has a lot of   1   these days. ‎ Zhang Lin has a hard time with her English and math,   2   she often fails (不及格) her exams. When she gets bad grades, her mother gets angry   3   her. She finds it is hard to have a talk with her mother and she thinks her mother   4   understands her. What can Zhang Lin do about this? She is very worried. She believes the worst thing is to do   5  . So Zhang Lin   6   to talk to her friends. But she worries that if they know that, they will laugh at her. If so, she will certainly feel   7  . ‎ Also, Zhang Lin likes a boy. She wrote a letter to him, but she is   8   to send the letter to him. She wants to tell her father about   9   letter, but she thinks her father will criticize (批评) her. If her father   10   she likes a boy, he will be angry. ‎ No one can help Zhang Lin to solve her problems. She doesn’t know what to do. Who can help her? ‎ ‎( ) 1. A. ideas          B. worries      ‎ C. time           D. homework ‎ ‎( ) 2. A. so            B. but      ‎ C. though    D. unless ‎ ‎( ) 3. A. to             B. for      ‎ C. from          D. with ‎ ‎( ) 4. A. often       B. sometimes ‎ C. never     D. always ‎ ‎( ) 5. A. something      B. anything ‎ C. nothing        D. everything ‎ ‎( ) 6. A. asks          B. wants ‎ C. stops        D. refuses ‎ ‎( ) 7. A. more      B. less     ‎ C. better          D. worse ‎ ‎( ) 8. A. afraid         B. sure    ‎ C. ready       D. able ‎ ‎( ) 9. A. your      B. their    ‎ C. his      D. her ‎ ‎( ) 10. A. knows    B. will know ‎ C. knew  D. is knowing ‎ III. 阅读理解（本题共20分，每小题2分）‎ A Everyone needs friends. There is an old saying, "Friends are God's way of taking care of us." But how do you find real friendship and keep it?‎ The American writer Sally Seaman tells young students some smart ways to find friends. Sally says finding friendship is just like planting a tree. You  plant the seed (种子) and take care of it to make it grow.‎ First, you should choose(选择) a friend. What makes a good friend? It is not because a person has money or good looks. A good friend should be kind and patient. For example, if you have a bad day, a good friend should listen to your complaints and do his or her best to help. To make a friend, you cannot be too shy. You should make each other happy and share your lives. ‎ But things cannot always be happy. Even the best friends have fights(吵架). What should you do when you have a fight with your friend? You have to talk to him or her. When there is no one around, have an honest talk. If he or she doesn't want to talk, you could write a letter. There are three steps to being friends again: ‎ Tell him or her how you are feeling; say what your friend has done wrong, and explain why you did this or that. ‎ Remember that friendship is the most important thing in your life.‎ ‎( ) 1. Sally wants to tell students the ways to_____.‎ A. find friends   B. plant trees   ‎ C. get happy   D. keep fit ‎( ) 2. What makes good friends? A good friend should _____.‎ A. be lovely and cool ‎ B. be kind and patient C. have lots of money  ‎ D. have good looks ‎( ) 3. According to the text, you can ____ your friend after a fight.‎ A. buy a present for       ‎ B. never say a word to C. have dinner with ‎ D. write a letter to ‎( ) 4. What should you do if you fight with your friend?‎ A. Fight till win.                    ‎ B. Say sorry to him or her.‎ C. Have an honest talk or write a letter.  ‎ D. Tell the teacher.‎ ‎( ) 5. What is the best title of the text? ‎ A. Teenagers and friendship.  ‎ B. The good friends around you.‎ C. The trouble of growing up.   ‎ D. The care and keeping of friends.‎ B Two years ago, my family moved to a new city and I had to study in a new school. As I had few friends there, I felt lonely. Then I met Tony. The first time I saw him, he was standing in t he center of a group of students, telling jokes. The children around laughed from time to time. Tony knew about my problem. He asked me to play basketball with his friends and helped me with my studies. We soon became good friends. ‎ About a year ago, however, Tony’s father lost his life in an accident. As a result, his family had to move to a small house, Tony changed into a different person, He became silent and he even lost his interest in studies. Several times, I invited him to go out and play basketball with me, but he refused. I want to help him, but didn’t know what to do. ‎ Then something strange happened in my class. Two classmates lost the money in their schoolbags. ‎ Last Friday, just before the P.E. lesson, I went back to the classroom to get my running shoes. The door was half open, I went in. To my astonishment, I saw Tony was searching one of my classmates’ schoolbags. I was shocked… ‎ ‎( ) 6. What kind of boy was Tony at the beginning of the story? ‎ A. He was a clever boy. ‎ B. He was a poor boy. ‎ C. He was a popular boy. ‎ D. He was a shy boy.‎ ‎( ) 7. Why did the writer become friends with Tony? ‎ A. Because Tony helped him do his homework. ‎ B. Because Tony was kind to him. ‎ C. Because Tony liked playing basketball. ‎ D. Because Tony told jokes. ‎ ‎( ) 8. What caused the change of Tony? A. His father’s accident. ‎ B. His strange character. ‎ C. The move of his family. ‎ D. The loss of his interest in playing with his friends. ‎ ‎( ) 9. How did the writer feel when he saw Tony’s change? ‎ A. He felt angry. ‎ B. He felt surprised. ‎ C. He felt unhappy. ‎ D. He felt worried. ‎ ‎( ) 10. The underlined word “ astonishment” means ________. ‎ A. sadness B. surprise ‎ C. disappointment D. joy 第二部分 非选择题（共55分）‎ IV. 任务型阅读(每小题2分，共10分)‎ The first Earth Day was in 1970. People were beginning to worry about we were doing to our environment. So they set up Earth Day to tell everyone about their worries. ‎ In 2007 organizers in over 150 countries planned over 4,000 big events. But Earth Day is not just about marches(游行) and big events. In the week around Earth Day (Arial 22) there were many thousands of smaller local events. These events dealt with environmental problems in the neighborhood. ‎ The World Wide Fund for Nature made a list of 5 things that each person could do to save the environment. ‎ Don’t leave the tap running. ‎ Turn off lights when you leave a room. Turn off your computer every night. ‎ Wash your clothes, and yourself, in warm or cold water, not hot water. ‎ Dishwashers use as little water as possible. ‎ If we all do at least 2 of these all the time, we can make a big difference. ‎ ‎1题判断正误（“T”表示正确，“F”表示错误）；2-4 题回答问题；5题将划线句子译成汉语。 ‎ ‎1. More than 150 countries celebrated the Earth Day in 2007. （ ） ‎ ‎2. What is the purpose for people to set up Earth Day? ‎ ‎ ________________________________‎ ‎3. When is Earth Day? ‎ ‎ ________________________________‎ ‎4. How many things that the World Wild Fund for Nature listed to ask people to do to save the environment? ‎ ‎ _________________________________‎ ‎5. _________________________________‎ V. 情景交际(根据对话内容，在空白处填入恰当的句子，使对话完整、通顺。每小题2分，共10分) ‎ A: Hello! This is Dale. ‎ B: Hello, Dale! This is Linda. (1)_______________________________? ‎ A: Sorry, my sister Susan is out at this time. ‎ B: Could you tell me when she will come back? ‎ A: I’m not sure about it. (2)________________________________? ‎ B: Sure. Please tell her I want to invite her to my birthday party next Sunday. ‎ A: Thanks for asking. (3)________________________________? ‎ B: The party will start at 6:30 p.m. ‎ A: (4)_______________________________? ‎ B: I’m going to have it at Rijiang Restaurant. ‎ A: (5)_______________________________? ‎ B: The restaurant is on Jianshe Road, across from Xiandai Building. ‎ A: OK. I’ll tell her about it. ‎ B: Thank you very much. Goodbye! ‎ A: Bye! ‎ VI. 用所给词的适当形式填空（每小题1分，共5分）‎ ‎1. Jenny will help me  ________(organize) the school trip. ‎ ‎2. Look! Some ________(teenager) are planting trees. ‎ ‎3. It was easy work, so Joe decided to do it ________(him). ‎ ‎4. It’s difficult for them ________(solve) their problem. ‎ ‎5. Can you give me some ________(advice) on how to do it? ‎ VII. 根据汉语补全句子，每空一词（每小题2分，共10分）‎ ‎1. 妈妈让我放学后买一些菜。 ‎ Mother asked _______ ________ ________ some vegetables after school. ‎ ‎2. 你想来点炸土豆片吗？ ‎ Would you like some _________ _______? ‎ ‎3. 请把这个蛋糕切成两半。 ‎ Please cut the cake ________ _________. ‎ ‎4. 我可以把这件事告诉你，但是你必须保密。 ‎ I can tell you about it, but you must ______ it ______ _____. ‎ ‎5. 我们不应该逃避现实。 ‎ We shouldn’t _______ _______ _________ reality. ‎ VIII. 书面表达（20分）‎ 成长中每个人都要面对烦恼，并解决问题。假设你叫刘明，是美国中学生艾丽斯的朋友。她在给你的电子邮件中倾诉她的烦恼：一位亲近的朋友向她借钱，艾丽斯怕借钱给了朋友她会不还，她不知道该怎么办，因此问你是否有相同的问题。请给她回复，回答她的问题，提出你的建议，并就此事谈谈你的看法。词数： 60-80词左右。‎ Dear Alice, ‎ I’m glad to hear from you. ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ yours, ‎ Liu Ming 期末测试卷 ‎(测试时间：90分钟 满分：120分)‎ I. 单项选择（本题共15分， 每小题1分）‎ ‎( ) 1. There a football game in Mary’s school.‎ A. will have B. is going to have C. is going to be D. are going to be ‎( ) 2. —I enjoy the beauty of nature in the countryside. ‎ ‎ —Me, too. And the air is than that in the city.‎ A. much fresh B. more fresher C. much fresher D. most fresh ‎( ) 3. —Which do you think is_______ , floods, droughts or earthquakes?‎ ‎ —Earthquakes, of course.‎ A. serious B. much serious ‎ C. more serious D. the most serious ‎( ) 4. —What’s the girl going to be when she________?‎ ‎—She is going to be a teacher. ‎ A. looks up B. grows up C. will grow up D. will look up ‎ ‎( ) 5. —How many students are there in your school?‎ ‎— ________students, I think.‎ ‎ A. thousand of ‎ B. three thousands ‎ C. three thousand ‎ D. three thousands of ‎( ) 6. —How is your arm, Tom?‎ ‎—Oh, don’t worry. The X-ray shows it’s .‎ A. serious something ‎ B. serious nothing ‎ C. something serious ‎ D. nothing serious ‎( ) 7. —When did he go to summer camp?‎ ‎—He _____ to summer camp five days _____.‎ A. goes, ago B. went, ago C. went, for D. goes, before ‎ ‎( ) 8. — do your parents go to the movies? ‎ ‎—Once a month.‎ A. How long B. How far C. How often D. How soon ‎( ) 9. —_________ she have breakfast this morning?‎ ‎—No. She left home __________ breakfast.‎ A. Do; with B. Does; for C. Does; without D. Did; without ‎( ) 10. He usually _____________ his bag ________ magazines and story books.‎ ‎ A. fill, with B. fills, with ‎ C. fill, into D. fills, in ‎( ) 11. _____ bananas and _____ yogurt do you need for your banana milk shake?‎ A. How many; how many B. How many; how much C. How much; how much ‎ D. How much; how many ‎( ) 12. If it _____ tomorrow, we ____ to climb mountains.‎ A. doesn’t rain; go B. won’t rain; will go C. doesn’t rain; will go D. won’t rain; go ‎ ‎( ) 13. The apple is too big, let’s cut it _______.‎ A. in half B. to half C. into half D. at half ‎( ) 14. Mr. Smith plans _________ here much longer because he has lots of things to do.‎ A. to keep B. keep C. to stay D. stay ‎( ) 15. —I’m going to Kate’s birthday party this afternoon.‎ ‎— .‎ A. Good luck. B. The same to you. ‎ C. I think so. D. Have a good time.‎ II. 完形填空（本题共10分，每小题1分）‎ Life in the 22nd century (世纪)will be 1 from life in the 21st century, because many changes will take place in the new century. But what will the changes be?‎ The population(人口) is 2 fast. There will be more and more people in the world and most of them will live 3 than before. 4 will be much smaller and more useful, and there will be at least one in every home. And computer studies will be one of 5 subjects at school.‎ ‎ People will work fewer hours than they 6 in the 21st century, and they will have more free time for sports, 7 TV and travelling. Traveling will be more convenient(便利的). And many more people will go to other countries 8 holidays. ‎ More land will be used for building, new towns and houses. Then there will be less room for cows and sheep, so meat will be more expensive. 9 no one will eat it every day, instead (代替)they eat more vegetables and fruit. People will be healthier than before.‎ Work in the future will be different, too. Dangerous and hard work will be done by robots（机器人）, 10 of this, many people will not have enough work to do. This will be a problem.‎ ‎( ) 1. A. same B. the same ‎ C. different D. difference ‎( ) 2. A. making B. growing ‎ C. running D. doing ‎( ) 3. A. longer B. shorter ‎ C. faster D. taller ‎( ) 4. A. Trains B. Telephones ‎ C. Computers D. Planes ‎( ) 5. A. the most important ‎ B. most important ‎ C. the more important ‎ D. more important ‎( ) 6. A. do B. does C. did D. are ‎( ) 7. A. watch B. to watch C. watching D. watched ‎( ) 8. A. to B. in C. with D. for ‎( ) 9. A. Probably B. Maybe ‎ C. May be D. However ‎( ) 10. A. Because B. So ‎ C. Although D. But III. 情景交际：根据上下文，从方框中选择合适的句子，补全对话。（本题共10分，每小题2分）‎ A. What about you?‎ B. Do you like soccer? ‎ C. What are you going to do today? ‎ D. That’s why I like it. ‎ E. Why don’t you like it? ‎ F. Are you going home today? ‎ G. I also hope Chinese soccer can have ‎ good grades one day. ‎ A: Tom, 1. ‎ B: I’m going to watch a soccer game this afternoon. ‎ A: Really? 2. ‎ B: Yes. I like it very much. 3. ‎ A: I don’t like it. And I can’t think of any reason why you like soccer, because Chinese soccer is very bad. ‎ B: 4. . I think all Chinese people should give more love to Chinese soccer. ‎ A: Yes. You’re right. And 5. ‎ IV. 阅读理解（本题共40分，每小题2分）‎ A Uncle Li and Uncle Wang are good friends. They live next to each other and their farms are both at the foot of the mountain. So they can help each other. But neither of them likes to use his head. They’re both poor though they work hard. Most villagers have built new houses, but they still live in the low and broken houses. They never find out why.‎ Once Uncle Li went to town to buy some medicine for his wife. In the town he heard the apples in a city were expensive. He told Uncle Wang about it as soon as he went back. They decided to carry some apples to the city. They borrowed some money from their friends and bought nearly 1,000 kilograms of apples in the villages and carried them to the city on a tractor. Bad luck! A lot of apples have already been carried there when they arrived. A few days later they had to sell them at a low price (价格). They felt unhappy and returned to their village.‎ ‎　 “I can’t understand why we sustained (蒙受) losses in business while others always profit (盈利)” Uncle Li asked one day.‎ ‎“The tractor was too small.” Uncle Wang said without thinking. “We’ll carry more apples on a truck next time!”‎ ‎“I agree!” said Uncle Li. “How foolish (傻的) we were!”‎ ‎( ) 1. Uncle Li and Uncle Wang live in the low and broken houses because ___.‎ ‎　　 A. they hope to save money ‎ B. they’re both poor ‎　　 C. their farms are at the foot of the mountain ‎　 D. they’re not far from their farms ‎( ) 2. The two farmers carried the apples to the city to _________.‎ ‎　　 A. make a journey ‎ B. visit some places of interest C. meet their friends ‎ D. make a profit ‎( ) 3. The two farmers had to sell their apples at a low price because ____.‎ ‎　　 A. theirs weren’t as good as the others’　　‎ B. theirs were much less than the others’‎ ‎　　 C. many apples had been already carried to the city ‎ D. they forgot to carry them on a truck ‎( ) 4. Uncle Li and Uncle Wang were unhappy because _________.‎ ‎　　 A. they had sustained losses in business ‎ 　　 B. they had lost some money in the city ‎　　 C. something was wrong with the tractor ‎　　 D. other people profited in the city ‎( ) 5. Which of the following is true?‎ ‎　　 A. The two farmers found out why they were poor. ‎ B. The two farmers will soon get rich.‎ ‎　　 C. Neither of the farmers is clever. 　　‎ D. The two farmers decided to buy a truck.‎ B ‎ ‎ ‎(   ) 6. We can see this advertisement _________.‎ ‎ A. at a cafe B. at a library C. at school D. at home ‎(   ) 7. We can go for lunch at _______on Monday.‎ ‎ A. 10:30 B. 11:45‎ ‎ C. 12:30 D. 14:30‎ ‎(   ) 8. Mrs. Zhou will spend ________if(如 果) she goes for dinner on Friday.‎ ‎ A.＄6 B.＄7 ‎ C.＄11 D.＄12‎ ‎(   ) 9. Mr. Brown and his 8-year-old son had to pay _______for dinner last Sunday.‎ ‎ A.＄7 B.＄11 ‎ ‎ C. ＄12 D. ＄17‎ ‎(   ) 10. You can ________according to（根据） the ad.‎ A. take away the food in one box for 8 dollars ‎ B. enjoy all you can eat and barbecue C. get a free bottle of wine with your friend if you are 16 years old.‎ D. call the Chinese Café at 9651 4655‎ C Can you understand the following words?‎ ‎“Long time no see.”      ‎ ‎“Good good study, day day up.”‎ ‎“I like your smile, but dislike you put your shoes on my face.”‎ Yes, we call these examples Chinglish, like “people mountain, people sea”.‎ Chinglish usually means English words with Chinese grammar on street signs or products（商品）. However, many English speaking tourists love them. Tom has been living in Beijing for years. “I think many Chinese people dislike Chinglish. But I love it. It’s quite interesting. I think if the translations（翻译） of English in China are all perfect（完美的）, something will be lost from Chinese culture. So, it is also a part of Chinese culture.”   ‎ However, Chinglish will probably become a part of history in future. Beijing has made a plan to correct（改正） Chinglish within five years. “It is so funny to see Chinglish on the signs. And they are a kind of trouble for communication（交流） between the Chinese and foreigners,” a Beijinger said.‎ However, some people in China like Chinglish. They think that English has “borrowed”(借) a lot from other languages such as German, French and Spanish（西班牙语） in the past, and now as Chinese’s turn.‎ ‎ ( )11. What is Chinglish according to the passage?‎ ‎ A. The English words easy to pronounce.‎ ‎ B. The Chinese words difficult to translate.‎ ‎ C. The English words with Chinese grammar.‎ ‎ D. The Chinese words with English grammar that foreigners love.‎ ‎(   )12. What does “people mountain, people sea” mean?‎ ‎ A. There are many people.‎ ‎ B. People are on the mountain and in the sea.‎ ‎ C. All the people are running.‎ ‎ D. People are taller and taller.‎ ‎(   )13. What does Tom think about Chinglish?‎ ‎ A. It shows Chinese are popular.‎ ‎ B. It is hated by all foreign tourists.‎ ‎ C. It helps him to learn English well.‎ ‎ D. It is also a part of Chinese culture.‎ ‎(   )14. The last paragraph but one (倒数第二段) tells us that Beijing will____.‎ ‎ A. correct Chinglish in future ‎ B. change English and Chinese ‎ C. help foreigners to learn Chinglish ‎ D. put English words into Chinese ‎ ‎(   ) 15. Some people, who love Chinglish, think that it is fine for English to borrow something from_____.‎ ‎ A. French         B. Chinese ‎      C. Spanish       D. German D What do you call a school with no tests, no grades, no classes, and no teachers? Students of the Met School and their parents think it to be the best school in the world.‎ The school is in Rhode Island, USA. Dennis Littky opened it in 1996. He was fired（解雇） from two other schools, because many parents of the school students were happy with his unusual ideas. The school takes poor kids who are failing(失败) at schools. Nearly(几乎) everybody has already given up （放弃）these students and their parents want to try anything. The Met School gives Littky a great place to try out his new ideas.‎ ‎“The word that most kids use when they talk about high school is ‘boring’,” says Littky. “But no one would say the Met was boring.” Advisors(指导老师) (not teachers) work with small groups of students for four years. Students spend almost half of their school time learning real-life skills（技能）, such as working for business（生意）, spending time with government(政府) people, and helping teach younger children. Instead of（代替） tests, the students give shows about their work outside school.‎ In fact, students work harder here than in other schools. All the students from the Met graduate and can choose to go to a good university （大学）. Now, Bill Gates is starting schools like this one around the USA.‎ ‎( ) 16. ___________ think(s) that the Met School is the best.‎ ‎ A. The headmaster of the Met School.‎ ‎ B. The student outside the Met School.‎ ‎ C. All the students and their parents from the Met School.‎ ‎ D. The teachers at the Met School. ‎ ‎( ) 17. What do most high school students ‎ think of normal（普通的） school?‎ ‎ A. Interesting.  B. Relax. C. Boring. D. Exciting ‎( ) 18.What does the underlined word “graduate” in the last paragraph mean in Chinese?‎ ‎ A. 毕业 B. 离开 ‎ C. 结束 D. 搬离 ‎( ) 19. What do the students do at the Met School?‎ ‎ A. They spend all their school time playing.‎ ‎ B. They keep giving shows about their school.‎ ‎ C. They only learn from working for business.‎ ‎ D. Almost half of the time, they learn real-life skills.‎ ‎( ) 20. According to the passage, which of the following if TRUE?‎ ‎ A. Life at the Met School is very easy because there are no tests.‎ ‎ B. Teachers at the Met School give students much more homework than at normal school. ‎ ‎ C. Students can choose to go to a good university.‎ ‎ D. Students at the Met School spend all their time working outside school.‎ V. 任务型阅读。（本题共10分，每小题2分）‎ Dogs like living with people. They are very friendly. They can do many things for people. (A) Some dogs help people to look after sheep, other dogs help them to find the lost children. And some of the dogs can help the blind.‎ There is a kind of dog. His name is (B) Seeing Eye dog. Now we can see this kind of dog all over the world. They are working for the blind. The Seeing Eye dog is strong and easy to train. He helps the blind to walk from place to place. Before a dog becomes a Seeing Eye dog, he must go to a training school for about three months. (C) ____________ the dog has to learn to sit or stay when he hears the trainer’s call. In his next lesson the dog learns to take his trainer across busy streets. The dog has many things to learn. At the end of the training he must take tests. When he passes the test, the Seeing Eye dog will do things by himself. ‎ Now he can help the blind people. (D) The new master may be a man, a woman, or even a child. It takes the dog and his blind master about a month (E) ___________ (learn) to work and live together.‎ 阅读短文，完成任务。‎ ‎1. 将（A）处划线句子译成汉语。 ‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ ‎2. In Chinese, (B) “Seeing Eye dog” means ‎ ‎_______________________.‎ ‎3. 在（C）处填入一个适当单词。‎ ‎_____________________‎ ‎4. 改写（D）处划线句子。__________ the new master ___________ a man,‎ ‎5. 用(E)处所给单词的适当形式填空。__________________________________‎ VI. 情景交际：根据对话内容，用适当的单词或句子补全对话（本题共10分，每小题2分）‎ A: Did you 1 on your vacation ?‎ B: Yes, I did.‎ A: W 2 did you do on vacation?‎ B: I visit my grandparents in Emei Mountains.‎ A: 3 your grandparents?‎ B: They were fine. Thank you.‎ A: S0 did you go to the mountains?‎ B: Of course, I did. And I saw4___________ animals and tall trees there.‎ A: Did you give food to the monkeys?‎ B : Yes, I did.. It was really interesting.‎ A: What else did you do there?‎ B: I 5 . Look here, my photos. Wow, They're great.‎ VII. 用所给词的适当形式填空（本题共5分，每小题1分）‎ ‎1. ________ (luck), he passed the final exam in the end.‎ ‎2. On her ____________ (twenty) birthday, Mary got the best gift in her life.‎ ‎3. Did you enjoy __________(you) in the park yesterday?‎ ‎4. —_____ people_______(use) money to buy things? ‎ ‎—Yes, they will. ‎ ‎5. There are a lot of new ____________(build) in our city.‎ VIII. 根据汉语，完成句子。（本题共10分，每小题2分）‎ ‎1. 因为这场雨，我们今天无法在室外打篮球了。‎ ‎ We can’t play basketball outside today ________ ________ the rain.‎ ‎2. 队友密切合作，使大伙儿都发挥到极致是很重要的。‎ ‎ It’s important for the players to play together and _______ ________ the best in each other. ‎ ‎3. 学校在教育中起着最为重要的作用。 ‎ Schools play the _______ ______ _____ in education.‎ ‎4. 他总是随时能够倾听我的烦恼。 ‎ He is always ________ ________ listen to my problems.‎ ‎5. 学生们每周仅看一两次电视。 ‎ Some students only watch TV __________ or ________ a week.‎ IX. 书面表达（本题共10分）‎ 根据要求完成大作文，词数80左右。 ‎ 汤姆邀请杰克下周六去他家，但是杰克那天没有空，因此不能赴约。假如你是杰克，请根据提示写一封电子邮件拒绝汤姆的邀请，说明原因，要点如下 时间 活动 周六上午 上钢琴课，帮助妈妈做家务 周六下午 去看牙医。‎ 周六晚上 为了考试而学习。‎ 注意：文章的开头和结尾已写好，不计入总词数。可以适当发挥，不要逐字翻译。‎ Hi Tom,‎ Thanks for____________________________‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ Best wishes,‎ Jake ‎ 八年级英语全册教案（人教版）‎ Unit 1 Where did you go on vacation?‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：anyone, anywhere, wonderful, quite a few, most, something, nothing, everyone, of course, myself, yourself ‎ 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① —Where did you go on vacation? —I went to the mountains. ‎ ‎② —Where did Tina to on vacation? —She went to the beach. ‎ ‎③ —Did you go with anyone? —Yes, I did./No, I didn’t. ‎ ‎2) 能了解以下语法：‎ ‎ —复合不定代词someone, anyone, something, anything等 的用法。‎ ‎ —yourself, myself等反身代词的用法。‎ ‎3） 一般过去时态的特殊疑问句，一般疑问句及其肯定、否定回答。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 学会用一般过去时进行信息交流，培养学生的环保意识，热爱大自然。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 用所学的功能语言交流假期去了什么旅行。‎ ‎2) 掌握本课时出现的新词汇。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ ‎1) 复合不定代词someone, anyone, something, anything等 的用法。‎ ‎2) yourself, myself等反身代词的用法。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Lead-in ‎ ‎1. 看动画片来进入本课时的主题谈论上周末做了些什么事情，谈论过去发生的事情。 ‎ Ⅱ. Presentation ‎1. Show some pictures on the big screen. Let Ss read the expressions. ‎ ‎2. Focus attention on the picture. Ask: What can you see? Say: Each picture shows something a person did in the past. Name each activity and ask students to repeat: ‎ Stayed at home, Went to mountains, went to New York City 6. Went to the beach, ‎ visited my uncle, visited museums, went to summer camp ‎ ‎3. Now, please match each phrase with one of the pictures next to the name of the ‎ activity，point to the sample answer. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers. Answers: 1. f 2. b 3. g 4. e 5. c 6. a 7. d ‎ III. Listening ‎ ‎1. Point to the picture on the screen. ‎ Say: Look at the picture A. Where did Tina go on vacation? She went to mountains. ‎ Ask: What did the person do in each picture? ‎ ‎2. Play the recording the first time. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording a second time. ‎ Say: There are three conversations. The people talk about what did on vacation. Listen to the recording and write numbers of the names in the right boxes of the picture. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers. ‎ IV．Pair work ‎ ‎1. Point out the sample conversation. Ask two Ss to read the conversation to the class. ‎ ‎2. Now work with a partner. Make your own conversation about the people in the picture. ‎ ‎3. Ss work in pairs. As they talk, move around the classroom and give any help they need. ‎ ‎4. Let some pairs act out their conversations. ‎ V. Listening ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss they will hear a conversation about three students’ conversations. Listen for the first time and fill in the chart. Then listen again and check Yes, or No. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read the phrases in the chart of 2b. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording the first time. Ss listen and fill in the chart. ‎ ‎4. Play the recording a second time for the Ss to check “Yes, I did.” or “No, I didn’t. ” ‎ ‎5. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ VI. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Let two Ss read the conversation between Grace, Kevin and Julie. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss work in pairs and try to role-play the conversation. ‎ ‎3. Ask some pairs to act out their conversations. ‎ VII. Role-play ‎ ‎1. First let Ss read the conversation and match the people and places they went. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss act out the conversations in pairs. ‎ ‎3. Some explanations in 2d. ‎ Homework: ‎ 用英语询问你的一位好朋友，她（他）假期去了哪里？看到了什么？并将此对话写在作业上。‎ A: Where did you go…？‎ B: I went to…‎ A: Did you see…‎ B: Yes, I did. / No, I didn’t. ‎ 板书设计：‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ anyone, someone, everyone, something, anything, everything yourself, myself Where did you go on vacation? Did you do anything special?‎ I went to New York City. Did you go anywhere interesting?‎ Where did she go on vacation？ most of the time ‎ She went to the mountains. ‎ 教学反思：‎ Section A 2 (Grammar focus-3c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 复习所学的重难点句型及句式结构。‎ ‎2）总结学习anyone, someone, everyone, something, anything,‎ ‎ nothing等不定代词的用法。‎ ‎3）练习运用所学的句型及句式结构。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 学会用一般过去时进行信息交流，培养学生的环保意识，热爱大自然。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 用所学的功能语言交流假期去了什么旅行。‎ ‎2) 复习运用本课时出现的新词汇。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ ‎1) 复合不定代词someone, anyone, something, anything等 的用法。‎ ‎2) 阅读填空能力的提高。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎ ‎1. Free talk: Ask Ss the questions: Where did you go on vacation? ‎ Ss try to answer the questions. ‎ ‎2. Review the usage of “复合不定代词”‎ Ⅱ. Grammar focus. ‎ ‎1. 学生阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。 ‎ ‎1. 你去了什么地方去度假？ ‎ ‎ ______ ______ you go on ___________?‎ ‎2. 我去了纽约市。 ‎ ‎ I _______ _______ New York City.‎ ‎3. 你和什么人别一起去的吗？ ‎ ‎ ______ ______ go out with ________？ ‎ ‎4. 不，没有别人在这儿。每个人都在度假。 ‎ ‎ No. ____ ______ was here. ‎ ‎ ________ was on _________. ‎ ‎ … (其余试题见课件部分)‎ ‎3.‎ ‎ 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。‎ Ⅲ. Try to Find ‎ 一、复合不定代词总结：‎ ‎1. some, any, no, every与-one, -thing可以组成八个不定代词，他们分别是： ‎ someone, ________ _______ ________ __________ __________ ______________。‎ ‎2. 带some的复合不定代词常用于肯定句中；带 any的复合不定代词常用于否定句或一般疑问句中。例如： ‎ ‎ 我想吃点东西。 I’d like _____________ to eat. ‎ ‎ 今天有人给我打电话吗？ ‎ ‎ Did ________ call me today? ‎ ‎3. 当形容词修饰不定代词时，应放在其后面。例如：这本书里有什么新东西吗？ ‎ ‎ Is there __________ _______ in this book? ‎ 今天没有什么特别的事。 ‎ ‎ There’s ___________ ________ today.‎ ‎4. 由some, any, no, every构成的复合不定代词作主语时，都作单数看待，其谓语动词用单数第三人称形式。例如： ‎ ‎ Something is wrong with my watch.‎ ‎ Well, everyone wants to win.‎ ‎ Nobody knows what the future will be like.‎ ‎ There is something for everyone at Greenwood Park.‎ ‎5. 除no one以外，其他复合不定代词都写成一个词。‎ 二、学生们读上面的探究试题，并合作探究完成。‎ 三、看大屏幕，校对答案。‎ Ⅳ. Practice ‎ Work on 3a: ‎ ‎1. Let Ss look at the conversation in 3a. First let one student read the words in the box. ‎ ‎2. Tell Ss to read the conversation and fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎3. 方法指导：‎ 首先，应通读对话，掌握短文大意；其次，回顾一下刚才学习的有关复合不定代词的用法。‎ 然后，仔细阅读每个句子，根据空格前后的词语进行推敲。比如，第一句话是一个一般疑问句，空格前有do一词，可知空格处应填anything一词，意为“做什么事情”。其他类似。‎ ‎ 学生们，按老师指导的方法进行阅读，并逐句推敲每空应填什么词，在实际的运用提高自己的阅读能力、分析能力及综合运用能力。‎ 最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。‎ Explanation : 反身代词 Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to fill in the blanks in the e-mail message with the words in the box. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：‎ 首先，应通读全文，掌握短文大意；其次，回顾一下刚才学习的有关复合不定代词的用法。‎ 然后，仔细阅读每个句子，根据空格前后的词语进行推敲。比如，第一句话是一个一般疑问句，空格前有do一词，可知空格处应填anything一词，意为“做什么事情”。其他类似。‎ ‎ 学生们，按老师指导的方法进行阅读，并逐句推敲每空应填什么词，在实际的运用提高自己的阅读能力、分析能力及综合运用能力。‎ 最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。‎ Ⅴ. Group work ‎ ‎1. Work on 3c: Ask your group questions about their vacation. Then tell the class your results. ‎ ‎2. Fill in the blanks according to the answers.‎ ‎3. Try to make a report in each group. Then let one student read the report to the class. ‎ ‎(最后，可以经学生们评议来推举最有能力的小组）‎ Ⅵ. Exercises ‎ ‎1. If time is enough, do some more exercises on big screen. ‎ ‎ 用恰当的不定代词填空。‎ 1. ‎ _________ found Mr. Li’s keys and gave them back to him yesterday. ‎ ‎2. ─Did you see ___________ in the big box? ‎ ‎ ─ No, I didn’t. There’s ___________ in it. ‎ 3. ‎_________ helped the little boy. He did it himself.‎ ‎4. My watch doesn’t work. ___________ is wrong with it.‎ ‎ 5. ─Hello, ___________!‎ ‎ ─Hello, Mr. Smith! ‎ ‎6. ─How’s it going, Jack?‎ ‎ ─Great! ____________ is going well. ‎ ‎7. ─Did you go to the beach with ‎ ‎ ___________?‎ ‎ ─Yes. I went there with my cousin. ‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. 背诵Grammar focus 部分。 ‎ ‎2. 复习复合不定代词及反身代词的用法。 ‎ 板书设计 ‎ Section A 2 Grammar focus-3c anyone, someone, everyone, something, anything, nothing Did you go out with anyone? ‎ No. No one was here. Everyone was on vacation. ‎ Did you buy anything special? ‎ Yes, I bought something for my father. ‎ No, I bought nothing.‎ How was the food? Everything tastes good. ‎ 教学反思：‎ Section B 1 1a-2e ‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：decide, try, paragliding, feel like, bird, bicycle, building, trader, wonder, difference, top, wait, umbrella, wet, because of, below, enough, hungry ‎ ‎2) 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① Where did…? ‎ ‎② What did…? ‎ ‎③ How was…？ / How were…? ‎ ‎④ Did she/he…? ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 学生了解我国不同地方的人们上学的方式，了解还有一些贫困地区的孩子们需要我们去帮助他们。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及表达方式。‎ ‎2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。‎ ‎3）阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点 ‎1. 听力训练 ‎2. 阅读2b部分的短文并完成相关要求。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎1. Daily greeting. ‎ ‎2. Check the homework. Let some Ss report where did they go on ‎ vacation. ‎ ‎3. Review the “复合不定代词”‎ ‎4. Review the “反身代词”‎ ‎5. Show a movie of paragliding. ‎ Ⅱ. Writing ‎ Work on 1a:‎ ‎1. Point to the six words. delicious, expensive, exciting, cheap, terrible, boring ‎2. Read the words and let Ss read after the teacher. ‎ ‎3. Point to the last picture and say: This is a cake. It’s delicious. Then do the same thing for all six pictures. ‎ ‎4. Let Ss match each word with a picture. Then check the answers with the students. ‎ ‎ …‎ Work on 1b: ‎ ‎1. Explain the meaning of “ J words” and “ L words.” ‎ ‎2. Let Ss discuss the words they know and write them down on the line. ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss read out their words to the class. (Or let some Ss write their words on the blackboards.)‎ Ⅲ. Listening ‎ Work on 1c: ‎ ‎1. T: Now let's work on 1c. First, let one student read the questions aloud. Make sure all the Ss know the meanings of the questions.‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the first time. Ss only listen. ‎ ‎3. Then play the recording for the second time. Ss listen and answer the questions. ‎ ‎4. Then play the recording for the third time for the Ss to check the answers. ‎ ‎5. Ss listen to the tape and circle the words and phrases they hear. ‎ ‎6. Check the answers: (Look at the big screen.)‎ Work on 1d: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss this time they have to write down what Lisa said about her vacation, the people, the fun park, the food and the store. ‎ ‎2. Then play the recording for the second time. Ss listen and write down the words.‎ ‎3. Then play the recording for the third time for the Ss to check the answers. ‎ 听力指导：在听时要抓重点内容。第一次听要求我们回答问题，因此在听的时候，应重点将与这些问题相关的内容方面的听清，其他作为非重点内容。另外，要注意要速记下重点内容。‎ 在完成1d部分时要注意听的重点是放在Lisa对这五个方面的事情所做评价，因此应听清楚那些形容词。 ‎ Ⅳ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to ask and answer about Lisa’s vacation. Begin your questions with the following sentences. For example:‎ Where did you go on vacation?‎ I went to New York City. ‎ Did you go with anyone? ‎ Yes, I did. ‎ ‎2. Ss work in pairs and ask and answer about Lisa’s vacations. ‎ ‎3. Let some pairs come to the front and ask and answer in pairs. ‎ Ⅴ. Discussion ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to work in groups. Discuss the questions together. ‎ What do people usually do on vacation?‎ What activities do you find enjoyable?‎ ‎2. Give Ss some possible answers: ‎ ‎ People usually go to some places of interest for vacation. ‎ ‎ I find fishing enjoyable.‎ ‎3. Ss discuss the two questions. Write down their answers. Let some group report their answers. ‎ VI. Reading ‎ Work on 2b: ‎ ‎1. T: Now we’ll read Jane’s diary entries about her vacation and answer the questions. ‎ Did Jane have a good time on Monday? ‎ What about on Tuesday? ‎ ‎2. Ss read the diary quickly and find the answers to the questions. ‎ ‎3. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Work on 2c: ‎ ‎1. Let some Ss read Jane’s diary entries again. Fill in the chart. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss look at the chart first. Then let them read and fill in the chart. ‎ ‎3. Check the answers. (Look at the big screen.)‎ Work on 2d: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss they should read the conversation about Jane’s trip to Penang again and use the information in the diary entries. ‎ ‎2. Ss read the conversation about Jane’s trip to Penang first then try to fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎3. 方法指导：首先，应读通读整个对话一遍，理解对话的大意；然后，认真阅读有空格的上下句的内容，结合日记的内容，确定空格处的内容。 最后，再通读一遍对话，综合日记的内容看每个空格处是否贴切。‎ ‎3. Ss read carefully and try to write down the words in the blanks. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the class. ‎ Work on 2e: ‎ ‎1. 告诉学生们这篇日记是Jane在七月十八日又一次参观了Penang Hill 后，所写的。读日记，并用括号中单词的正确形式填空。 ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：首先，再次明确这是一篇日记，因此应用一般过去时态；然后，通读一遍日记的内容，了解大体内容；最后，综合每句的内容，用括号中动词的正确的形式填空。‎ ‎3. Ss read the diary and try to fill in the blanks.‎ ‎4. Check the answers. (Look at the big screen)‎ ‎5. 对动词一般过去时的规则形式与不规则形式，再复习一遍。‎ Homework ‎ 用所给动词的适当形式填空。 ‎ 1. My mother ______ (buy) a new schoolbag for me yesterday. ‎ 2. When _____ you _____ (start) to learn English?‎ 3. My aunt ______ (take) us to dinner at a restaurant but the food _______ (is) not good at all. ‎ 4. When I _______ (am) in America, I _______ (make) a lot of new friends. ‎ 5. They _______ (have) a great sale last weekend. ‎ 板书设计：‎ Section B1 1a-2e Words: decide, try, paragliding, feel like, bird, bicycle, building, trader, wonder, difference, top, wait, umbrella, wet, because of, below, enough, hungry ‎ ① Where did…? ‎ ‎② What did…? ‎ ‎③ How was…？ / How were…? ‎ ‎④ Did she/he…? ‎ Did Jane have a good time on Monday? ‎ What about on Tuesday? ‎ Section B 2 3a-Self check ‎ 教学反思：‎ Section B 2 3a-Self check 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 复习询问或谈论假期去某地旅行的经历。‎ ‎2) 能够综合运动词的一般过去时形式，并能正确填空。‎ ‎3) 总结回顾动词过去式的规则变化不规则变化。 ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎1) 学生了解我国不同地方的人们上学的方式，了解还有一些贫困地区的孩子们需要我们去帮助他们。‎ ‎2）通过谈论假期旅行的经历，明白在旅行时应注意保护环境。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 能综合运用所的重难点词汇来完成相关任务。 ‎ ‎2）能运用英语根据相关提示来记自己某次旅行的经历。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 能运用英语根据相关提示来记自己某次旅行的经历。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎1. Let Ss read the passage about Jane’s vacation to Malaysia. Then fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎2. Check the answers. ‎ Ⅱ. Discussion ‎ ‎1. Show some pictures of the some places of interest. Tell Ss the name of them. ‎ e.g. the Great Wall, Summer Palace, Tian’anmen Square, a Beijing hutong…‎ ‎2. Let Ss discuss what they can do, eat, buy… in those places. ‎ Ⅲ. Writing ‎1. Tell Ss they went to one of these places of interest last summer vacation. With the help of the words in the box, try to fill in the blanks of the diary. ‎ ‎2. Let some Ss read the words in the box.‎ ‎3. Ss read the diary and try to fill in the blanks with the words in the box. ‎ ‎2. 阅读指导: ‎ 首先，应阅读日记一遍，了解日记的大意。然后，细读每一句，根据上下文文意来确定每个空格处应填的词汇。比如：读第一行可知此处是填空记日记时的时间，空格后面有日期，因此空格处应填月份August。读第二句话，可知空格处应填写天气的词汇，故应选hot and sunny。其他类似。‎ ‎3. Ss read the passage then fill in the blanks with the words in the box. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers. ‎ Ⅳ. Practice Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. Let some Ss read the questions aloud to the Ss. Make sure they know the meaning of the questions. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss work in pairs to ask and answer the questions. Write their answers on a piece of paper. ‎ ‎3. Get some pairs read out their answers.‎ ‎4. Check the verbs forms. ‎ Work on 3c:‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to write a travel diary like Jane’s on Page 5. Use your notes in 3b. ‎ ‎2. 写作指导：‎ 1. 本文为写日记， 因此应用一般过去时态。应注意动词的过去式形式。 ‎ 1. 回顾一下在3b中所回答的问题的情况，然后将这些句子按恰当的逻辑顺序排列在一起，形成条理清晰的一段文字。 ‎ 2. 可以根据旅行的经历再添加一些恰当的想象的句子。 ‎ 3. 再次，阅读一遍短文，看有没有错误的句子。 ‎ ‎3. Ss write their diary by themselves. Give any help they need. ‎ ‎4. Let some Ss read their diary to the class. ‎ Ⅴ. Self check 1 ‎ ‎1. 让学生们看自己的笔记，复习相关复合不定代词的用法。‎ ‎2. Let Ss read the small conversation and choose the correct words in the box to fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎3. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ ‎4. Explain any problem that Ss can’t understand. ‎ Ⅵ. Self check 2 ‎ ‎1. 让学生们看自己的笔记，复习相关动词过去式的规则变化及不规则变化。‎ ‎2. Ss read the passage and fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss write their answers on the blackboard. ‎ ‎4. Check answers with the Ss. ‎ ‎5. Explain any problem that Ss can’t understand.‎ Ⅶ. Group work ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss what they should in this activity. Imagine you are all foreigners on vacation in China. You meet each other at the airport on your way home. Talk about what you did on your vacation. ‎ ‎2. Ss work in groups of four and ask and answer about their vacations in China. ‎ ‎3. Let some pairs act out their conversations in front of the class. ‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. Review Section B. ‎ ‎2. 阅读Self check 2 的短文，并强化记忆所列举动词的一般过去式形式。 ‎ ‎3. 总结全单元出现的不规则变化的动词的一般过去式，并努力记住他们。‎ 板书设计：‎ Section B 2 3a-Self check ‎3a: August, hot and sunny, a Beijing hutong, beautiful, bought something special, it was interesting, Beijing duck, delicious, tired ‎ ‎3b: Where did you go? What food did you eat?‎ ‎ Did you go with anyone? What did you like best?‎ ‎ How was the weather? Did you dislike anything?‎ ‎ What did you do every day? How did you feel about the trip? ‎ 教学反思：‎ Unit 2 How often do you do exercise Teaching aims of this unit:‎ Language goals :‎ ‎1.Vocabulary: always usually often sometimes hardly ever never ,once a day ,twice a week ,three times a month, my eating habits ,healthy /unhealthy lifestyle , keep in good health, junk food ,eat less meat, the same as, be different from ,the difference between…and…, of course ,look after, be good /bad for, sleep nine hours every night all /most /some /no students ,maybe, although exercise =do/play sports ‎ ‎2.Ask and answer : What do you usually do on weekends?‎ ‎ I often watch TV on weekends.‎ ‎ How often do you watch TV?‎ ‎ I watch TV twice a week..‎ ‎ How long do you sleep every night?‎ ‎ I sleep nine hours every night.‎ ‎ What are the differences?‎ ‎3. Topic :My lifestyle or habits Aims of abilities: Talk about how often you do things Aims of emotion: Get the messages from the others successfully.‎ ‎4.Language functions: Wh-questions, What do …?, How often …?,Adverbs of frequency, All/most/some/none 课时安排5课时 Period One: Section A (1a—2c)‎ Period Two: Section A (3—4)‎ Period Three: Section B (1a—2c)‎ Period Four：Section B (3a—4)‎ Period Five: Self check and Revision (A-self check)‎ Period One Teaching Aims:‎ ‎1. Learn to talk about how often do you do things ‎ ‎2. To learn the words of the adverbs of frequency.‎ Teaching Difficulties:‎ ‎1.words: exercise, skateboard, hardly, ever, shop, once, twice, time, surf, internet, program.‎ ‎2.phrases: how often, on weekends, go to the movies, exercise, go skateboarding, always , usually , often , never , hardly ever , sometimes .‎ ‎3.Sentence patterns: What does she /he do on weekends ? She often goes to the movies .How often do you shop ? Once a week / Twice a week ··· .‎ Teaching Aids: Tape recorder; Multi-Media.‎ Teaching Procedures:‎ Step 1 ：Greeting.‎ ‎1.Welcome back: Talk about their holidays.‎ ‎2.Encourage Ss to share their holidays with the whole class.‎ Step 2 ：Leading – in ‎1. Do you like watching TV? Yes ,I do.‎ ‎ Do you watch TV every day? Yes, I do.‎ ‎ How often do you watch TV?‎ ‎ I watch TV every day. I watch TV twice a week.‎ ‎2.Introduce the key vocabulary.‎ Ask the students to say what they see in the thought bubbles.‎ Check the answers on the board.2. ‎ ‎3. Name each activity.‎ Repeat reading the following: watch TV, read, shop, go skateboarding, exercise, draw ‎ ‎4. Look at each picture in 1c.Tell what the person does on weekends. ‎ Check the Ss orally.‎ ‎1) Make sure what they will hear and do .‎ ‎2) Read these adverbs and explain.‎ ‎5.Play the tape twice .Write the letters on the line.‎ Ask Ss: Well, do you still remember your last vacation?‎ How did you spend it?‎ Was it the same as this summer vacation?‎ So what do you often do in your summer vacation? ‎ Then show some phrases for Ss to practice. ‎ Then present as following: ‎ always>usually>often>sometimes>hardly ever(几乎没有) >never and let them understand their differences at the first time.‎ Step 3 ：Guessing Presentation and Practice.‎ Encourage Ss to tell us about themselves,using always, usually, often, sometimes, hardly ever(几乎没有) or never.‎ ‎.Do it like that with some activities. And during this part, present surf the net exercise and go skateboarding.‎ Step4 ：.Do a survey:‎ Activities How often Take a shower Wash your hair exercise Clean your room Ask and answer: How often do you take a shower?‎ ‎ How often does he take a shower?‎ Let Ss ask and answer in pairs, using always, usually, often, sometimes, hardly ever(几乎没有) or never.‎ Step 5: Homework ‎1.Do exercises on pages 1-2 of the workbook to practice the language ‎ presented in this unit.‎ ‎2.Remember what we learn today.‎ ON BLACKBOARD Unit 1‎ I always get up early.‎ I am never late for class.‎ I sleep nine hours every night.‎ always usually often hardly ever never of course , pretty healthy/good ,unhealthy ,a healthy lifestyle, try to do sth..,‎ look after, help sb. to do sth., study better, the same as, be different from 教学反思：‎ Period Two Teaching Aims:‎ ‎1. Students can learn to talk about activities and how often to each other ‎ ‎2. Students can listen, talk ,read and write these words correctly Teaching Difficulties:‎ ‎1. Words: high school, most, no, result, active, for as, for about ‎2. Phrases: for as, for about ‎3.Sentence patterns: How often do you shop? I shop once a month.‎ ‎ How often does Cheng watch TV? He watches TV..‎ Teaching Aids: Tape recorder; Multi-Media.‎ Teaching Procedures:‎ Step One ：Greeting.‎ Step Two ：Leading – in Drills:‎ T: What do you usually do on weekends ?‎ S1: I usually play soccer .‎ T: How often do you play soccer ?‎ S1: I play soccer twice a week .‎ T: How often does he play soccer ?‎ The other Ss: He plays soccer twice a week .‎ Repeat for three times .‎ Step Three ：Pre-task Review the grammar box .‎ Step Four ：While-task ‎1. Call attention to the survey .‎ 2. Make sure the Ss understand the chart .‎ T: What activity do ninety-five percent of Green High students do every day ?‎ ‎3. Ss answer .If necessary , give them help .‎ ‎4. Review the information in the green box with Ss .‎ ‎5. Read the article first by the Ss .‎ ‎6. Check the answers .‎ ‎7. Practise reading .‎ Step Five ：Post-task ‎1.T: What can you do to improve your English ?(e.g. read English books, practice reading and speaking ) How often do you ··· ?‎ ‎2.Think of more things you can do to improve your English and write them here .‎ ‎3.Ask several Ss each question .‎ ‎4.See: Who is the best English students in the class ‎ Step Six: Homework:‎ ‎1.Revise the new words .‎ ‎2. Preview the next section 教学反思：‎ Period Three Teaching Aims:‎ Learn to talk about how often they do things to keep healthy.‎ Teaching Difficulties:‎ ‎1.Words:‎ junk food, milk, coffee, chips, cola, chocolate, drink, health, how many, interviewer.‎ ‎2.Phrases: how many, be good for, be bad for, every day.‎ ‎3.Sentence patterns: How often do you drink milk, Liu Feng?‎ How many hours do you sleep every night?‎ She says it’s good for my health.‎ Teaching Aids: Tape recorder; Multi-Media.‎ Teaching Procedures:‎ Step 1 ：Greeting.‎ Step 2 ：Warm-up ‎ ‎1.Enjoy an English song.‎ ‎2.Free talk. Talk with Ss about the following questions:‎ Do you like fruit vegetables?‎ Yes, I do.I love it/ them. It’s/They’re delicious. And it’s /they’re healthy food. It’s/They’re good for our health. Or No, I don’t. It’s awful. I can’t stand it.‎ Ask Ss: How often do you eat fruit vegetables?‎ Step 3: Presentation ‎1.Teach milk. Do you like milk? Do you drink milk every day? Why /Why not?‎ ‎2.Then teach chip /cola/chocolate/coffee in the same way. Don’t forget to ask them Are they/Is it healthy food /drink? They’re /It’s healthy/unhealthy/ junk food. Don’t eat /drink them /it too often.‎ Step 4: Pair work Ss make a similar conversation by themselves.‎ A: How often do you{ eat…? drink…?‎ B : I eat/drink… every day/….‎ A: Do you like it ?‎ B: Yes, I do. It’s good for my health.‎ ‎/No, I don’t. But my mother wants me to eat/drink it.‎ Step5 : Presentation The teacher asks Ss other questions:‎ How often do you exercise/watch TV/read English/play computer games?‎ How many hours do you exercise/watch TV/read English/sleep/play computer games?‎ Step 6: Pair work Get Ss to make a long conversation by themselves.‎ Step 7: Listen (work on 2a)‎ Get the Ss to listen and circle the answers to each question .Later check the answers.‎ Step 8: Work on 2b ‎ Listen again and fill in the blanks in the survey. Then check the answers.‎ Step 9 .Group work Role play. Student A is the interview. Student B is Katrina. Student C is Bill. Try to act the conversation out .They can use their own ‎ words.‎ Step 10.Task Get the Ss to ask their classmates as many questions as they can about their lives. The questions above (2b) can help them. After that they can give a report in front of the class.‎ Step 11. Homework :‎ ‎1. Finish the exercise in this period.‎ ‎2. Write the report in the exercise book.‎ 教学反思：‎ Period Four:‎ Teaching Aims:‎ ‎1. Learn following expressions: ‎ ‎2. Learn to write one’s own habits.‎ Teaching Difficulties:‎ ‎1.Words: habit, try, lifestyle, grade, better, same, as, different, difference, maybe, although, for, keep, must.‎ ‎2.Phrases: eating habits, look after, healthy lifestyle, unhealthy lifestyle, good grades.‎ ‎3. Main task: How to write a composition of one’s habits.‎ Teaching Aids: Tape recorder; Multi-Media.‎ Teaching Procedures:‎ Step1: Revision ‎1. Free talk: ‎ ‎2.Ask and answer ‎ How often do you exercise? How often do you eat vegetables/fruit/junk food? ‎ How often do you drink milk/coffee/tea? How many hours do you sleep every day? ‎ Use he/she/they ask and answer these questions. ‎ Group works Step 2.Presentation and Practice 1. Free talk. ‎ What is a healthy lifestyle. ‎ After that, T can show a picture with healthy lifestyle and unhealthy one: ‎ ‎ eat fruit never eat vegetables/fruit ‎ ‎ vegetables drink coffee/wine too much ‎ ‎ drink milk never drink milk ‎ ‎ sleep 9 hours sleep 5 hours ‎ ‎ do exercise never do exercise healthy lifestyle unhealthy lifestyle T: And you know: Healthy lifestyle can help us get good grades. Good food and exercise help us to study better. My student Katrina has a good lifestyle. Let’s see it.‎ Step 3.Read 3a.‎ Compare the passage with yourselves.‎ Explain: ‎ of course , pretty healthy/good ,unhealthy ,a healthy lifestyle, try to do sth.., ‎ look after, help sb. to do sth., study better, the same as, be different from Give more examples.‎ Step 4. Finish 3b. ‎ Sep 5.Homework: ‎ Read the text for many many times. And correct your composition referring to it.‎ ON BLACKBOARD Unit 1‎ I always get up early.‎ I am never late for class.‎ I sleep nine hours every night.‎ always usually often hardly ever never of course , pretty healthy/good ,unhealthy ,a healthy lifestyle, try to do sth..,‎ look after, help sb. to do sth., study better, the same as, be different from 教学反思：‎ Period Five: Self check and Revision Step1 Greetings & free talk .‎ Step2 Discussion ‎ Work in groups, discuss which kind of life is healthy. ‎ Do a report according the discussion. ‎ We think we should eat fruit and vegetables… ‎ Step3 Self check Fill in each blank with the correct word given.‎ Then make your own sentence with each word.‎ ‎1. wants 2.exercises 3.help 4.try 5.have Step3 Key vocabulary 1.ever adv. 曾经 2. once　adv. 一次 3. twice　 adv. 两次 ‎4.internet　n.　 互联网 5. program　 n. 　节目单， （电脑）程序 6. hilltop　　n. 　山顶 7. result　n. 　结果， 成果 8. key　　n. 　提醒，提示，　 线索，　 答案 9. translate　v. 　翻译 10. song　 n. 　歌曲 11.junk　n. 　垃圾， 破烂物，废弃的旧物 12. milk　n. 　牛奶 13. interviewer　n. 　采访者 14.habit　n.　习惯，习性 15.difference　n. 　不同，差异，区别 16.grade　 n. 　 分数，成绩，年级 17. although　conj. 虽然，即使，纵然 18. unhealthy　 adj.　不健康的， 不益健康的 19.skateboarding n. 　 溜滑板运动 Step4 Key phrases: 1. how often 　多久一次 2. as for　　至于，关于 3. junk food　　垃圾食品 4.eating habit 　饮食习惯 5.of course　　当然 6.look after 　 照顾， 照看 7. start with 　 以……开始 ‎ ‎8. make a difference　使得结果不同，有重要性 9. go shopping　去购物 10.have a party 聚会 11. go to the movie　去看电影 12. once a week　每周一次 13. hardly ever　 很少 14. twice a week　 每周两次 15. three times a week　　每周三次 16. watch TV　 看电视 17.on weekend　 　在周末 18. do homework　 做作业 19. a lot of　许多 20. try to do　　试图（努力）做某事 21. help sb (to) do sth.　帮助某人做某事 22. the same as　　和……相同 23.keep in good health　 保持身体健康 Step 5 Grammar ‎ ‎1.掌握句型： ‎ ‎1)What do you usually do on weekends? I often go to the movies. ‎ What does she do on weekends ？ She often goes to the movies.‎ What do you usually do on weekends? I often go to the movies.‎ ‎(watch TV、read books 、exercise 、clean、skateboard、 play basketball、wash clothes、go shopping、 go to movies)‎ How often do you exercise/… ?‎ Task one “Find my group members.”‎ ‎2)在规定 时间内填完活动表格，再向周围同学开始询问，找出与自己课外活动大致相同的同学请他或她在每项活动后面签名。‎ Activity Name ‎3) Do a survey “What does she /he do on weekends ?”‎ Name Activity How often ‎2. Presentation and drill ‎（1）教师指着屏幕说：“ Now let’s see my activities on weekends. How often…?屏幕上出现各项活动的图片并介绍。 I always read books at 6:00 in the morning. Then I usually run at 6:30. I often clean my house in the afternoon. Sometimes I watch TV, but I never watch TV too much. I hardly ever go to the movies.‎ ‎（2）点击鼠标屏幕上出现频率副词及相关的百分比。‎ always(100%) usually(80%) often (30-50%)‎ sometimes(20%) hardly ever(5%) never(0%)‎ 领读频率副词，让学生快速认读。‎ ‎（3）分别点击活动图片，每个图片正面出现一个频率副词。‎ 教师依次提问： What do you do on weekends?‎ 引导学生用图片中的活动及副词回答，如：I usually run.‎ ‎（4）Task: Making cards ‎ 每个学生把自己的课外活动做成卡片，再把频率副词做成卡片，然后一个学生问What do you do on weekends? 另一个学生分别拿一张活动卡片和频率卡片并用其进行回答。‎ ‎(5)常见的频度副词有never(从不), sometimes(有时),often(经常),usually (通常), always(总是).‎ 从0%(never)到100%(always)可以这样排序:‎ ‎0%……………………………………100%‎ never sometimes often usually always ‎(6) 注意频率副词在句中有不同的位置.‎ 在 be 动词之后:‎ I’m usually ill on planes.‎ Are you usually at home on Monday?‎ He isn’t usually ill on planes.‎ 在实意动词之前:‎ I usually work on Friday.‎ I sometimes go to London.‎ ‎3. all, most , some和none的用法。‎ ‎（1）all (所有的，全部的人或物)，any (任何一个)， none (都不)。 以上词使用范围为三者以上。 　 All the flowers are gone.　所有的花都谢了。 　 I don't like any of the flowers.　这些花我都不喜欢。 　 I like none of the flowers.　这些花我都不喜欢。 ‎ 注意：all与none用法一样。跟单数名词，用单数动词；跟复数名词，用复数动词。 　　　　All of the students are there. 所有的学生都在那。 　　　　All (of) the milk is there.　   所有的牛奶都在那。‎ ‎（2）. some 一些 　 1) 可与复数名词及不可数名词连用。 　 2) 当做"某一"解时，也可与单数名词连用。（= a certain） 　　　 You will be sorry for this some day. 　　　 总有一天，你会后悔这件事的。 　　　 A certain (some) person has seen you break the rule. 　　　 某些人不同意你的看法。 ‎ ‎（3）most意为“最大多数”、“最大量”。后可直接跟名词(可数或不可数)，同时，也可接有形容词修饰的名词。注意：跟可数名词时，谓语动词要用复数形式。如：‎ ‎　　Most boys like playing football.大部分男孩都喜欢踢足球。‎ ‎　　I always spend most time learning English.大部分时间我总是花在学习英语上。‎ Step6. Exercises. 　　(　 ) 1.A: How often ______ she exercise? B: Twice a week. 　　A. do 　　　　 B. does　　　　　 C. doing　　　　D. did 　　(　 ) 2. I ______ like to drink milk. 　　A. not 　　　　 B. doesn’t　　 　C. don’t　　　 D. no 　　(　 ) 3. Good food and exercise ______ me to study better. 　　A. help 　　　 B. helps　 　　　 C. helping 　　 D. to help 　　(　 ) 4. Is her lifestyle the same ______ yours or different? 　　A. as 　　　　 B. in　　　　　 　C. at　　　　　 D. to 　　(　 ) 5. I like ____ for breakfast. 　　A. a book　　　B. a ruler　　　　 C. an egg　　 　D. a sofa 　　(　 ) 6. The ____are $21. 　　A. glasses　　 B. shoe　　　 　　 C. table 　　　 D. bike 　　(　 ) 7. Tennis ____ my favourite sport. 　　A. are　　　　 B. is　　　　　 　 C. am　　　　 　D. be 　　(　 ) 8. I have a tennis and my friend Jim ____ two tennis rackets. 　　A. have 　　　 B. play　　 　　　 C. plays　　 　 D. has 　　(　 ) 9. “Let’s play computer games.” “That ____ interesting.” 　　A. looks　　　 B. sounds　　 　　 C. listens 　　 D. reads 　　(　 )10. My father likes football. But he ____ it. 　　He only ____ football matches on TV! 　　A. plays, watches　　　　　　　 　B. play, watch 　　C. doesn’t play, watches　　　　 D. plays, doesn’t watch ‎ ‎　　【参考答案】 ‎ ‎　　1. B　 2. C　 3. A　 4. A　 5. C　 6. A　 7. B　 8. D　 9. B　 10. C Unit 3 I’m more outgoing than my sister.‎ I. Teaching article: Unit 6‎ II. Teaching aims and demands ‎       Talk about personal traits.‎ ‎       Compare people.‎ ‎       Is that Sam?‎ ‎       No, that’s Tom. He has shorter hair than Sam.‎ ‎       He’s calmer than Sam.‎ III. Teaching importance and difficulty ‎       Comparative with –er, -ier.‎ ‎       More and both.‎ IV. Teaching ways ‎       Revision, Learning, Practice and Reading.‎ V. Teaching tools ‎       Tape-recorder and Lantern.‎ V. Teaching times ‎       Six periods Period 1 ‎ Teaching article Unit 6 Section A ‎ Teaching type Speaking Teaching aims Knowledge object Key vocabulary. Target language. Oral Practice.‎ Ability oblect Learning skill. Speaking skill. Communicative competence Moral object Learn to play a musical instrument.‎ Teaching key points ‎ and difficult points Is that Sam?‎ No, that’s Tom. He has shorter hair than Sam.‎ And He’s calmer than Sam.‎ Is that Tina?‎ No, it isn’t. It’s Tina. Tara’s shorter than Tina.‎ Teaching aids A tape recorder. A projector. Some objects.‎ Teaching methods Listening and speaking methods. Communicative approach.‎ Teaching procedures Step I Greet the class as usual and check the homework.‎ Step II Make a simple drawing of a boy and a girl on the blackboard.‎ Judy is tall.    Judy is taller than Bobby.‎ Then bring out two rules of different length. Say:‎ This is ruler. It’s Bobby’s ruler.(longer)‎ This is Judy’s ruler.(long)‎ Bobby’s ruler is longer than Judy’s.‎ Step III Show some new words on the blackboard.‎ Read the new words to students and ask them to repeat.‎ Step IV 1a ‎ Ask students to do this activity individually. Then check and answers.‎ Tall—short      long hair—short hair    thin—heavy   calm—wild Step V 1b First tell students what the twins are. Twins ‎ are children born at the same time to the same parents, but not always.‎ Step VI 1c Pairwork Ask two students to read the sample conversation to the class.‎ A: Is that Tara?‎ B: No, it isn’t. It’s Tina. Tara’s shorter than Tina..‎ Then have students work with a partner.‎ Make conversation work with a partner.‎ Step VII Pronunciation Note Write one of the example sentences from the picture on the board circle the word than say. When we say the word than, we say it quickly. You don’t hear very much of the sound.‎ Step VIII Summary and Homework Today we’ve leant the twins are having a concert. We’ve leant how to compare people. After class, give more practice, comparing your school things. Next class I’ll ask some of you to say your conversations OK? Now, class is over? See you!‎ Blackboard design Unit 6 I’m more outgoing than my sister Draw two people on the blackboard. One is Judy. The other is Bobby.‎ Judy is taller than Bobby. Bobby is shorter than Judy.‎ Homework ‎ Today we’ve leant the twins are having a concert. We’ve leant how to compare people. After class, give more practice, comparing your school things. Next class I’ll ask some of you to say your conversations OK? Now, class is over? See you!‎ 教学反思：‎ Period 2 ‎ Teaching article Unit 6 Section A 2a-2c Teachingtype Speaking and listening Teaching aims Knowledge object Key vocabulary. Target language. Oral Practice. Grammar Focus.‎ Ability oblect Learning skill. Writing skill. Communicative competence Moral object Handsome is that handsome does.‎ Teaching key points ‎ and difficult points Oral practice..‎ Grammar Focus Teaching aids A tape recorder. A projector.‎ Teaching methods Listening and writing methods. Communicative approach. Pair work Teaching procedures Step I Greet the class as usual and check the homework.‎ Step II 2a Read the words in the box to students.‎ Funny 有趣的  serious    严肃的Outgoing  （性格）外向的    quiet 安静的 Tell students smart and athletic are new words. Explain the new words and tell students what they mean.‎ Step III 2b Ask students to look at the boxes with the headings. Tina is …, Tara is …‎ Listen to the recording again. This time write how Tina and Tara are different. Please write ‎ words in the boxes.‎ Step IV 2c Pair work Let students look at the chart in Activity 2c. Ask two students to read it. Tell students ***means Sam is taller than Tom.‎ Have students know they will talk about Sam and Tom in this activity.‎ Student A: Is Tom more intellectual than Sam?‎ Student B: (Look at the answer chart on page 97) No, Sam is smarter than Tom?‎ Step VI Grammar Focus Review the grammar box. Ask a student to read the sentences to the class.‎ Write the word funny on the board. Circle the letter y and say, when a word ends y, the y changes to an I when you add –er. For example, funny – funnier.‎ Step VII Show some dialogue on the blackboard Conversation 1:‎ A: Is that Mary?‎ B: No, it isn’t. It’s Peter. Peter is more carful than Mary.‎ A: Yes, Mary is more careless than Peter.‎ Conversation 2:‎ A: Is it Zoe?‎ B: No, it Wendy. Wendy is shorter than Zoe.‎ Conversation 3:‎ A: Is it Vera?‎ B: No, it’s not. It’s Mary. Mary is thinner ‎ than Vera.‎ Step VIII Summary and Homework Today we’ve leant some words and learnt how to compare people. I hope you can study harder than ever. You can learn more knowledge and make more progress. After class, read the key vocabulary and learn them by heart.‎ Blackboard design Unit 6 I’m more outgoing than my sister Funny,           funnier     More athletic than More intellectual than         More serious than Homework ‎ Today we’ve leant some words and learnt how to compare people. I hope you can study harder than ever. You can learn more knowledge and make more progress. After class, read the key vocabulary and learn them by heart.‎ Period 3 ‎ Teaching article Unit 6 Section A 3a-4‎ Teaching type Reading Teaching aims Knowledge object Reading material. Target language. Listening, speaking and writing practice.‎ Ability oblect Learning and speaking skills. Reading and writing skills. Communicative competence Moral To be a brave and hardworking man ‎ object Teaching key points ‎ and difficult points Listening, speaking and writing practice.‎ My friend is the same as me. We are both quiet.‎ Do you look the same?  No, I’m a little taller than her Teaching aids A projector. Some piece of paper. A paper bag Teaching methods Listening, speaking and writing practice. ‎ Reading and writing methods.‎ Communicative approach.‎ Teaching procedures Step I Greet the class as usual and check the homework.‎ Step II 3a There’s a letter in this activity. Read this letter to students. Answer any questions students nay ask. Then show the five sentences on the blackboard.‎ ‎1. Liu Li has more than one sister.‎ ‎2. There are some similarities between Liu Li and Liu Ying.‎ ‎3. Liu Ying is not as good at sport as her sister.‎ ‎4. Liu Ying talks more than Liu Li.‎ ‎5. Both girls go to lots of parties.‎ Step III Grammar Note We are both tall.‎ They are both boys.  We both have short hair.  They both go to this school.‎ Circle the word both in the four sentences. Ask students: Does the word both come before or after ‎ the word are?‎ Step IV 3b Pair work First ask two students to read the sample conversation in the speech bubble.‎ Then tell students to work with a partner. Talk about how you are different from a friend of family member.‎ Step VI The Same and Different T: Do you find your partner?‎ T: OK. Now I’ll tell you how to do the game. You can ask and answer the same questions as in Activity 3b. Please remember you have three minutes to write down the things that are the different and same between your partner.‎ Step VII An Optional Activity Students can do a similar activity using information about family members. They can list the ways they are the same as and different from various members of their families. Then they can tell the class about these differences and similarities.‎ Step VIII Summary and Homework Today we’ve read and article and known the same and difference between the twins—Liu Ying and Liu Li. And we’ve done a game. We’ve learnt to say the same and difference between you and your partner.‎ homework:‎ ‎(1) Read the letter again. (2) Finish off the ‎ exercises of workbook.     ‎ Blackboard design Unit 6 I’m more outgoing than my sister We are both tall.  They are both boys.  We both have short hair.‎ They both go to the school.‎ Homework ‎ ‎(1) Read the letter again. (2) Finish off the exercises of workbook.  ‎ 教学反思：‎ Period 4 ‎ Teaching article Unit 6 Section B 1a-2c Teaching type Speaking and listening Teaching aims Knowledge object Key vocabulary.  Target language. Oral practice. Listening and writing practice.‎ Ability oblect Learning skill. Writing skill. Communicative competence.‎ Moral object A friend in need is a friend indeed.  Wish you to find your real friends Teaching key points ‎ and difficult points Oral practice.‎ Listening and writing practice.‎ Teaching aids A projector. A tape recorder.‎ Teaching methods Listening and writing methods. Communicative approach. Group work. Pair work.‎ Teaching procedures Step I Greet the class as usual and check the homework.‎ Step II  Show the new words on the blackboard.‎ Read the new words to students and ask them to repeat.‎ Step III Section B 1a T: All of you have good friends, right?   Well, can you tell me the same and difference between you and your friends?‎ Sa: He is quieter than me.‎ Sb: We are both tall.‎ Sc: Her hair is longer than mine.‎ T: Great! And what do you think the most important things are to be your friend? Now, please look at the blackboard. I’ll show descriptions on the blackboard.‎ Step IV 16 Group work Statements about friends using the phrases 1a.‎ Step V An activity  Who is it?‎ Ask students to work in small groups. Each and writes down as many sentences as they can to describe him or her.‎ Step VI 2aIn this activity first ask students to look at the names and the first column of the talbe.‎ Tell students they will hear an interviewer talking to Holly and Maria. They are talking about what they like about their best friends.‎ Step VII 2b Let students look at the rest of the chart. Read the heading at the top of each column.‎ The same as best friend.  Different from best friend.‎ Tell students we’ll listen again. Ask students to fill in the chart. How are Holly and Maria the same as and different from their best friends?‎ Step VIII Homework and Summary Today we’ve recycled some key vocabulary and learnt some new words. And we’ve learnt to talk about our best friends.‎ After class write down five statements about what is important in a best friend. Please remember you can write a false statement among the five statements. Next class we’ll do a game.‎ Blackboard design Unit 6 I’m more outgoing than my sister A good friend …  Has cool clothes  Is popular in school Likes to do the same things as me   Is good at sport Is good at school work              Makes me laugh Homework ‎ After class write down five statements about what is important in a best friend. Please remember you can write a false statement among the five statements. Next class we’ll do a game.‎ 教学反思：‎ Period 5 ‎ Teaching article Unit 6 Section B 3a-4‎ Reading and Teaching type ‎ writing Teaching aims Knowledge object Key vocabulary.  Reading passage.  Oral practice. Reading and writing practice.‎ Ability oblect Reading skill.  Writing skill.  Communicative competence Moral object Take an activity part in all kinds of social activities. ‎ Get a chance to train your integrating skills.‎ Teaching key points ‎ and difficult points Oral practice.  ‎ Writing and speaking practice Teaching aids A projector.  Pieces of paper on which students write the five statements Teaching methods Listening and writing methods. ‎ Reading and writing methods ‎ Communicative approach.     ‎ Pair work.‎ Teaching procedures Step I Greet the class as usual and check the homework.‎ Step II  Show the new words on the blackboard.‎ Read the new words to students and ask them to repeat.‎ Step III 3a In this activity first read the article to students. Then answer any questions students any ask. For example,‎ S: What’s view?‎ T: It’s what you think about something. It’s ‎ how you feel about something.‎ Step IV 3b First let students look at the chart in Activity 2a on page 38. Then ask students to write their own sentences about Holly’s friend and some sentences about Maria’s friend.‎ Step V 3c In this activity first ask students to say some of the words and phrases from this unit they can use. For example,‎ Tall, short, thin, heavy  Athletic, intellectual, shy  Outgoing, serious Step VI 2a In this activity first ask students to look at the names and the first column of the table. Tell students they will hear an interviewer talking to Holly and Maria. They are talking about what they like about their best friends.‎ Step VII Pair work ‎ Find Someone for the Job!‎ Focus students on the job ad. Ask students if they know the word—abacus. If they don’t know, explain it to them. Abacus—a frame with balls that was used to do arithmetic, long before calculators.‎ Step VIII Homework and Summary Today we’ve reviewed the key vocabulary in this unit by reading practice.. And we’ve learnt to write about our best friends. Now homework, write ‎ down the words you underlined in Activity 3a in your exercise book.‎ Blackboard design Unit 6 I’m more outgoing than my sister Sentences students write: The name of a student who should get the job Homework ‎ Today we’ve reviewed the key vocabulary in this unit by reading practice.. And we’ve learnt to write about our best friends. Now homework, write down the words you underlined in Activity 3a in your exercise book.‎ 教学反思：‎ Period 6 ‎ Teaching article Unit 6 Self check Teaching type Revision Teaching aims Knowledge object Reviewing the key vocabulary in this unit. Writing practice. Just for fun.‎ Ability oblect Self check skill. Writing skill.‎ Moral object Study hard and make great progress Teaching key points ‎ and difficult points Writing practice. ‎ Reviewing the key vocabulary Quiet, funny, outgoing Kind, athletic Teaching aids A projector. A tape recorder Teaching methods Self check method. Writing method. Communicative method Teaching procedures Step I Greet the class as usual and check the homework.‎ Step II Self Check 1‎ After students finish writing their sentences, write a number of student’s answers on the blackboard.‎ ‎(1) My friend likes sports. She’s very athletic.‎ ‎(2) Paul is never quiet! He can’t stop talking.‎ ‎(3) Mr. Wang is a kind man. He always helps others.‎ ‎(4) Mary is a funny girl. She always makes me laugh.‎ ‎(5) Jane isn’t very outgoing. She likes to stay at home and rest.‎ Step III 2First ask different students to read the questions on the left. Students read.‎ Are you taller now? Are you more intellectual? Are you more popular?‎ Are you a better student?‎ Then ask students to think of themselves two years ago. How are they different now?‎ Step IV Just for Fun!‎ Ask two students to read the dialogue to the class. Two students read.‎ A: I think I see the twins. Is that Java?‎ B: No, that’s Jalap. Jalap has curlier hair than Java.‎ A: And Java is taller than Java.‎ Write the words curly—curlier on the blackboard. Explain the words curly to students or draw a simple picture what curlier hair means.‎ Step V Workbook Read this article about Ali and Armlet. Then answer the questions Step VI Summary This class we’ve reviewed the key vocabulary of the unit. And we’ve learnt how to compare our themselves between now and two years ago. I hope you can make great progress.‎ Step VIII Homework Finish off the exercises of the Workbook Blackboard design Unit 6 I’m more outgoing than my sister Curly  Curlier  Curly hair Homework ‎ Finish off the exercises of the Workbook 教学反思：‎ nit 4 What’s the best movie theater?‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：theater, comfortable, seat, screen, close, ticket, worst, cheaply, song, DJ, choose, carefully, reporter, so far, fresh, comfortably, No problem ‎ 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① It has the biggest screens. ‎ ‎② It’s the most popular. ‎ ‎③ Which is the best clothes store? ‎ ‎④ You can buy clothes the most cheaply there. ‎ ‎⑤ They play the most boring songs. ‎ ‎2) 能了解以下语法：‎ ‎ 掌握形容词及副词的最高级形式；用最高级形式来描述人或物的特殊。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 了解我们周围中有那些最出色的人或物，知道生活中有很多值得我们去学习的人。周围环境中有很多值得我们去珍惜的事物。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 形容词及副词最高级形式的构成。‎ ‎2) 用形容词或副词的最高级形式来描述人或事物。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 用形容词或副词的最高级形式来描述人或事物。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Lead-in ‎ ‎1. 向学生们介绍一座大家都很熟悉的电影院，谈论自己对这座建筑物的感受。从而引出本课时中的一些重要单词：comfortable seats, big screens, best ‎ sound, cheap, new movies, close to home, buy tickets quickly, popular… ‎ ‎2. 学生们听老师的介绍，并学习这些新生词。 ‎ ‎3. 学生们看幻灯片，并学习记忆这些生词。 ‎ Ⅱ. Presentation Learn the new words. ‎ Ⅲ. Discussion ‎ ‎1. How do you choose which movie theater to go to? Write the things in the box under “Important” or “Unimportant”.‎ ‎2. Ss discuss with their partners and write the words in the box in the chart. ‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ ‎1. T: Tell Ss to read the sentences in the chart. Make sure they know the meaning of the sentences. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and match the statement with the right movie theaters. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Ⅴ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the model with a partner. ‎ ‎2. Use the information in the chart of 1b. Ask and answer with a partner. ‎ ‎3. Let some pairs ask and answer about the chart. ‎ Ⅵ. Listening ‎ Work on 2a: ‎ ‎1. Read the questions and answers in 2a. Tell Ss to remember the information. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and circle the boy’s answers. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers.‎ Work on 2b: ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the sentences below. Explain some main sentences for the Ss. Make sure they know what to do. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to write the correct store or radio station next to each statement. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers. ‎ Ⅶ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss Student A is the reporter. Student B is the boy. Role-play the conversation. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read conversation after the teacher. ‎ ‎3. Explain some main points for the Ss. ‎ ‎4. Ss act the conversation in pairs. Ask some pairs to act out their conversations. ‎ Ⅷ. Role-play ‎ ‎1. Read the conversations and answer the two questions: ‎ ‎① What is the newest cinema? __________________________________ ‎ ‎② How does Helen like it? ____________________________________ ‎ ‎2. Explain some new words and main points in the conversation. ‎ ‎3. Read the conversation after the teacher. ‎ ‎4. Practice the conversation with their partner. Then let some pairs to act out the conversation. ‎ Homework: ‎ 写六个句子来说一下你们班的“最……”。 ‎ In my class, Lin Tao is the tallest. ‎ 1. In my class, …‎ 板书设计：‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ ‎ theater, comfortable, seat, screen, close, ticket, worst, cheaply, song, DJ, choose, carefully, reporter, so far, fresh, comfortably, No problem ‎ Sentences Structures：‎ ‎① It has the biggest screens. ‎ ‎② It’s the most popular. ‎ ‎③ Which is the best clothes store? ‎ ‎④ You can buy clothes the most cheaply there. ‎ ‎⑤ They play the most boring songs.‎ 教学反思：‎ Section A 2 (Grammar focus-3c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇：worse, service, pretty, menu, act ‎ ‎2）进行一步复习巩固学习Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。‎ ‎3）对形容词及副词的最高级形式的构成进行总结，掌握其构成规则。‎ ‎4) 总结用形容词及形容词的最高级形式来描述人物或事物的句型结构。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 了解我们周围中有那些最出色的人或物，知道生活中有很多值得我们去学习的人。周围环境中有很多值得我们去珍惜的事物。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 复习巩固Section A 部分所学的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。‎ ‎2) 掌握和运用形容词和副词的最高级形式来描述人物或事物。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ ‎1) 掌握一些特殊形容词或副词的最高级形式。‎ ‎2) 运用形容词和副词的最高级形式来描述人物或事物。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Lead-in 回答下列问题：‎ In our class, who is the funniest student?‎ In our class, who is the most serious student?‎ In our class, who is the tallest student?‎ In all the subjects, which is the most interesting subject?‎ In all the subjects, which is the most difficult subject?‎ ‎1. Who’s the tallest in your class? ‎ ‎2. Which is the worst clothes store? ‎ ‎3. Which is the best clothes store? ‎ ‎4. Which radio station plays the most boring songs?‎ ‎5. Which radio station plays the best songs?‎ ‎6. Which cinema has the most comfortable seats?‎ Ⅱ. Grammar Focus ‎1. 学生阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。‎ ‎① 哪是可以去的最好的电影院？ ‎ ‎ What is the ____ ______ _____ to go to?‎ ‎② 城镇剧院，它离家最近。 ‎ ‎ Town Cinema. It’s the ______ ___ home.‎ ‎③ 并且你能在那里最快地买到票。 ‎ ‎ And you can buy ______ the _______ ________ there. ‎ ‎④ 哪家是镇上最差的服装店？ ‎ ‎_______ is the ______ clothes store in town? ‎ ‎⑤ 梦想服装店。它比蓝月亮差一些。 ‎ Dream Clothes. It’s ______ ____ Blue Moon。 ‎ ‎⑥ 它的服务最差。 ‎ ‎ It has ______ _______ _________. ‎ ‎⑦ 你认为970 AM怎么样？ ‎ ‎ What do you _______ _____ 970 AM? ‎ ‎⑧ 我认为970AM十分差，它放最差的音乐。 ‎ ‎ I think 970 AM is _______ _______. It has the ______ ________. ‎ ‎2. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。‎ ‎3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。‎ Ⅲ. Try to Find ‎ 一、形容词和副词的最高级形式的构成：‎ ‎1. 学生们观察例词，发现他们的规则，与同学们讨论，并记下来。 ‎ ‎2. 最后，由各小组长来说一说他们小组所做的总结。‎ ‎3. 大屏幕出示形容词和副词的最高级形式的规则，学生们记忆或记在笔记本上。‎ 二、用最高级来描述人物或事物的句型小结：‎ ‎1. A + be + the 形容词最高级 + 表示范围的介词词组 ‎ ‎2. A + 动词+ (the) 副词最高级 +（表示范围的介词词组） ‎ 例句：‎ Dream Clothes is the worst in town.‎ The DJs choose songs the most carefully.‎ Ⅳ. Practice ‎ Work on 3a: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to read the sentences in 3a and try to fill in the blanks with correct forms of the words in brackets. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：应通读全句，掌握短文大意；然后，根据句意及句子中有没有表示范围的词组，来确定空格处的形容词或副词是用何级别形式。比如，在第一题中，句末有表示范围的词组in town，可知空格处应填bad的最高级形式，故应填worst。其他类似。‎ ‎3. 学生们，按老师指导的方法进行阅读，并逐句推敲每空应填什么词，在实际的运用提高自己的阅读能力、分析能力及综合运用能力。‎ ‎4. 最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。‎ Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. 让学生们阅读表格中词语，并记忆这些词语的形式。‎ ‎2. 让学生们思考一下他们居住地周围的一些商店的情况，并填写在表格中。‎ ‎3. 让学生们就表格中所填写的内容，来发表自己谈论自己居住地周围的情况，并写在表格中。 相互检查一下自己所写的句子，发现并改正错误。‎ ‎4. 让部分学生读一下自己的句子。大家一起改正句子中的错误。‎ Ⅴ. Group work ‎ ‎1. 让一名学生读表格中的内容。并告诉学生们本学习活动的要求。‎ ‎2. 学生们与自己的小组成员一起来讨论自己居住地周围的饭店的情况，并将名字及情况填写在表格中。‎ ‎3. 讨论并比较这些饭店的情况，每个成员发表自己的意见，讨论自己认为是最好的饭店。‎ ‎4. 选举一名学生来向同学们汇报自己小组的讨论情况。 ‎ ‎(最后，可以经学生们评议来推举最有能力的小组）‎ Ⅵ. Exercises ‎ If time is enough, do some more exercises on big screen. ‎ ‎ 用所给单词的适当形式填空：‎ ‎1. Lily is ______ (early) than Lucy. ‎ ‎2. Who goes __________ (slowly), Tom or Jim?‎ ‎3. This book is _______________ (interesting) than that one.‎ ‎4. She is ____________ (careful) in her school.‎ ‎5. Who is _________ (late) Jim, Tom or Jack?‎ ‎6. I think beef noodles is ________________ (delicious) of all. ‎ Homework ‎ 谈论一下自己班级的“班级之最” Who’s the tallest? (the smartest, the tallest, the heaviest, the friendliest, the thinnest, the most beautiful, the busiest, the funniest, the most popular…)‎ I think … is the tallest. ‎ 板书设计 ‎ Section A 2 Grammar focus-3c ‎3a: worse, the worst; better, the best; more expensive, the most expensive; most comfortably; the most interesting ‎ ‎3b: New World has the best service in town.‎ ‎ Big Mouth has best food. ‎ ‎ Red Tea House has the best service. ‎ ‎3c: Danny’s is the best one because it’s the closest to my home.‎ ‎ Blue Moon is the best one because it has the most delicious food. ‎ 教学反思：‎ Section B 1 1a-2e ‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：creative, performer, talent, common, all kinds of, beautifully, role, winner, prize, everybody, make up, example, for example, poor, seriously, give ‎ ‎2) 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① Who was the best performer？ ‎ ‎② All these shoes have one thing in common. ‎ ‎③ That’s up to you to decide. ‎ ‎④ But if you don’t take these shows too seriously, … ‎ ‎⑤ They usually play a role in deciding the winner. ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 了解一些选秀节目的实质及目的，正确对待生活中的一些歌星及影星，不要盲目地追风，做追星族。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及表达方式。‎ ‎2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。 ‎ ‎3）阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点 ‎1). 听力训练 ‎2). 阅读2b部分的短文并完成相关要求。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎1. Daily greeting. ‎ ‎2. 复习形容词和副词最高级形式的构成规则，并完成相关任务。 ‎ ‎3. Check the homework. Let some Ss report “Who’s the … in class?” ‎ Ⅱ. Presentation ‎1. T: Show some movie theater or restaurant in the neighborhood on the big screen. Tell Ss your thoughts about them. ‎ ‎2. Talk about the clothes stores or food stores in your neighborhood. ‎ e.g.‎ ‎ Blue Moons has the worst clothes. New Fashion has the best quality. Young House has the cheapest clothes. Jenny’s has the best service. ‎ Ⅲ. Game ‎ ‎1. Work with your partners. You say an adjective and your partner say its opposites in the chart. ‎ ‎2. Ss work in pairs and see who can do better. ‎ ‎3. Work on 1a and write these words and phrases next to their opposites in the chart. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ Work on 1c: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to look at the pictures and the names in 1c. Tell Ss this school had a talent show last weekend. Some Ss and some teachers took part in the talent show. Now listen to the conversation and math the pictures with the performers. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss. Ss just listen for the first time. Play the recording again and match the pictures with the performers. ‎ ‎3. Check the answers: ‎ Work on 1d: ‎ ‎1. T: Now please look at the chart in 1e. What do the people say about the performers? You'll listen to the tape again. Then try to fill in the blanks. ‎ 听力指导：要抓别人对他们每个人的评价所说的词汇，也就是那些表示评价的形容词或副词的最高级形式。因此在听的时候，应重点放在对人物的表演进行评价的最高级形式上。‎ ‎2. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again and check the answers with the class. ‎ Ⅴ. Group work ‎ ‎1. Work in groups. Look at the information in 1d and make a conversation with your partner. ‎ ‎2. Make a model for the Ss. ‎ ‎3. Tell Ss to make a conversation about all the performers. ‎ ‎4. Teacher can walk around the classroom, and give some help to the Ss. ‎ Ⅵ. Reading ‎ ‎1. T: Do you often watch TV? Do you like China’s Got Talent? Today we’ll learn a passage about talent shows. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read the passage quickly and find out “Which three talent shows are mentioned? ” ‎ ‎3. Ss read the passage quickly and find the answers to the questions.‎ Ⅶ. Reading ‎ ‎1. T: Now let’s work on 2c. First, let’s read the questions and make sure we know the meanings of all the questions. Then read the passage again and find the answers to the questions. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：首先，应读懂五个题目的意思；然后，带着这五个问题再次认真阅读短文的内容，并在短文中找出相关问题的回答依据。 综合短文内容与题目内容，确定最为贴切的答案。‎ ‎3. Ss read carefully and try to find the answers to the questions. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the class. ‎ Ⅷ. Reading ‎ ‎1. T: Read the passage again. This time you should underline all the superlatives in the passage, then write sentences using at least four of them. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：首先，在短文中划出形容词或副词的最高级形式；然后，结合自己生活或班级中的人或事物来用这个词语来造一个自己的句子；最后，与同位交换自己的句子，互相检查一下。‎ ‎3. Ss find the superlatives in the passage. Try to write their sentences. ‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. 课后阅读短文，试着复述课文，总结课文出现的重难点词组及表达方式。‎ ‎2. 完成2e中的调查，并写出一个调查报告。 ‎ Section B 2 3a-Self check ‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 复习形容词及副词的比较的构成规则。掌握生词crowded。‎ ‎2) 能够综合运用所掌握的知识来描述周围的地点及事物的特点。‎ ‎3) 通过描述周围的地点及事物来综合运用所学的形容词及副词的比较的用法。 ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎1) 每个人都有自身的特长、优点和特点，古人云：三人行必有我师焉。每个人都可以从他人那儿学习到你所需要的可贵的品质和精神。‎ ‎2）文中的选材贴近学生日常生活，易激发学生的学习兴趣。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1)‎ ‎ 能运用所学的形容词或副词的最高级的用法，根据提示来完成选词填空的任务。‎ ‎2）能运用所学的形容词或副词的最高级的用法来描写自己周围的一些地点和事物等。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 能运用所学的形容词或副词的最高级的用法来描写自己周围的一些地点和事物等。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions. ‎ ‎2. Who’s got the talent in your class? Let some Ss give their report. ‎ e.g.‎ ‎1) Li Fei is the best chess player. ‎ ‎2) Xu Li is the most talented dancer. ‎ ‎3) Wu Fan is the most interesting writer. ‎ ‎4) Sun Nan is the faster runner. ‎ ‎5) … is the best basketball player. ‎ ‎6) … is the best English speaker. ‎ ‎7) … is the funniest actor. ‎ ‎3. Review the phrases. And make a sentence with the phrases. ‎ ‎1) 有相同特征 _________________‎ ‎2) 各种各样的 _________________‎ ‎3) 由……决定 _________________‎ ‎4) 发挥作用 ___________________‎ ‎5) 编造 ________________‎ ‎6) 例如 ________________‎ ‎7) 认真对待_____________‎ ‎8) 给某人某物 ___________ ‎ Ⅱ. Lead-in ‎ ‎1. Let Ss talk about “What’s your favorite place to go on weekends? Why is it?”‎ e.g. ‎ ‎1) The Children’s Center is the best place to go on weekends. Because I can play ‎ tennis and play ping-pong. I can speak English with friends. ‎ ‎2) The best place to go is Center Park. Because I can swim and climb the hill. I can ‎ fly kites and take a walk in the woods. ‎ Ⅲ. Reading ‎ ‎1. Read the article about Greenwood Park. Fill in the blanks with the correct superlative forms of the adjectives and adverbs in the box. ‎ ‎2. 写作指导：‎ 首先，阅读短文，整体把握短文大意。 ‎ 其次，分析有空格的每个句子，看空格处应是形容词还是副词，根据句意确定单词。 ‎ 最后，将单词的最高级形式填到空白处。副词前可以不加the。 ‎ ‎3. Ss try to read the article and try to fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the Ss.‎ Ⅳ. Writing ‎ Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. Think about some of the best places/things in your town. Why are they the best? ‎ ‎2. Give some examples to the Ss. ‎ best middle school: No. 1 Middle School; ‎ Why: Because it is the most beautiful school in my town. ‎ Best super-market: New Century Supermarket ‎ Why: the best quality and the best service ‎ ‎… ‎ ‎3. Ss try to think it and think about the reasons. ‎ ‎4. Try to fill in the blanks. ‎ Work on 3c: ‎ ‎1. Write about your town and the best places/things there. ‎ ‎2. 写作指导： ‎ Ø 本文为写自己所居住的城镇上最好的地方或事物，并说明原因。 ‎ Ø 因此，时态应用一般现在时态； ‎ Ø 应先描述最……的是某个地方，然后说明这个地方最好的原因。 ‎ Ø 应注意正确运用形容词或副词的最高级形式来表达。 ‎ ‎3. 学生们根据写作提示，及上面表格中的提示来写作这篇文章。‎ ‎4. Let some Ss read their passage to the class. ‎ Ⅴ. Discussion ‎ ‎1. Discuss the towns/cities in China with a partner. Tell the class which town/city you think is the best. ‎ ‎2. Give Ss some examples:‎ I think Hangzhou is the best city in China. Because it’s the most beautiful. West Lake is the most famous place. And it’s the most popular city. Quite a lot of visitors come to Hangzhou every year. ‎ ‎3. Ss discuss with their partners and try to give their own idea. ‎ ‎4. Try to write about their ideas on a piece of paper. ‎ Ⅵ. Self check ‎ Work on Self check 1: ‎ ‎1. Fill in the blanks with the superlative forms of the words in the box. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：首先，阅读句子理解大意。确定空格是修饰名词还是修饰动词，从而确定空白处是形容词还是副词。最后填上其恰当的最高级形式。‎ ‎3. 指导： 1. the cheapest 空格后有名词restaurant; 关键句“你可以花仅五元就能买到一大盘饺子。” ‎ ‎… ‎ ‎4. 学生做每个试题，并校对答案。‎ Work on Self check 2 ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to read the information then correct the mistakes. ‎ ‎2. Ss work by themselves. ‎ 说明原因：在短文第一段中列举了这三家影剧院的票价：Town Cinema 12美元；Screen City10.50美元；Movie World 10美元。 ‎ ‎3. 学生们完成试题并说明原因。‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. Review Section B. ‎ ‎2. Imagine you going to a talent show of famous people. Write an article about the talent show.‎ ‎ ‎ 板书设计：‎ Section B 2 3a-Self Check ‎3a：the best; the fastest; the most crowded; the most creative ‎ ‎3c: one possible version: ‎ ‎ The best school is No. 1 Middle School because it is the most beautiful. The best supermarket is New Century Supermarket because it has the best quality things and the best service. The best restaurant is Rui Jia Restaurant because it has the most delicious food and it is the cleanest restaurant. The best clothes store is Fashion Kids because it has the best quality clothes and it plays the nicest music. The best theater is Hanhai 3D Theater because it has the biggest screen and it has the most comfortable seats. ‎ 教学反思：‎ Unit 5 Do you want to watch a game show?‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：sitcom, news, soap, educational, plan, hope, find out, discussion, stand, happen, may, expect ‎ 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① What do you want to watch? ‎ ‎② What do you think of talk shows? ‎ ‎③ I can’t stand them. ‎ ‎④ I don’t mind them. ‎ ‎⑤ I like/love them. / I don’t like them. ‎ ‎2) 能了解以下语法：‎ ‎ 动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。‎ ‎3）学会陈述自己的看法；学会谈论自己的喜好。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 学会谈论流行文化，了解各类电视和电视节目的名称和自己的喜欢。 注意引导学生们形成正确的文化观念，大力培养学生们的跨文化意义，形成自己独立的个性。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握各类电视和电视节目的名称。‎ ‎2) 掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；了解后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。 ‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；了解后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Lead-in ‎ 学生们根据图片提示学习各类电视节目并且练习运用What do you thin k of…? ‎ Ⅱ. New words ‎ Learn the names of the TV shows. ‎ Ⅲ. Game ‎ ‎1. 引导学生们看1a中的图片，根据提示依次说出每一部TV Show的名称。 ‎ ‎2. 让学生们看图片及1a中的词汇，将图片与正确的词汇相连。 ‎ ‎3. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ ‎1. T: Tell Ss to read the shows in the box. Make sure they know the meaning of the shows. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the shows1-4. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Ⅴ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Let Ss look at the pictures in the box. Then explain the meaning of each expression to the Ss. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read the conversation after the teacher. Then let Ss make their own conversation using the shows and expressions in the box. ‎ ‎3. Let some pairs ask and answer about the shows. ‎ Ⅵ. Listening ‎ Work on 2a: ‎ ‎1. Read the shows in the box of 2a. Tell Ss to remember the information. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the TV shows [1-5]. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers. ‎ Work on 2b: ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the sentences below. Explain some main sentences for the Ss. Make sure they know what to do. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to write the correct words in the ‎ blanks. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers. ‎ Ⅶ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss ask and answer questions about the TV shows in 2a. They can use the information that is true for them. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read conversation after the teacher. ‎ ‎3. Explain some main points for the Ss. ‎ ‎4. Ss act the conversation in pairs. Ask some pairs to act out their conversations. ‎ Ⅷ. Role-play ‎ ‎ 1. Read the conversations and match the name with the right shows. ‎ ‎① Grace a. game shows and sports shows ‎② Sarah b. soap operas ‎ ‎③ Grace’s classmates c. news and talk shows ‎ ‎2. Explain some new words and main points in the conversation. ‎ ‎3. Read the conversation after the teacher. ‎ ‎4. Practice the conversation with their partner. Then let some pairs to act out the conversation. ‎ IX. Homework: ‎ 用下列词组来造句： ‎ ‎(1) plan to … (2) hope to… ‎ ‎(3) find out… (4) can’t stand…‎ ‎(5) sth. happen (6) expect to …‎ 板书设计：‎ Section A 1 1a-2d ‎ sitcom, news, soap, educational, plan, hope, find out, discussion, stand, happen, may, expect Sentences Structures：‎ ‎① What do you want to watch? ‎ ‎② What do you think of talk shows? ‎ ‎③ I can’t stand them. ‎ ‎④ I don’t mind them. ‎ ‎⑤ I like/love them. / I don’t like them. ‎ 教学反思：‎ Section A 2 (Grammar Focus-3c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇：joke, comedy ‎ ‎2）进行一步复习巩固运用Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。‎ ‎3）进一步学习运用所学的知识来陈述自己的看法；学会谈论自己的喜好。‎ ‎4) 掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语这一语法知识；掌握后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 学会谈论流行文化，了解各类电视和电视节目的名称和自己的喜欢。 注意引导学生们形成正确的文化观念，大力培养学生们的跨文化意义，形成自己独立的个性。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 进一步学习运用所学的知识来陈述自己的看法；学会谈论自己的喜好。‎ ‎2) 掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语这一语法知识；掌握后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语这一语法知识；掌握后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Revision ‎ ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words learned in the last class. ‎ ‎2. Ask and answer questions about the different shows. ‎ ‎ What do you think of news?‎ ‎ I can’t stand it. / I like it. / I don’t mind it. I… ‎ ‎3. Role-play the conversation in 2d. ‎ Ⅱ. Grammar focus ‎1. 学生阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。‎ ‎① 你想看新闻吗？ ‎ ‎ Do you want to ____ ______ _____?‎ ‎② 你觉得谈话节目怎么样？ ‎ ‎ What do you ______ ___ _____ shows?‎ ‎③ 我不介意看。/我不能忍受。/ 我喜欢看。 ‎ ‎ I don’t ______ them. I ____ ______ them. I ____ ________ them. ‎ ‎④ 你计划今晚上看什么节目？ ‎ ‎ _______ do you______ _____watch tonight? ‎ ‎⑤ 我计划看《我们过去的时代》。 ‎ ‎ I ______ ____ watch Days of Our Past.‎ ‎⑥ 你期望从情景喜剧中学到什么？ ‎ ‎ What can you ______ ___ ____ from sitcoms? ‎ ‎ ⑦ 你能学到一些很好的笑话。 ‎ ‎ You can _______ some great _____. ‎ ‎ ⑧ 你为什么喜欢看新闻呢？ ‎ ‎ Why do you like _________ ___ ______?‎ ‎ ⑨ 因为我希望查明在世界各地发了什么事情？ ‎ ‎ Because I ______ ____ _____ ___ what’s going ________ the world.‎ ‎2. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。 ‎ ‎3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。‎ Ⅲ. Grammar 动词不定式做宾语的用法： ‎ 动词不定式的形式：to + 动词原形 Jack wants to buy some flowers for Mr. Wu.‎ ‎ 杰克想给吴老师买些花。 ‎ 常见的跟动词不定式做宾语的动词: ‎ ‎ 想要 want, 期望 expect, 希望hope, 计划plan, 决定decide ,开始begin,开始start ‎ ‎2. 最后，由各小组长来说一说他们小组所做的总结。‎ ‎3. 大屏幕出示常见的跟动词不定式做宾语的动词和同学们一起对答案。‎ 二、【拓展】省略to 的不定式 ‎ 有些动词后面跟动词不定式时应将不定式符号to省去。常见的动词有let, make, feel, help, watch, hear等。例句：‎ 让我来帮助你。 Let me help you. ‎ 你能帮助我打扫房间吗？ Can you help me clean the house? ‎ Ⅳ. 及时练 用所给单词的适当形式填空：‎ ‎1. She expects _________ (arrive) tomorrow.‎ ‎2. Let’s _______ (watch) talk shows tonight.‎ ‎3. They hope _________ (visit) the Great Wall next year. ‎ ‎4. Do you plan _______ (find) a part-time job?‎ ‎5. When do you want _____ (go) swimming?‎ ‎6. My uncle often helps me ________ (learn) math and English. ‎ Ⅴ. New words joke comedy Ⅵ. Practice ‎ Work on 3a: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to read the conversation in 3a and try to fill in the blanks with right words. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：应通读整个对话，掌握对话大意；‎ 然后，根据问句所问的内容及自己的实际情况来回答问题。‎ 注意，第二个问是一个选择疑问句，意为“你想看……还是看……呢？”‎ ‎3. 学生们，按老师指导的方法进行阅读，并逐句推敲每空应填什么词语，在实际的运用提高自己的阅读能力、分析能力及综合运用能力。‎ ‎4. 最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。‎ ‎5. 学生们两结对操练对话，最后找几名学生来表演一下对话。‎ Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. 让学生们阅读表格中的问题，明白每个问题的意思。‎ ‎2. 让学生们思考一下他们自己的实际情况，并做出正确的回答。‎ ‎3. 让学生们互相检查自己所写的句子，发现并改正错误。 ‎ ‎4. 让部分学生就这些问题进行问答，说出自己所写的句子。大家一起改正句子中的错误。 ‎ Word on 3c:‎ ‎1. 让一名学生读表格中的内容。并告诉学生们本学习活动的要求。‎ ‎2. 先由一名学生们对自己的小组成员进行提问，询问每一名成员希望看的内容。然后，在表格中的适当位置记下他们的名字。‎ ‎3. 由其余的同生们根据表格中的情况来写一个小组成员情况的报告。大家互相讨论一下这些报告，最后，确定出一个最完整且没有错误的报告。‎ ‎4. 由这名学生来向同学生汇报自己小级的情况。 ‎ ‎(最后，可以经学生们评议来推举最有能力的小组）‎ VII. Exercises VIII. Writing task 写一个报告，陈述一下你的爸爸、妈妈及祖父母亲分别喜欢看什么类型 节目，并简要说明原因。 ‎ My mother likes sitcom. She thinks they’re interesting. …‎ 板书设计 ‎ Section A 2 Grammar Focus-3c ‎3a: to watch an action movie; the sports shows; want to watch; a sitcom; ‎ ‎ watch the news. ‎ ‎3b: 1. I don’t mind them. 2. I like to watch The Winner. ‎ ‎ 3. No, I don’t. I think it’s boring. ‎ ‎ 4. I expect to find what’s going on around the world. ‎ ‎3c: One possible version: ‎ ‎ In my group, S1 wants to watch a movie. S2 hopes to watch a sitcom. S3 expects to watch the news. S4 plans to watch a sports show. S4 never wants to watch a game show. ‎ 教学反思：‎ Section B 1 1a-2e ‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：meaningless, action, action movie, cartoon, culture, famous, appear, become, rich, successful, might, main, reason, film, unlucky, lose, ready, be ready to, character, guy ‎ ‎2) 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① I like to watch action movies because they’re exciting. ‎ ‎② John wants to watch talk shows because they’re enjoyable. ‎ ‎③ One of the main reasons is that Mickey was like a common man. ‎ ‎④ However, he was always ready to try his best. ‎ ‎⑤ People today expect to see more than just a little mouse fighting bad guys. ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 了解他人对不同的电影或电视剧的看法，明白不同的人有不同的喜好，从而明确人们喜好的差异性；了解世界其他国家的文化，形成跨文化的意思。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及表达方式。 ‎ ‎2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。 ‎ ‎3）阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点 ‎1. 听力训练 ‎2. 阅读2b部分的短文并完成相关要求。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Revision 看图画让学生们根据图片提示来完成句子，注意动词不定式的用法。 ‎ Ⅱ. Lead-in ‎ T: Show some movies or shows on the big screen. ‎ Let Ss discuss about them. Ask and answer what they think of them. ‎ Ⅲ. New words Present some new words on the big screen. ‎ Ⅳ.Work on 1a ‎ ‎1. Work with your partners. Ask and answer about the movies or shows. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss talk about the movies or shows with the words in 1a. ‎ ‎3. Let some pairs ask and answer in front of the class. ‎ Ⅴ. Listening ‎ Work on 1b: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to listen and circle the description words you hear in the box in 1a. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss. Ss just listen for the first time. Play the recording again and circle the words. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording and check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Work on 1c: ‎ ‎1. T: Now please look at the chart in 1c. What do John and Mary think of the movies or shows? You'll listen to the tape again. Then try to fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎ 听力指导：要抓别人对他们两个人的看法所说的词汇，也就是那些表示看法的形容词。因此在听的时候，应重点放在对剧目进行评价的形容词上。‎ ‎2. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again and check the answers with the class. ‎ Ⅵ. Discussion ‎ ‎1. Work in groups. Look at the questions in 2a. ‎ ‎2. Ask one student the questions as a model. ‎ ‎3. Tell Ss to discuss the questions in the group. ‎ Ⅶ. Reading ‎ ‎1. Introduce something about Disney.‎ ‎2. New words.‎ ‎3. Work on 2b.‎ T: Do you like to watch cartoons? Do you know Mickey Mouse? Today we’ll learn a passage about Mickey Mouse. ‎ Let Ss read the passage quickly and complete the time line on next page. ‎ Ss read the passage quickly and complete the time line on next page. ‎ Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ ‎4. Work on 2c. ‎ First, let’s read the questions in the chart. Make sure all the students know the meaning of the questions. Then read the passage again and find the answers to the questions. ‎ 方法指导：首先，应读懂五个题目的意思；然后，带着这五个问题再次认真阅读短文的内容，并在短文中找出相关问题的回答依据。 综合短文内容与题目内容，确定最为贴切的答案。‎ Ss read carefully and try to find the answers to the questions. ‎ Check the answers with the class. ‎ ‎5. Work on 2d T: Read the passage again. This time you should discuss the questions with a partner. ‎ 方法指导：首先，在短文中找到相关问题的回答依据；然后，与伙伴来讨论一下这个问题，结合自己生活经历回答出这个问题； ‎ Let some Ss talk about their answers. ‎ VIII. Explanation IX. Homework ‎ ‎1. Finish 2e on P38.‎ ‎2. Remember the words and phrases in the lesson. ‎ ‎ 板书设计：‎ Section B 1 1a-2e New words and expressions: ‎ meaningless, action, action movie, cartoon, culture, famous, appear, become, rich, successful, might, main, reason, film, unlucky, lose, ready, be ready to, character, guy Sentence Structures:‎ ‎① I like to watch action movies because they’re exciting. ‎ ‎② John wants to watch talk shows because they’re enjoyable. ‎ ‎③ One of the main reasons is that Mickey was like a common man. ‎ ‎④ However, he was always ready to try his best. ‎ ‎⑤ People today expect to see more than just a little mouse fighting bad guys.‎ Section B 2 (3a-Self Check) ‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 掌握下列生词: dress up; take sb.’s place, army, do a good job ‎ ‎2) 复习to不定式做宾语的用法。掌握后面跟不定式结构做宾语的动词。‎ ‎3) 能够综合运用所掌握的知识来描述自己所喜欢的一些动画片或影视剧。‎ ‎3) 通过自己所喜欢的一些动画片或影视剧来达到熟练运用所学知识的目的。 ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎1) 每个人都有自己的爱好，要了解个体的差异性，了解自己的爱好，尊重别人的爱好。 ‎ ‎2) 了解一些影视片的内容，通过观看不同形式的影视片来了解社会，丰富自己的文化知识。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 能运用所学的知识及提示来阅读相关影视片的简介，并能完成相关任务。 ‎ ‎2）能运用所学的知识与句型表达方式来简介一下自己所看过的影视片。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 能运用所学的知识与句型表达方式来简介一下自己所看过的影视片。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Revision Review the main phrases learned yesterday. ‎ ‎(1) 想起 __________ ‎ ‎(2) 例如________‎ ‎(3) 发行；出版 _________________‎ ‎(4) 在二十世纪三十年代 ______________‎ ‎(5) 主要原因之一___________________‎ ‎(6) 努力做某事 ________________‎ ‎(7) 愿意迅速做某事_______________‎ ‎(8) 尽最大努力_____________‎ ‎(9) 不仅仅；不只___________‎ Ⅱ. Lead-in ‎ Ask some questions about Mulan. Let the Ss think and answer the questions: ‎ ‎“Do you like cartoons? Do you know Mulan? Can you say anything about it?” ‎ ‎ Ss discuss the questions and answer the questions. e.g.‎ ‎ S1: Yes, I do. Mulan didn’t have any brothers. She took his father’s place to fight in the army. ‎ S2: Mulan dressed up like a boy. Nobody knew she was a girl in the army. ‎ Ⅲ. New words ‎ Ⅳ. Reading ‎ ‎1. Read the article about Mulan. Fill in the blanks in the movie review. Use the words in the box to help you. ‎ ‎2. 写作指导：‎ 首先，阅读短文，整体把握短文大意。 ‎ 其次，分析有空格的每个句子，看空格处的意思，联系所给单词的意思，确定空格处应填的单词。‎ 最后，再通读一遍短文，看是否通顺合理。 ‎ ‎3. Ss try to read the article and try to fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the Ss.‎ Ⅴ.Writing ‎ Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. Think about your favorite movies. Write notes for your own movie review. ‎ ‎2. Give some examples to the Ss. ‎ The name of the movie: The Lion King ‎ The kind of the movie: cartoon ‎ What the movie is about? ‎ ‎ Simba’s father was the king. But his uncle, Scar killed his father. When Simba grew up, he came back to the forest and became the true King. ‎ What you think of the movie/star? ‎ It was fantastic. ‎ ‎3. Ss try to think about their favorite movies. Write notes for their own movie review. ‎ ‎4. Try to fill in the blanks. ‎ Work on 3c: ‎ ‎1. Write about your movie review using the notes in 3b. ‎ ‎2. 写作指导： ‎ Ø ‎ 本文为写自己所喜欢的电影的剧情回顾， ‎ Ø ‎ 因此，时态应用一般现在时态与一般过去时态； ‎ Ø ‎ 首先，可介绍影片的类型，及主人公等。‎ Ø ‎ 然后，介绍故事的梗概。 ‎ Ø ‎ 最后，表达你对该影片的总体看法。 ‎ ‎3. 学生们根据写作提示，及上面表格中的提示来写作这篇文章。‎ ‎4. Let some Ss read their passage to the class. ‎ Ⅵ. Discussion ‎1. Read the kinds of shows or movies in the chart in 4. Ask and answer about them with a partner. Write the answers in the chart. ‎ ‎2. Give Ss some examples:‎ ‎ S1: What do you think of soap operas? ‎ S2: I think they’re boring. What about you? ‎ S1: Well, I don’t like them, either. ‎ ‎3. Ss ask and answer with their partners and try to fill in the chart. ‎ ‎4. At last, write a short report about your ideas and your partner’s. ‎ VII. Self check ‎ Work on Self check 1: ‎ ‎1. Fill in the blanks with the superlative forms of the words in the box. ‎ ‎2. ‎ 本题是根据提示词来进行问答。问句和答语中没有对人称的提示，因此应自主确定人称。可以用you来询问，则回答应用I；如果是用第三人称来询问，则回答也相应的用第三人称来答，如果是第三人称单数形式还应注意动词用恰当的第三人称单数形式。 ‎ 具体分析： ‎ 如：1） ─What do you think of soap operas? ─I can’t mind them. ‎ ‎─What does your father think of soap operas? ─He can’t mind them. ‎ ‎… ‎ ‎4. 学生做每个试题，并校对答案。‎ Work on Self check 2 ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to read the statements below. Then think about them. Which of the statements they agree. Check (√). Check (×) if they disagree. Give at least one reason. ‎ ‎2. Ss work and by themselves. ‎ 说明原因： Give some examples: e.g. I think we can learn some interesting things.‎ ‎3. 学生们完成试题并说明原因。‎ VIII. Homework ‎ Write your movie review using the notes in 3b.‎ ‎ ‎ 教学反思：‎ Unit 6 I’m going to study computer science.‎ Section A1 (1a-2d)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：grow up, computer programmer, cook, doctor, engineer, violinist, driver, pilot, pianist, scientist, be sure about, make sure ‎ 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① ─What do you want to be when you grow up? ‎ ‎ ─I want to be a basketball player. ‎ ‎② ─How are you going to do that? ‎ ‎ ─I’m going to practice basketball every day. ‎ ‎③ Where are you going to work? ‎ ‎④ When are you going to start? ‎ ‎⑤ I’m not sure about that. ‎ ‎2) 能了解以下语法：‎ ‎ 掌握一般将来时态的构成形式； ‎ ‎3) 用一般将来时态表达将要做的事情。 ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 每个人都有自己的梦想和对未来的打算，对于将来想要从事的职业也充满了憧憬。 人们以常谈论他们的设想，因此，应通过学习这单元的内容来激发学生们的学习主动性和学习兴趣，使他们更加有理想，并为实现自己的理想而不断努力。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 学习一般将来时态的构成方式。‎ ‎2) 学习本课时出现的重点句型，通过在不同情景下运用来熟练运用一般将来时态。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 用一般将来时态表达自己未来的打算。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Lead-in ‎ ‎1. 介绍自己小时候想要从事的职业，由此归纳出以前所学过的一些职业的英语表达方式：‎ ‎ teacher, nurse, doctor, basketball player, runner, actor, actress… ‎ ‎2. 询问学生们想要从事的职业，从而引出句型：‎ ‎─ What do you want to be when you grow up? ‎ ‎─ I want to be a basketball player. ‎ ‎3. 学生们看幻灯片，引导学生们进行问答自己将来所喜欢的职业。 ‎ Ⅱ. Presentation ‎1. 播放幻灯片，展示一些职业的图片，来引导学生们学习一些新的职业名词：‎ ‎ computer programmer, cook, engineer, violinist, pianist, pilot, scientist,… ‎ ‎2. 让学生们看大屏幕来学习记忆这些生词。‎ ‎3. Tell Ss to rank them [1-12]. 1 is most interesting, 12 is least interesting. ‎ ‎2. Try to remember the new words. ‎ Ⅲ. Game ‎ ‎1. Show some pictures in the big screen. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss guess what he/she does. ‎ ‎3. Let Ss try their best to guess the job. See which group is the best. ‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ ‎1. T: Tell Ss to read the words of jobs in the chart. Make sure they know the meaning of the words and sentences. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ ‎4. Play the recording again. Ss listen and match the jobs with activities. ‎ ‎5. Show the answers on the big screen. ‎ Ⅴ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the model with a partner. ‎ ‎2. Use the information in the chart of 1b. Ask and answer with a partner. ‎ ‎3. Let some pairs ask and answer about the chart. ‎ Ⅵ. Listening ‎ Work on 2a: ‎ ‎1. Let Ss look at the pictures below. Explain the activities in the pictures if necessary. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and check (√) the correct boxes in the picture. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers.‎ Work on 2b: ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the chart below. Tell Ss that they’ll listen to Cheng Han’s plan for the future. They should answer the questions:‎ ‎“What” means “What is Cheng Han want to be?”‎ ‎“Where” means “where is Cheng Han going to work?”‎ ‎“How” means “How is he going to do it? ”‎ ‎“When” means “when is he going to start?”‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to write the correct answers in the chart. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers. ‎ Ⅶ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to ask and answer about Cheng Han’s plans using the information in 2b. ‎ ‎2. Give a model to the Ss. ‎ ‎3. Ss work in pairs. Try to ask and answer about Cheng Han’s plans. ‎ ‎4. Ask some pairs to act out their conversations. ‎ Ⅷ. Role-play ‎ ‎ 1. Read the conversations and answer the two questions: ‎ ‎① What does Ken want to be? __________________________________ ‎ ‎② How is he going to do that? __________________________________‎ ‎③ What does Andy want to be? ‎ ‎____________________________________ ‎ ‎2. Explain main points in the conversation. ‎ l The Old Man and the Sea by Hemingway. 海明威的《老人与海》。 此处介词by为“由……所著”之意。再如：a short story by Lu Xun (鲁迅的一部短篇小说)，the music by Mozart(莫扎特写的音乐)，paintings by Van Gogh(梵高的绘画)等。‎ l Then you can be anything you want! 那么你就能当上你想做的人了。 ‎ 此句的基本意思是you can be anything，不定代词anything指代未来所从事的某一职业，you want用来修饰anything。‎ ‎3. Let Ss read the conversation after the teacher. ‎ ‎4. Practice the conversation with their partner. Then let some pairs to act out the conversation. ‎ Homework: ‎ ‎1. Recite the conversation in 2d after school. ‎ ‎2. 根据图片提示或自己的实际想法编写一个对话。 ‎ ‎ --What are you going to be when you grow up?‎ ‎--I’m going to be a/an…‎ ‎--How are you going to do that? ‎ ‎--I’m going to…‎ 板书设计：‎ Section A1 (1a-2d)‎ Words: ‎ grow up, computer programmer, cook, doctor, engineer, violinist, driver, pilot, pianist, scientist, be sure about, make sure ‎ Sentence structures: ‎ ‎① ─What do you want to be when you grow up? ‎ ‎ ─I want to be a basketball player. ‎ ‎② ─How are you going to do that? ‎ ‎ ─I’m going to practice basketball every day. ‎ ‎③ Where are you going to work? ‎ ‎④ When are you going to start? ‎ ‎⑤ I’m not sure about that. ‎ 教学反思：‎ Section A2 (Grammar focus-3c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇：college, education, medicine, university, London, article, send ‎ ‎2）进行下一步复习巩固学习Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。‎ ‎3）总结一般将来时态的句子结构，并掌握其在不同句式中的句子结构。‎ ‎4) 能够熟练运用一般将来时态的句子来表达自己未来的打算和做法等情况。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 每个人都有自己的梦想和对未来的打算，对于将来想要从事的职业也充满了憧憬。 人们以常谈论他们的设想，因此，应通过学习这单元的内容来激发学生们的学习主动性和学习兴趣，使他们更加有理想，并为实现自己的理想而不断努力。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 复习巩固Section A 部分所学的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。‎ ‎2) 能够熟练运用一般将来时态的句子来表达自己未来的打算和做法等情况。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ ‎1) 掌握一般将来时态的句子结构，并掌握其在不同句式中的句子结构。 ‎ ‎2) 能够熟练运用一般将来时态的句子来表达自己未来的打算和做法等情况。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎ ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words learned in the last class. ‎ ‎2. Game: Give some riddles on jobs to the Ss. Ss try to guess the job. ‎ ‎3. Ask and answer what they want to be and how they’re going to do that. ‎ ‎4. Role-play the conversation in 2d. ‎ Ⅱ. Grammar Focus. ‎ ‎1. 学生阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。‎ ‎① 当你长大后，你想做什么？ ‎ ‎ What do you want ____ ___ When you _____ _____?‎ ‎② 我想成为一名工程师。 ‎ ‎ I want to ______ ___ _________.‎ ‎③ 你打算如何做？ ‎ ‎ How ______ you _____ to ____that? ‎ ‎④ 我打算努力地学习数学。 ‎ I’m _______ _____ ______ _____ really hard. ‎ ‎⑤ 想去哪里工作？ ‎ ‎ ______ _______ you going to work? ‎ ‎⑥ 我打算搬往上海。 ‎ ‎ I’m ______ _____ ________ to Shanghai. ‎ ‎⑦你打算从什么时候开始？ ‎ ‎ When ______you _______ to _____? ‎ ‎⑧ 我打算完成中学和大学时开始。 ‎ ‎ I’m going to _____ _______I _____ high school and _________. ‎ ‎2. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。‎ ‎3.‎ ‎ 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。‎ Ⅲ. Try to Find ‎ ‎ 一、一般将来时态：‎ ‎1. 表示即将发生的事或最近 ____________ 的动作。表示说话者的______________ ‎ 例句：‎ 我打算下个月去北京参观。 ‎ ‎ I’m going to visit Beijing next year. ‎ 她打算长大后，搬往上海。 ‎ She’s going to move to Shanghai when I grow up. ‎ 练一练：‎ ‎① 玛丽要卖她的汽车。 ‎ Mary is going to sell her car.  ‎ ‎② 今天早上我将不吃早餐。 ‎ I'm not going to have breakfast this morning.  ‎ ‎③ 你打算邀请约翰参加你的聚会吗？ ‎ Are you going to invite John to your party? ‎ ‎④ 你打算买什么？ ‎ What are you going to buy?  ‎ want to be的用法 Ⅳ. Practice ‎ Work on 3a: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to read the sentences in 3a and match what these people want to do with what they are going to do. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：指导：先读懂这些句子的意思。根据生活常识来进行推测，将职业与相关的活动相连。 ‎ 比如，在第一题中，“我朋友相成为一名工程师。” 由常识可知答语应是学习数学；因此应选e句“她打算学习数学。”其他类似。‎ ‎3.学生们，按老师指导的方法进行阅读，并根据常识来推测应采取什么样的活动。‎ ‎4. 最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。‎ Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. 让学生们阅读对话，整体把握对话的意思。‎ ‎2. 然后仔细读对话，根据上下文意及时态来确定空格处所应填的词。‎ ‎3. 和学生们一起校对答案。‎ ‎4. 让学生们朗读并表演这个对话。‎ Ⅴ. Group work ‎ ‎1. 让学生们看表格中的四个特殊疑问词，告诉他们，在这个活动中要求学生们在表格中填写出自己的理想、实现理想的做法，工作的地点及开始的时间等问题。‎ ‎2. 学生们与自己的小组成员一起来讨论自己理想、实现理想的做法，工作的地点及开始的时间等问题，同学们根据自己的实际情况，在表格先填写出自己打算成为什么职业的人；打算在哪里工作；打算如何做；打算什么时候开始。‎ ‎3. 就上述问题，根据表格的提示，用英语进行讨论。‎ ‎4. 让几个小组的同学来用英语问题上述四个问题。 ‎ ‎(最后，可以经学生们评议来推举最有能力的小组）‎ Ⅵ. Exercises ‎ If time is enough, do some more exercises on big screen. ‎ ‎ 重排下列句子，成为一段完整的对话。 ‎ A. Are you going to move to Hollywood? ‎ B. Well, I’m going to take acting lessons. ‎ C. What are you going to be when you grow up? ‎ D. I’m going to finish high school and college first. ‎ E. When are you going to start? ‎ F. I’m going to be an actor. ‎ G. And how are you going to become an actor? ‎ H. No, I’m going to move to New York.‎ ‎___, ___, ____, ____, ___, ___, ___, ____ ‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. 复习Grammar focus 中的内容。‎ ‎2. 用正确的形式填空。 ‎ ‎1） We are ____________________ (play) basketball tomorrow. ‎ ‎2）They __________________ (visit) their aunt next week. ‎ ‎3）_____Lucy______________(watch)movie with Lily tomorrow? No, _____ ______. ‎ ‎4）There ___________________________ (be) a football match tomorrow. ‎ ‎5）They ___________________ (not practice guitar) next week.‎ 板书设计 ‎ Section A2 Grammar focus-3c ‎3a: e; h; f; d; a; c; g; b ‎ ‎3b: when; am going; Where; going; What, going; study; When; start ‎ ‎3c: A: What do you want to be when you grow up?‎ ‎ B: I want to be a basketball player.‎ ‎ A: How are you going to do that?‎ ‎ B: I’m going to take basketball lessons. ‎ 教学反思：‎ Section B1 1a-2e 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：resolution, team, foreign, able, be able to, question, meaning, discuss, promise, beginning, write down, physical, themselves, have to do with; self-improvement, take up, hobby, weekly, schoolwork ‎ ‎2) 能掌握以下句式结构：‎ ‎① ─What are you going to do next year? ‎ ‎ ─I’m going to take guitar lessons. ‎ ‎② Many resolutions have to do with self-improvement. ‎ ‎③ They’re going to take up a hobby like painting. ‎ ‎④ Sometimes the resolutions may be too difficult to keep. ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 每个人都有自己的梦想和对未来的打算，对于将来想要从事的职业也充满了憧憬。 人们以常谈论他们的设想，因此，应通过学习这单元的内容来激发学生们的学习主动性和学习兴趣，使他们更加有理想，并为实现自己的理想而不断努力。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及表达方式。‎ ‎2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。 ‎ ‎3） 阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点 ‎1. 听力训练 ‎2. 阅读2b部分的短文并完成相关要求。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎1. Daily greeting. Check the homework.‎ ‎2. 头脑风暴： 说出表示的职业名词 ‎ teacher, nurse, doctor, actor, actress, runner, basketball player, pilot, waiter, computer programmer, pianist, scientist, violinist… ‎ ‎ 学生们可以小组为单位进行比赛，看谁写出来的最多。（在五分钟内）‎ ‎3. 说理想，谈打算。‎ I want to be an engineer. I’m going to study math. ‎ ‎ 让学生们依次说出他们的理想及打算如何去做。（可以用大屏幕提示职业或用学生们自己刚才写的职业） ‎ Ⅱ. Presentation ‎1. T: Do you have any New Year’s Resolutions?‎ ‎ Let some Ss answer your questions. ‎ ‎2. Present some other New Year’s Resolutions on the big screen.‎ e.g. learn to play the piano; make the soccer team; get good grades; eat healthier food; get lots of exercise ‎ ‎ 3. Let Ss try remember these resolutions and think of other resolutions. ‎ Ⅲ. Talking ‎ ‎1. Tell your partners your New Year’s Resolutions. ‎ ‎2. S1: I’m going to get lots of exercise. I’m going to make a basketball team. ‎ ‎ S2: I’m going to learn another foreign language. I’m going to learn French. ‎ S3: …‎ ‎3. Let Ss say as many resolutions as they can. ‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ Work on 1c: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to read the resolutions in 1a. Tell Ss to listen and circle the resolutions they hear. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and circle. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers: ‎ Work on 1d: ‎ ‎1. T: Now please look at the chart in 1d. Tell Ss Lucy, Kim and Mike are talking about their New Year’s Resolutions. How are they going to do it? Listen and try to fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎ 听力指导：本题要求同学们听清他们打算如何做来实现他们各的理想；因此，同学们在听的时候应将注意力放在“如何做”上；第一遍仅听，努力记住要做的事情；第二遍的时候再写出来。‎ ‎2. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again and check the answers with the class. ‎ Ⅴ. Group work ‎ ‎1. Work in groups. Make a list of resolutions and how you are going to make them work. Then discuss with your group. ‎ ‎2. Ask some pairs to act out the conversations. ‎ ‎3. Ask Ss the two questions:‎ ‎ Did you make any resolutions last year?‎ ‎ Were you able to keep them? Why or why not? ‎ Ⅵ. Reading ‎ ‎1. T: This passage is about resolutions. Now read the passage quickly and match each paragraph with its main purpose. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read the sentences in the box first. Let some Ss say the meanings. ‎ ‎3. Ss read the passage quickly and match each paragraph with its main purpose.‎ ‎4. Let Ss underline the words and phrases that helped them decide. ‎ Ⅶ. Reading ‎ ‎1. T: Now let’s work on 2c. First, let’s read the sentences and make sure we know the meanings of all the sentences. Then read the passage again and chose which paragraph in the passage each sentence goes in. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：首先，应读懂五个句子的意思；然后，带着这五个句子再次认真阅读短文的内容，特别是认真阅读空格前后句子的意思，以便根据上下文意及整个段落的意思来确定空格处应填的句子。 综合段落的主旨大意及空格上下文的意思，确定最贴切的答案。‎ ‎3. Ss read carefully and try to find the answers to the questions. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the class. ‎ Ⅷ. Reading ‎ ‎1. T: Read the passage again. Then answer the questions with s hort sentences. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：首先，读懂这五个问题的意思；然后，带着问题再次阅读短文，为相关问题找到恰当的答语；如果没有直接的答案，还应根据自己对课文的理解并结合自己的生活经验来给出一个恰当的答案。如：第4和第5小题都应是回答自己的想法。‎ ‎3. Ss try to answer the questions. Then discuss the answers with your partners. ‎ Explanation ‎ ‎1. Some resolutions have to do with better planning, … 有些决定与合理的时间规划相关，……‎ ‎1) 此句中的planning为名词，表示“计划；规划”等意思，如：city planning（城市规划）等。英语中better planning类似汉语中的“合理规划”，指通过制定计划来更加充分的利用时间、空间、精力等。‎ ‎2) have to do with这个结构表示“与……相关；与……有关联或有关系”。例如：What does this problem have to do with what we’re learning today? ‎ 这道题跟我们今天所学的内容有什么关系？‎ ‎2. Sometimes the resolutions may be too difficult to keep.‎ 有时这些决定可能会太难而无法实现。‎ 此处情态动词may表示推测，相当于汉语的“可能；或许；大概”之意。又如：You may be right this time, but I’m not sure. 这一次你或许是对的，但我无法确定。‎ ‎2) 英语中too…to…是一种固定结构，表示“太……而不能够……”。又如：‎ The kid is too young to play this game. ‎ 这孩子太小，不能玩这个游戏。‎ ‎3) 本句中的动词keep意为“履行（诺言等）；遵守（惯例等）”，这是keep的常见用法之一。类似的句子还有：‎ People hardly ever keep them! ‎ 人们很少履行它们（指计划）。 ‎ 在这一语义下，常见的表示还有keep a promise(信守诺言)，keep one’s word(‎ 遵守承诺；说话算数)等。如：‎ We always keep our word. ‎ 我们说话是算数的。‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. 课后阅读短文，试着复述课文，总结课文出现的重难点词组及表达方式。‎ ‎2. 完成2e的任务；用这些词组来造句。 ‎ 教学反思：‎ Section B2 3a-Self check 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 复习一般将来时态的构成。掌握生词own, personal, relationship ‎ ‎2) 能够综合运用一般将来时态及所给的提示词来完成阅读填空的任务。‎ ‎3) 能够综合运用所学的知识来学习写作自己的新年决心。 ‎ ‎4）通过完成Self check的中练习题来全面复习一般将来时态的用法。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 每个人都有自己的梦想和对未来的打算，对于将来想要从事的职业也充满了憧憬。 人们以常谈论他们的设想，因此，应通过学习这单元的内容来激发学生们的学习主动性和学习兴趣，使他们更加有理想，并为实现自己的理想而不断努力。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 能够综合运用一般将来时态及所给的提示词来完成阅读填空的任务。‎ ‎2）能够综合运用所学的知识来学习写作自己的新年决心。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 能够综合运用所学的知识来学习写作自己的新年决心。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions. ‎ ‎2. Fill in the blanks of the main idea of the passage in 2b: (On the big screen)‎ ‎1. A resolution is a kind of p ________. We usually make resolutions at the b_______ of the year. We hope to i_______ our lives. ‎ ‎2. Some resolutions are about p_______ health. Many resolutions have to do with self-improvement. Some resolutions have to do with better planning, like making a w_______ plan for s___________. ‎ ‎3. Review the phrases. And make a sentence with it. ‎ ‎1) 在……的开端_________________‎ ‎2) 写下；记录下 _________________‎ ‎3) 关于；与有关系 _________________‎ ‎4) 学着做；开始 做___________________‎ ‎5) 有相同之处 ________________‎ ‎6) 太……而不能 ________________‎ ‎7) 向某人许诺 _____________‎ ‎8) 提高某人的生活___________ ‎ Ⅱ. Lead-in ‎ ‎1. Ask Ss about their New Year’s Resolutions: ‎ ‎ e.g. ‎ T: What’s your New Year’s Resolutions, Mary?‎ Mary: I want to take up volleyball next term. ‎ T: Great! What about you, Jack?‎ Jack：I’m going to make a soccer team. And we’re going to practice soccer every weekend. ‎ ‎…‎ ‎2. Present some new words on the big screen. Explain them to the Ss. Ss try to remember them. ‎ ‎ own, personal, relationship ‎ Ⅲ. Reading ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to work on 3b. Complete the first two paragraphs about resolutions with the words in the box. ‎ ‎2. 写作指导：‎ 首先，阅读方框中的词汇，掌握其意思，然后阅读短文，整体把握短文大意。 ‎ 其次，分析有空格的每个句子，根据上下文意及句子结构确定空格处应填哪一个词。 ‎ 最后，将单词填在空格上，并完整的读一遍短文，看是否通顺。‎ ‎3. Ss try to read the article and try to fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the Ss.‎ Ⅳ. Writing ‎ Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. Read the headings below. Think about your own resolutions. ‎ ‎2. Write your own resolutions under the following heading. ‎ ‎ (If you don’t have any ideas, you may go through the passage in 2b. )‎ ‎3. Ss try to think about their own resolutions and try to write them down. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with your partners. ‎ Work on 3c: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to use the notes in 3b and write three more paragraphs about their resolutions. ‎ ‎ In each paragraph, write what they are going to do and why. ‎ ‎2. 写作指导： ‎ Ø ‎ 本文为写自己决心、及做法，并说明原因。 ‎ Ø ‎ 因此，时态应用一般将来时态； ‎ Ø ‎ 应先根据3b的想法，说明自己的决心；然后，具体说一下自己打算怎样去实现这个理由；最后，再简单地说一些做此事的原因。 ‎ Ø ‎ 应注意一般将来时态的结构（be going to），不要丢掉be ‎ 动词am。这是同学们最易出现的错误。 ‎ ‎3. 学生们根据写作提示，及上面表格中的提示来写作这篇文章。‎ ‎4. Let some Ss read their passage to the class. ‎ Ⅴ. Discussing ‎ ‎1. Discuss the environment in your city. Are the street and the park clean? Is the air clean? Is it quiet or noisy? ‎ ‎2. Tell Ss: It’s everyone’s duty to keep our city clean and tidy. Can you think of a plan to make it cleaner and greener? ‎ ‎3. Give Ss some examples: ‎ Ø We’re going to make the subway better. Then people don’t have to drive to work. ‎ Ø We’re going to plant more trees and flowers in the park and street. ‎ Ø ‎…‎ ‎4. Ss try to write about their own plans on a piece of paper. ‎ ‎5. Let some Ss read out their plans. See who has a best one. ‎ Ⅵ. Self check ‎ Work on Self check 1: ‎ ‎1. Match the jobs with the school subjects. ‎ ‎2. Check the answers. Then let some Ss make some sentences with them. e.g. ‎ ‎ I want to be a computer programmer. I’m going to study computer science. ‎ ‎3. 指导： 复习运用句型结构：I want to be…, I’m going to … ‎ ‎4. 学生自主写句子，然后相互检查答案。‎ Work on Self check 2 ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to read the conversation and fill in the blanks with the right words. ‎ ‎2. Ss work by themselves. ‎ ‎3. Check the answers and explain some main points. e.g. ‎ 第三行：How; going; 分析句子结构，主、谓、宾语都有，可知应缺少状语成分；句意：你打算如何做？‎ ‎3. 学生们分角色表演这个对话。‎ Work on Self check 3‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to make their own plans using the phrases below. ‎ ‎2. Ss work with their partners. Write down their own plans. ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss read their plans. Correct any mistakes. ‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. Review Section B. ‎ ‎2. Interview five of your friends. Ask them what they’re going to do next weekend. Then write a report.‎ ‎ ‎ 板书设计：‎ Section B2 3a-Self check ‎3a： are; help; make; take; is; learn; listen ‎ ‎3c: one possible version: ‎ ‎ The second resolution is about improving my physical health. I’m going to get more exercise and eat more vegetables. (Because my parents say I’m kind of thin.) The third resolution is about improving my relationships with my family and friends. I’m going to help mom cook meal and do the dishes. I’m going to play games with my friends. (Because we can understand each other well through games. ) ‎ Self check 2: want; to be; How, going; going; Where; going; going; to be; going Unit 7 Will people have robots?‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词： paper, pollution, prediction, future, pollute, environment, planet, earth, plant, part, play a part ‎ ‎2) 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① What will the future be like? ‎ Cities will be more polluted. And there will be fewer trees. ‎ ‎② Will people use money in 100 years? ‎ ‎③ Will there be world peace? ‎ ‎④ Kids will study at home on computers. ‎ ‎⑤ They won’t go to school. ‎ ‎2) 能了解以下语法：‎ ‎ will + 动词原形 来表达一般将来时态。‎ ‎3） 学会表达自己对未来的看法；学会谈论自己未来的打算。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 通过引导学生展望未来，及对未来生活的设计，来达到前景教育的目的，同时也通过对前景的设想，让学生在潜移默化中反省自己的现状，使之对目前的学习、生活习惯作适当的调整，并不断的改善自己的现状，使学生的理想观和价值观更为科学，更具发展价值。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握一般将来时态的意义和结构。‎ ‎2) 掌握There be句型的一般将来时态的结构。 ‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 掌握more/fewer；more/less的用法。‎ 情态动词will + 动词原形来表达一般将来时态。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Lead-in ‎ ‎1. 在大屏幕上向学生展示一些机器人的图片，让学生们说出谈论自己的未来的工作，对工作的打算等：What do you want to be when you grow up? ‎ Ss: I want to be a scientist. ‎ T: How are you going to do that? ‎ Ss: I’m going to study science hard.‎ ‎….‎ ‎2. 学生们根据图片来引导出机器人这一话题。 ‎ Ⅱ. Presentation ‎1. 引导学生们看大屏幕上的图片，根据图示来理解will来表达一般将来时态。‎ ‎ 用一句话来让学生们明白一般将来时态：‎ ‎ I’m thirteen years old now. And I will be fifteen years old in two years. ‎ 现在我十三岁，两年后我将是十五岁。 ‎ ‎2. 让学生们看大屏幕上图片，并让学生学习will + 动词原形及won’t + 动词原形的用法。通过例句让学生们理解。 ‎ Ⅲ. Game ‎ ‎1. How will your future be like in 100 years? Can you see anything about it? ‎ ‎2. Ss discuss and think about their future. Then say some sentences. ‎ e.g. People will have robots at their home.‎ ‎ There will be only one country. ‎ ‎ People won’t use money in the future. ‎ ‎…‎ ‎(同学们如果自己想象不出来，可以根据大屏幕的图片提示来说句子。) ‎ ‎4. How will the world be different 100 years from now? Read the predictions in 1a. Check A for agree or D for disagree. ‎ Ss read the sentences discuss them and check A or D . ‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ ‎1. T: Now listen to the recording and circle the predictions you hear in 1a. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and circle the predictions. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Ⅴ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the first conversation in 1c after the teacher. ‎ ‎2. Then let Ss ask and answer questions about the predictions in 1a. Then make their own conversation. ‎ 注意：如果将陈述句变为一般疑问句，应将情态动词will 提前到主语前便可。 ‎ ‎3. Let some pairs ask and answer about their conversations. ‎ Ⅵ. Listening ‎ Work on 2a: ‎ ‎1. Read the sentences in 2a. Tell Ss they will listen to some sentences. They should listen and circle the words in the bracket. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and circle the words. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers. ‎ Work on 2b: ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the sentences below. Explain some main sentences for the Ss. Make sure they know what to do. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to check the predictions they hear. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers. ‎ Ⅶ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss ask and answer questions about the predictions in 2a and 2b. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read conversation in 2c first after the teacher. ‎ ‎3. Ss talk about the predictions with the information in 2a and 2b. ‎ ‎4. Ask some pairs to act their conversations. ‎ Ⅷ. Role-play ‎ ‎ 1. Read the conversations and answer the questions: ‎ ‎1) What will the future be like in the book? ‎ ‎ 2) What can people do?‎ ‎2. Explain some new words and main points in the conversation. ‎ ‎ be in great danger, move to other planets; play a part;‎ ‎3. Read the conversation after the teacher. ‎ ‎4. Practice the conversation with their partner. Then let some pairs to act out the conversation. ‎ Homework: ‎ ‎1. Recite the conversation in 2d after school. ‎ ‎2. 用下列词组来造句： ‎ ‎(1) be more crowded and polluted (2) be fewer trees ‎(3) be in great danger (4) on the earth ‎ ‎(5) less water (6) playa part ‎ 板书设计：‎ Section A1 (1a-2d)‎ 单词： paper, pollution, prediction, future, pollute, environment, planet, earth, plant, part, play a part ‎ 句型：‎ ‎① What will the future be like? Cities will be more polluted. And there will be fewer trees. ‎ ‎② Will people use money in 100 years? ‎ ‎③ Will there be world peace? ‎ ‎④ Kids will study at home on computers. ‎ ‎⑤ They won’t go to school. ‎ Section A2 (Grammar Focus-3c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇：peace, sea, sky ‎ ‎2) 进行一步复习巩固运用Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。‎ ‎3) 进一步学习运用所学的知识来陈述自己对将来的看法；学会谈论自己的对将来的预言。‎ ‎4) 掌握情态动词will来表达一般将来时态这一语法知识； ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 通过引导学生展望未来，及对未来生活的设计，来达到前景教育的目的，同时也通过对前景的设想，让学生在潜移默化中反省自己的现状，使之对目前的学习、生活习惯作适当的调整，并不断的改善自己的现状，使学生的理想观和价值观更为科学，更具发展价值。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 进一步学习运用所学的知识来陈述自己对将来的看法；学会谈论自己的对将来的预言。‎ ‎2) 掌握情态动词will来表达一般将来时态这一语法知识；并运用所学的知识来表达将来的活动。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 掌握情态动词will来表达一般将来时态这一语法知识；‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎ ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words learned in the last class. ‎ ‎2. Ask some Ss to give some predictions. ‎ ‎ T: What’s your prediction about the future? ‎ ‎ S1: There will be less free time.‎ ‎ S2：There will be more pollution. ‎ ‎3. Role-play the conversation in 2d. ‎ Ⅱ. Grammar Focus. ‎ ‎1. 学生阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。 ‎ ‎① 将来会是什么样子？ ‎ ‎ ② What ______the ____ be _____?‎ 城市污染将会更多。且树木将会更少。 ‎ ‎ Cities ____ ___ _____ polluted. And there ____ _____ _______.‎ ‎③ 一百年后，人们会使用钱币吗？ ‎ ‎____ people ____ money ___ 100 years? ‎ ‎④ 不会的。一切东西将会免费。 ‎ ‎ No, they ______. Everything ____ ___ _____.‎ ‎ ⑤ 世界将会有和平吗？ ‎ ‎ ______ ____ _____ world peace?‎ ‎⑥ 是的，我希望如此。 ‎ ‎ Yes, I ______ _____. ‎ ‎⑦ 孩子们将会在家中在电脑上学习。 ‎ ‎ Kids _____ ______ at home _____ _______. ‎ ‎⑧ 他们将不会去上学？ ‎ ‎ They ______ _______ to school. ‎ ‎2. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。 ‎ ‎3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。‎ Ⅲ. Try to Find ‎ 一、一般将来时态 ‎ 肯定式：主语+ will + 动词原形 ‎ Kids will study at home on computers.‎ ‎ 孩子们将会在家里的电脑上学习。 ‎ 否定式：主语 + won’t + 动词原形 ‎ People won’t use money in 100 years.‎ 一百年后人们将不再使用钱币。 ‎ 一般疑问句式： ‎ Will + 主语 + 其他？ ‎ 肯定回答：Yes , 主语 + will. ‎ 否定回答： No, 主语 + won’t. ‎ 人们将会有更多的空闲时间吗？ ‎ 是的，会。/ 不，不会。 ‎ Will people have more free time? ‎ Yes, they will. /No, they won’t. ‎ 二、There be 句型： ‎ ‎1. there be 句型表示客观存在的“有”（所有者不明确）。例如： ‎ 有湖边有很多树。 ‎ ‎_____ _______ many trees near the lake. ‎ be 动词有 ______ _______ 两种形式。 ‎ ‎ 2. be 动词形式的确定要根据其后面的名词 单复数形式来确定。 ‎ ‎ _____ _____ an apple tree in the park.‎ ‎ _____ ______ many people in the park today. ‎ ‎3. There be 句型的一般将来时结构：‎ 肯定式：There + ________ + 其他 否定式： There + ___________ + 其他 一般疑问句：____________ + be + 其他?‎ ‎ 答语： Yes, there will. / No, there won’t. ‎ 三、‎ 可数名词 ‎ ‎1. more + ‎ ‎ 不可数名词 ‎ ‎2. less + 不可数名词 ‎3. fewer + 可数名词 ‎ Ⅳ. Practice ‎ Work on 3a: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to read the conversation in 3a and try to fill in the blanks with more/ less or fewer. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：应通读整个对话，掌握对话大意；‎ 然后，根据空格后的名词是可数名词还是不可数名词来确定是用more, less ‎ 还是fewer。‎ 注意，有些名词前有形容词来修饰。 ‎ ‎3. 最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。‎ ‎4. 学生们阅读这些句子并试着记住这些句子。‎ Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. 让学生们阅读句子的开头，明白每个句子的意思。‎ ‎2. 让学生们思考一下针对这一情况，在将来会发生什么样的情况。‎ ‎3. 让学生们互相检查自己所写的句子，发现并改正错误。 ‎ ‎4. 让部分学生说一说自己所写的句子。大家一起改正句子中的错误。 ‎ Ⅴ. Group work ‎ ‎1. 小组中的同学们对未来的城市进行讨论。‎ ‎2. 每个成员发表自己的想法，小组长进行记录，并进行汇总。‎ ‎3. 最后，同学们根据小组 成员的想法，然后，展开想象，试着每名同学们画一幅未来城市的画。‎ ‎4. 最后，比较一下每个小组的画，看哪个小组画得较好。 ‎ ‎5. 试着对自己小组里的情况用英语做成一个报告。‎ Ⅵ. Exercises ‎ If time is enough, do some more exercises on big screen. ‎ ‎ 根据下列表格的内容完成后面的句子：‎ Garden City now In 100 years ‎600 houses ‎1000 houses A lot of pollution Almost no pollution Seven schools Two schools ‎2400 people ‎3500 people A lot of snow ‎ A little snow Six movie theaters ‎ Two movie theaters ‎ ‎ 根据上面的表格用more, less, fewer填空。 ‎ There will be __________ house There will be __________ pollution There will be __________ schools There will be _________ people There will be ___________ snow There will be ________ movie theaters Homework ‎ ‎1. 复习Grammar Focus 中的内容。‎ 展开你想象的翅膀，想一下20年后，你的生活将会怎么样？并写六个句子来描述一下。 ‎ In twenty years, …‎ Section B1 1a-2e ‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：apartment, rocket, space, space station, even, human, servant, dangerous, already, factory, simple, over and over again, believe, hundreds of, inside, disagree, shape, fall, fall down, look for, possible, impossible ‎ ‎2) 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① —Where do you live？ —I live in an apartment. ‎ ‎② There are already robots working in factories. ‎ ‎③ It’s easy for children to wake up and know where they are. ‎ ‎④ That may not seem possible now, but computers and rockets seemed impossible 100 years ago. ‎ ‎3) 能综合运用will表达一般将来时态。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 通过引导学生展望未来，及对未来生活的设计，来达到前景教育的目的，同时也通过对前景的设想，让学生在潜移默化中反省自己的现状，使之对目前的学习、生活习惯作适当的调整，并不断的改善自己的现状，使学生的理想观和价值观更为科学，更具发展价值。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及表达方式。 ‎ ‎2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。 ‎ ‎3） 阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点 ‎1. 听力训练 ‎ ‎2. 阅读2b部分的短文并完成相关要求。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎1. Daily greeting. ‎ ‎2. 复习情态动词will 构成的一般将来时态的构成。 ‎ ‎3. 复习more, fewer, less 后面所跟名词的情况。 ‎ ‎4. 让学生们谈谈自己所画的未来城市的前景情况。‎ Ⅱ. Lead in ‎ ‎1. Ask Ss some questions: ‎ T: What will do in the future? ‎ T: Where will you live? ‎ T: How will you go to work? ‎ Get some Ss think and answer the questions. ‎ ‎2. Present some new words on the big screen. e.g.‎ ‎ apartment, rocket, space, space station, human, servant, factory…‎ ‎3. Explain some main words to the Ss . Give some examples on the big screen. ‎ ‎ simple, over and over again, believe, hundreds of, disagree, shape, fall, fall down, look for, possible, impossible even, dangerous, already ‎ ‎4. Work on 1a. Write each word in the correct column below. ‎ Ⅲ. Discussion ‎ ‎1. Work with your partners. Think of other words and write them in the chart in 1a. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss discuss the words and write them in the chart. ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss read the words. ‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ Work on 1c: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to listen to Alexis and Joe’s conversation. and Number the pictures 1-3. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss. Ss just listen for the first time. Play the recording again and number the pictures. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording and check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Work on 1d: ‎ ‎1. T: Now please read the sentences in 1d. Tell Ss they'll listen to ‎ the tape again. Then try to fill in the blanks with the words in the chart. ‎ ‎ 听力指导： 通过事物读句子及空格中的单词，可以看出，本听力重点要求我们听清句子的时态，因此我们在听时应重点听句子的谓语动词，并明确其时态。如果不能快速写下来，可以先做标记，在听完后再写完整。‎ ‎2. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again and check the answers with the class. ‎ ‎4. Tell Ss one is Alexis and the other is Joe. Talk about Joe’s life now, 10 years ago and 10 years from now. ‎ Ⅴ. Discussion ‎ ‎1. Work in groups. Tell your partner what you know about robots. What do they look like and what can they do? ‎ ‎2. Ask some Ss describe the robots they know. ‎ Ⅵ. Reading ‎ ‎1. T: Are you interested in robots? Do you want to have a robot? ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read the passage quickly and complete sentences below about what robots can do now. ‎ ‎3. Ss read the passage quickly and complete the three sentences. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Ⅶ. Reading ‎ ‎1. T: Now let’s work on 2c. This time you should read the passage a little more carefully. Then write three sentences about what robots will be able to do in the future. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：明确我们这次阅读的任务，然后，带着这个任务再次认真阅读短文的内容，并在相关段落中认真查找未来机器人所能做的事情。 并写出正确的答案。‎ ‎3. Ss read carefully and try to write the three sentences. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the class. ‎ Ⅷ. Reading ‎ ‎1. T: Read the passage again. This time you should read the passage and fill in the blanks in this paragraph with words in the article. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：首先，阅读这个小短文，了解其大意；然后，在理解小短文意思的基础上，重点阅读有空格的句子，并在原文中找与之相关的段落或句子，并填写出正确的答案。 ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss talk about their answers. ‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. 课后阅读短文，试着复述课文，总结课文出现的重难点词组及表达方式。‎ ‎2. 完成2e中的任务，并将句子写在作业本。 ‎ 教学反思：‎ Section B2 3a-Self check ‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 掌握下列生词: probably, during, holiday, word ‎ ‎2) 复习用will表达一般将来时态的用法。结合机器人这一话题表达自己的想法。‎ ‎3） 能够综合运用所掌握的知识来描述自己未来生活的情况。‎ ‎3) 通过自己描述自己未来生活的情况来达到熟练运用所学知识的目的。 ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 通过引导学生展望未来，及对未来生活的设计，来达到前景教育的目的，同时也通过对前景的设想，让学生在潜移默化中反省自己的现状，使之对目前的学习、生活习惯作适当的调整，并不断的改善自己的现状，使学生的理想观和价值观更为科学，更具发展价值。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 能运用所学的知识及提示来阅读相关个人未来生活预测，并能完成相关任务。 ‎ ‎2）能运用所学的知识与句型表达方式来描绘一下自己未来的生活。‎ ‎3） 复习要单元所学的重点知识点，并完成相关复习任务。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 能运用所学的知识与句型表达方式来描绘一下自己未来的生活。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions. ‎ ‎2. Review the main phrases learned yesterday. ‎ ‎(1) 在工厂 __________ (2) 帮助做某事________‎ ‎(3) 感到乏味 _________________‎ ‎(4) 在将来 ______________‎ ‎(5) 试着做某事___________________‎ ‎(6) 能够 ________________‎ ‎(7) 倒塌 _______________‎ ‎(8) 似乎可能/不可能 _____________‎ ‎(9) 许多；大量__________‎ ‎3. Talking about the robots:‎ ‎ (1) What can a robot do now?‎ ‎ (2) What will the robots do in the future? ‎ Ⅱ. Lead in ‎ ‎1. Ask some Ss what their life will be in the future. ‎ T: What will you life be in the future?‎ S1: First, I will go to college. I will study computer science. Then I’ll work in Beijing. I will be a computer programmer in a famous company. Next, I will make a lot of money. I will have my own company like Bill Gates. I will buy a big house and live with my family in Beijing. ‎ S2: I will be an artist. First, I will study art at an art school. Then, I will move to Paris. I will find a part-time job there and save some money. At the same time, I will study French. Next, I will hold art exhibitions. I will become famous. Then I’ll have a lot of ‎ money. I will tour around the world then. ‎ Ⅲ. Reading ‎ ‎1. Read the article about Jill’s life in the future. Fill in the blanks with the words in the box. ‎ ‎2. 阅读指导：‎ 首先，阅读短文，整体把握短文大意。 ‎ 其次，分析有空格的每个句子，看空格处的意思，联系所给单词的意思，进行综合分析，确定空格处应填的单词。例如：第一空，由下文“在那座城市里有更多的工作”，可知本空填live“居住”一词。‎ 最后，再通读一遍短文，看是否通顺合理。 ‎ ‎3. Ss try to read the article and try to fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Ⅳ. Writing ‎ Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. Think about your life 20 years from now. Write down some notes in the chart below. ‎ You can add more items. ‎ ‎2. Give some examples to the Ss. ‎ ‎3. Ss try to think about their lives 20 years from now. Write notes for their own reviews. ‎ ‎4. Try to fill in the blanks. ‎ Work on 3c ‎ ‎1. Write about your life 20 years from now using the notes in 3b. ‎ ‎2. 写作指导： ‎ Ø ‎ 本文为写自己未来20年后的生活情况。 ‎ Ø ‎ 因此，时态应用一般将来时态（will + 动词原形）； ‎ Ø ‎ 首先，可根据在3b中的提示，介绍一下自己打算的工作、及生活的地点、自己的业余活动等情况。 ‎ Ø 然后再展开自己想象的翅膀，对自己的生活环境及其他方面大胆想象，并写出来。 ‎ Ø ‎ 最后，通读一遍短文，重点检查一下各句子的时态及语句是否通顺。 ‎ ‎3. 学生们根据写作提示，及上面表格中的提示来写作这篇文章。‎ ‎4. Let some Ss read their passage to the class. ‎ Ⅴ. Discussion ‎1. Discuss how a robot will help students with schoolwork in the future. Write down your group’s ideas and draw a picture of your robot. ‎ ‎2. Give Ss an example: ‎ ‎ I think students won’t need write words on the paper because robots will write down everything you think. ‎ ‎3. Ss discuss with their partners and try to draw the robots they think about. ‎ ‎4. At last, let some Ss talk about their robots and pictures of the robots. ‎ Ⅵ. Self check ‎ Work on Self check 1: ‎ ‎1. Put the words in the correct columns in the chart.‎ ‎2. Make sure Ss know what they should. ‎ ‎3. 引导学生们复习more/fewer/less 的用法： ‎ more后面可跟可数名词或不可数名词； ‎ fewer后面跟可数名词； ‎ less 后面跟不可数名词； ‎ ‎4. 学生将以上单词分类，并校对答案。‎ ‎5. 学生们可以试着多增加一些单词，并将它们填写在方框中。‎ Work on Self check 2 ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to read the conversation below. Then Fill in the blanks in the conversation. ‎ ‎2. Do the first one for the Ss as a model:‎ ‎ (1. be; like在本句中是介词，意为“像”，因此本句中缺少be动词，句中有情态动词will，故应用be动词的原形。) ‎ ‎3. Ss try to fill in the blanks with the right words. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the class. ‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. Review Section B. ‎ ‎2. 根据第4 部分中同学们对学习机器人的想象，来写一篇60字左右的小短文来描述一下你所想象的机器人的形状、大小及他在学习方面提供哪些帮助。‎ ‎ ‎ 板书设计：‎ Section B2 3a-Self check ‎3a： live; more; fewer; less; keep; wear; look; work, take ‎ ‎3c: one possible version: ‎ ‎ In 20 years, I think I’ll be a pilot. I’ll work in Beijing, because my parents work in Beijing. I want to live with them. I’ll live in a large apartment. As a pilot, I can have a few days off very month. I think I’ll keep some plants in my apartment. There’ll be a park near my home. I’ll take a walk after supper. I like chess, so I can also play chess with my friends in the park. ‎ Self check 1: more/fewer: job, people, robot， planet, car, city, building, tree ‎ ‎ more/less: pollution, fresh water, paper, clean air, free time, money Self check 2: 1. be; 2. like 3. will, will 4. will 5. there, be 6. will ‎ 教学反思：‎ Unit 8 How do you make a banana milk shake?‎ ‎ 主要教学思路：‎ some vegetables , meat , fruits and drinks.‎ food---making activities make other foods make banana milk shake ‎1.)turn on , cut up , pour , peel , put... in/into , drink,‎ ‎ 2.)bowl, shake , blender , yogurt , honey , ingredient , teaspoon, a cup of ,‎ 一、教材分析(Analyse the teaching material)‎ 本节课以制作香蕉奶昔为话题，主要谈论一些常见的家庭饮食方面的制作方法，通过丰富多彩的口语练习，掌握制作方法的同时，又在语言情境中，对一些动作加以区分和应用，熟练掌握这些动词 turn on , cut up , pour , peel , put into , drink,的表达方式和口语中的提问方式，同时还要学习掌握一些新名词，如：bowl， shake , blender , yogurt , ingredient , teaspoon, a cup of , honey ,‎ 二、    学生分析 ‎ 1) 知识基础：在七年级中已经有两个单元介绍了大量的食品单词，但本单元对部分的词汇以及制作过程的学习存在一定难度。‎ ‎ 2) 思维能力：学生有较强的记忆力和模仿能力，但还有待培养知识的扩展运用能力。‎ ‎ 3) 认知心理：学生有较强的求知欲和表现欲，但对于还存在自信不足或羞于表现的学生还要多加激励。‎ 三、    教学目标分析 ‎1）语言目标：掌握制作香蕉奶昔的过程 ‎ ‎2) 能力目标：‎ 听：能听懂制作香蕉奶昔的对话材料。‎ 说：能够描述制作香蕉奶昔的过程。‎ 读：能读懂介绍关于制作食谱的文章。‎ 写：能写出 Section A Part 1a-1c中的重点单词和重点句型，并能够为自己最喜欢的食物写食谱。‎ ‎ 3） 情感文化目标 ‎ （1）培养学生与人交往中具有的积极态度，（2）了解更多的关于制作香蕉奶昔的过程及配料。询问或描写一种食物的制作过程。（3）培养学生的概括与推理能力。（4）培养学生的跨学科学习能力。（5）培养学生的逻辑排序能力。‎ 四、    学习策略与思维技巧 ‎（1）作猜测；（2）按次序排列信息；（3）进行连续性的描述。（4）小组讨论。‎ 五、    课前准备 ‎ 阅读资料或社会调查，了解水果沙拉、奶昔、爆米花、三明治、北京烤鸭等食品的制作过程，准备一台果汁机和录音机。‎ 六、教学设计 Period One Ⅰ. Teaching contents ‎ Section A 1a ，1b ，1c Ⅱ. Teaching aims and demands ‎ ‎ Learn to describe a process of making a banana shake and follow the instructions.‎ Ⅲ. Teaching keys and difficult points.‎ ‎1.       Vocabulary: turn on, cut up, drink , peel , pour , put , blender , shake.‎ ‎2.       Target sentences: How do you make a banana milk shake? ‎ Peel the bananas; Cut up the bananas; Put the bananas and the ice-cream in the blender; Pour the milk into the blender; Turn on the blender； Drink the banana milk shake. ‎ Ⅳ. Teaching methods ‎ Watching, listening, writing methods; teamwork Ⅴ. Teaching aids ‎ a tape recorder; a projector Ⅵ. Teaching Procedures Step 1 Warming up / Revision ‎ Task 1 . Play a piece of music 《Food and drink》for students to listen and relax.‎ ‎ (This activity make students be interested in this English lesson) ‎ ‎ Task 2. Revise the names of some vegetables , meat , fruits and drinks.‎ Teacher: Do you like bananas? ‎ What kind of fruit do you like ? ‎ What’s your favorite food?/ vegetable?/ meat?/ fruit? ‎ vegetables ‎　 …　　　‎ fruits ‎ …‎ meat ‎ …‎ drinks ‎ …‎ Step 2. The key vocabulary ‎ ‎ Task 1. Discuss where people usually have meals and where the foods are from .‎ Teacher: 1) What do you have for your three meals?‎ ‎2) Where are the foods you have from? ‎ ‎(Lead to the key words and learn: home-cooking , take-away food )‎ Task 2. Discuss what food people make. ( T:Some people like to cool body by making food at home, especially in summer. The weather is too hot. So people make some food to cool body.)‎ ‎ Teacher: What do people like cooking in hot summer?‎ Students: banana milk shake , fruit salad , popcorn , sandwiches , pancake...‎ Task 3: Learn how to make a banana milk shake.‎ ‎·Look at 1 a ,teach the names of all items. Point to the pictures of the items and ask students to repeat.‎ ‎· Focus on the pictures . Ask the students to tell what they see in each picture. Describe each action and ask students to repeat the process of making.‎ ‎ Task 4. Ask students to write the names of the actions on the black lines. Then check the answers.‎ ‎ 1. Peel the bananas. ‎ ‎2. Cut up the bananas, ‎ ‎3. Put the bananas and ice-cream into the blender. ‎ ‎4. Pour the milk into the blender. ‎ ‎5. Turn on the blender. ‎ ‎6. Drink the shake.‎ ‎. Step 3. Listening ‎ Task 1. Point to the actions in the picture according to what the teacher read about the list of actions in 1b. Ask different students to look at the picture and tell what is happening.‎ Task 2. Play the recorder for the first time. The students only listen. Then listen again, number the instructions in the right order.‎ ‎3. Put the bananas and ice-cream into the blender. ‎ ‎ 1. Peel the bananas. ‎ ‎2. Cut up the bananas, ‎ ‎4. Pour the milk into the blender.‎ ‎ 6. Drink the shake.‎ ‎5. Turn on the blender. ‎ ‎(These activities let students know how to make a banana milk shake.)‎ Step 4. Practice using the target language ‎ Task 1. Teamwork . Ask six students to start their conversations like the sample conversation in 1b. Each student try to describe a process Task 2. Try to talk about how to make an apple milk shake in group. ‎ Task 3. Each student try to tell how to make an apple milk shake in a group.‎ ‎ (Let the students have spoken English and listening practice) ‎ Step 5 Related exercises in class ‎ I. Read and circle the corret words or phrases ‎1. First (peel/ pour) three bananas.‎ ‎2. Then (turn on / cup up) the apples.‎ ‎3. (Drink/ Put) the bananas in the blender.‎ ‎4. (Put/ Turn on ) the blender.‎ ‎5. (Pour / Peel/ drink) the milk shake. ‎ II. 单项选择 ‎6. Some factories pour the dirty water the river.‎ A. into B. in C. to ‎7. It’s dark in the classroom. the lights, Li Lei.‎ A. Turn on B. Turn off C. Open ‎8. Here are some apples and bananas, please .‎ A. give to Peter them B. give them to Peter C. give Peter to them ‎9. Mary is tea for her guests at home.‎ A. cooking B. making C. doing ‎10. — Can I help you, sir? — Yes, I’d like five and some peas.‎ A. potatoes B. meats C. bananas ‎ Step 6.Summary:What have we learned today? ‎ Task 1: Let some students think and tell the teaching keys ‎ and the target language Task 2: Show the teaching keys and the target language ‎ on the blackboard.‎ ‎(These activities teach to grasp the key vocabulary and learn the target language)‎ Step 7. Homework Task 1. Review the words.‎ Task 2. Try to make a banana mile shake or an apple milk shake for parents at home. ‎ Step 8. Blackboard Design ‎ Unit 7 How do you make a banana milk shake? ‎ the key vocabulary:‎ 1) You need to do these: peel,cut up,put...in/into ,pour...in/into,‎ turn on,drink ‎2) You need: yogurt,blender,shake ‎ ‎ the target language 1. Peel the bananas. ‎ 1. Cut up the bananas, ‎ 2. Put the bananas and yogurt in/into the blender. ‎ 3. Pour the milk in/into the blender. ‎ 4. Turn on the blender. ‎ 5. Drink the shake.‎ 教学反思 ：‎ Unit 9 Can you come to my party?‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：prepare, prepare for, exam, flu, available, another time, until, hang, hang out, catch ‎ ‎2) 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① — Can you come to my party on Saturday afternoon? ‎ ‎ — Sure, I’d love to. ‎ ‎② — Can you go to the movies on Saturday?‎ ‎ — I’m sorry, I’m not available. I have too much homework this weekend. ‎ ‎③ That’s too bad. Maybe another time. ‎ ‎④ Sure. Thanks for asking. ‎ ‎⑤ Sam isn’t leaving until next Wednesday. ‎ ‎2) 能了解以下语法：‎ ‎ 用情态动词can来表达邀请。‎ ‎3）学会表达邀请，学会对邀请进行恰当的答复或拒绝。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 学会人际交往的基本常识，学会有礼貌地邀请别人以及回答别人的邀请的方式。理解“义务”涵义，学会承担自己应尽的义务，能够在班级以及社会生活中担当一定的责任。理解人与人之间的真情，学会珍惜朋友之间、师生之间的友情。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 运用所学提出邀请，接受邀请和拒绝邀请。‎ ‎2) 正确使用can, might, must 等情态动词。 ‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ ‎1) 扎实掌握重点词汇和表示邀请的句型并能灵活运用。 ‎ ‎2) 通过听力练习和小组合作，理解并能提出邀请并作肯定回答。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Lead-in ‎ ‎1. 在大屏幕上向学生展示一张邀请函。‎ T: Hello, everyone! Yesterday I received an invitation letter from my dear friend; she invited me to go to her Halloween party. But I have something important to do. I’m studying for a test. I don’t know what to do. What should I say? Can you help me? … ‎ ‎2. Ss try to answer the questions. ‎ Ⅱ. Presentation ‎1. 引导学生们看大屏幕上邀请及两个答语。‎ ‎ Look at the expressions on the screen: “Sure, I’d love to.” “I’m sorry, I have to…”. Read the expressions to the class and the students repeat each one. ‎ Say, can you come to my party? Have the S1 give “yes answers” and S2 give “no answers” then plus a reason. Ask students to give their own reasons. If necessary, I can give a reason and have the students repeat it. ‎ ‎2. 用汉语向学生说明回答别人邀请时，所作的两种类型的答复。‎ Ⅲ. Game ‎ ‎1. 学生看大屏幕上的转盘，根据转盘所停止位置的词组来做邀请与应答的游戏。 ‎ ‎2. Make a model to the Ss: ‎ e.g. S1: Can you go shopping with me? ‎ ‎ S2: Sorry, I can’t. I have to prepare for the math exam. ‎ ‎ …‎ ‎3. Ss work in pairs and answer the questions. ‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ ‎1. T: Now listen to the recording and write the names next to the correct students in the picture. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the first time. Students only listen. Play the recording a second time. Write the name of each person next to his or her picture.‎ ‎3. Play the recording again. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Ⅴ. Group work ‎ ‎1. Help students form groups of four. Say, one of you is student A. Student A invites the other three students to your party. The other students say “yes” or “no”. Remember to give a reason.‎ ‎2. Have the students work in groups.‎ ‎3. Let some groups ask and answer about their conversations. ‎ Ⅵ. Listening ‎ Work on 2a: ‎ ‎1. Read the sentences in 2a. Tell Ss they will listen to some sentences. They should listen and circle the words “can” or “can’t” in the bracket. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and circle the words. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers. ‎ Work on 2b: ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the chart below. Tell Ss, this time they must write the reasons in the chart. Make sure they know what to do. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to write the reasons in the chart. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers. ‎ Ⅶ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to look at the reasons in the chart in 2b. Then write some more. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read conversations in 2c. ‎ ‎3. Ss practice the conversations using the reasons in the chart on the right. ‎ ‎4. Ask some pairs to act out their conversations. ‎ Ⅷ. Role-play ‎ ‎ 1. Read the conversations and answer the questions: ‎ ‎1) What did they do last fall? _____________________________________‎ ‎2) What does Nick have to do on Saturday? _____________________________‎ ‎3) When will they hang out? _____________________________‎ ‎2. Explain some new words and main points in the conversation. ‎ ‎ until, not…until, hang out, catch ‎ ‎3. Read the conversation after the teacher. ‎ ‎4. Practice the conversation with their partner. Then let some pairs act out the conversation. ‎ Homework: ‎ ‎1. Recite the conversation in 2d after school. ‎ ‎2. 假设你将于这个周末过生日，并开一个生日聚会，你约请朋友们参加你的聚会，但有几名同学因故不能来，请你将与他们的对话用英语编写出来。 ‎ ‎ ‎ 板书设计：‎ Section A 1(1a-2d)‎ 单词：prepare, prepare for, exam, flu, available, another time, until, hang, hang out, catch ‎ 句型：‎ ‎① — Can you come to my party on Saturday afternoon? ‎ ‎ — Sure, I’d love to. ‎ ‎② — Can you go to the movies on Saturday?‎ ‎ — I’m sorry, I’m not available. I have too much homework this weekend. ‎ ‎③ That’s too bad. Maybe another time. ‎ ‎④ Sure. Thanks for asking. ‎ ‎⑤ Sam isn’t leaving until next Wednesday.‎ 教学反思：‎ Section A 2 (Grammar Focus-3c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇：invite, accept, refuse ‎ ‎2）进行一步复习巩固运用Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。‎ ‎3）进一步学习运用所学的知识来表达邀请；学会如何回答别人对自己的邀请，以及学会如何有礼貌地拒绝他人的邀请，并陈述理由。‎ ‎4) 掌握情态动词can, must, have to, might的用法。 ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 学会人际交往的基本常识，学会有礼貌地邀请别人以及回答别人的邀请的方式。理解“义务”涵义，学会承担自己应尽的义务，能够在班级以及社会生活中担当一定的责任。理解人与人之间的真情，学会珍惜朋友之间、师生之间的友情。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 进一步学习运用所学的知识来表达邀请；学会有礼貌地答复他人对自己的邀请。‎ ‎2) 掌握情态动词can来表达邀请；运用情态动词have to, must, might等有礼貌地说明拒绝他人邀请的理由。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ ‎1) 能熟练进行邀请及应答。‎ ‎2) 运用情态动词have to, must, might等有礼貌地说明拒绝他人邀请的理由。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎ ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words learned in the last class. ‎ ‎2. Ask some Ss to invite some Ss to his/her party. The partners give some answers. ‎ ‎ S1: Can you come to my party?‎ ‎ S2：Sure. I’d love to. ‎ ‎ S3: Sorry, I can’t. I have to look after my sister at home.‎ ‎ S4: … ‎ ‎3. Role-play the conversation in 2d. ‎ Ⅱ. Grammar Focus. ‎ ‎1. 学生阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。 ‎ ‎① ─星期六你能来我的聚会吗？ ‎ ‎ ─____ you _____ to my party on Saturday?‎ ‎─当然，我乐意来。Sure. ____ _____ _____. ‎ ‎─对不起，我必须为数学考试而学习。 ‎ Sorry, I _____ _____ _____ a math test. ‎ ‎② ─ 明天晚上你能去看影剧院吗？ ‎ ‎ ─ _____ you ____ to the movie ___________ night? ‎ ‎ ─当然可以，听起来很棒。 ‎ ‎ ─ ______, that _______ ________.‎ ‎ ─ 恐怕不行，我得了流感。 ‎ ‎ ─ I’m ______ not. I have the ______. ‎ ‎③ ─ 他能去聚会吗？ ‎ ‎ ─ _____ he ______ to the party？ ‎ ‎ ─ 不能。他必须帮助他的父母亲。 ‎ ‎ ─ No, he ____. He _____ to help his parents. ‎ ‎ ④ ─ 她能参加棒球比赛吗？ ‎ ‎ ─ ____ she go to the baseball _______?‎ ‎ ─ 不，她没有空。她必须去看医生。 ‎ ‎ ─ No, she’s _______ ________. She ______ to ____ to the ______. ‎ ‎⑤ ─ 他们能去看电影吗？ ‎ ‎ ─ _____ they____ to the _______？ ‎ ‎ ─ 不，他们没有空。他们可能必须去见朋友。 ‎ ‎ ─ No, they’re not __________. They _____ ______ ____ meet their ________. ‎ ‎2. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。 ‎ ‎3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。‎ Ⅲ. Try to Find ‎ 如何表达邀请与答复别人的邀请： ‎ ‎1. can 用于表示 “____________”，如： ‎ ‎ 汤姆会骑马。 ___________________‎ ‎2. “Can you…?”表达 “______________”，‎ 答语：同意用____________________. ‎ 不同意用__________________________.‎ ‎ 如：恐怕不行，我要去探望我的姑姑。 ‎ ‎ ____________________________________‎ Ⅳ. Practice ‎ Work on 3a: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to read the conversation in 3a and try to complete the answers with might and one of the phrases in the box. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：‎ ‎ 首先，应明确练习的要求。本题要求同学们用情态动词might来委婉地表达自己在将来的某个时间可以有做的事情。‎ 然后，读空格中所给的词组，明确它们的意思。读每个小对话，根据上文语境结合所给的词组，选择一个恰当的事情来回答。‎ 注意，一定要用上情态动词might。 结构：might + 动词词组 ‎ ‎3. 最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。‎ ‎4. 学生们阅读这些对话，并与伙伴一起练习这组小对话。‎ Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. 告诉学生们本题的要求：根据括号中所给的提示词来补全问句，并做出恰当地答复。‎ ‎2. 让学生们重点看答复提示中所要求是“接受”的还是“拒绝”的，并做答复。如果是拒绝，还应根据括号中的提示词给出一个恰当的理由。‎ ‎3. 让学生们互相检查自己所写的小对话，发现并改正错误。 ‎ ‎4. 让部分学生与自己的伙伴说一说自己所写的小对话。大家一起改正句子中的错误。 ‎ Ⅴ. Group work ‎ ‎1. 小组中的同学们每个人都填写一张表格（见3c中表格）来明确自己近期要做的事情，选择一个恰当的时间来开一个聚会。‎ ‎2. 先由小组长根据自己的安排，邀请你小组里的成员去参加你的聚会，每个小组成员，根据自己表格上的安排来确定是否参加这个聚会。‎ ‎3. 然后，其他同学轮流根据自己的安排，邀请你的组里的成员去参加你的聚会，其他成员根据自己表格上的安排来确定是否参加这个聚会。‎ ‎4. 最后，看你们小组哪位同学能邀请到最多的同学参加自己的聚会。 ‎ Ⅵ. Exercise ‎ If time is enough, do some more exercises on big screen. ‎ 选择恰当的答案完成对话：‎ A: Hey, Bob. 1. ___________‎ B: I’m sorry, I can’t. I have to help my parents.‎ A: 2. ________. How about you, Ling Ling? Can you come to my party?‎ L: 3. _________‎ A: On Saturday afternoon.‎ L: Oh, no, I can’t. 4. ____________‎ A: That’s too bad. 5. _____________.‎ L: Sure. Thanks for asking.‎ A. That’s too bad. B. Can you come to my party? ‎ C. Are you going shopping with me?‎ D. Maybe another time. E. I have to study for a test. ‎ F. When is it? G. I’d love to.‎ ‎1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. _____ 5. _____‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. 复习Grammar Focus 中的内容。‎ ‎2. 你的朋友邀请你去看电影，请根据在3c中所填写的信息编写一个与你朋友的对话。 ‎ A: Can you go to the movie on Saturday evening? ‎ B: Sorry, I can’t. I have to… ‎ 板书设计 ‎ Section A 2Grammar Focus-3c ‎3a: 1. watch TV; 2. I might practice the violin. 3. I might finish it on the weekend. 4. I might go with my cousin. 5. I’m afraid not. I might visit my grandparents. ‎ ‎3b: 1. Can you play tennis with us? Sure. I’d love to. ‎ ‎2. Would you like to go to the movies?‎ ‎ I’m afraid I can’t. I might have to prepare for the math exam. ‎ ‎3. Can you hang out with us tonight? Sorry. I can’t. I must help my mom at home. ‎ ‎4. Would you like to come to my birthday party? Sure. I’d love to. ‎ 教学反思：‎ Section B 1 1a-2e ‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：the day before yesterday, the day a fter tomorrow, weekday, look after, invitation, reply, forward, delete, print, sad, goodbye, take a trip, glad, preparation, glue, without, surprised, look forward to ‎ ‎2) 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① — What’s today？ — It’s Monday. ‎ ‎② — Can you play tennis with me? — Sorry, I can’t. I … ‎ ‎③ I look forward to hearing from you all. ‎ ‎④ Bring Ms. Steen to the party without telling her so that she can be surprised. ‎ ‎3) 能综合运用can来表达邀请。‎ ‎4）通过阅读邀请函来掌握必要的信息。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 学会人际交往的基本常识，学会有礼貌地邀请别人以及回答别人的邀请的方式。理解“义务”涵义，学会承担自己应尽的义务，能够在班级以及社会生活中担当一定的责任。理解人与人之间的真情，学会珍惜朋友之间、师生之间的友情。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及表达方式。 ‎ ‎2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。 ‎ ‎3）阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点 ‎1. 听力训练 ‎ ‎2. 阅读2b部分的短文并完成相关要求。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎ ‎1. Daily greeting. ‎ ‎2. 复习表达请求与应答请求。 ‎ ‎3. 复习一些常用的委婉地表达拒绝的方式。 ‎ ‎4. 让学生们谈谈自己未来两天（tomorrow及the day after tomorrow ‎ ）的活动打算。‎ Ⅱ. Lead-in ‎ ‎1. Ask Ss some questions: ‎ T: What day is today/tomorrow/the day after tomorrow? ‎ S: It’s Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday. ‎ ‎2. Then sing a song like the song of ABC.‎ Sunday/Monday /Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/Saturday/ ‎ ‎3. T: What was/is the date yesterday/the day before yesterday/ today/tomorrow/the day after tomorrow? ‎ S: 13th/14th/15th…. Let the students ask these questions one by one. ‎ Explain the new sentence: ‎ ‎ “What’s today/ tomorrow/the day after tomorrow?” ‎ ‎“It’s Monday./Tuesday./Wednesday.” ‎ ‎4. Show the days of the week in a large monthly calendar.‎ Point out the days of the week at the top of the calendar and ask a student to read these words aloud. ‎ Ask a student to point out today’s date, tomorrow’s date, the day after tomorrow’s date and yesterday’s date. Complete activity 1a, check the answers. ‎ Ask students to write the words today, tomorrow, yesterday and the day after tomorrow in the correct spaces on the calendars in their books. ‎ Ⅲ. Discussion ‎ ‎1. Work with your partners. Look at the chart in 1a. Then ask and answer with a partner. ‎ ‎ S1: What’s today? ‎ S2: It’s Monday, the 14th. ‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ Work on 1c: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to listen to Vince and Andy’s conversation. Then circle Yes or No. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss. Ss just listen for the first time. Play the recording again and circle. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording and check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Work on 1d: ‎ ‎1. T: Now please read Vince’s activities in 1d. Tell Ss they'll listen to the tape again. Then try to match Vince’s activities with the days in 1d. ‎ ‎ 听力指导： 通过事先读表格中的内容，可以看出，本听力重点要求我们听清每个活动的时间安排，因此我们在听时应重点听句子中的活动及其时间。并将时间与活动内容相连。‎ ‎2. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to match Vince’s activities with the days. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again and check the answers with the class. ‎ Ⅴ. Pair work ‎ Work on 2a:　‎ ‎1. Work in pairs. One is Andy and the other is Vince. Andy, invite Vince to play tennis. ‎ ‎2. Ask some pairs to read the conversation first. ‎ ‎3. Ask Ss to practice the conversations in pairs. ‎ ‎4. Ask some pairs act out their conversation. ‎ Work on 2b:‎ Make a list of kinds of parties people have.‎ Ss discuss the parties they know. And write them down on their books. ‎ Ⅵ. Reading ‎ ‎1. T: Did you have a surprise party for sb.? Who is it? Why do you have a party for him/her? ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read the passage quickly. Why did the people write them? Match the reason with each message below. ‎ ‎3. Ss read the passage quickly and match the reasons with each message. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Ⅶ. Reading ‎ ‎1. T: Now let’s work on 2c. This time you should read the passage a little more carefully. Then answer the questions. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：首先，阅读试题的内容，明确问题的意思，然后，带着这五个问题再次认真阅读短文的内容，并在相关段落中认真查找相关问题的答案。根据相关提示完成问题。‎ ‎3. Ss read carefully and try to answer the questions. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the class. ‎ Ⅷ. Reading ‎ Work on 2d. ‎ ‎1. T: Now let’s work on 2d. Nowadays, it’s very popular to have a house warming party when someone moves into his/her new house. The passage below is a invitation of a housewarming party. Read the invitation and complete the blanks with the words and phrases from the message on Page 69. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：‎ 首先，通读全文可知，短文是邀请朋友来参加聚会。 通读本段文字，掌握大意。重点把握有空格句子的意思，分析空格处的意思。 ‎ 然后，根据记忆用2b短文中的词汇来填空，补全这篇短文。 ‎ ‎ 最后，再阅读一遍短文，并检查所填内容的正确性。‎ ‎3. Let some Ss write their answers on the blackboard. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Work on 2e: ‎ ‎1. T: Imagine one of your favorite teachers is leaving. Plan a party ‎ for him/her. Answer the questions with a partner. ‎ ‎2. Ss discuss the questions with a partner. Then answer the questions. ‎ ‎3. Let some pairs answer the questions. ‎ ‎4. Correct the mistakes they made. ‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. 课后阅读短文，试着复述课文，总结课文出现的重难点词组及表达方式。‎ ‎2. 完成2e中的任务，并将问答句写在作业本上。 ‎ 教学反思：‎ Section B 2 3a-Self Check ‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 掌握下列生词: daytime, concert, headmaster, event, guest, calendar ‎ ‎2) 复习邀请信的表达方式，阅读相关邀请信并能获得相关信息，回答相关问题。‎ ‎3）能够综合运用所掌握的知识并根据相关提示来完成写一个简单的邀请信的任务。‎ ‎4) 通过写一个邀请信及答复伙伴的邀请信，达到综合运用所学知识的目的。 ‎ ‎5）复习本单元所学的重难点内容，及时巩固提高。 ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 学会人际交往的基本常识，学会有礼貌地邀请别人以及回答别人的邀请的方式。理解“义务”涵义，学会承担自己应尽的义务，能够在班级以及社会生活中担当一定的责任。理解人与人之间的真情，学会珍惜朋友之间、师生之间的友情。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 复习邀请信的表达方式，阅读相关邀请信并能获得相关信息，回答相关问题。‎ ‎2）能够综合运用所掌握的知识并根据相关提示来完成写一个简单的邀请信的任务。‎ ‎3）复习本单元所学的重点知识点，并完成相关复习任务。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 通过写一个邀请信及答复伙伴的邀请信，达到综合运用所学知识的目的。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions. ‎ ‎2. Review the main phrases learned yesterday. ‎ ‎(1) 将……带到…… ‎ ‎(2) 去旅行 ‎ ‎(3) 想起 ‎ ‎(4)（在）不做某事（的情况下）‎ ‎(5) 以便于；以至于 ‎ ‎(6) 期望；盼望 ‎ ‎(7) 一个令人吃惊的聚会 ‎ ‎(8) 收到某人的信 ‎ ‎3. Talk about David’s party and complete the blanks in the big screen. ‎ ‎ (短文内容见大屏幕)‎ Ⅱ. Lead-in ‎ ‎1. Ask Ss what an opening party is. And ask them if they have come to an opening party. ‎ S1: I know. When a building is put into use, people often have a ceremony to celebrate it. It’s an opening. Last year, our new school is put into use. We had a great opening. ‎ Ⅲ. Reading ‎ ‎1. T: Now let’s work on 3a: ‎ A new school library is put into use. They’ll have a great opening. The headmaster writes many invitations to the parents of their school. Now read the invitations below and answer the questions. ‎ ‎2. 阅读指导：‎ 首先，快速阅读短文，整体把握短文大意。 ‎ 其次，阅读后面的七个问题，明确问题的意思。带着这七个问题再去仔细阅读邀请信，在短文的相关位置找到这些问题的答案依据，并写出正确的答案。‎ 最后，再通读一遍短文，结合短文内容看所回答的问题有无错误或不周全的地方。 ‎ ‎3. Ss try to read the article and try to fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Ⅳ. Writing ‎ Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. Think about a party or any other event you know. Write an invitation to your friends to come to your party or event. ‎ ‎2. Let some Ss read the information in the chart. ‎ ‎3. Ss try to think about their parities or events. Write an invitation using the information in the chart. ‎ ‎4. Read their invitations and check if there are mistakes. ‎ ‎5. Exchange your invitations with a partner. Then write a reply to his or her invitation. ‎ ‎ If you can’t come to his/her invitation, you should write some proper reasons. ‎ ‎6. Ss try to write down their invitations. ‎ ‎7. Let some Ss read their passage to the class. ‎ Ⅴ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Read the calendar in 4. Make sure Ss know the activities in each day. ‎ ‎2. Tell Ss how to do it. Sa, look at your calendar on the right. Sb, look at yours on Page 81. Find a time you can both go shopping. ‎ ‎3. Make a model to the Ss: ‎ Sa: Can you go shopping with me next week?‎ Sb: Sure. I’d love to. When?‎ Sa: Well, what are you going to do on Monday evening?‎ Sb: I must study for the English test. What about Tuesday evening. ‎ ‎4. Ss ask and answer the activities they will in each day. Then make a decision when to go shopping together. ‎ ‎5. At last, let some Ss ask and answer questions. ‎ Ⅵ. Self Check ‎ Work on Self Check 1: ‎ ‎1. Fill in the blanks in the conversation. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read the conversation first and try fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎3. 引导学生们复习如何写邀请信及如何答复邀请。‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ ‎5. Explain how to do it. ‎ e.g. 1. Can; 2. on; 句意“你好，彼特。你在周末能来参加我的聚会吗？” 第一空用情态动词can表达请求；第二空后有时间the weekend,故用介词on来表示这一具体时间。 ‎ 其他类似。 ‎ Work on Self check 2 ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss how to do this task. ‎ ‎ T: You get these invitations but you can’t go. Write a refusal and a reason. ‎ ‎2. Do the first one for the Ss as a model:‎ ‎ (1. I’m afraid I can’t. I have to prepare for the math exam.) ‎ ‎3. Ss try to complete the conversations. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the class. ‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. Review Section B. ‎ ‎2.根据第4 部分中表格中的内容，编写一个邀请你的朋友参加你的一个聚会的对话。‎ ‎ 板书设计：‎ Section B 2 3a-Self Check ‎3a： ‎ ‎1. Larry Smith. ‎ ‎2. It’s for the opening of the new library at No. 9 High School. ‎ ‎3. It will be on the morning of Wednesday, January 8th at 9:00. ‎ ‎4. They can enjoy the school concert. ‎ ‎5. They should dress neatly. ‎ ‎6. Yes. They should bring one book as a gift for the new library. ‎ ‎7. They should write to this invitation by Friday. ‎ ‎3c: one possible version: （见大屏幕）‎ Self check 1: Can; on; I’d; you; can’t; have; Can; might; I’ll ‎ Self check 2: ‎ ‎1) I’m afraid I can’t. I have to prepare for the math exam.‎ ‎2) Sorry, I can’t. I have to look after my sister at home.‎ ‎3) I’d love to. But I’m not available. I’ll visit my grandparents with my family.‎ ‎4) I’m afraid not. I have to go to the dentist. ‎ ‎ 教学反思：‎ Unit 10 If you go to the party, you’ll have a great time!‎ Section A1 (1a-2d)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词： meeting, video, organize, potato chips, chocolate, upset, taxi, advice 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① ─I think I’ll go to the party with Karen and Anna. ‎ ‎ ─If you go to the party, you’ll have a great time!‎ ‎② ─What will happen if they have the party today? ‎ ‎ ─Half the class won’t come. ‎ ‎2) 能了解以下语法：‎ ‎ 掌握含if条件状语从句的主从复合句的用法。 ‎ ‎3) 能用if 引导的条件状语从句作出假设，用will谈论结果。 ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标： ‎ 学习因果关系的表达和做出合理的建议。谈论自己的感受，同时使学生在英语交流中注意并观察他人的情感。由于本单元话题贴近学生生活，符合他们热爱休闲的心理，可以提高他们学习英语的兴趣，积极参与英语实践活动。‎ ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点、难点：‎ ‎（1）重点句型：—I think I’m going to go to the party with Karen and Ann.‎ ‎—If you do, you’ll have a great time.‎ ‎（2）正确使用if 引导的条件状语从句 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Lead-in ‎ Ask some questions. ‎ T: If you are happy, what will you do? ‎ S: If I am happy, I will smile. ‎ T: If you become sad, what will you do? ‎ S: If I become sad, I will cry. ‎ T: What will happen if you are going to do too much work? ‎ S: If I am going to do too much work, I will get tired. ‎ Ⅱ. Presentation ‎1．Show some pictures to present new structure:‎ If it is sunny this Sunday, I’ll go fishing.‎ Ask several students:‎ What will you do if it is sunny this Sunday?‎ If I have much money, I will buy a big house.‎ What will you do if you have much money?‎ Practice with the students:‎ ‎2．Show some pictures to present the following:‎ ‎(1) I think I’m going to stay at home.‎ If you do, you’ll be bored.‎ ‎(2) I think I’m going to work until night.‎ If you do, you’ll be tired. ‎ ‎(3) I think I’m going to exercise.‎ If you do, you’ll be healthy.‎ ‎(4) If you go to the party, you’ll have a great time.‎ ‎(5) If you watch TV every night, your parents will be mad at you.‎ ‎3. Work on 1a, match the statements with the pictures [a-d].‎ Ⅲ. Game ‎ ‎1. Show some pictures in the big screen. Let Ss ask and answer like this: ‎ A: What are you going to do …?‎ B: I think I’m going to….‎ A: If you do, you’ll be … ‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ Work on 1c: ‎ ‎1. Point out the statements and the responses in activity 1a. Tell Ss to listen to the recordings and complete the responses. ‎ ‎ 2. Play the recording for the first time, Ss only listen. ‎ ‎ 3. Play the recording again the try to complete the responses. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers. ‎ Ⅴ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the model with a partner. ‎ ‎2. Look at the pictures above. Use the information in 1b. Ask and answer with a partner. ‎ ‎3. Let some pairs ask and answer about the pictures. ‎ Ⅵ. Listening ‎ Work on 2a: ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the two sentences below. Make sure they know what to do. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and circle the right answers. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers.‎ Work on 2b: ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the phrases and questions below. Tell Ss that they should answer the questions with the proper phrases. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to write the correct answers. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers. ‎ Ⅶ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss role-play a conversation between Nelly and Mark. ‎ ‎2. Give a model to the Ss. ‎ ‎3. Ss work in pairs and practice the conversation. ‎ ‎4. Ask some pairs to act out their conversations. ‎ Ⅷ. Role-play ‎ ‎ 1. Read the conversations and answer the questions below. ‎ ‎ (1) What will happen if we ask people to bring food? ‎ ‎___________________________________‎ ‎(2) What will happen if we give people some small gifts if they win? ‎ ‎____________________________________ ‎ ‎2. Explain some new words and main points in the conversation. ‎ ‎3. Let Ss read the conversation after the teacher. ‎ ‎4. Practice the conversation with their partner. Then let some pairs to act out the conversation. ‎ Homework: ‎ ‎1. Recite the conversation in 2d after school. ‎ ‎2. 用括号里所给词的适当形式补全句子。‎ ‎(1) If she stops smoking, _______________. (be more healthy)‎ ‎(2) If it rains, ____________. (stay at home)‎ ‎(3) If I go on a diet, ___________. (lose weight)‎ ‎(4) If we get up early, ________________. (go out for the day) ‎ ‎(5) If he gets a job, _____________. (earn lots of money) ‎ 板书设计：‎ Section A (1a-2d)‎ New Words: ‎ meeting, video, organize, potato chips, chocolate, upset, taxi, advice ‎ 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① ─I think I’ll go to the party with Karen and Anna. ‎ ‎ ─If you go to the party, you’ll have a great time!‎ ‎② ─What will happen if they have the party today? ‎ ‎ ─Half the class won’t come. ‎ 教学反思：‎ Section A2 (Grammar Focus-3c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇：upset, taxi, advice ‎ ‎2）进行一步复习巩固学习Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。‎ ‎3）掌握正确用含if条件状语从句的主从句。‎ ‎4) 能够熟练运用所学的知识，用if来表达条件，用will来表达结果。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 学习因果关系的表达和做出合理的建议。谈论自己的感受，同时使学生在英语交流中注意并观察他人的情感。由于本单元话题贴近学生生活，符合他们热爱休闲的心理，可以提高他们学习英语的兴趣，积极参与英语实践活动。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 复习巩固Section A 部分所学的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。‎ ‎2) 能够熟练运用所学的知识，用if来表达条件，用will来表达结果。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ ‎1) 掌握正确用含if条件状语从句的主从句。‎ ‎2) 能够熟练运用所学的知识，用if来表达条件，用will来表达结果。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎ ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words learned in the last class. ‎ ‎2. Talking: ‎ Let’s look at the pictures in 1a and let Ss make sentences with “if…will” . ‎ e.g. If you go to the party with Karen and Anna, you’ll have a good time.‎ One by one, let some Ss make a sentences by themselves. ‎ ‎3. Game:‎ ‎ Tell Ss “If you have a lot of money, what will do?” ‎ ‎ Ss think and tell the class what they will do.‎ ‎ Judge who is the best. ‎ ‎4. Role-play the conversation in 2d. ‎ Ⅱ. Grammar Focus ‎1. 学生阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。‎ ‎ ① 我想我将会乘公交车去参加聚会。 ‎ ‎ I _____ I’ll take the bus to the ______. ‎ ‎② 如果你那样做，你将会迟到。 ‎ ‎ If you ______ ，_____ be late. ‎ ‎③ 我想我将待在家里。 ‎ ‎ I _____ _______ stay at home. ‎ ‎④ 如果你那样做，你将会很伤感。 ‎ ‎ If you ____, ______ ____ sorry. ‎ ‎⑤ 如果他们今天开聚会，将会发生什么事？ ‎ ‎ ____, ____ _______ if they _____ the party today?‎ ‎⑥ 如果他们今天开，班里一半的学生将不会去。 ‎ ‎ If they ______ it today, ______ the class _______ come. ‎ ‎⑦ 我们应当要求人们带食物来吗？ ‎ ‎ Should we ______ people to ______ food?‎ ‎⑧ 如果我们要求人们带食物来时，他们将会仅带薯条和巧克力。 ‎ ‎ ______we ______ people to bring food, ________ just ______ potato chips and chocolate. ‎ ‎2. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。‎ ‎3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。‎ Ⅲ. Try to Find ‎ ‎ 一、含if条件状语从句的主从复合句 ‎ ‎1. If条件状语从句中，主句用一般将来时，从句用__________表示将来。________原则 ‎ 例如：We will go to the park if it _______ ______ (rain) tomorrow.‎ ‎2. if条件状语从句中，如果主句有must，can，may等情态动词，从句用__________。 ‎ You must stop if the traffic light ____(be) red. ‎ ‎3. If条件状语从句中，主句是祈使句，从句用____________表示将来。________原则 ‎ 例如：Don’ t wait for me if I_____(be) late.‎ 练一练：‎ ‎① Put up your hands if you _____ (have) any questions. ‎ ‎② If it____ (be) cold tomorrow, I will wear my sweater. ‎ ‎③ He can go home if he ______ (finish) his homework.‎ 二、 Game: ‎ Boys and girls have a competition: ‎ 在大屏幕上给出条件与结果，让男生、女生进行比赛，来比赛。‎ 先给出一个例子，然后进行六个小题的比赛，看哪一方能得胜。 ‎ Ⅳ. Practice ‎ Work on 3a: ‎ ‎1. Ss skim the passage first. Try to know the meaning of the passage. ‎ Then Ss read the passage carefully again and try to fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in the brackets. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：‎ ‎① know; do 句意“我不知道明晚参加迈克的生日聚会的事怎么做？”don’t 后跟动词原形；what to + 动词形式，复合不定式结构。‎ ‎② think; 本句表达一客观事实，主语parents是复数形式，故一般现在时态。句意“我父母认为我应当为下周的英语考试而学习” ‎ ‎③ go; will be; 本句是含if条件状语从句的主从复合句；应遵循主将从现原则。句意“如果我去参加聚会，他们会很失望。”‎ ‎④ tells; have; 本句为but连接的一并列句，后半句为一般现在时，故前半句也应是一般现在时，主语Mike是第三人称单数形式，故填tells；don’t后跟动词原形。‎ ‎⑤ wear; will look; 本句为含if条件状语从句的主从复合句，应循主将从现原则。句意“如果我穿牛仔，我会看起来很糟糕。”‎ ‎⑥ go; how to + 动词原形 表示“如何做某事”，是复合不定式结构。‎ walk; will take; 本句为含if条件状语从句的主从复合句，应循主将从现原则。句意“如果我步行去，将会花费我很多时间。”‎ ‎⑦ take; will be;本句为含if条件状语从句的主从复合句，应循主将从现原则。句意“如果我乘出租车去，又将会很贵。” 。 ‎ ‎3. 最后，学生们再次阅读短文一遍，进行深入理解。‎ Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. 让学生们阅读所给的条件或结果，整体把握对话的意思。‎ ‎2. 然后根据自己的生活经验，想一个结果或条件。表达结果时用will + 动词原形；表达条件时用if条件句，注意谓语动词用一般现在时态。‎ ‎3. 让学生们相互问答这些问题。 并查对他们句子中的错误。‎ Ⅴ. Group work ‎ ‎1. Make a story in group. ‎ ‎2. Write a story with your group on a piece of paper. The first person begins with story with “I think I will….” The others add sentences with “if”, Pass the paper around twice. Then read the story. ‎ ‎3. Make sure Ss know what to do. ‎ ‎4. 学生们合作每个同学用 “I think I will… If I…, I will…” 来写一个句子。然后，小组同学们将他们所写的句子放在一起，构成一个句子。‎ ‎(最后，可以经学生们评议来推举那个小组的故事是最好的。）‎ Ⅵ. Exercises ‎ 用动词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1．If she ______ (finish ) work early, she ______(go) home. ‎ ‎2．If the weather _____(be) fine，we _____ (go)for a walk . ‎ ‎3. If I_____(have) time tonight, I _____ (finish) the book I’m reading. ‎ ‎4. If it_____ (rain) next weekend, we_____ (not be able to ) plant the vegetable . ‎ ‎5. If it_____(rain), we______(stay)at home ‎ ‎6. If she______(arrive), she _____(phone) me . ‎ ‎ ‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. 复习Grammar Focus 中的内容。‎ ‎2. 将3c的短文，再完整地写一遍。 ‎ 板书设计 ‎Section A Grammar Focus-3c ‎3a: 1. know, do, think, go, will be, tells, have, wear, will look, go, walk, will take, take, will be ‎ ‎3b: 1. I’ll be late for school. ‎ ‎ 2. My parents will be upset. ‎ ‎ 3. I’ll become very heavy. ‎ ‎ 4. I play chess after school every day. ‎ ‎ 5. I don’t go to my friends’ parties.‎ 教学反思：‎ Section B1 1a-2e 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：travel, agent, expert, keep…to oneself, themselves, teenager, normal, unless, certainly, wallet, worried, mile, angry, in the end, understanding, careless, mistake, himself, careful, advise, solve, step, trust, experience, in half, halfway ‎2) 能掌握以下句式结构：‎ ‎① ─What do you think I should do? Can you give some advice? ‎ ‎ ─I think I should go to college. ‎ ‎② But If I go to college, I’ll never become a great soccer player. ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 学习因果关系的表达和做出合理的建议。谈论自己的感受，同时使学生在英语交流中注意并观察他人的情感。由于本单元话题贴近学生生活，符合他们热爱休闲的心理，可以提高他们学习英语的兴趣，积极参与英语实践活动。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及表达方式。‎ ‎2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。 ‎ ‎3） 阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点 ‎1. 听力训练 ‎2. 阅读2b部分的短文并完成相关要求。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎1. Daily greeting. Check the homework. ‎ ‎2. 头脑风暴： ‎ ‎ Show a picture of “a lot of money”. ‎ Ask Ss “What will you do if you have a lot of money?”, Let Ss think and give their answers one by one. ‎ S1: If I have a lot of money, I’ll buy a big house for my parents. ‎ S2: If I have a lot of money, I’ll build a new road for my village. ‎ S3: If I have a lot of money, I’ll build a new school for our town. ‎ ‎…‎ ‎ 学生们进行评比，看谁的想法最好。‎ ‎3. 选词填空。‎ meeting, video, chocolate, taxi, ‎ upset, advice, organize ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎　1） If you walk there, you’ll be late for the _______. ‎ ‎2）If they watch a _______ at the party, some students will be bored. ‎ ‎3） I don’t know what to do, can you give me some ________? ‎ ‎4）What will happen if she _______ a soccer game on Saturday? ‎ ‎5） If she doesn’t come home on time, her parents will be ________. ‎ ‎6） If it rains tomorrow, we’ll take a _______ there. ‎ ‎7） If he eats too much ________, he’ll be very heavy. ‎ Ⅱ. Presentation ‎1. Say, Money is very important! But money is not everything.‎ be happy; travel around the world; go to college; be famous, get an education… ‎ Ⅲ. Talking ‎ ‎1. What is the most important thing to you? ‎ be happy ‎ go to college ‎ Be famous ‎ Travel around the world ‎ Make a lot of money ‎ Get an education ‎ ‎3. Let Ss ask and answer in pairs. ‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ Work on 1b: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to listen and look at the list in 1a. Put an “A” before each thing the soccer agent talks about and a “P” before each thing Michael’s parents talk about. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and write. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers: ‎ Work on 1c: ‎ ‎1. T: Now please read the sentences in 1c. Try to understand the “if” clause or the “will” sentences. ‎ ‎ 听力指导：‎ ‎ 本题要求是补全if条件句后面的will主句，因此应将重点放在听含“will”的主句上。‎ 特别是要听清句子的前两个单词。‎ ‎2. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to choose the right answers. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again and check the answers with the class. ‎ ‎4. Show the tape scripts to the Ss on the big screen. ‎ Ⅴ. Pair work ‎ Work on 1c: ‎ ‎1. Work in pairs. Student A is Michael, Student B is his friend. Student B gives student A advice. ‎ ‎2. Ask two students to read the conversations to the class. ‎ ‎3. Ss work in pairs. Ask and answer the questions in pairs. ‎ Work on 2a. ‎ ‎1. T: What kinds of things do you worry about? Who do you usually go to for help? ‎ ‎ Now ask and answer the questions with a partner.‎ ‎2. Let some pairs ask and answer their questions. See what kind of worries they have. ‎ Ⅵ. Reading ‎ ‎1. T: Read the three statements below and then skim the passage. Which statement expresses the main idea of the passage? ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read the passage quickly and try to find the r ight statement. ‎ ‎ 指导：‎ 先分析句意：a. 如果人们有问题，他们应当向专家求建议。 ‎ b. 如果人们有问题，他们应当努力保守秘密。 ‎ c. 如果人们有问题，他们应当向别人诉说。 ‎ ‎3. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Ⅶ. Reading ‎ ‎1. T: Now let’s work on 2c. ‎ First, let’s read the questions and make sure we know the meanings of all the questions. Then read the passage again and try to answer the questions. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：首先，应读懂五个问题的意思；然后，带着这五个问题再次认真阅读短文的内容，特别是认真阅读短文中与某问题相关的部分，以便根据上下文意及整个段落的意思来确定如何回答这个问题。 综合上下文的意思，确定最贴切的答案。 ‎ ‎3. Ss read carefully and try to find the answers to the questions. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the class. ‎ Ⅷ. Reading ‎ ‎1. T: Now let’s read the short passage and the phrases in 2d. Fill in the blanks with the phrases in the box. If you don’t sure about what to fill. You can go through the passage in 2d. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：首先，通读这六个词组的意思；然后，再读这篇小短文的意思，根据自己的印象，用方框时里的单词填空；认真理解每个空格处的意思，填上正确的答案。‎ ‎3. Ss try to fill in the blanks with the right forms. Check the answers. ‎ Ⅸ. Discussion ‎1. T: Now read the questions below. Make sure you know the meaning of the questions. ‎ ‎2. Ask three students the following questions. Take notes of their answers. ‎ ‎3. Make a list of questions in your group. ‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. 课后阅读短文，试着复述课文，总结课文出现的重难点词组及表达方式。‎ ‎2. 课下再根据2e部分的内容；写一个调查报告，表述自己小组同学的困难及他们经常处理困难的方式。 ‎ 教学反思：‎ Section B2 3a-Self Check 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 复习讨论自己及伙伴们所有的问题，并能通过讨论来找到解决问题的办法。 ‎ ‎2) 能够综合运用所学的知识以及根据所给的提示词来完成描述他人的问题及解决办法 的小短文。 ‎ ‎3) 能够综合运用所学的知识来描述他人的问题及解决办法 的小短文。 ‎ ‎4）通过完成Self check的中练习题来全面复习本单元的重难点知识点。 ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 学习因果关系的表达和做出合理的建议。谈论自己的感受，同时使学生在英语交流中注意并观察他人的情感。由于本单元话题贴近学生生活，符合他们热爱休闲的心理，可以提高他们学习英语的兴趣，积极参与英语实践活动。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1）能够综合运用所学的知识来描述他人的问题及解决办法 的小短文。 ‎ ‎2）通过完成Self check的中练习题来全面复习本单元的重难点知识点。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming up and revision ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions. ‎ ‎2. 将下列词组翻译成英语 ‎1) 有许多担忧 ________________________‎ ‎2) 与某人交谈 ________________________‎ ‎3) 害怕做某事 _____________________‎ ‎4) 最终 ____________ ‎ ‎5) 生气 ___________ ‎ ‎6) 犯一些粗心的错误 _____________ ‎ ‎7) 分享我的问题 _____________________ ‎ ‎8) 逃避问题 ___________________ ‎ ‎9) 将……分成两半 _______________‎ ‎10) 有时候他们在学业上出现问题。_________________________________‎ ‎11) 在生活中，有困难和担忧是正常的事。 _____________________________‎ ‎12) 如果不向别人谈一谈，我们肯定会觉得更糟。 ___________________________‎ ‎13) 罗伯特就一些寻常的问题向学生们提了建议。_______________________________‎ ‎3. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ ‎4. Let some Ss to read their report of their students’ problems. ‎ Ⅱ. Lead-in ‎ ‎1. T: (Tell Ss one of your problems) e.g. ‎ I don’t have many friends? What do you think I should do? Can you give me some advice? ‎ Let some Ss give you some advice. ‎ ‎2. Show some pictures of different kind of “problem”. ‎ Ⅲ. Discussing ‎ ‎ Let Ss discuss what kind of problem they usually have in their group. Make a list of them. Then think of the possible solutions. ‎ Make a list of them, too. ‎ ‎1. Each student chooses his or her three biggest worries (they think). Write them down on a piece of paper. ‎ ‎2. Let some Ss read their worries. ‎ Ⅳ. Writing ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to work on 3b. First, read the structures below to plan your writing. ‎ ‎2. 写作指导：‎ 首先，阅读所给的提示，掌握其大意，从整体上把握短文大意。 ‎ 其次，从上面所记的三个担忧中选择一个，运用所掌握的句子结构来完成。 ‎ 最后，将你朋友的名字及问题填写上，并进一步说明问题的解决办法，最后，完整地读一遍短文，看是否通顺。‎ ‎3. Let some Ss read their passages and try to find if there are any mistakes? ‎ Give Ss one possible version: ‎ Ø ‎ My friend Jenny has a problem. She is too heavy. I think she should eat less junk food and eat more vegetables and fruit. I think she also should get more exercise. If she eats more vegetables and fruit she will eat less junk food. If she gets more exercise, she’ll be much thinner soon. ‎ Work on 3c: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to write about the other two worries. Use the structures in 3b to write a short passage. ‎ ‎2. Ss work by themselves and try to write a short article. ‎ ‎3. Ss try to write a short article with the worries in3a and the structures in 3b. ‎ 写作指导： ‎ Ø ‎ 本文为写某位朋友的问题及解决办法。 ‎ Ø ‎ 因 此，时态应用一般现在时态，恰当用情态动词及含if条件状语从句的主从复合句来表达条件及结果。 ‎ Ø ‎ 可根据3b中的句式结构来，将3a中提到的其他两个担忧写出来。 ‎ Ø ‎ 最后，阅读一遍自己所写的短文，并与同位或小组其他成员交换检查自己短文中出现的错误。 ‎ ‎4. Let some Ss read their passage to the class. Give any help if necessary. ‎ Ⅴ. Group work ‎ ‎1. Talk about the Project in your school “We Can Help!” ‎ ‎2. Make sure Ss know what they should do. ‎ ‎(Our school is taking part in the project “We Can Help!”. Add more items to the poster. Then talk about what you will do if you take part in the project. )‎ ‎3. Give Ss an example: ‎ Ø Old people’s home visit.‎ A: What will you do if you visit an old people’s home?‎ B: If I help with that, I’ll bring the old people some flowers. ‎ ‎4. Let some other Ss give their advice.‎ e.g.‎ ‎ S1: If I help with that, I’ll sing and dance for them to make them happy. ‎ ‎ S2: If I help with that, I’ll…‎ Ⅵ. Self check ‎ Work on Self check 1 ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to fill in the blanks with the words in the box. ‎ ‎ 提示： 正确理解句子上下文的语境，根据语境来填上一个正确的地点或活动。 ‎ ‎2. Ss work by themselves the try to fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎3. Check the answers and explain some main points. e.g. ‎ ‎ 理解句意： ‎ Ø 如果我的家庭迁入一个新居所，我会邀请你们都来参加聚会。‎ Ø 如果我买到票，你会和我一起去看电影吗？ ‎ Ø 如果学校举办音乐会，我将会弹奏吉它。 ‎ Ø 如果我被邀请，我将去参加艾米的聚会。 ‎ Work on Self check 2 ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to fill in the blanks with the words in the blanks. ‎ ‎2. Give Ss some directions: ‎ Ø 通读对话一遍，理解对话的大意，明确空格中词汇的意思。 ‎ Ø 认真阅读每一句话，分析空格处的意思，根据上下文语境确定空格处应填的词汇。 ‎ ‎3. Let Ss try to complete the conversation with the words in the box. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers. ‎ Work on Self check 3 ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss what they should do. ‎ ‎2. Ss work with their partners complete the sentences in the blanks. ‎ ‎3. Give Ss an example:‎ ‎ What will you do if it rains all weekend?‎ ‎ I will chat with my friends on line and play computer games at home. ‎ ‎4. Let some Ss read their sentences. ‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. Review Section B. ‎ ‎2. Write a letter to me. If you go to the party, what will happen? If you don’t go to the party, what will happen? ‎ 板书设计：‎ Section B 3a-Self check ‎3 b: one possible version: ‎ My friend Jenny has a problem. She is too heavy. I think she should eat less junk food and eat more vegetables and fruit. I think she also should get more exercise. If she eats more vegetables and fruit she will eat less junk food. If she gets more exercise, she’ll be much thinner soon. ‎ self check 1: 1. apartment; 2. movie; 3. school; 4. party self check 2: Are, going; want; if, will; fight; sorry; will self check 3: e.g. I will chat with my friends on line and play computer games at home.‎